TopPage

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXM7570S4E

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM

MX-M6570
MODEL MX-M7570
CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

[7] TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

[13] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

[14] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

[15] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
 CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING [6] SIMULATION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Starting the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 3. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii 4. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii [7] TROUBLESHOOTING
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer unit, 1. Error code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
the developing unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
2. JAM and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
3. Image send communication report code . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 4. Dial tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
1. System diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE
2. Option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS 2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 [9] MAINTENANCE
2. Copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 1. Works necessary when executing
3. Printer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 the maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
4. FAX function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 2. Display of maintenance execution timing. . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
5. Image send function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 3. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
6. Report/list function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 [10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
7. Mechanical/Supply related matters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 1. Disassembly of Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
8. Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 2. Disassembly and assembly of each unit . . . . . . . . . 10-35
9. Ambient conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. HDD/eMMC PWB map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB,
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 HDD/eMMC PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
3. Definition of developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
5. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
2. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
[13] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
2. DSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
3. Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
3. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
4. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4. Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
5. Sensors and detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
5. Paper transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
6. Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 6. LSU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
7. Clutches and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 7. OPC drum section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
8. Drive motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 8. Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
9. Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 9. Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
10. Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 10. Transfer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
11. Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 11. Waste toner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
12. Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 12. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
13. Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 13. Duplex/paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
14. PWB/Memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
[14] ELECTRICAL SECTION
15. Fuses and thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
16. Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
2. Power line diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
3. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[15] OTHERS
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1. TOOL LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
NOTE FOR SERVICING
MX-M7570 *Service Manual
When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the fol-
lowing points.
 Gas tube
1. Precautions for servicing
 Lightning conductor
* When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the  A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except grounding object by the authorities.
when performing the communication test, etc.
 Grounding wire for telephone line
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
* There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use
* Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.
extreme care when servicing.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not stress, forc-
It may cause a burn.
ibly bend, or pull the power cord.
* There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
* Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
* Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path. Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
* When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to * Do not place liquids or foreign metallic objects inside the
machine.
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
driving sections. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
* Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. * Do not touch the power cord, insert the phone jack, operate the
machine, or perform service on the machine with wet or oily
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside
the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury. hands.
It may cause an electric shock.
* When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink exces-
sively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with 3. Note for installing site
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary. Do not install the machine at the following sites.
* The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to dam- * Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature,
age fingers when servicing. low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature
* Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner and humidity.
may ignite and burn you. Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the machine,
* When replacing a lithium battery on a PWB, only use the speci- causing paper jam or copy dirt.
fied replacement battery. For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
If a battery of different specification is used, it may cause a described later.
machine malfunction or breakdown.
* When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to it,
be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may otherwise cause a machine breakdown or malfunction.

CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
(200V series only) * Place of extreme vibrations
It may cause a breakdown.

2. Warning for servicing

* Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
* If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock. * Poorly ventilated place
* Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone.
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may result.
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so as
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such a
grounding must be made. machine may produce an ozone smell. Install the machine in a
well ventilated place.

MX-M7570 NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

* Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may parts
undergo qualitative change.
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
It may cause a breakdown or output quality problems.
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
* When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or an
anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.

* Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier and blue
print machine may result in poor quality output.
* There was a trouble in a place where silicon-series gas or vol- * When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag (case),
atile components are generated. Use great care for avoiding use an earth band as shown below:
this. ? Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the machine.

* Place of much dust

When dust or contaminants enters the machine, it may cause a
breakdown or poor quality output.

* Place near a wall

The machine will require ventilation. ? When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
If ventilation is not proper, poor output or machine failure may procedure on an anti-static mat.
result.

11-13/16"
(30cm)

11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)

* Unstable or irregular surface

If the machine is dropped or tips over, it may cause injury or
machine malfunction.
Use an optional desk or an exclusive-use desk.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lock
the casters.

MX-M7570 NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU 7. Screw tightening torque
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three
items. types.
* When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the These types are classified according to the shape of the screw
power plug from the power outlet. grooves and use positions.
* When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures The table below shows the types of the screws and the tightening
described in this Service Manual. torques depending on the use position.
* When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
the parts including the cover installed and perform the operation table.
check. However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than speci-
* Do not modify the LSU. fied on this table, or under special circumstances, the details are
* When visually checking the inside of the machine for the opera- described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such
tion check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes. an exception.
If the above precaution is neglected or the LSU is modified, ones Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an electrode
safety may be at risk. or a current flows, use enough care to tighten securely to avoid
loosening.
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the
transfer unit, the developing unit Screw kinds and tightening torques

When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the devel- Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
oping unit, strictly observe the following items. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the torque torque torque
diameter fixed
(N m) (kgf cm) (lbft)
copy and print image quality.
M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
Drum unit
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
* Avoid working at a place with strong lights. M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
* Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights for
a long time. Tapping screws (for iron)
* When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it with Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 sheets torque torque torque
diameter fixed
of paper to cover it.) (N m) (kgf cm) (lbft)
* Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
(Plate thickness
material on the OPC drum surface.
0.8mm or above)
Transfer unit M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
* Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign (Plate thickness
material on the transfer roller, transfer belt, and the transfer belt 0.8mm or above)
and transfer cleaning roller. M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
(Plate thickness
Developing unit
less than 0.8mm)
* Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
material on the magnet roller. (Plate thickness
Fusing unit less than 0.8mm)
* Be careful not to attach finger prints or foreign materials on the
fusing roller. Tapping screw (for plastic)
Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
(N m) (kgf cm) (lbft)
M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9

MX-M7570 NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

MX-M7570
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE Service Manual

1. System diagram

MX-FN34
MX-PN16
(+0+5*'4
B/C/D
270%*
/1&7.'

MX-TR21
':+664#;70+6

MX-FN35 MX-RB26
5#&&.'56+6%*
2#2'42#55
(+0+5*'4
70+6 MX-LT10
.10)2#2'4
(''&+0)64#;

MX-M6570
MX-M7570
MX-TU15 &+)+6#.
':+664#; /7.6+(70%6+10#.
%#$+0'6 5;56'/

MX-PN13 MX-FN21 MX-RB13 MX-CF11 MX-RB27 MX-LC18

A/B/C/D (+0+5*'4 4'.#;70+6 +05'46'4 %74.%144'%6+10 .#4)'%#2#%+6;
270%* 70+6 64#;
/1&7.'

MX-TM10 MX-FN33 MX-RB24

+00'4(+0+5*'4 2#2'42#5570+6
64+//+0) MX-LC19
/1&7.' .#4)'%#2#%+6;
64#;
MX-FN22 MX-FD10
5#&&.'56+6%* (1.&+0)70+6
(+0+5*'4

MX-PF10 MX-FX15 AR-SU1 MX-FWX1 MX-FR60U MX-USX1 MX-USX5

$#4%1&'(106-+6 (#%5+/+.'':2#05+10 56#/270+6 +06'40'6(#: &#6#5'%74+6;-+6 5*#42&'5-.+%'05' 5*#42&'5-.+%'05'
-+6 ':2#05+10-+6 -+6 -+6

MX-US10 MX-US50 MX-USA0 MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-KB19

5*#42&'5-.+%'05' 5*#42&'5-.+%'05' 5*#42&'5-.+%'05' #22.+%#6+10 #22.+%#6+10 ':6'40#.#%%176 -';$1#4&
-+6 -+6 -+6 +06')4#6+10/1&7.' %1//70+%#6+10/1&7.' /1&7.'

MX-EB18
9+4'.'55.#0
#&#2614

MX-M7570 PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

2. Option list
MX-M6570
Model name Name Remarks
MX-M7570
Paper Feeder MX-LC18 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY OPT A4/8.5x11"
MX-LC19 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY OPT A3/11x17"
MX-LT10 LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY OPT For Main unit
Paper exit system MX-TR21 EXIT TRAY UNIT OPT
MX-FN33 INNER FINISHER OPT
MX-TU15 EXIT TRAY CABINET OPT Cannot install the MX-TU15 and the MX-RB26
MX-FN34 FINISHER OPT For 65 sheets binding
MX-FN35 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER OPT For 65 sheets binding/Saddle 20 sheets binding
MX-PN16B PUNCH MODULE OPT 3/2 holes (For 3K Finisher/Saddle Stitch Finisher)
MX-PN16C OPT 2/4 holes (For 3K Finisher/Saddle Stitch Finisher)
MX-PN16D OPT 4 wide holes (For 3K Finisher/Saddle Stitch
Finisher)
MX-RB24 PAPER PASS UNIT OPT For Inner Finisher
MX-RB26 PAPER PASS UNIT OPT Cannot install the MX-RB26 and the MX-TU15
MX-RB13 RELAY UNIT OPT For 100 sheets binding
MX-FN21 FINISHER OPT 100 sheets binding
MX-FN22 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER OPT 100 sheets binding/saddle 25 sheets binding
MX-PN13A PUNCH MODULE OPT 2 holes (For 100-sheet 4K Finisher/Saddle Stitch
Finisher)
MX-PN13B OPT 3/2 holes (For Saddle Finisher)
MX-PN13C OPT 2/4 holes (For Saddle Finisher)
MX-PN13D OPT 4 wide holes (For Saddle Finisher)
MX-TM10 TRIIMING MODULE OPT
MX-CF11 INSERTER OPT
MX-RB27 CURL CORRECTION UNIT OPT
MX-FD10 FOLDING UNIT OPT
Printer expansion MX-PF10 BARCODE FONT KIT OPT
--- Printer Expansion Kit STD
--- PS Expansion Kit STD
Image send expansion MX-FX15 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT OPT Not available for some destination.
AR-SU1 STAMP UNIT OPT
MX-FWX1 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT OPT
Authentication/ MX-FR60U DATA SECURITY KIT OPT Non-authentication version
Security
Application MX-USX1 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-USX5 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-US10 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-US50 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-USA0 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-AMX1 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE OPT
MX-AMX2 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE OPT Standard for North America and Europe. Sharp
MX-AMX3 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE OPT OSA Utility CD ROM is not included.
MX-KB19 KEYBOARD OPT Standard for North America.
MX-EB18 WIRELESS LAN ADAPTOR OPT No support in some regions
Service MX-SC11 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT
(For MX-FN34/35, 65-sheet Finisher)
MX-SC12 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT
(For MX-FN35, Saddle Stitch)
MX-SCX1 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT
(For MX-FN22, Saddle Stitch)
MX-SCX2 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT
(For MX-FN21/22, 100-sheet Finisher)
AR-SV1 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT Product for service maintenance
--- External Vend Interface Kit OPT

STD: Standard equipment

OPT: Installable

MX-M7570 PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

MX-M7570
[2] SPECIFICATIONS Service Manual
(2) Multi Bypass

Paper 65ppm 75ppm

1. Basic specifications machine machine
Plain A3W/ 12×18" 31 34
A. Engine Specification paper A3/11×17"/8K 33 35
B4/8.5×14”/8.5×13”/8.5×13.4”/8.5×13.5” 37 40
Photo-conductor OPC (Diameter: Black: 65mm) A4/B5/8.5×11”/16K 65 68
kind A4R/8.5×11R/B5R/7.25×10.5R/16KR 43 46
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser) A5R/5.5×8.5R 45 48
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development Custom 215.9mm or less and the 65 68
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method (vice- length of horizontal
Transfer system Transfer belt scanning scanning is 257mm or
Separation system Natural separation method direction more.
* Sub separation claw is equipped. length) 216mm or more - less than 51 54
Cleaning system Counter blade 225mm and the length of
Fusing system Heat roller horizontal scanning is
Waste toner disposal No toner recycling system / Waste toner bottle 257mm or more.
system 225mm or less and the 43 46
Toner supply during Available length of horizontal
operation scanning is less than
Outer Color Pastel white, natural wave design 257mm.
225.1mm or more - less 43 46
B. Engine speed (ppm) than 297mm
297.1mm or more 31 34
(1) Tray 1 - 4, LCC, LCT Extra 31 34
OHP A4/8.5×11” 43 43
Paper 65ppm 75ppm
A4R/8.5×11R 31 31
machine machine
Heavy A3W/ 12×18" 22 22
Plain A3W/ 12×18" 31 34
paper A3/11×17"/8K 23 23
paper A3/11×17"/8K 34 37
B4/8.5×14”/8.5×13”/8.5×13.4”/8.5×13.5” 26 26
B4/8.5×14”/8.5×13”/8.5×13.4”/8.5×13.5” 39 42
A4/B5/8.5×11”/16K 43 43
A4/B5/8.5×11”/16K 65 75
A4R/8.5×11R/B5R/7.25×10.5R/16KR 31 31
A4R/8.5×11R/B5R/7.25×10.5R/16KR 45 48
A5R/5.5×8.5R 31 31
A5R/5.5×8.5R 45 48
Custom 215.9mm or less and the 43 43
Custom 215.9mm or less and the 65 75
(vice- length of horizontal
(vice- length of horizontal
scanning scanning is 257mm or
scanning scanning is 257mm or
direction more.
direction more.
length) 216mm or more - less than 41 41
length) 216mm or more - less than 51 55
225mm and the length of
225mm
horizontal scanning is
225mm or less and the 45 48 257mm or more.
length of horizontal
225mm or less and the 31 31
scanning is less than
length of horizontal
257mm.
scanning is less than
225.1mm or more - less 45 48 257mm.
than 297mm
225.1mm or more - less 31 31
297.1mm or more 31 34 than 297mm
Heavy A3W/ 12×18" 22 22 297.1mm or more 22 22
paper A3/11×17"/8K 23 23 Extra 22 22
B4/8.5×14”/8.5×13”/8.5×13.4”/8.5×13.5” 26 26 Postcard HIGH *1 43 43
A4/B5/8.5×11”/16K 43 43 Postcard LOW *1 22 22
A4R/8.5×11R/B5R/7.25×10.5R/16KR 31 31
A5R/5.5×8.5R 31 31 *1: Switched by the service simulation setting. Postcard is set Low
Custom 215.9mm or less and the 43 43 before shipment.
(vice- length of horizontal
scanning scanning is 257mm or C. First Copy Time
direction more.
length) 216mm or more - less than 41 41 Engine 65 ppm 75 ppm
225mm and the length of Platen 3.9 sec 3.5 sec
horizontal scanning is DSPF 5.9 sec 5.4sec
257mm or more.
225mm or less and the 31 31 < Measuring Conditions >
length of horizontal
– Landscape feeding of A4 (8 1/2" x 11") sheets from the 1st tray
scanning is less than
257mm. – Polygon in rotation
225.1mm or more - less 31 31 – Exclude the first page right after when the power switch "ON".
than 297mm
– Magical View is OFF
297.1mm or more 22 22
OHP A4/8.5×11” 43 43
A4R/8.5×11R 31 31

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
D. Engine resolution F. Document feeder
Resolution *1 Copy Writing
(1) DSPF
600 x 600dpi
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder)
1200 x 1200dpi Scan speed Monochrome Color (A4/8.5" x 11")
Print Writing (A4/8.5" x 11")
600 x 600dpi Copy Single: N/A
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi 100 pages/min. *1
1,200 x 1,200dpi (600 x 300dpi, 4bit)
Gradation *2 Copy Writing 80 pages/min.
(256 levels) 600 x 600dpi, 4bit (600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi 53 pages/min.
1,200 x 1,200dpi, 1bit (600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
Duplex:
Print Writing
200 pages/min. *1
PCL:
(600 x 300dpi, 4bit)
600 x 600dpi, 1bit, 600 x 600dpi,4bit
160 pages/min.
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
1,200 x 1,200dpi, 1bit
106 pages/min.
PS:
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
600 x 600dpi, 1bit, 600 x 600dpi,4bit
Thin paper Single
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi
54 pages/min
1,200 x 1,200dpi, 1bit
(600 x 300dpi) *1
*1: Resolution: 600dpi (default) 46 pages/min
(600 x 400dpi)
*2: The Dither and Error Diffusion methods using 8 bit input will be 36 pages/min
performed. (600 x 600dpi)
FAX *2 Single: 100 sheets/min. NA
E. Scanner section (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(1) Resolution/Gradation Duplex: 200 pages/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Scanning Monochrome Internet FAX *1 Single: 100 sheets/min. NA
Resolution (dpi) Platen 600 x 600dpi (default) (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
600 x 400dpi Duplex: 200 pages/min.
DSPF 600 x 600dpi (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
600 x 400dpi (default) Scanner *2 Single: 100 sheets/min. Single: 100 sheets/min.
600 x 300dpi (200 x 200dpi, (200 x 200dpi,
Exposure lamp White LED 300 x 300dpi, 1bit) 300 x 300dpi, 8bit)
Duplex: 200 pages/min. Duplex: 200 pages/min.
Reading gradation 10bit
(200 x 200dpi, (200 x 200dpi,
Output gradation BW: 1bit
300 x 300dpi, 1bit) 300 x 300dpi, 8bit)
Gray scale: 8bit
Document setup Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
Full Color: each color RGB 8bit
direction
(2) Document table Document Center standard (Rear one-side standard for
standard position random feeding)
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed) Document Sheet-through method
Scanning area 297 x 432mm transport method
Original standard Left corner as standard Document size Standard size
position Inch-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Detection Yes
Inch-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
Detection size Automatic detection (One type of detection unit to
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
be switched for software destination)
Inch-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11",
Dehumidifying Supplied as a service parts 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
heater (Scanner AB-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
section) A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
AB-4: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-5: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Long paper 1000 mm (Monochrome 2 levels only)
Mix paper feed Available
(Same series,
same width paper)
Random feeding Available
(different (A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5;
combination of AB/ and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS effective.)
inch system,
different width)
Document weight Single:
Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)
Plain paper: 13 - 34 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Duplex: 13 - 34 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 2
 Document capacity Max. 180 sheets (64g/m2 17 lb. Bond)
Max. 150 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max.
height: 50/64 inch, 19.5mm or less
Types of document OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon
that may not be paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or
transport. breakage, pasted paper, cutout document,
document printed with ink ribbon, documents with
perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated
document by punch unit is allowed.)
Paper detection Yes
Detectable paper Auto detection (Refer to “Document size”)
size
Paper feeding Right hand feeding
direction
Finish stamp Option

*1 Only when sending images.

*2 Default 200 x 200dpi

G. Paper feed section

(1) Basic specifications

Type Standard 4 trays (Tandem LCC + 2 trays) + Multi bypass

Maximum 4 trays + Multi bypass + Large capacity casette
Dehumidifying heater Service parts

Tray 1 Tray 2
Tray Tray 3 Tray 4 Multi bypass tray
(LCC left side) (LCC right side)
Paper capacity Plain paper (80g/m2) 1,250 sheets 850 sheets 500 sheets 500 sheets 100 sheets
Paper size Refer to “Feedable Paper Type”.
Paper size detection No Refer to “Feedable Paper Type”.
Paper type settings Refer to “Feedable Paper Type”.
Method to change paper size Switche by User/Serviceman *1 User selection
Universal cassette handle Yes ---
Default Paper Size Inch series 8.5" x 11" 8.5" x 11" Shipped with the guides set for the largest ---
Setting AB series A4 A4 paper size. ---
Paper remaining quantity detection None and 3 levels None and 3 levels None and 3 levels(100%/67%/9%/None) Available detect
(100%/33%/6%/ (100%/50%/9%/ “None” status only.
None) None)
Paper size display Yes ---

*1: The trays can be changed between A4 and 8.5" x 11" by the users. However, they can be changed to and form B5 only by the serviceman.
(2) Extra paper capacity

Paper type Feeding Tray Multi bypass tray

Postcard NA 20 sheets
Envelope NA NA
OHP 40 sheets 20 sheets
106-256g/m2:40 sheets,
Heavy paper 80 sheets
257-300g/m2:20 sheets,
Tab paper 40 sheets 20 sheets
Glossy paper NA 1 sheet
Others 1 sheet 1 sheet

(3) Feedable Paper Type

Tray 1 Tray 2 Multi

A4LCC A3LCC
Paper feed section (Tandem (Tandem Tray 3 Tray 4 bypass tray
(Option) (Option)
left) right) (Option)
Minimum weight 60g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2 55g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2
Maximum weight 105g/m2 105g/m2 220g/m2 220g/m2 300g/m2 220g/m2 220g/m2
Paper Thin paper — — — — Yes — —
type Plain paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre printed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre Punched Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 1 106 - 176g/m2 28lbs bond-65lbs cover — — Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 2 177 - 220g/m2 65lbs cover-80lbs cover — — Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 3 221 - 256g/m2 80lbs cover-140lbs index — — — — Yes — —
Heavy paper 4 257 - 300g/m2 140lbs index-110lbs cover — — — — Yes — —

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 3
 Tray 1 Tray 2 Multi
A4LCC A3LCC
Paper feed section (Tandem (Tandem Tray 3 Tray 4 bypass tray
(Option) (Option)
left) right) (Option)
Paper Index paper *1 — — — Yes Yes — —
type OHP Transparency — — — Yes Yes — —
Label — — — Yes Yes — —
Glossy paper — — — — Yes — —
User settings 1 - 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Paper 12" x 18" (A3W) 305 x 457 — — — — Yes — Yes
size Ledger (11" x 17") 279 x 432 — — Yes Yes Yes — Yes
Legal (8.5" x 14") 216 x 356 — — Yes Yes Yes — Yes
Asian legal (8.5" x 13.5") 216 x 343 — — Yes Yes Yes — —
Mexican legal (8.5" x 13.4") 216 x 340 — — Yes Yes Yes — —
Foolscap (8.5" x 13") 216 x 330 — — Yes Yes Yes — Yes
Letter (8.5" x 11") 279 x 216 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter R (8.5" x 11"R) 216 x 279 — — Yes Yes Yes — Yes
Invoice R (5.5" x 8.5"R) 140 x 216 — — — Yes Yes — —
Executive R (7.25" x 10.5"R) 184 x 266 — — Yes Yes Yes — —
9 x 12 (A4W) 305 x 229 — — — — — — —
A3 297 x 420 — — Yes Yes Yes — Yes
B4 257 x 364 — — Yes Yes Yes — Yes
A4 297 x 210 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4-R 210 x 297 — — Yes Yes Yes — Yes
B5 257 x 182 Yes — Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5-R 182 x 257 — — Yes Yes Yes — —
A5-R 148 x 210 — — — Yes Yes — —
8K 270 x 390 — — Yes Yes Yes — —
16K 270 x 195 — — Yes Yes Yes — —
16K-R 195 x 270 — — Yes Yes Yes — —
Monarch 98 x 191 — — — — — — —
COM9 98.4 x 225.4 — — — — — — —
COM10 105 x 241 — — — — — — —
DL 110 x 220 — — — — — — —
C4 229 x 324 — — — — — — —
C5 229 x 162 — — — — — — —
C6 114 x 162 — — — — — — —
Nagagata3 120 x 235 — — — — — — —
Nagagata4 90 x 205 — — — — — — —
Yogata2 114 x 162 — — — — — — —
Yogata3 105 x 235 — — — — — — —
Kakugata2 240 x 332 — — — — — — —
Kakugata3 216 x 277 — — — — — — —
Extra - Custom size — — — Yes Yes — —
Min X — — — 148mm/ 140mm/ — —
(sub scan) 5.875inch 5.5inch
Max X — — — 432mm/ 457mm/ — —
(sub scan) 17inch 18inch
Custom range
Min Y — — — 100mm/ 90mm/ — —
(main scan) 4inch 3.625inch
Max Y — — — 297mm/ 305mm/ — —
(main scan) 11.625inch 12inch
Extra - Unknown size — — — — Yes — —
Width: 90 - 305 — — — — — —
Banner paper Yes
Length: 458 - 1300

*1: Index width: A4(12-20mm), 8.5x11(6.1-17mm)

H. Paper exit section

(1) Exit Capacity

Exit location Center (option) Right side (option)

Exit Capacity 250 sheets (80g/m2,,recommended paper) 100 sheets (A4/8.5 x 11)(80g/m2,,recommended paper)

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 4
(2) Size of paper which can be discharged

Paper exit section Duplex Main unit center tray Right exit tray
Paper Thin paper 55-59g/m2 13-16 lb bond — Yes Yes
type Plain paper 1 60-89g/m2 16-24 lbs bond Yes Yes Yes
Plain paper 2 90-105g/m2 24-28 lbs bond Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes
Pre printed paper Yes Yes Yes
Punch paper Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 1 106 - 176g/m2 28lb bond-65 lb cover Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 2 177 - 220g/m2 65 lbs cover-80 lbs cover Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 3 221 - 256g/m2 80lb cover-140 lb index — Yes Yes
Heavy paper 4 257 - 300g/m2 140lb index-110 lb cover — Yes —
Envelope — — —
OHP Transparency — Yes Yes
Label — Yes Yes
Index paper *2 — Yes —
Glossy paper — Yes Yes
User settings 1 - 8 *3 Yes Yes Yes
Paper 12" x 18" (A3W) 305 x 457 Yes Yes Yes
size Ledger (11" x 17") 279 x 432 Yes Yes Yes
Legal (8.5" x 14") 216 x 356 Yes Yes Yes
Asian legal (8.5" x 13.5") 216 x 343 Yes Yes Yes
Mexican legal (8.5" x 13.4") 216 x 340 Yes Yes Yes
Foolscap (8.5" x 13") 216 x 330 Yes Yes Yes
Letter (8.5" x 11") 279 x 216 Yes Yes Yes
Letter R (8.5" x 11"R) 216 x 279 Yes Yes Yes
Executive R (7.25" x 10.5"R) 184 x 266 Yes Yes Yes
Invoice R (5.5" x 8.5"R) 140 x 216 Yes Yes Yes
A3 297 x 420 Yes Yes Yes
B4 257 x 364 Yes Yes Yes
A4 297 x 210 Yes Yes Yes
A4-R 210 x 297 Yes Yes Yes
B5 257 x 182 Yes Yes Yes
B5-R 182 x 257 Yes Yes Yes
A5-R 148 x 210 Yes Yes Yes
8K 270 x 390 Yes Yes Yes
16K 270 x 195 Yes Yes Yes
16K-R 195 x 270 Yes Yes Yes
Postcard *1 195 x 270 — Yes Yes
Monarch 98 x 191 — — —
COM9 98.4 x 225.4 — — —
COM10 105 x 241 — — —
DL 110 x 220 — — —
C4 229 x 324 — — —
C5 229 x 162 — — —
C6 114 x 162 — — —
Nagagata3 120 x 235 — — —
Nagagata4 90 x 205 — — —
Yogata2 114 x 162 — — —
Yogata3 105 x 235 — — —
Kakugata2 240 x 332 — — —
Kakugata3 216 x 277 — — —
Extra - Custom size Yes Yes Yes
Min X (sub scan) 182mm/7.25inch 140mm/5.5inch 140mm/5.5inch
Max X (sub scan) 457mm/18inch 457mm/18inch 457mm/18inch
Custom range
Min Y (main scan) 140mm/5.5inch 90mm/3.625inch 90mm/3.625inch
Max Y (main scan) 305mm/12inch 305mm/12inch 305mm/12inch
Extra - Unknown size — Yes Yes
Width: 90 - 305 — —
Banner paper*4 Yes
Length: 458 - 1300

*1: Japan only.

*2: Index width: A4(12-20mm), 8.5x11(6.1-17mm)
*3: Comply with Paper type setting.
*4: Banner paper (from Multi Bypass): Max.1300mm by simulation setting. Banner paper for right exit tray is not available for every destination.

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 5
I. Operation panel L. Wireless LAN
Size 10.1 inch Item Specification
Type Dot matrix LCD, touch panel Compliant regulation IEEE802.11 n/g/b
Display dot number 1,024 x 600 dots (WSVGA) Transmission method IEEE802.11n/g IEEE802.11n/g
Color Yes IEEE802.11b IEEE802.11b
LCD Drive Display Area 222.72x125.28mm (AUO 10.1inch) HOST I/F USB 2.0 Type A  Connect the module to MFP’s
(WxD) internal USB I/F
LCD back-light LED lamp back-light system DEVICE I/F IEEE802.11 n/g/b
LCD Contrast Adjust Yes Antenna type Integrated antenna
Angle / position Yes ( tiltable): free positions Access mode Infrastructure mode, Software AP mode
adjustment Security WEP, WPA/WPA2-mixed PSK, WPA/WPA2-
Touch panel method Resistive touch display (effective 2-point touch) mixed EAP*,WPA2 PSA,WPA2 EAP*
*Not applicable to Software AP mode
J. Controller
M. Warm-up time
CPU ARM11 600MHz
ARM9 400MHz (1W power save mode: 65 ppm 75 ppm
75MHz) Warm up Main power SW on 43sec 43sec
SOC Cortex-A53 Quad 1.4GHz time*1 Sub Power SW on 27sec 27sec
Interface Availability of Preheat mode Yes Yes
IEEE1284 Parallel No Jam recovery time*2 27sec 27sec
Ethernet 1 port
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T *1: Result may change depending on the environmental condition.
Support TCP/IP(IPv4, IPv6): Supported *2: After 60 seconds leaves door open, standard condition, poly-
Protocol IPX/SPX: Not Supported gon motor is stopping.
EtherTalk: Not Supported
USB 2.0 2 port ARM11 Not used N. Power source
(High speed) (Front / SOC For Wireless LAN module
(Host) *1 Rear) (internal) 100V 200V
Rear port Voltage / Current 110-127V 16A 220-240V 8 A
USB Front port Frequency 60Hz 50/60Hz
HUB For internal IC card reader Power source cord Fixed type (Direct) Inlet type
(4 port) For internal keyboard Power switch 2 switches
Not used Primary switch : in the front cover.
Secondary switch (momentary SW): on the
USB 2.0 (High speed) 1 port
operation panel.
(Device) *2
Acquisition of USB No
O. Power consumption
Validation
ACRE expansion I/F No
100V 200V
Ir-Simple I/F No
Max. rated power consumption*1 1.92 kW 1.84 kW
Video I/F (for panel-PC- No
Fax waiting power consumption is Yes No
BOX)
1W or less/ (Exclude the
Serial I/F (for vendor & 1 port for standard. *Condition of Standing by Network: case of use Fax
PCI) 1 port for supplemental port. Connect with TCP/IP protocol only. and Network at
Memory Refer to (Memory/HDD) once)
Memory Slot 0 Recovery time from Preheat mode 15 sec
Acquisition of Windows No
Premium Logo P. Security
Bluetooth No
Motion sensor Yes Admin/Service password scheme YES
NFC tag Yes

*1: The USB port will be able to be disabled by the Sim.

2. Copy functions
*2: USB Device to be disabled through Sim setting. A. Copy Magnification Ratio
K. Memory·Hard disk Copy ratio Same size 1:1±0.8%
AB system : 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%,
(1) Capacity 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%,
200%, 400%
ICU PWB
Flash Inch system : 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%,
eMMC PWB REUS SOC HDD*1 121%, 129%, 200%, 400%
memory
On board On board Zoom 25 – 400% (25-200% for the document feeder)
2MB 16GB 1GB(STD) 4GB(STD) 500GB Preset magnification 4 levels (Reduction : 2 levels / Enlargement : 2
ratio levels)
*1 : HDD capacity may vary depending on the procurement condi-
XY zoom Yes
tion.
Auto Ratio calculation The copy ratio is automatically calculated by
(2) eMMC PWB specifying the original size and copy size
manually.
Utilized memory Area Boot/Program area (Selected from standard sizes / input directly)
FAX data storage area: 1GB

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 6
B. Number of Sets H. Copy Functions
Acceptable number of 1 – 9999 sets Automatic paper Yes (Mixed/random-size feeding are
sets selection (APS) supported.)
Setting number of sets No Automatic magnification Yes (Mixed/random-size feeding are
by page (Setting number selection (AMS) supported.)
of sets by original) Paper type selection Yes: Type setting is allowed
Rotated copy Yes (Large rotated copy exceeding A4 is
C. Density / Copy Image Quality Processing supported.)
Rotated copy is Yes
Exposure mode Automatic (Magical view, Character AE) supported when the
Text, Text/Printed Photo, Printed Photo, Text/ APS / AMS are off.
Photo, Photo, Map and Pale-color document Electric sort Yes
Mode of Copy original Yes Rotated sort No
Manual levels 9 levels Job reservation Yes (Job status up to 99)
Toner save mode Yes. Selected from 3 levels in the SIM Auto Selection Setting of Yes
settings. tray that is Supplied the
Paper
D. Original Preview function Yes
Notification sound of Yes (Supported by the Soft-SW)
Auto detection Yes
finished copy job
AB system Yes (A5/A5R/B5/B5R/A4/A4R/B4/A3/216x340/
Stop copy when no Yes (Supported by the Soft-SW)
216x343)
original
*Clipping B5R(Coner), Clipping B5R(Center)
Display of the number of No
support by soft SW.
original pages read
Inch system Yes (5.5x8.5/5.5x8.5R/8.5x11/8.5x11R/8.5x13/
Void less copy No
8.5x14/11x17/8.5x13.4)
Copy reservation while Yes
Direct input X direction (AB system:25-432 mm; inch
warming up
system:1-17 inches)
Y direction (AB system:25-297 mm; inch When proof copying No
system:1-11 5/8 inches)
Size registration Yes (Registered up to 12 sizes) Auto Offset OFF when Yes
outputting one sheet
E. Paper Select the ups or downs Yes
output tray at outputting
Standard paper tray Tray 1-4 by finisher
Bypass Tray
Option paper tray Large Capacity Tray(A3/Ledger)
I. Job Program
Large Capacity Tray(A4/Letter)
Job program calling/ Yes (Registered up to: 48; Preset: 1)
Bypass tray settings on Yes
registration
the paper selection
screen Job program name Yes
registration
Input of non- Yes
standard sizes Job program calling/ No
registration by user
Registration of Yes
non-standard sizes Bypass tray paper type Yes
registration
F. 2-Sided Copy Bypass tray paper size Yes
registration
1-sided copy > 1-sided Yes
copy J. Copy Performance
1-sided copy > 2-sided Yes (Capable of rotating the orientation of the Speed to Change Original Document (Copy mode)
copy paper by 180 degrees when the paper is
reversed.) Engine 65ppm 75ppm
2-sided copy > 2-sided Yes (Capable of rotating the orientation of the S to S 65cpm (100%) 75cpm (100%)
copy paper by 180 degrees when the paper is
reversed.) *Defines the copy speed at the combination of the main unit and a
2-sided copy > 1-sided Yes (Capable of rotating the orientation of the document feeder.
copy paper by 180 degrees when the paper is * S to S: A4 / 8.5x11 document, 11 pages and 1 copy (not including
reversed.) the first copy) Monochrome : 600x400dpi(default)
G. Image Quality Adjustment *Except multi mode broadcasting.

Auto calibration Yes

Registration adjustment No

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 7
K. Job Efficiency Calculation method:
BLI target (DSPF) S to S/StoD=FCOT+60/cpm x 10 pages
DtoD=FCOT+60/cpm x 20 images
Engine 65ppm 75ppm
* S to S : Average of 10 originals of A4 / 8.5x11 document
S to S 83.5% 81.9%
x1,x5,x10 -set
S to D 81.2% 77.2%
D to D 87.6% 84.3% * S to D : Average of 10 originals of A4 / 8.5x11 document
x1,x5,x10-set
* D to D : Average of 10 originals of A4 / 8.5x11 document
(20 images) x1,x5,x10 -set

3. Printer function
A. Printer driver supported OS
Custom PCL6 Custom
OS *1 Custom PS PPD PC-Fax TWAIN
SPDL2 PCL5e
Windows 98 / Me No No No No No No
NT 4.0 SPS or later No No No No No No
2000 No No No No No No
Server 2008 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 x 64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 x 64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 R2 x 64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8 No No No No No No
Windows 8 x 64 No No No No No No
Server 2012 x 64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8.1 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8.1 x 64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2012 R2 x 64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 10 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 10 x 64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2016 x 64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Mac For 9.0 No No No No No No
For X 10.2 No No No No No No
For X 10.3 No No No No No No
For X 10.4 No No No No No No
For X 10.5 No No No No No No
For X 10.6 No No CD-ROM No No No
For X 10.7 No No CD-ROM No No No
For X 10.8 No No CD-ROM No No No
For X 10.9 No No CD-ROM No No No
For X 10.10 No No CD-ROM No No No
For X 10.11 No No CD-ROM No No No
For X 10.12 No No CD-ROM No No No
For X 10.13 No No CD-ROM No No No

*1: New OS is supported according to the rule in Digital Document System Group.,

B. PDL emulation/Font
PDL (Command) Installed font Option font
PCL5c / PCL6 compatible STD European outline font = 80 styles Barcode font = 28 styles
Line printer font (BMP) = 1 style
Genuine Postscript 3 STD European outline font = 139 styles –
Font for List Print Salable font STD Arfic mobile font -

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 8
C. Supported Print Channel
Installed font Option font
USB (device) USB1.1 / USB2.0(High-Speed)
USB (host) USB1.1 / USB2.0(High-Speed)
PSERVER/RPRINT for the NetWare No
environment
LPR UNIX LPR/LPD command-compatible print channel
IPP Print channel in compliance with IPP1.0
PAP EtherTalk (AppleTalk) No
FTP Equipped with the function to print data received via built-in FTP server.
NetBEUI No
Raw Port(Port9100) 9100 TCP port (Raw Port) supported
HTTP (Web Submit Print) Set/ Print the file by Web via network.
POP3 (E-Mail To Print) Print attached data of receiving E-mail automatically.
BMLinkS Support Network OA equipment interface by JBMIA (Only Japan)

IPP,HTTP and POP3 support SSL.

D. Print Functions
Function Description SPDL/PCL PostScript3
Multiple Pamphlet Binds multiple pamphlet outputs into a single Yes Yes
booklet.
Network tandem print Two units connected via network can be used simultaneously for a printout. Yes Yes
Separate the data on the PC and send to MFP. (Only Windows)
*Guaranteed for same model, same configuration
Windows Cluster Print When a Windows server breaks down, a mirror server takes over and Yes Yes
executes the suspended print job. (Only Windows)
*There may be color differences between machine types.
ROPM The function enables the printout of a multiple number of copies in one RIP Yes Yes
processing.
Multi-access RIP processing must be allowed during printing. Yes Yes
Printing must also be allowed during scanning.
Paper direction setting for 2-sided Pages with front-back attribute such letterhead or punch paper are to be Yes Yes
printing of letterhead paper and pre- printed correctly in front-back page order for 2-sided printing.
punched paper. (Logo paper print
supported
(SEGA AOK Corporation))
Enable Selected Paper For setting of Bypass tray, even if the setup values on the main unit side do Yes Yes
Type/Size in Bypass Tray not match with those on the driver side, the printing will be executed in the
setting of the driver regardless of the setup values
on the main unit side.
Control of setting under terminal service Print setting of each client is memorized under terminal service of server OS. Yes Yes
environment (Setup for each log-in can be skipped.) (Only Windows)

Control of setting under Citrix products Auto create printer print setting of each client is memorized under Yes No
environment CitrixXenApp products environment (XenApp 5.0, XenApp 6.0, XenApp 6.5,
XenApp7.5, XenApp7.6, XenApp7.7, XenApp7.8, XenApp7.9, XenApp7.11,
XenApp7.12) (Save labor to set when log-in)
Driver distribution function Driver Distribution function to manage printer drivers by SRDM is supported. Yes Yes
Form overlay The function downloads a form to the main unit beforehand, sends the PCL5: Yes Yes
contained data only, and inserts the data into the form in the main unit for PCL6: No
printout.
Planet Press Objectif Lune Corporation’s Planet Press (Software No Yes
to execute the mapping of forms (DL beforehand)
and variable data in the printer interior)
Bonjour for This technology detects and connects peripheral equipment on the network No Yes
Macintosh environment automatically.
The dynamic network connection (computer, peripheral equipment and
software) is possible without user setting.
Document control Print the document with a fixed pattern to avoid Yes Yes
illegal copy. (Opt) (Opt)
Object judgment (screen change / screen In the printer color mode output, object of image data (area of photograph / Yes Yes
setting) graphic text) is judged.
Print screen (resolution) is changed automatically.
Binding with no line To prevent bound pages from becoming thick, saddle stitch printing is No No
performed for a small number of pages.
Chapter inserts Insert blank page automatically to entering 1st page of each chapter to odd Yes No
page.
Tab paper print The function print on the tab section of Tab paper. Yes No
Print the document created by an The function specified the shifting width of print data in the printing on the Yes Yes
application on the tab. paper of which paper type is specified as “Tab paper” at the main unit.
Print the character strings specified by The function in which the character strings to be printed on the tab section of Yes No
the printer driver UI on the tab. Tab paper is specified and printed on the tab section of Tab paper.

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 9
Expansion of margin shift In the current model, the margin shift width setting value can be changed per Yes Yes
10mm. Change from 10mm to 1mm. When Margin Shift is set, it will not be (Only Windows)
cut off when it is shifted.
Move Adjusting copy position in vertical axle and cross axle. No No
Configurable each right side or back.
Saddle staple support In the current model, imposition of images and stapling are performed in Yes Yes
Saddle stitch printing.
However imposition is sometimes already performed in the application etc.
Therefore, the specification of saddle staple only
is added.
A3W saddle stitch support Function to enable A3W/SRA3 saddle stitch so that A3 full size pamphlet can Yes Yes
be created by cutting it into A3 size.
*SRA3 is only for pre-imposed.
A3 data one page Saddle stitch of pre-imposed A3 data in A3W sheet. Yes Yes
A4 data two pages Saddle stitch of two-page A4 data in A3W /SRA3sheet without space Yes Yes
between them.
*SRA3 is only for pre-imposed.
Booklet of custom size data Impose custom size data for booklet Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
A3W paper center output support A3W paper can be output on the center output tray. Yes Yes
IC card authentication of driver Usually, it needs to register authentication data to driver for authentication of No No
printer.
In addition, it needs to authenticate IC card and insert ID of IC card to printed
data when print out.
WSD support Discovery function for printer Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
90 degrees rotation function Even if paper is set to different direction, print with 90 degrees image rotation Yes Yes
automatically when printing image is matched paper size. (Rotation is (Rotation is
(However, cannot change direction during job) made made
by the MFP.) by the MFP.)
A4/LTR auto conversion When letter size papers are not set in the paper tray for letter size (8-1/2” x Yes Yes
11”) printing, A4 papers are selected automatically to be printed.
A3 print from A3W/WLT size When receive printer job which have A3W/WLT paper size, change paper Yes Yes
size A3 automatically and print.
Change only paper size, image magnification is same with original.
(supported by SW)
Spool display Show jobs that will be spooled in HDD before ripping printer jobs. Yes Yes
Long original print Print long original.(max.1200mm) (Supported by Sim of machine) Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Woven pattern print When printing confidential documents, print copy controlled character such Yes No
as “Copy prohibition” as woven pattern behind the original.
Job cancel at Auto job control review User can cancel the job at Auto job control review dialog. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
A0/A1 fit page Print A0&A1 data into A4 or Letter size. Yes No
Page interleave This function is used to interleave each printed page with an identical insert Yes No
page. To use this function, it’s necessary to use the “Overlay”
function to prepare an insert page file.
Use driver to render JPEGs In case of having JPEG image in the original document, user can select Yes Yes
whether printer driver or MFP to render JPEG image. (Only Windows)
Print Position This function is to adjust print position of odd and even page of document Yes Yes
separately. (Adjustable in increments of mm/inch) (Only Windows)
Print number of page when N-up printing Print number of page on not only each original but also each output. No No
Expansion of N-up printing Normal print only 1st page, and remaining pages are N-up printing. (can be Yes No
duplex)
100%N-Up Print in 100% size in N-Up for specific combination of data and paper size, Yes Yes
when the data is usually reduced in imposition. (Only Windows)
Layout print The function specifies the layout for imposition of document or image. Yes No
N-up (Except the 1st sheet) It enables 1-up print only for the 1st page and N-up for the other pages. Yes No
Reverse the 2nd sheet at 2-up It enables to rotate the 2nd page by 180 degrees at 2-up. N/A N/A
Repeat print Reduce Pre-set/non standard size automatically and repeat them. Yes No
Gloss paper printing Print digital camera pictures to gloss paper easily. Yes Yes
It’s able to set gloss paper as paper type without adding profile.
N-Up support when saddle stitch printing Ex. Print presentation documents by 2-up and pamphlet layout. Yes Yes
Half size LT/Legal pamphlet support Enable to select original size half size LT/ Legal when staple on saddle stitch Yes Yes
printing + pamphlet. (Only Windows)
Void less printing Ex. Possible to print void less when print photo to gloss paper at Kiosk. No No
Driver setting priority This function prioritize print setting specified in the printer dricer UI, ignoring Yes Yes
the printer settings from application. (Only Windows)
Print Policy To limit operation by user level, function to turn on some item mandatory. Yes Yes
Refer below about item which is limited. And design consideration of can (Only Windows)
support additional demand.

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 10
 User authentication every time This function enforces print users to execute user authentication. Yes Yes
Force Retention This function enforces print users to use retention function. Yes Yes
Force B&W print This function enforces print users to print in monochrome. N/A N/A
Acquisition of Windows login name Windows login name information can be applied to the login name for printer Yes Yes
driver.
Print release This function enables the setting to store file by Print release function every Yes Yes
time for print job.
Use Login name as user name Login name is applied to user name automatically at print job. Yes Yes
Billing cord This function always requires entry of billing code at print job. Yes Yes
Force Retention of Printer job by MFP This function enforces to save all printer job to HDD of MFP inspite of setting Yes Yes
for retention.
(Forbiding to print of DSK function except holding is diferrent function,
because it deletes automatically the job without saving.)
Billing code Billing destination is selectable for each item. Yes Yes
Acquisition of Billing code name from the Billing code name registered in the main unit can be obtained from the dirver. Yes Yes
driver (Only Windows)
Toner save mode Toner save mode (1 level) Yes Yes
(3 levels: separately supported by the driver)
Smoothing (RET) Support RET (resolution enhancement techniques) Yes Yes
To smooth the edges of image and reduce jagged lines in order to obtain
virtually high resolution.
Trapping Select to prevent void area which may be generated around edge of colors. No No
Sharpness This is used to sharpen an image or make it softer. Yes Yes
5 levels (Sharp: 2 levels, Soft: 2 levels)
Line width adjustment function Adjust the line width for output and make print. Fixed width indication/ratio Yes No
indication are available.
Custom Image Custom image can be stored and registered in MFP through printer driver. Yes No
Function Flow Lite Print & Send. “Send” can be specified by printer driver. Yes No
Auto Offset cancellation at only one sheet When only 1 page is printed in a job and it is output from the finisher, offset is No No
of output canceled automatically.
Saddle fold at only one sheet of output It’s able to saddle fold even if when out put sheet is only one in 1 job. Yes Yes
Offset by each specified number of sets Offset by each specified number of sets when printing No No
when no staples
Duplex printing default setting It sets duplex printing by default for US and EU. Yes Yes
(Requirements of Lot4 / EPEAT) (Only Windows)
Lot4 support Duplex setting is default when printing. Yes Yes
And do not pass through duplex path for one page job. (For EU only) (Only Windows)
Crop mark Print corner crop marks and center crop marks when printing full fixed size No No
data on larger-than-fixed-size sheet.
Centerfold insertion Inserts a sheet from the inserter at the last page of pamphlet as centerfold. No No
Trimming width adjustment Trimming width by the trimmer is adjustable for saddle stitching and saddle Yes Yes
folding.
Extended maximum number of sheets for Extends the maximum number of insert for cover / back cover / insert to 1000 Yes Yes
insertion sheet. (Only Windows)
Continuous insertion of cover / insert Enables continuous insertion (including paper feeding from the inserter) Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Put inserts before the back cover It’s able to put inserts before the back cover. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Cover/Insert multiple selection/deletion It’s able to choose multiple inserted pages and delete them. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Separator page insertion Enables to insert separator pages between sets / jobs. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Disabling blank print by printer driver Enables to disable the blank print from the printer driver. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Number-of-set management number Adds the number for managing number of sets in multiple set printing. Yes No
print
Printable area adjustment Expand engine void to 1.5mm. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Image rotation of custom size It’s able to print for both Short edge direction (Landscape) and Long Edge Yes Yes
direction (Portrait)
Carbon print An image is copied and printed continuously from different trays. Yes Yes
The order of paper feeding can be specified by the driver. (Only Windows)
Displaying paper weight Paper types’ weight is displayed on the print driver’s dialog. Target paper Yes Yes
types are Thin paper, Plain paper, and Heavy paper 1-3. (Only Windows)
Support four-digit number of sets Support acceptable number of sets up to 9999 sets Yes Yes
CMYK Image Enhancement Correct the gray scale density when CMYK data is printed out from No Yes
applications by PS driver. (Only Windows)
Extended image adjustment function Adjustment by object and by hue is enabled in the RGB image adjustment Yes No
(PCL) function.
Ruled line thickness adjustment function Since fine line of Excel (1 dot) may sometimes not be printed out, the fine Yes N/A
line is thicken to be 2 dots to print.
Image emphasis function Text/line/image is thickened. Yes Yes
Fine Text Change the screen for text into the high-resolution screen to reduce jaggy. Yes Yes
Auto configuration on printer drivers Reflect configuration of MFP to configuration of drivers automatically by Yes Yes
option automatic settings on Printer drivers. (Only Windows)

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 11
Reverse Prints support for binding data When saddle staple on 3K saddle finisher, interchange page order to turn Yes Yes
folding inside out by software of MFP. (Only Windows)
Staple setting display on print screen of Staple setting is added to print setting screen of App of Office2013. Yes Yes
App of Office 2013
Image enhancement Change the screen of outline of letter and graphic and smoothen the edge Yes Yes
Photo image Change the suitable screen of the photographs. Yes Yes
Installer function Function of the setting for driver. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Auto configuration from installer. Reflect configuration of MFP to configuration of drivers automatically when Yes Yes
installing from installer. (Only Windows)
Update an existing printer driver Update an existing printer driver Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
One time installation for multiple One time installation for multiple models Yes Yes
models (Only Windows)
Multiple installation for single model Multiple installation for same model and port. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Add port Add the port which is already installed Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Set shared printer Set shared printer at the installation Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Set additional driver If the driver is shared with users running different version of Windows (32/ Yes Yes
64bit) for Server- Client environment, install additional driver. (Only Windows)
Uninstaller Select models to delete printer at the uninstallation. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
AirPrint support Support AirPrint ver. 1.5 which is the standard print service of iOS. It Yes (PS is required)
supports version after 5.0.
Mopria Support Comply with Mopria Standard supporting the compatibility in which printing No
by any competitors’ printer is possible easily regardless of location from all
types of mobile equipments.
Google Cloud Print Support Support Cloud print service by Google. Yes (PS is required)
Support Ver.2.0.

E. Condition Settings
Setting item Description
Initial setting Basic settings for printer use such as number of copies or printing direction.
PCL setting Setting of PCL symbols and fonts.
PS setting Setting of allowing or not allowing printing and binary output during PS error.

4. FAX function D. Image Quality/Image Process

A. Transmission method Half tone reproduction Equivalent to 256 levels
Exposure adjustment Auto / Manual (5 steps)
Transmission time Less than 3 sec (Super G3) FAX quality selection Standard (8 x 3.85 line/mm (203.2 x 97.8dpi))
Less than 7 sec (G3 ECM) Fine (8 x 7.7 line/mm (203.2 x 195.6dpi))
Compression/ MH, MR, MMR, JBIG Super Fine (8 x 15.4 line/mm (203.2 x 391dpi))
expansion system (Fixed to ECM for MMR or JBIG.) Ultra Fine (16 x 15.4 line/mm (406.4 x 391dpi))
Modem speed 33.6kbps  2.4kbps automatic fallback Half-tone (Combination with normal character is
Resolution 8 x 3.85 line/mm, 8 x 7.7 line/mm, invalid.)
8 x 15.4 line/mm, 16 x 15.4 line/mm (Standard
memory is used for transmit/receive.) E. Record Size
Intercommunication G3/Super G3: Standard (V.34, V.17, V.33, V.29,
V.27ter) Max. record width 293mm
Communication line Public switched telephone network (PSTN), Record size (AB series)
Private branch exchange (PBX), F-net A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R
SEGA: R-key for PBX setting (Inch series)
ECM Yes 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
8.5 x 5.5R
B. Number of Support Line * If the document length exceeds A3 size, it is divided and printed.
Standard 1 line * For printing the list, A5R and 8.5 x 5.5R cannot be used.
Expansion Not provided

C. Transmission Mode
DSPF/OC Yes (Switching during the reading is feasible
transmission switching (When Preview and Job build mode)

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 12
F. Dial Transmit Thin paper scan function Available except for duplex
function scan
Manual dialing To be entered by 10-key, # key, * key Edge erase transmit function Yes
Re-dialing The previous 50 items (max.) can be saved, Only for the fixed sizes
and one of them can be selected. Job build Yes
Individual call is available. Page division transmit Yes
Individual dialing 2000 items including the group dialing items Cover No
Group dialing 2000 items including the individual dialing Index No
items Transmit message adding No
Program dialing 48 items + preset 1 item function
Chain dialing Max. 64 digits including individual dialing, Receive Auto receive Yes
10-key dialing, and pause. function Manual receive Yes
Dial search Alphabet order search, User index groups DRD call function Distinctive Ring Detection
Quick search Yes North America: Standard,
LDAP search Yes Pattern 1 – 5
Sub address Yes Australia/New Zealand/Hong
Password Yes Kong: ON/OFF (TEL/FAX)
Memory box registration Yes Memory receive Yes
Transfer function Yes
* LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access protocol Number of registration: 1
item
G. Memory for Transmit/Receive Specified receive function Yes (Number of registration)
Rejection numbers: Max.50
FAX transmission data HDD items
FAX reception data HDD Receive data print condition Yes
function
H. Function Receive data staple setting/ Yes
Copy number setting
Transmit Calling function Yes Rotation receive Yes
function Requires the frequency Output by clockwise rotation
setting for each destination. of 90 degrees
PBX function Germany, France only Divided receive Yes
Memory transmit Yes (Definable destinations: Divided print is not made in
94 destinations) duplex mode.
On-hook Yes Duplex receive Yes
Quick online transmit Yes F-code confidential receive Yes
Direct transmit Yes Print hold Yes
Manual transmit Yes Document Admin Yes
Auto re-call mode Yes Inbound Routing Yes
Time indication function Yes Sender registration function Yes
Sequential broadcasting Yes Sender print function Yes
function On-hook dialing function Yes
F code interface Yes Retransmit function Yes
broadcasting indication Only one interface station Pause function Yes
function can be specified. Pause time is 1 – 15 sec.
F code interface Yes Sound volume setting Yes
broadcasting function function
F code confidential send Yes Tone pulse select function Tone, Pulse, Auto
function (North America/Taiwan)
Polling Yes * For the other destinations,
Even with another company set with the soft switch.
machine External phone connection Yes
Sequential polling function Yes Memory remaining capacity Yes
Even with another company check function Only the integral part is
machine displayed.
F-code polling Yes Back up Yes
Bulletin board Yes Registered data read/write Yes
F code bulletin board Yes function
function Report/List Yes
Auto reduction transmit Yes Special Destination check function Yes
A3  B4, A3  A4, B4  A4 function Broadcasting destination Yes
Rotation transmit Yes display function
Counterclockwise rotation of Transmit job change function Yes
90 degrees Save-energy function Yes
Duplex transmit Yes Line monitor display function Yes
Document transmit from OC Yes FAST Yes
function Facsimile Automated Service
Long length original transmit Only when DSPF is used. Technology
Transmission is enable up to Time adjust function Yes
1000mm. Summer time ON/OFF
Mixed documents function Only when DSPF is used. PC-FAX Yes
Zoom transmit Yes Color mode No
2 in 1 transmit Yes
Card shot transmit Only when transmitting from
OC

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 13
 Special Sender registration function Yes D. Support Image
function Number of registration: 1 for
standard sender name and Format /
address. And 18 sender Mode Compression Item
names can be registered. method
Default destination setting No Scanner File format TIFF
Unauthorized scan Yes (Mono 2 gradation) PDF
prevention function PDF/A-1b
Filing-each-page function No PDF/A-1a
Re-operation function Yes Encrypted PDF
User account function Yes XPS
Max. 200 items additionally Searchable PDF
to the default Office file (pptx, xlsx, docx)
Counter function Yes Text file (TXT) (UTF-8)
Rich text file (RTF)
5. Image send function File format Color TIFF
(Color/ Gray scale) JPEG
A. Mode
PDF
PDF/A-1b
Mode Sub mode Support
PDF/A-1a
Scanner E-mail Yes
Encrypted PDF
FTP server Yes*1,*2
High compression PDF
Shared folder (SMB) Yes*1
XPS
Desktop Yes
Searchable PDF
USB memory Yes
Office file (pptx, xlsx, docx)
HDD Yes*3
Text file (TXT) (UTF-8)
Internet Fax / Direct SMTP - Yes
Rich text file (RTF)
Fax - Yes
Compression method Non-compression
Data input ( metadata ) E-mail Yes
(Mono 2 gradation) G3 (1-dimentional)= MH (Modified
FTP server Yes
Huffman)
Shared folder (SMB) Yes
G4= MMR (Modified MR)
Desktop Yes
Compression method JPEG (High/Middle/Low)
Remote PC scan - Yes
(Color/ Gray scale) High compression PDF
*1:Their can send e-mails that include hyper links. Black Letter Emphasis
Internet File format TIFF-FX(TIFF-F / TIFF-S)
*2:Also support for Passive mode. Active mode and Passive mode
Fax Direct (Monochrome)
are switchable by setting.
SMTP G3 (1-dimentional)= MH (Modified
*3: Download should be available from the device web page. Huffman)
G4 = MMR (Modified MR)
B. Support System
Fax File format N/A
(Monochrome)
Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax Compression method MH/ MR/ MMR/JBIG
Direct SMTP
(Monochrome)
Corresponding SMTP/SMTP- POP3 server N/A
server/Protocol SSL*1 SMTP server File per page (Setting of the number of pages available)
FTP (TCP/IP)/ ESMTP server
* Apply the formats which have been set by each mode when
FTPS
SMB *2 broadcasting across modes of Image Send. (One scan multi for-
HTTP/HTTPS mat).
(Supported
protocol of
E. Image Processing
Sharp OSA) (1) Color mode
*1: The password length is extended up to 128 bytes at the SMTP
Internet Fax/
authentication. Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
*2: Network environment for SMB. B&W Yes Yes Yes
SMB support version SMBv1.0, v2.0, v2.1, v3.0 Gray scale Yes N/A N/A
[Windows] Full color Yes N/A N/A
Auto Color Selection Yes N/A N/A
Server2008, Server2008x64, Windows7, Windows7x64,
Windows8.1, Windows8.1x64, Windows 10, Windows 10x64,
Server2016
*Internal evaluation only. Strictly confidential.
[Macintosh]
OSX 10.6, 10.7, 10.8, 10.9, 10.10, 10.11, 10.12

C. IPv6 Support
No support

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 14
(2) Resolution Function Description Support
Apply E-mail The e-mail address of the Yes
Internet Fax/ address authenticated user is automatically
Level Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP of the user for set as the default address.
1 100x100dpi 200x100dpi Standard: 203.2x97.8dpi login (Scan to Me) It’s available to set whether to choice
(Half Tone: N/A.) (Half Tone: N/A.) address of the user for login or
2 150x150dpi N/A N/A not when broadcasting to fax /
3 200x200dpi 200x200dpi Fine (203.2x195.6 dpi) internet fax. It’s available to set
4 300x300dpi 200x400dpi Super Fine (203.2x391 dpi) whether to choice the address of the
5 400x400dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine (406.4x391 dpi) user for login or not when
broadcasting.
6 600x600dpi 600x600dpi N/A
And it has the function to prohibit to
(3) Exposure / Original Type choice address except the user
who log in.
Internet Fax/ Scan to Self Scanned images are only sent to the Yes
Mode Scanner Fax login user’s e-mail address (When the
Direct SMTP
that is stored in the CAC card. A MX-EC50 is
Halftone reproduction Equivalent to 256 gradations
CAC-related function. enabled.)
Exposure Auto Yes <- <-
Scan to Site Scanned images are only sent to the Yes
Adjustment Manual 5 levels <- <-
e-mail address that the (When the
Original Text Yes N/A N/A administrator has specified MX-EC50 is
document type Text / Photo Yes N/A N/A beforehand. A CAC-related function. enabled.)
(Selectable in Text / Yes N/A N/A Permit “!/,/&/;/#” at It permit the “! /,/&/;/#” at inputing the Yes
manual mode) Printed photo folder designation address of Scan to SMB.
Photo Yes N/A N/A of Scan to SMB
Printed photo Yes N/A N/A Find My Address The function which search Yes
Map Yes N/A N/A information from MFP/external
Magical scan Yes N/A N/A authentication system and display
(Area division + Suppress the result by authenticated user
Background) information.
Selection of image quality N/A Halftone (B&W only) OSA external authentication is
ON/OFF available.
Home Directory The authenticated user can select Yes
(4) Other Image Processing Functions Function any of the network folders as
default address.
Internet Fax/ Prohibit the It prohibits to input the next address Yes
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP broadcast for making to send only the
Moire reduction mode N/A*1 N/A N/A transmission of user who log in at Scan to Home
CPT (notes’ security) Yes N/A N/A Home Directory Directory.
Scanning QR No No No Home Directory A function to acquire directory No
Function (CAC) information from the AD or MFP, and
*1:A similar function is available by adjusting sharpness. to set the user info that I read at the
time of CAC use from CAC in an
F. Specifying Addresses address automatically.
Scan to URL Store scanned data to the HDD of Yes
(1) Address Specifying Method
MFP, send the storage destination
URL of the data to an optional e-mail
Function Support
address.
One-touch Yes
Scan to URL Scanned data are sent by attaching No
Group key Yes (Function them to an e-mail when they are
Direct input Yes (e-mail/SMB/Internet Fax (including Expansion) small. When large, they are stored in
(Entry from the soft keyboard, Direct SMTP)/Fax) the server or the HDD of the
externally-connected *Addresses of FTP/Desktop can not be MFP whose URL is sent by e-mail.
keyboard or 10 keypad) input directly. Linkage with the Scan to Me function
Selection from the LDAP Yes is possible.
server Permit only Specification for SAE2 issue (SEF Yes
Display the address No specific domain tender). Unprescribed one domain
information stored in the LDAP addresses for can be registered.
server directly in the key list. direct entry of
address.
(2) Other Address Specifying Method Resend Addresses can be selected from the Yes
latest 50 destinations in the
Function Description Support sending history. Selections can be
Setting of the The default address can be set in the Yes made from all destinations in the
default address scanner mode. The user sending history including FTP/
can send only by setting an original Desktop/SMB.
and touching the start key.

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 15
(3) Address Book Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax
1) Registration Direct SMTP
Sequential N/A N/A Yes
Max. number of registrations Total: 2000 keys Broadcast
*It’s abailable to register 2,000 items Transmission
about the address scan to FTP / Desktop / request
SMB. Deleting addresses No Yes Yes
Number of addresses can be Max. 500 addresses from groups which
registered have been already
in one Group key registered.
Number of addresses can be 6000 addresses (included in the 2000
5) Settings to Disable Address Specification /Registration
registered keys)
by inputting directly in Group
Internet Fax/
keys Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Registration using the LDAP Yes
Disable Yes Yes Yes
search results
Registering
Address book registration in Yes
Destination from
the sending history screen
Operation Panel
Registration of a sending line Yes
Disable Yes Yes Yes
to fax individuals
Registering
(when a line is installed.)
Destination on
Speed dial (quick key) Yes (Call by inputting a registration Web Page
number from the 10-key pad)
Disable Yes N/A N/A
Registration
2) Registration Method
Using Network
Scanner Tool
Registration in Registration in
Registration on Disable [Resend] Yes Yes Yes
Address Type the operation the sending
the Web page on Fax/Image
panel history
Send Mode
E-mail Yes Yes Yes
address mode Disable Selection Yes Yes Yes
from Address Book
FTP address No No Yes
Disable Direct Yes Yes Yes
Desktop No No Yes or registration
Entry
address from
NST (Network Disable Broadcast No No Yes
Scanner Tool) Setting
SMB addres No Yes Yes Disable PC-Fax/ N/A Yes N/A
PC-I-Fax
Fax address Yes Yes Yes
Transmission
Internet Fax Yes Yes Yes
Prohibition to send N/A N/A Yes
address
for PC-FAX
Direct SMTP Yes Yes Yes
address (4) Program
3) Address Book Functions
Number of registrations Registered up to: 48; Preset: 1 (Group/
Individual can be registered.)
Import/export of VCF format No
My address book Yes (5) Information to Be Sent
Cloning Address book Yes (Directly from one MFP to another)
Retrieve local address book Yes Internet Fax/
Fixed mode display Yes Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Linkage with the PC-FAX Yes Subject Select from the list. N/A
address book Direct entry (80 one-byte/two-byte
Readout/read-in of data Yes characters; Number of lists: 30)
registered in other models (by the address book conversion utility)
Changeable user tab support No File name Select from the list N/A
Default color setting by No Match the subject
address Direct entry (80 one-byte/two-byte
Add listing which is entered Yes characters; Number of lists: 30)
forwarding administrator
password and forwarding Outbound Yes N/A
information when address message
book is transferred (message body)
Outbound Select from the [Link] entry N/A
4) Specification of Multiple Addresses message selection
Number of letters 1800 one-byte characters (900 N/A
Internet Fax/ in an outbound two-byte characters)
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP message
Broadcast Yes (E-mail/ Yes Yes Pre-Setting Mail Yes N/A
Transmission FTP/Desktop/ Signature *1
SMB)
Number of 500 500 500 *1 : A text message can be set to be automatically added in
destinations the body of outbound messages. It can not be edited at the
of broadcast
transmission time of sending.

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 16
1) Registration/Selection of Sender/Reply-to Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Internet Fax/ Own Number Sending N/A Yes Yes
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP (Sender’s name is
Reply-to Select from the N/A N/A included in outbound
list. (One Own Name message)
direct entry is fixed as Transaction Report N/A Yes Yes
Select from the default) (The print method of
LDAP server the transaction report
Number of 1,000 addresses N/A N/A can be selected at the
destinations (used for user time of sending)
registered in authentication Memory Box N/A N/A Yes
Reply-to as well)
Supress Background Yes N/A N/A
Sender N/A 1 sender 1 sender
Blank Page Skip Yes N/A N/A
registration (up to 20 two- (up to 20 two-
(Available to both DF/
byte / 40 byte / 40
OC scanning)
one-byte one-byte
Drop Out Color Yes (Text N/A N/A
characters) Only characters)
mode/only
one set of sender Only one set of
B&W 2
information can sender
gradation
be registered, information can
and I-Fax be registered, Sharpness Yes(5 levels) N/A N/A
addresses are and Fax numbers Contrast Yes(5 levels) N/A N/A
registered in are registered RGB adjustment Yes*1 N/A N/A
the name part. in the name field. Stamp No No No
It’s not available Watermark No No No
to register Filing Yes Yes Yes
sender’s name Quick File Yes Yes Yes
for internet fax
Multi Shot No Yes Yes
/ direct SMTP.
Verification Stamp Yes Yes Yes
(6) Send Function ON/OFF setting Yes Yes Yes
of Verification
1) Original stamp from
basic screen
Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax Default Yes Yes Yes
Direct SMTP
verification
Original size input Yes stamp is set in
Original size Yes*1 Every modes
registration Preview Yes Yes Yes
Non standard size Yes Polling reception N/A N/A Yes
input
Job divide by N/A N/A N/A
Non standard size Yes recognizing
registration blank pages
Sending Long Size YES Dual Page Scan send Yes Yes Yes
registration Max. 1000 mm (1-sided copy/only B&W 2 gradation)
Combined pages send No No No
*1: Postcard and photo (L size) can be handled on the document Divide send by size Yes (support No No
limit only E-mail)
glass.
Multi Crop Yes N/A N/A
2) Fax Send (Only E-mail/
FTP/Desktop/
Memory transmission Yes (Max. 100 in total in the image NetworkFolder
send mode.) /Scanto Ext
Speaker Yes Memory)
Quick online transmission Yes Photo Crop Yes N/A N/A
Direct transmission Yes (Only E-mail/
(Switching: Memory transmission FTP/Desktop/
<-> Direct transmission) NetworkFolder
Manual transmission setting No /Scanto Ext
Memory)
3) Special Functions Business Card Scan Yes No No
(Only E-mail/
Internet Fax/ FTP/Desktop/
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP NetworkFolder
Job Build Yes Yes Yes /Scanto Ext
Slow Scan Mode Yes Yes Yes Memory)
Mixed Size Original Yes Yes Yes
*1: Default value can be changed by the system settings.
Original Count Yes Yes Yes
(Available to both DF/
OC scanning)
Edge Erase (Edge/ Yes Yes Yes
Edge +Center/Center/
Side)
Book division Yes Yes Yes
Card Shot Yes(Ratio:63- Yes(Ratio:63- Yes(Ratio:63
400%) 400%) -400%)
Time Specified send Yes Yes Yes

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 17
4) Other Send Functions *4: If the same file name is found at Scan to SMB, file name is
changed automatically by adding serial number at the end to save.
Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax (7) Receive Functions
Direct SMTP
Auto Reduction N/A N/A Yes 1) Receive method
Sending Setting
Rotation Sending N/A Yes Yes Internet Fax/
Mode Fax
Zoom sending Enlargement/reduction is allowed only from Direct SMTP
standard sizes. Automatic reception Yes Yes
Own Name Select No No Yes Select Manual reception Yes (Direct SMTP: No) Yes
from the total Switching from manual N/A Yes
of 18. reception to (SEF only)
Own Number Sending N/A Yes Yes auto reception
Printing Page Number N/A Yes Yes
at Receiver (can be 2) Print Functions for Received Data
switched in the System
Settings) Mode Internet Fax/
Fax
Direct SMTP
Date Print (can be N/A Yes Yes (Notation
switched in the System (Notation can can be Auto Receive Reduce Setting Yes Yes
Settings) be switched) switched) Fixed size reception Yes (by the No
Recall mode N/A DSMTP: Yes Soft-SW)
Times and Specified size scaled reception No No
interval of Rotated reception Yes Yes
recall setting Setting of received data print No Yes
can be set in condition
the System (Setting of Print Actual Size or
Setting. Reduction Print)
Error N/A Yes Yes 2-sided copy reception Yes Yes
Busy N/A Yes Yes Multi Shot (2in1) reception No No
Change of the number Yes N/A N/A Auto Reduction Sending Setting Yes Yes
of pages for each file when A3 size is received
Extended maximum Yes (Maximum Yes (Maximum Yes (for only the places of destination
paper job 9999 pages) 999 pages) (Maximum of the fax with the inch system)
999 pages) Auto Reduction Sending Setting Yes Yes
Restriction on Yes Yes (Direct No when letter size is received
transmission size SMTP : No) (for only the places of destination
Reception Report N/A Yes N/A of the fax with the AB system)
Not support Received data bypass output Yes Yes
timeout setting Index printing N/A N/A
(Direct SMTP: Body Text Print Select Setting Yes Yes
No) Output tray setting Yes Yes
Transmission result No N/A N/A Output tray setting as for every line N/A N/A
notification*1 Insert job separators No No
Deleting the sending Yes Yes Yes Number of copies of received data No No
history*2
Staple setting of received data No No
Covers N/A No N/A
Color print when empty black toner N/A N/A
Outbound message N/A No N/A
Foot Print Yes Yes
Keeping address for a Yes Yes Yes
All pages collective delection of Yes Yes
certain time after
reception data on the preview screen
sending*3
Delete specified pages of received No No
Manual recall from job Yes Yes Yes
data
status screen
undo No No
Retry mode from the No No No
Bulk deletion plural pages No No
transmission error job
list display
3) Inbound Routing of Received Data
Auto adjustment of Yes Yes Yes
image set direction Mode Internet Fax/Fax/ Direct SMTP
when Legal original
Format PDF, Single TIFF, Multi TIFF, XPS
Take priority to show Yes Yes Yes
Destination E-mail, FTP, SMB, Desktop, Fax,
the address book
Internet-Fax (Except Direct SMTP)
Time-out setting of Yes Yes Yes
Save to HDD of the MFP Yes (Creatable folders : Max 500,
Image Send job
automatically Creatable files : Max 500 per one
Support for the same Yes No No folder)
file name at Scan to
Auto image reduction of received Yes
SMB*4
data at auto saving
Address display in the Yes Yes Yes
Auto create settings of PDF for PC Yes
job status at the
Browsing to the HDD of the MFP
address direct input
File name setting when inbound Yes
*1: The file size can be displayed in the Complete Queue in the job routing (Attached TSI information)
status screen. The sender name is added to the Yes
inbound file name
*2: The sending history to be deleted is for resending in the normal
Information about the MFP that Yes
mode. The addresses in the sending history can be deleted both transfers the data is added to the
individually or all. transferred data
*3: It’s available to set ON / OFF to show the system setting by soft Timetable Yes
SW (default: OFF). Inbound routing by line type Yes

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 18
 Mode Internet Fax/Fax/ Direct SMTP Internet Fax/
Mode Fax
Alternative mode for destination Yes Direct SMTP
error Printing/forwarding of Yes Yes
Easy switching destinations of Yes (The forward table can be specified pages.
inbound routing enabled/disabled in the home Output reception from Yes Yes
screen.) specified fax numbers. (as in C-Jupiter2) (as in C-Jupiter2)
Print expansion function is available Yes (by the Soft-SW)
during data transfer Enhanced Always Print, transfer 7) Document Administration Function
error will be stored into the
transfer error box. Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax
Default: On (only for Print) Direct SMTP
Transfer error list printing after each Yes (by the Soft-SW) Default: Off Forwarding Yes
transfer error occurrence sent/received The formats of forwarding data can be selected.
Data. (Single TIFF/ Multi TIFF/ PDF / XPS)
4) Other Receive Functions (Document (Scan to e-mail/ FTP/ SMB/ Desktop/ PC-Internet Fax/
Admin) PC- Fax/ Fax/ I-Fax are also supported) Folder setting
Internet Fax/ by each of sending and receiving is supported.
Mode Fax
Direct SMTP *When the transfer destination setting (sending data) is
Allowing specified Yes(50 addresses) N/A valid, it is impossible to execute the job that is include
address/domain Direct SMTP.
reception
8) Transmission Method
Rejecting specified Yes(50 addresses) N/A
address/domain
Internet Fax/
reception Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Allowing reception N/A Only specified numbers
Transmission time N/A N/A Less than 2 sec.
from specific numbers (50 numbers / 20 digits)
(Super G3/
Rejecting reception N/A Only specified numbers
JBIG)
from specific numbers (50 numbers / 20 digits)
Modem Speed N/A N/A 33.6 kbps -> 2.4
Rejecting reception N/A Yes (by the Soft-SW)
kbps
from fax numbers
Auto-fallback
without a TSI value
Intercommunication N/A N/A Super G3 / G3
External phone N/A Yes
Communication line N/A N/A Public switched
connection remote
telephone
Received data bypass Yes Yes
network (PSTN),
output
private branch
Time Specified output Yes Yes exchange
Reception Check Yes (Direct SMTP: N/A (PBX), F-net
Interval Setting No)(0-8 hours in SEGA: R-key for
increments of 1 min.) PBX setting
POP3 Communication Yes (Direct SMTP : N/A Max. number of lines N/A N/A 1 line
Time out Setting No)(30-300 seconds ECM N/A N/A Yes
in increments of
Support the digital N/A N/A Yes
30sec.)
line network
Data Forwarding in Yes Yes (Sending level)
case of trouble
of output 9) Record Size
Auto wake up print Yes Yes
Alternative reception 400 messages 400 messages Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax
(including fax and (including fax and Direct SMTP
Internet fax) Internet fax) Maximum recording N/A 293mm
NJR transmission after No No width
reception Record size N/A A3-A5, 11x17-5.5x8.5
(Notifying PC of
reception) (8) F-code
1) F-code Transmission
5) Fax Received Notive by LED (Status Display LED)
Internet Fax/
Internet Fax/ Mode Scanner Fax
Mode Fax Direct SMTP
Direct SMTP
Sub-address N/A N/A Yes (20 digits)
Fax received notice by Yes Yes
LED (status display LED) Pass code N/A N/A Yes (20 digits)
Cooperation with paper Yes Yes
2) F-code Memory Box (Fax Functions)
removal
Fax Polling Security Yes
6) Received Data Preview
Pass code Number Setting Yes (10 numbers/20 digits)
Internet Fax/ Polling Memory Send Yes
Mode Fax 100 memory boxes can be registered for
Direct SMTP
Print Hold Setting for Yes Yes Polling Memory, Confidential and Relay
received data Broadcast in all (Public Box: 1).
Setting the number of times the public
Image check (Preview) Yes Yes
box may be polled:
Forwarding from Yes Yes
once/unlimited number of times
preview
Confidential transmission Yes (F-code Method)
Filing to HDD from Yes Yes
Relay Broadcast transmission Yes (F-code Method)
preview
request
Register to junk FAX No Yes
from preview

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 19
 Relay Broadcast Send Yes (11) Others
(Fax to e-mail/ Internet Fax/
Fax Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax
Number of characters can be 18 one-byte/two-byte characters Direct SMTP
registered in the PC- Internet Fax N/A Yes N/A
memory box PC- Fax N/A N/A Yes
FAST N/A N/A No
(9) Telephone Function Network FAST N/A N/A No
Distinctive ring N/A N/A Settings vary
Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner FAX detection depending on
Direct SMTP
the area.
Receiver N/A N/A No
Trial mode Scanner: No No N/A
Speaker N/A N/A Yes Meta data: Yes
Hold N/A N/A No Linearized PDF Yes N/A N/A
Pause Time N/A N/A Yes (1-15 sec.) Supported by
Setting the network
Telephone call N/A N/A No (External scanner tool.
during power telephone calls are Support the format Yes (Supported by soft SW) [Link]
outage possible.) of date for file name of send job for scanner / internet fax [Link]
Switching N/A N/A 10/20/TONE/ Auto name name of received data transfer (Support to save the
between tone Select Availability of received data to HDD of MFP) [Link] name of
and pulse setting or the default received data when automatically document filling
value varies Sharpdesk Mobile Yes N/A N/A
depending on the supports
destination of the Profile Yes N/A N/A
product. registration
from Sharpdesk
(10) Sound settings Mobile
Send scanned Yes N/A N/A
Internet Fax/
Mode Item Scanner Fax data to
Direct SMTP
Sharpdesk
Speaker Speaker N/A N/A Yes *1 *2 Mobile
Volume Setting
Calling Speaker N/A N/A Yes *1 *6 (12) PC-Internet Fax / PC-Fax Function Overview
Volume Setting
1) Operation Environment
Ring tone Speaker N/A N/A N/A
Volume Setting
OS
Line monitor Speaker N/A N/A Yes *1 *6
Interface USB2.0,10/1000BASE-T,100BASE-TX
Volume Setting
Communication LPR/lp,Port9100(RAW)IPP,USB2.0
Reception Speaker N/A Yes *1 No
protocol
Volume Setting
Receive Speaker N/A N/A Yes *1 *6 * Factory default of USB (device) is OFF. It can be released by Sim.
Complete Signal Volume Setting
2) Function
Sound pattern N/A N/A Yes *1 *3
Time setting for N/A N/A Yes *1 *4 PC-Internet Faxsend Yes (Required option: Internet Fax expansion kit)
communication Max. I-Fax address length: 64 digits
ending sound
PC-Fax send Yes (with fax equipped )
Send Complete Sound volume N/A N/A Yes *1 *6 Max. fax number length: 64 digits (including sub-
Signal setting address and passcode)
Sound pattern N/A N/A Yes *1 *3 Resolution 200x100dpi / 200x200dpi / 200x400dpi /
Time setting for N/A N/A Yes *1 *4 400x400dpi / 600x600dpi
communication Original size A3 / B4 / A4 / AS / BS / 11x17 / 8.5x14 / 8.5x11 /
ending sound 5.5x8.5 / 8.5x13 / 8k / 16k
Send/receive Sound volume N/A N/A Yes *1 *6 Compression method MH / MMR
error signal setting
Broadcast Yes (Mix of fax and I-Fax is available. Max.
Sound pattern N/A N/A Yes *1 *3 transmission destinations: 500)
Time setting for N/A N/A Yes *1 *5 F-code transmission Yes Sub-address Yes Up to 20
communication digits
ending sound
Pass code Yes Up to 20
Communication Sound volume N/A Yes *1 No digits
Error Signal setting
Phone book Yes
Setting of Sound volume Yes *1 Yes * 1 Yes *1 registration /
Original Scan setting transmission function
Complete Signal
Letter of transmittal Yes (Not allowed for broadcast transmission)
(Image send)
attaching function*1
*1: Set up in the System Settings. Letter of transmittal Yes
creating function
*2: 9 levels including mute.
Entering address Yes
*3: PATTERN 1/2/3/4. directly
Setting of different sounds for each of the receive signal, send Own Number Send Yes
(Own Number is printed at all times.)
complete signal and send/receive error signal shall be available.
Preview function Yes
*4: 5 levels from 2.0 to 4.0 sec.
Reception Report Yes
*5: 2 levels of 0.3 and 0.7 sec. (Notifying PC by the
*6: 10 levels including mute. NJR)

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 20
 Document filing Filing Yes *1: The history is not deleted after the Image Sending Activity
function Quick File Yes Report is printed, the latest 50 histories can always be printed by
PC-FAX transmission Yes manual printing.(Valid by soft [Link] is Off)
log *2: Display destination address when Internet fax is received.(Valid
User authentication Yes by soft [Link] is Off)
Re-call from sending Yes (Mass production reflection after release the
log bewer special driver for Japan limited specifications) C. Other List Print Functions
*Support all destinations
*Re-send by address at broadcast: No Item Support
Time Color for PC-iFax Yes List 2-sided print Yes
R-KEY (SEGA only) Yes Changing settings Log Yes (It supports to print out setting list by
Importing MFP’s Yes (Importing from the address book editor) arranging default value and current value.)
address book
Getting MFP’s address Yes 7. Mechanical/Supply related matters
book via Network
Color for PC-iFax No A. Paper Setting function
Display PC-FAX Yes It is a function in which each parameter such as fusing temperature
sending result on PC setting can be specified as a property. The following items can be
*1：The use of letters of transmittal made by applications shall be registered in the service web page.
available.
Number of profile 20
Settable item
6. Report/list function Name Yes
Paper weight 55-300g/m2 (Unit of measurement can
A. User Authority be switched: g/m2, Ib Bond, Ib Index, Ib
Cover)
Type Support
Paper type Select from Uncoated Paper/Coated
Machine Status List Yes Paper (Gloss)/Coated Paper (Matte)/
Printer Test PCL Symbol Set List Yes Embossed Paper
Page PCL Internal Font List Yes Paper information Color, Tab, Pre-Punched Paper
PCL Extended Font List Yes ON/OFF setting for each
PS Font List Yes Paper property Fixed Paper Side, Disable Duplex,
Kanji Font List Yes Disable Staple,Disable Staple less
NIC Page Yes staple, Disable Punch
Sending Individual List Yes ON/OFF setting for each
Address List Group List Yes Fusing temperature settings Yes
Memory Box List Yes Curl improvement No
Document Filing User / Folder List Yes Fusing operation settings
Disjunction position settings No
B. Administrator Authority Double Feed Detection Setting No
Transfer current settings Yes
Type Support Transfer environment Yes
Home Screen Home Screen List Yes correction settings
Copy Function Settings Copy Settings List Yes PTC current settings No
Printer Settings Printer Settings List Yes Side1/2, XY Print Position Yes
Image Send Settings Metadata Set List Yes Test print function No
Common Settings List Yes Side1/2, XY Ratio Settings*1 By 0.01%
Scan Settings List Yes Test print function No
Fax Settings List Yes Motor speed settings Yes
I-Fax Settings List Yes Color Registration adjustment No
Document Filing Document Filing Settings List Yes Paper Registration adjustment Yes
Settings Maximum Density Adjustment Yes
Sharp OSA Settings Sharp OSA Settings List Yes Transfer position at heavy No
Common Paper Settings List Yes paper B/W mode
Machine Identification Settings List Yes Print Void setting No
Operation Settings List Yes
Keyboard Settings List Yes *1: Only for SHARP driver
Device Control List Yes
B. Plain Paper Expansion Support
Network Settings Network Settings List Yes
Security Settings Security Settings List Yes The existing Plain Paper (60-105g/m2) is divided into Plain Paper 1
Energy Save Setting Energy Save List Yes (60-89g/m2) and Plain Paper 2 (90-105g/m2).
Image Quality Image Quality Adjustment List Yes
Adjustment
Image Sending Activity Image Sending Activity Yes
Report Report(Fax)*1
Image Sending Activity Yes
Report(Scan)*1
Image Sending Activity Report Yes
(Internet Fax)*1*2
Data Receive/Forward Allow/Reject Number List Yes
List Inbound Routing List Yes
Document Admin List Yes
Allow/Reject Mail & Domain Name Yes
List

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 21
8. Dimensions and Weight
Outer dimension W663 x D772 x H1218mm
(Included operation panel) (adjuster and protruding objects
included)
Dimension occupied by the W1003 x D818mm
machine (with manual tray extended, and
LCD is tilted upright. Adjuster and
protruding objects are included)
Weight Approx. 164kg
(including photo [Link]
including consumables)

9. Ambient conditions
1) Working environment

Humidity (RH)

85%

60%

20%

10°C 30°C 35°C

Temperature

Standard Temperature 23±2°C

environmental Humidity 50±10%RH
conditions
Usage Temperature 10 -35°C
environmental Humidity 20-85%RH
conditions Atmospheric 590-1013hPa (height:0-2000m)
pressure
Storage period Toner/Developer:
24 months from the manufactured month
(Production lot) under unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
under unsealed state

MX-M7570 SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 22
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
MX-M7570
Service Manual

1. Supply system table

A. North America, Middle America, South America
Quantity in
Item Content Life Model name Remarks
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 83K MX-754NT 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 6%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 800K MX-754NV 10
Drum OPC drum x1 800K MX-754DR 10

B. Europe, Eastern Europe, Russia, Australia, New Zealand

Quantity in
Item Content Life Model name Remarks
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 83K MX-754GT 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 6%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 800K MX-754GV 10
Drum OPC drum x1 800K MX-754DR 10

C. Asia, Hong Kong

Quantity in
Item Content Life Model name Remarks
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 83K MX-754AT 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 6%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 800K MX-754AV 10
Drum OPC drum x1 800K MX-754DR 10

D. Middle East, Taiwan, Africa, Israel, Philippines

Quantity in
Item Content Life Model name Remarks
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 83K MX-754FT 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 6%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 800K MX-754FV 10
Drum OPC drum x1 800K MX-754DR 10

MX-M7570 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

 1 : ‘19/March.

2. Maintenance parts list

A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Main charger kit MX-754MK Main charger unit x1 400K 10
Cleaning blade x1
Side seal F x1
Side seal R x1
Drum separate pawl x4
Toner reception seal x1
Drum gear x1
Transfer belt kit MX-754TT Transfer belt x1 400K 10
Transfer roller x1
Transfer drive gear x1
Transfer cleaning roller x1
Transfer roller bearing x2
Heat Roller kit MX-754HK Upper heat roller x1 400K 10
Upper heat roller bearing x2
Upper heat roller insulation bush x2
Upper heat roller gear x1
Upper heat roller separate pawl x6
Separate pawl spring (Upper) x6
Lower heat roller x1
Lower heat roller bearing x2
Lower heat roller separate pawl x2
Separate pawl spring (Lower) x2
Web cleaning kit MX-754WB Upper web roller x1 400K 10
Upper web back up roller x1
Upper web back up roller bearing x2
Upper web pressure spring x2
Lower web roller x1
Lower web back up roller x1
Lower web back up roller bearing x2
Lower web pressure spring x2
Toner collection container MX-700HB Toner collection container unit x1 400K 5
Filter kit MX-754FL Ozone filter x1 400K 10
DV ozone filter x1
Toner filter x1
DV filter AS x1
Staple cartridge MX-SC11 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
1 x3
Staple cartridge MX-SC12 Staple cartridge x4 2000 times 32
1 x4
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
Staple cartridge MX-SCX2 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 12
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 - 20
Fusing unit MX-755FU1 Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 - 1
(Heater lamp 120V)

MX-M7570 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 2

 1 : ‘19/March.

B. Europe/East Europe/Australia/New Zealand/Asia/Middle East/Africa/Hong Kong

Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Main charger kit MX-754MK Main charger unit x1 400K 10
Cleaning blade x1
Side seal F x1
Side seal R x1
Drum separate pawl x4
Toner reception seal x1
Drum gear x1
Transfer belt kit MX-754TT Transfer belt x1 400K 10
Transfer roller x1
Transfer drive gear x1
Transfer cleaning roller x1
Transfer roller bearing x2
Heat Roller kit MX-754HK Upper heat roller x1 400K 10
Upper heat roller bearing x2
Upper heat roller insulation bush x2
Upper heat roller gear x1
Upper heat roller separate pawl x6
Separate pawl spring (Upper) x6
Lower heat roller x1
Lower heat roller bearing x2
Lower heat roller separate pawl x2
Separate pawl spring (Lower) x2
Web cleaning kit MX-754WB Upper web roller x1 400K 10
Upper web back up roller x1
Upper web back up roller bearing x2
Upper web pressure spring x2
Lower web roller x1
Lower web back up roller x1
Lower web back up roller bearing x2
Lower web pressure spring x2
Toner collection container MX-700HB Toner collection container unit x1 400K 5
Filter kit MX-754FL Ozone filter x1 400K 10
DV ozone filter x1
Toner filter x1
DV filter AS x1
Staple cartridge MX-SC11 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
1
x3
Staple cartridge MX-SC12 Staple cartridge x4 2000 times 32
1 x4
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
Staple cartridge MX-SCX2 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 12
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 - 20
Fusing unit MX-755FU Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 - 1
(Heater lamp 230V)

MX-M7570 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 3

3. Definition of developer/drum life end
When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified count.
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified count.
When either of the above reach the specified count, it is judged as life end.

when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the
specified amount, it is judged as life end.
To check the developer/drum life, use SIM22-13.

Developer/drum counter Developer/drum rpm

B/W B/W
Drum 65cpm/75cpm 800K 2,000K rotations
Developer 800K 2,000K rotations

4. Production number identification 1: Alphabet

Indicates the production factory.
A. OPC drum 2: Number
Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
Indicates the production month.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.

C. Toner cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the
bottom of the toner cartridge.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The lot number is comprised of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the
content as follows.
The number is printed on the inside of the drum.

1: Number
For this model, this digit is 2.
2: Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code.
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
5/6: Number
Indicates the day of the production date.
7/8/ Number, Alphabet
9/10: Indicates the factories number of production factory.
: Unit code/Model name
: Destination
B. Developer : Skating
: Production place
: Serial number
: Production date (YYYYMMDD)
: Version

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The lot number is 8 digits in length. Each digit indicates the content
as follows.
The number is printed on the developer bag. (For BK, at the right
lower side of the front. For Cl, at the right lower side of the back.)

MX-M7570 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 4

5. Environmental conditions
Humidity (RH)

85%

60%

20%

10°C 30°C 35°C

Temperature

Standard environmental Temperature 23±2°C

conditions Humidity 50±10%RH
Usage environmental Temperature 10 - 35 °C
conditions Humidity 20 - 85% RH
Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot) under
unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
under unsealed state

MX-M7570 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 5

MX-M7570
[4] Service Manual
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. External view
A. External view

11
4
6
18*
3*

1 19* 2
8*

5*

9* 10* 12 14 15 13 16* 17*

No. Name Function/Operation
1 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals.
Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned.
2 Front cover Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge.
3 Output tray (center tray)* Output is delivered to this tray.
4 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
5 Exit tray unit (right exit tray)* When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
6 Motion sensor This sensor detects the presence of a person that approaches the machine, and automatically
wakes the machine from sleep mode. (Motion Sensor Mode Only).
7 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading a large sheet of paper, be sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.
8 Inner finisher* This can be used to staple output.
9 Finisher (65-sheet stapling) * This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
10 Saddle stitch finisher This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding and stapling output and the
(65-sheet stapling) * fold function for folding output in half are also available.
A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
11 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
12 Tray 1(Left side) Paper holding tray.(1,250 sheets)
13 Tray 2 (Right side) Paper holding tray.(850 sheets)
14 Tray 3 Paper holding cassette.
15 Tray 4 Paper holding cassette.
16 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray (MX-LC18) is The capacity is max. 4,000 sheets of B5, A4, or 8.5" x 11".
installed) *
17 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray (MX-LC19) is This holds paper. 8-1/2" x 11" to 12" x 18" (B5 to A3W) paper can be loaded. Up to 3500 sheets of
installed) * paper can be loaded.
18 Keyboard* (North America is standard.) This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine. When not used, it can be stored under the
operation panel.
19 Punch module* This is used to punch holes in output. Requires the finisher (large stacker) or the saddle stitch
finisher (large stacker).

*: Peripheral device.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1

 19*
23*
22*
21*

20*

No. Name Function/Operation

19 Finisher (100-sheet stapling) * This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
20 Saddle stitch finisher This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding and stapling output and the fold function for
(100-sheet stapling) * folding output in half are also available.
A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
21 Folding unit * When outputting different paper sizes such as A3 and A4, the larger size paper can be Z-folded to align with the
smaller size paper.
22 Inserter * The cover paper and the inserted paper inserted to the printed paper can be set. By the off-line finish function, paper
can be directly sent to the finisher or the saddle finisher, executing stapling, punching, and folding.
23 Curl correction unit * Corrects curl of printed paper properly.

*: Peripheral device.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 2

B. Internal operation parts

1 2 3 4

6 7

No. Name function/Operation

1 Document feeder cover Open this cover to remove an original miss feed.
2 Original guides Set this guide to the original width to scan the original properly.
3 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. Originals must be placed face up.
4 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
5 Original size detector Detects the size of documents set on the document table (glass surface).
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
7 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 3

2. Internal structure

2
1
4

8
7

5
6
3

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Toner cartridges These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out in a cartridge, the cartridge of the color that
ran out must be replaced.
2 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
3 Transfer belt During black and white printing, only the black toner image is transferred onto the transfer belt.
4 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
5 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
6 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.
7 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in
the "on" position.
8 Waste toner box This collects excess toner that remains after printing.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 4

3. Connectors

No. Name function/Operation

1 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0. This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine. This connector cannot be
used under the factory setting. The connector on the front section can be used under the factory setting. When the
keyboard is installed to the machine, an exclusive connection is enabled. (Simultaneous connection is disabled.)
2 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer. For the
USB cable, use a shielded cable.
3 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. For the LAN cable, use a shielded type
cable.
4 Service-only connector This connector is for use only by service technicians. Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to
malfunction. Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118"
(3 m) in length.
5 Power plug

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 5

4. Operation panel

3 4
5

6 11 7 9
2

1 10

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
perform an operation.
2 [HOME] key / indicator Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to enable
quick and easy operation of the machine.
3 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
4 [POWER] key Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
5 [POWER SAVE] key / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy. The [POWER SAVE] key blinks when
the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
6 Data notification indicator The indicator lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of a job. When the Job separator or Exit tray unit (right tray)
is used for output, this blinks until the output is removed.
7 Error indicator Lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of the error.
8 IC card holder When an IC card is set to this holder with the IC card reader/writer installed, the user authentication can be made.
9 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
10 NFC touch point area You can easily connect a mobile device to the machine by touching the mobile device.
11 Motion sensor This sensor detects the presence of a person that approaches the machine, and automatically wakes the machine
from sleep mode. (Motion Sensor Mode Only).

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 6

5. DSPF
A. Rollers

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Document pickup roller Picks up a document to feed it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Feeds a document to the transport section.
3 Separation roller Separates a document to prevent double-feeding.
4 Transport roller 1(Drive) Provides deflection between the paper feed roller and this roller to correct the document skew.
5 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the
registration roller to document.
6 Transport roller 2(Drive) Transports document from transport roller 1 to registration roller.
7 Transport roller 2(Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to the document.
8 Registration roller (Drive) Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the document scanning timing.
9 Registration roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the
registration roller to document.
10 Transport roller 3(Drive) Transports document from the No. 1 scan section to the No. 2 scan section.
11 Transport roller 3(Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to the document.
12 Transport roller 4(Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 3 to the document exit roller.
13 Transport roller 4(Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to the document.
14 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges document.
15 Paper exit roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to the document.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 7

B. Sensors and switch

SCOV SPRDMD

SPPD2 STUD
SPED1 SPLS2
SPPD1
SPLS1

STLD SPWS
SPED2
SPPD3 SPOD
SOCD SPPD5
SPPD4
SLCOV

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

SCOV Upper door open/close sensor Light transmission type Detects open/close of the door.
SLCOV Under door switch Seesaw switch Detects open/close of the under door.
SOCD Open/close sensor Light transmission type Detects open/close of the unit.
SPED1 Document empty sensor Light reflection type Detects document empty in the document feed tray.
SPED2 Document empty sensor Light reflection type Detects document empty in the document feed tray.
SPLS1 Document length detection short sensor Light transmission type Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPLS2 Document length detection long sensor Light transmission type Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPOD Document exit sensor Light transmission type Detects document exit of the document.
SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1 Light transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPPD2 Document pass sensor 2 Light reflection type Detects pass of the document.
SPPD3 Document pass sensor 3 Light transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPPD4 Document pass sensor 4 Light transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPPD5 Document pass sensor 5 Light transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPRDMD Document random sensor Light transmission type Detects the document size in random document feed.
SPWS Document width sensor Volume resistor Detects the document width on the document feed tray.
STLD Document feed tray lower limit sensor Light transmission type Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray.
STUD Document feed tray upper limit sensor Light transmission type Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 8

C. Drive motors, clutches, PWB, lamps and fan

STRC
SPFM

STRRC
SPFC
SRRC
SPFFAN

CCD PWB SPOM

LED PWB SLUM

DSPF CNT PWB

LED PWB

Signal name Name Type Function / Operation

SLUM Lift up motor Stepping motor Drives the lift of the paper tray.
SPFC Paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the document feed section roller.
SPFFAN SPF cooling fan motor DC brush-less motor Cools the SPF section.
SPFM Paper feed/transport motor DC brush-less motor Drives the transport roller.
SPOM Exit motor Stepping motor Drives the exit roller.
SRRC No. 2 registration roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the No. 2 registration roller.
STRC Transport roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller 2.
STRRC No. 1 registration roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the No. 1 registration roller.

Name Function/Operation
DSPF CNT PWB Controls the DSPF.
CCD PWB Scanner read CCD.
LED PWB Irradiates a manuscript with light for CCD to read a manuscript image.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 9

6. Sensors and detectors

MHPS OCSW
POD2
TFD2 TFD3
POD3
POD1
WEBEND1 PRTPD
APPD1
TH_UM TH_US2
TH_US1
DSW_ADU
HUD-DV
WEBEND2
TH-DV
PCS
CCHPD TH_LM
FPFD
CCMD
TFSD
BESTD APPD2 MPWD MPLD1
TCS
MTOP2
PPD2 MPED MTOP1
MPFD HUD_M TH_M
DSW_F
T1PPD1 LPPD
WTSD T2PPD1
T1LUD
T1PED
T1SPD T2LUD DSW_RL1
T2PED
T2SPD

TNDSET
C3PFD
C3LUD C3PED
C3SS1
C3SS2
C3SS3 C3SS4 C3SPD
C4PFD
C4LUD C4PED
C4SS1 C4SS2
C4SS3 C4SS4
WTFD C4SPD
C4PWD

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1 Light transmission type Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass.
APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2 Light transmission type Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass.
BESTD Belt estrangement sensor Light transmission type Detects the estrangement of the belt.
C3LUD Cassette 3 upper limit detection Light transmission type Detects lift up of the cassette 3.
C3PED Cassette 3 paper presence detection Light transmission type Detects the cassette 3 paper presence.
C3PFD Cassette 3 paper entry detection Light reflection type Detects the cassette 3 paper pass.
C3SPD Cassette 3 remaining quantity detection Light transmission type Detects the cassette 3 remaining quantity.
C3SS1 Cassette 3 size detection 1 Tact switch Detects the cassette 3 paper [Link] insertion of the cassette 3 by
C3SS2 Cassette 3 size detection 2 Tact switch detecting one of cassette 3 size detection 1 to 4.
C3SS3 Cassette 3 size detection 3 Tact switch
C3SS4 Cassette 3 size detection 4 Tact switch
C4LUD Cassette 4 upper limit detection Light transmission type Detects lift up of the cassette 4.
C4PED Cassette 4 paper presence detection Light transmission type Detects the cassette 4 paper presence.
C4PFD Cassette 4 paper entry detection Light reflection type Detects the cassette 4 paper pass.
C4PWD Cassette 4 paper width sensor Volume resistor Detects the paper width.
C4SPD Cassette 4 remaining quantity detection Light transmission type Detects the cassette 4 remaining quantity.
C4SS1 Cassette 4 size detection 1 Tact switch Detects the cassette 4 paper [Link] insertion of the cassette 4 by
C4SS2 Cassette 4 size detection 2 Tact switch detecting one of cassette 4 size detection 1 to 4.
C4SS3 Cassette 4 size detection 3 Tact switch
C4SS4 Cassette 4 size detection 4 Tact switch
CCHPD MC cleaner HP sensor Light transmission type Detects the MC cleaner home position.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 10

 Signal name Name Type Function/Operation
CCMD MC cleaner shift sensor Light transmission type Detects the shift distance of the MC cleaner.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Light transmission type Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close.
DSW_F Front door open/close detection Light transmission type Detects open/close of the front door.
DSW_RL1 Right lower door open/close detector 1 Light transmission type Detects open/close of the right lower door.
FPFD Fusing front paper pass detector Light reflection type Detects paper pass in front of the fusing section.
HUD_M/TH_M Temperature/humidity sensor Sensor Detects the temperature and the humidity.(For the process control)
HUD_DV/
Temperature/humidity sensor Sensor Detects the temperature and the humidity.(For the process control)
TH_DV
LPPD LCC transport detector sensor Light reflection type Detects paper transport from the LCC.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Light transmission type Detects the scanner home position.
MPED Manual feed paper entry detection Light transmission type Detects the manual feed paper empty.
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Light transmission type Detects the manual feed paper empty.
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector 1 Light transmission type Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
Manual paper feed tray paper width
MPWD Volume resistor Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
detector
Manual paper fees tray pull-out position Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (storing
MTOP1 Light transmission type
detector 1 position).
Manual paper fees tray pull-out position Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (pull-out
MTOP2 Light transmission type
detector 2 position).
OCSW Original cover switch? Light transmission type Detects the trigger for document size.
PCS Process control sensor Light reflection type Detects the ID density.
POD1 Fusing rear detection Light transmission type Detects the paper exit from fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Light transmission type Detects the paper from paper exit.
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Light transmission type Detects the paper exit to right tray.
PPD2 Registration pre-detection Light reflection type Detects the paper in front of registration roller.
PRTPD Right paper exit tray paper detector Light transmission type Detects paper empty in the paper exit tray (Right paper exit tray)
Paper upper limit detector (Paper feed
T1LUD Light transmission type Detects the upper limit lift position of paper in the tandem tray.
tray 1)
T1PED Paper empty detector (Paper feed tray 1) Light transmission type Detects paper.
T1PPD1 Paper pass sensor (Tandem tray 1) Light reflection type Detects paper pass in the paper transport section of the Tandem tray 1.
Paper remaining quantity detector
T1SPD Light transmission type Detects the paper remaining quantity.
(Tandem tray 1)
Paper upper limit detector (Paper feed
T2LUD Light transmission type Detects the upper limit lift position of paper in the paper feed tray.
tray 2)
T2PED Paper empty detector (Paper feed tray 2) Light transmission type Detects paper.
T2PPD1 Paper pass sensor (Tandem tray 2) Light reflection type Detects the tandem tray 2 paper pass.
Paper remaining quantity detector
T2SPD Light transmission type Detects the paper remaining quantity.
(Tandem tray 2)
TCS Toner density sensor Magnetic sensor Detects the toner density.
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Light transmission type Detects the face down paper exit tray full.
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Light transmission type Detects the right tray paper exit full.
TFSD Toner remaining quantity sensor Magnetic sensor Detects the remaining quantity of toner in the toner hopper.
TH_LM Fusing lower temperature sensor Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing lower roller.
Fusing upper temperature sensor
TH_UM Thermistor Detects the center surface temperature of the fusing upper roller.
(Center)
TH_US1 Fusing upper temperature sensor (Edge) Thermistor Detects the edge surface temperature of the fusing upper roller.
Fusing upper temperature sensor (Edge)
TH_US2 Thermistor Detects the edge surface temperature of the fusing upper roller.
:for monitoring
TNDSET Open/close detector (Tandem tray 1,2) Light transmission type Detects open/close of the Tandem trays 1 and 2.
WEBEND1 Upper web end detection Light transmission type Detects the upper web end of the fusing unit.
WEBEND2 Lower web end detection Light transmission type Detects the lower web end of the fusing unit.
WTFD Waste toner bottle detector Light transmission type Detects installation of the waste toner bottle.
WTSD Waste toner shutter open/close detection Light transmission type Detects open/close of the waste toner shutter.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 11

7. Switches

DSW_R
PWRSW

DSW_INC

DHSW

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

DHSW* Dehumidification heater switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the Dehumidification heater power supply.
DSW_INC Inner cover right switch Micro switch Detects the open/close of the inner cover right.
DSW_R Right door switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/OFF the power line
of the fusing, motor and the LSU laser.
MSW Main switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main AC power source.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Turns ON/OFF the DC power source.

*: Service parts

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 12

8. Clutches and solenoids

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

C3PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 3) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
C4PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 4) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
MPUC Paper feed clutch (Manual paper feed) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
PTRC1 Paper vertical transport clutch (Lower) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller in the lower section of the vertical
paper transport section.
PTRC2 Paper vertical transport clutch (Upper) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller in the upper section of the vertical
paper transport section.
T1PUC Paper feed clutch (Tandem tray 1) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
T2PUC Paper feed clutch (Tandem tray 2) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
TTRC Transport clutch (Tandem tray 1, 2) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller of the Tandem tray.
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Selects the paper exit gate (ADU gate).
C3PUS Paper feed solenoid (Paper feed tray 3) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
C4PUS Paper feed solenoid (Paper feed tray 4) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
MPGS Paper feed gate solenoid (Manual paper Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the manual paper feed gate.
feed)
PSPS Separation pawl solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Exfoliates the paper of the drum part.
T1PUS Paper feed solenoid (Tandem tray 1) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
T2PUS Paper feed solenoid (Tandem tray 2) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
WEBS WEB drive control solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Drives the WEB.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 13

9. Drive motors

MIM
POM
TNM FUM ADUM1
TNHM1
TNHM2 DM PGM
PFM RRM
WEBM CCM
HPFM ADUM2 DVM
TURM
CPFM

T2LUM WTM

C3LUM
T1LUM
C4LUM

Signal name Name Type Function / Operation

ADUM1 ADU motor 1 Stepping motor Drives the right door section.
ADUM2 ADU motor 2 Stepping motor Drives the right door section.
CCM MC cleaner motor Brush motor Drives the MC cleaner.
CPFM Paper feed motor Brush less motor Drives the paper feed section.
C3LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 3) DC brush motor Lifts the paper feed tray.
C4LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 4) DC brush motor Lifts the paper feed tray.
DM Drum motor Brush less motor Drives the drum.
DVM Developing drive motor Brush less motor Drives the developing section.
FUM Fusing drive motor Brush less motor Drives the fusing unit.
HPFM Horizontal transport motor Stepping motor Transport paper from the paper feed section to the transport motor
drive [Link] paper from the right door section to the
transport motor drive system.
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Scanner (reading) section
PFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drive transport between the registration roller and the paper feed
section, transport between the registration roller and the right door
section.
PGM Polygon motor DC brush-less motor Scans the laser beam.
POM Paper exit drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
RRM Resist motor Stepping motor Drives the registration roller and controls ON/OFF.
TNHM1 Hopper stirring motor 1 Stepping motor Supplies the toner in toner Hopper to the DV unit.
TNHM2 Hopper stirring motor 2 Stepping motor Conveys the toner in toner Hopper to the toner supply roller.
TNM Toner motor Stepping motor Transport toner of the toner cartridge to the development unit.
TURM Transfer separation motor Brush motor Drives and separates the transfer belt.
T1LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 1) DC brush motor Lift the paper feed tray.
T2LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 2) DC brush motor Lift the paper feed tray.
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor 1 Stepping motor Drives the upper web cleaning paper.
WTM Waste toner drive motor Brush less motor Stirs waste toner.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 14

10. Lamps

No. Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

1 CL Scanner lamp LED Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
2 PTDL Discharge lamp LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately before transfer
operation.
3 HL_UM/US/UW Heater lamp Halogen lamp Heats the heat roller.
4 DL Discharge lamp LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 15

11. Gates

No. Name Function/Operation

1 ADU reverse gate Discharges paper to the right tray or selects the switch-back transport route to the ADU section.
2 Right exit gate Selects the paper path: to transport paper to the ADU section or to the right tray.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 16

12. Heater

WH_S1

WH_TND

WH_CS2

WH_CS1

Signal name Name Function/Operation

WH_CS1* Paper dehumidifying heater Dehumidifies the paper feed tray section to prevent paper from absorbing humidity which causes
(Paper feed tray 3) degraded image quality and paper jams.
WH_CS2* Paper dehumidifying heater Dehumidifies the paper feed tray section to prevent paper from absorbing humidity which causes
(Paper feed tray 4) degraded image quality and paper jams.
WH_S1* Scanner heat-retention heater Dehumidifies the scanner section to prevent it from dew condensation.
WH_TND* Paper dehumidifying heater Dehumidifies the paper feed tray section to prevent paper from absorbing humidity which causes
(Paper feed tray 1, 2) degraded image quality and paper jams.

*: Service parts

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 17

13. Fans

POFM1

POFM6
POFM5
POFM4
PROFM
POFM3
OZFM FUFM1
LSUFM

FUFM2

DVFM1 DVFM2
PSFM2

PSFM1

Signal name Name Function / Operation

PROFM Process air inlet fan motor Cools charger section of the process.
DVFM1 Development cooling fan motor Cools the development section.
DVFM2 Development cooling fan motor Cools the development section.
FUFM1 Fusing cooling fan motor 1(Exhaust) Cools the fusing section.
FUFM2 Fusing cooling fan motor 2(Intake) Cools the fusing section.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the LSU section.
OZFM Ozone fan motor Exhausts ozone.
POFM1 Exit cooling fan motor 1 Cools the exit section.
POFM3 Exit cooling fan motor 3 Cools the exit section.
POFM4 Exit tray cooling fan motor Cools the exit tray section.
POFM6 Paper cooling fan motor (R) Cools paper exited paper.
POFM5 Paper cooling fan motor (F) Cools paper exited paper.
PSFM1 Power cooling fan motor 1 Cools the power unit.
PSFM2 Power cooling fan motor 2 Cools the power unit.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 18

14. Filter

3
4

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
2 DV filter AS Prevents toner from splashing from the DV unit.
3 DV ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the DV unit.
4 Toner filter Takes in the floating toner of the image process section.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 19

15. PWB/Memory device
1
2
3
4

7 17
8
18
9 19
10
20
11 21

12 22

13

14

15
23
16

24
25
26

LSU /(2%29$

29

30
28

27

No. Name Function/Operation

1 ORS PD PWB Output the manuscript size detection signal.
2 MOTION SENSOR PWB Detects the approach of human in energy saving [Link] send signal to MFPC PWB.
3 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal. Controls the touch panel.
4 USB CONECTOR PWB USB Interface.
5 POWER-SR PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
6 NFC HOME KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
7 CCD PWB Scanner read CCD.
8 LED DRV PWB Drives the scanner lamp.
9 LED PWB Irradiates a manuscript with light for CCD to read a manuscript image.
10 DL PWB Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
11 PTDL PWB Diselectrifies an exposure body surface before the transcription.
12 Right Door Interface PWB Interfaces the signals of the sensors in the paper transport section.
13 MFPC PWB Controls the image-related items and controls all over the machine.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 20

No. Name Function/Operation
14 HDD Stores the filing data, the log data and authentication data also used as a work memory.
15 RRM Drive PWB Drives a conveyance motor.
16 HPFM Drive PWB Drives a conveyance motor.
17 ORS LED PWB Drives the LED for manuscript size detection.
18 HV MC PWB Generates the high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias voltage.
19 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
20 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
21 Scan Mother PWB Controls the scanner section and relay the signal of each board.
22 DC Power supply PWB Outputs the secondary side voltage.
23 AC PWB Controls the power supply on the primary side.
24 SIZE DT PWB Detects the paper size of the paper feed tray.
25 SIZE DT PWB Detects the paper size of the paper feed tray.
26 HV TC PWB Generates the transfer voltage.
27 eMMC PWB Stores the SOC program data, snapshot, the e-manual data, the watermark data, the log data
28 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
29 LD PWB Drives the laser diode and controls the power.
30 LSU CNT PWB Controls the LSU.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 21

16. Fuses and thermostats

13
12

Fusing unit

DC PWB

AC PWB

F101
F102
F103
F104
F105
F004

F1
F005
F001

F2

Fuses
Signal name Name Type Section
F1 Fuse 20A 250V AC PWB (For 100V series)
F1 Fuse 10A 250V AC PWB (For 200V series)
F2 Fuse 10A 250V AC PWB (For 200V series)
F001 Fuse 10A/250V DC PWB
F004 Fuse 0.25A DC PWB
F005 Fuse 2A DC PWB
F101 Fuse 6.3A/250V DC PWB
F102 Fuse 6.3A/250V DC PWB
F103 Fuse 6.3A/250V DC PWB
F104 Fuse 6.3A/250V DC PWB
F105 Fuse 6.3A/250V DC PWB

Thermostats
No. Signal name Name Type Function/Operation
12 TS UM Thermostat 1 Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
13 TS US Thermostat 2 Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US//HL_UW) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 22

17. Rollers

50
49
54
53
52
51

43
44
46
45
56
55

47
48
41
42

14
39 13
40
19
18 15
35
36
2 38
1 37
3 33
34
16 32
17
31
5 30
4
6
29
8 28
27
7 25
9 26
23
24
11
22
10 20
12 21

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 1) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 1) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 1) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
4 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 2) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
5 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 2) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
6 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 2) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
7 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 3) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
8 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 3) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
9 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 3) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
10 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 4) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
11 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 4) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
12 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 4) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
13 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
14 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
15 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
16 Horizontal transport roller left (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed roller to the horizontal roller Right.
17 Horizontal transport roller left (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
18 Horizontal transport roller Right (Drive) Transports paper fed from the horizontal roller left to the transport roller 12.
19 Horizontal transport roller right (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
20 Transport roller 1(Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport roller 2.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 23

 1 : ‘19/March.

No. Name Function/Operation

21 Transport roller 1(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
22 Transport roller 2 Transports paper fed from the transport roller 1 to the transport roller 3.
23 Transport roller 3(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 6.
24 Transport roller 3(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
25 Transport roller 4(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 3 to the transport roller 5.
26 Transport roller 4(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
27 Transport roller 5 Transports paper fed from the transport roller 4 to the transport roller 6.
28 Transport roller 6(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 4 or 5 to the transport roller 7.
29 Transport roller 6(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
30 Transport roller 7(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 6 to the transport roller 9.
31 Transport roller 7(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
32 Transport roller 8 Transports paper fed from the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 9.
33 Transport roller 9(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 10.
34 Transport roller 9(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
35 Transport roller 10(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
36 Transport roller 10(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 9 to the transport roller 12.
37 Transport roller 11(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
38 Transport roller 11(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 15 to the transport roller 12.
39 Transport roller 12(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
40 Transport roller 12(Drive) Transports paper to the registration roller. Makes a bend of the paper between a cash register strike
roller and this roller and corrects a paper skew and an image and relative relations of the paper.
41 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport
1 roller to paper.
42 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts the
1 relative position between images and paper.
43 Transport roller 13(Drive) Transports paper fed from the Fusing section to the exit section / the switch back section.
44 Transport roller 13(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the exit roller to provide the transport power of the exit roller to paper.
45 Transport roller 14(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the exit roller to provide the transport power of the exit roller to paper.
46 Transport roller 14(Drive) Transports paper transported from the switchback section to the transport roller 15.
47 Transport roller 15(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the exit roller to provide the transport power of the exit roller to paper.
48 Transport roller 15(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 14 to the transport roller 11.
49 Paper exit roller 1(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the exit roller to provide the transport power of the exit roller to paper.
50 Paper exit roller 1(Drive) Discharges paper to the left side.
51 Paper exit roller 2(Drive) Discharges paper to the right side.
52 Paper exit roller 2(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the exit roller to provide the transport power of the exit roller to paper.
53 Transport roller 16(Drive) Transports paper fed from the exit roller 1 to the transport roller 14 and the exit roller 2.
54 Transport roller 16(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
55 Heat roller Heat toner onto paper to fuse images.
56 Pressure roller Applies pressure to the heat roller.

MX-M7570 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 24

MX-M7570
[5] ADJUSTMENTS Service Manual

1. Outline
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the sequence
of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest.
There is, however, no need to perform all the adjustments. Perform only the necessary adjustments.
Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted.
If adjustments are omitted, the sequence of adjustments must be observed in ascending order. Failure to follow this procedure may result in
improper adjustment or failure of operation.

2. Adjustment item list

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ1 High voltage values ADJ 1A Main charger grid voltage adjustment 8-2
adjustment ADJ 1B Developing bias voltage adjustment 8-1
ADJ 1C Transfer current and voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ1D MC total electric current output setting 8-10
ADJ1E Transcription Electric cleaning output setting 8-6
ADJ2 Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ3 Print image distortion, ADJ 3A Print image distortion manual adjustment (LSU parallelism adjustment) 64-2
position, magnification ratio ADJ 3B Print image magnification ratio manual adjustment (Main scanning direction) 50-10
adjustment (Manual ADJ 3C Print image lead edge void area manual adjustment/Front-rear void area, rear edge 50-10
adjustment) void area manual adjustment
ADJ4 Scan image distortion ADJ 4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
adjustment (OC mode) ADJ 4B Scan image main scanning direction distortion adjustment
ADJ5 Scan image distortion ADJ 5A DSPF level adjustment
adjustment (DSPF mode) ADJ 5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode) 64-2
ADJ 5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode) 64-2
ADJ6 Scan image focus adjustment ADJ 6A Image focus adjustment (Document table mode/ DSPF front surface mode) 48-1
ADJ 6B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
ADJ7 Scan image magnification ADJ 7A Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment 48-1
ratio adjustment (Manual (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
adjustment) ADJ 7B Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment 48-1
(Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
ADJ 7C Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment 48-1
(Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode)
ADJ 7D Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment 48-1
(Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode)
ADJ8 Print/scan image off-center, ADJ 8A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode) 50-12
lead edge position adjustment ADJ 8B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF mode) 50-12, 50-6
(Manual adjustment) ADJ 8C Paper feed off-center manual adjustment (No.1 - 4 paper feed unit in main unit) 50-10
(Mechanical adjustment)
ADJ9 Print image lead edge position, off-center, magnification ratio adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 50-28
ADJ10 Image position, image loss, ADJ10A Copy mode image loss void area adjustment (Document table mode) 50-1
and void area adjustment ADJ10B Document scan position adjustment (Scanner scanning position adjustment when 53-8
scanning the front surface in the DSPF mode)
ADJ10C Copy image position and image loss adjustment (manual adjustment) (DSPF mode) 50-6
ADJ10D Image send mode, image loss adjustment 50-27
ADJ10E FAX send mode image loss adjustment 50-27
ADJ11/ Gray balance/density Note before execution of the image quality adjustment
SET1 adjustment Copy image quality check
Printer image quality check
ADJ 11A Scanner calibration 11A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) (document 63-3 (63-5)
(1) table mode)
11A Shading adjustment (Calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-2
(2)
11A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-3 (63-5)
(3)
ADJ 11B FR density 11B FR density unevenness automatic correction 61-11
variation correction (1)
11B FR density unevenness visual inspection correction 61-12
(2)
ADJ 11C Copy/Printer gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 46-74
(Basic adjustment)
ADJ 11D Copy quality 11D Copy gray balance and density adjustment 46-24
adjustment (1) (Automatic adjustment)
(Basic adjustment) 11D Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Manual 46-16
(2) adjustment)

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 1
Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ11/ Gray balance/density ADJ 11E Copy/Image send/ 11E Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each 46-2
SET1 adjustment FAX image quality (1) monochrome copy mode) (separately for the low-
adjustment density area and the high-density area)
(Individual (No need to adjust normally)
adjustment) 11E Copy gray balance, gamma adjustment 46-10
(2) (No need to adjust normally)
11E Monochrome copy density, gamma adjustment (for 46-16
(3) each monochrome copy mode)
(No need to adjust normally)
11E Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode 46-19
(4) document density scanning operation (exposure
operation) conditions setting (Normally no need to
set)
11E Document low density image density reproduction 46-32
(5) adjustment in the automatic monochrome (Copy/
Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background density
adjustment in the scanning section)
11E Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment (for 46-63
(6) each mode) (No need to adjust normally)
11E Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document 46-37
(7) reproduction adjustment
(No need to adjust normally)
11E Monochrome copy/color scan mode sharpness 46-60
(8) adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
11E Copy high density image density reproduction setting 46-23
(9) (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
11E DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment 46-9
(10) (No need to adjust normally)
11E Automatic gray balance adjustment by the user (Copy 26-53
(11) gray balance automatic adjustment ENABLE setting
and adjustment)
11E Copy gamma, gray balance adjustment for each 46-54
(12) dither (Automatic adjustment)
11E Dropout color adjustment (Normally not required) 46-55
(13)
11E Watermark adjustment (Normally not required) 46-66
(14)
ADJ 11F Printer image 11F Printer gray balance adjustment 67-24
quality adjustment (1) (Automatic adjustment)
(Basic adjustment) 11F Printer gray balance adjustment 67-25
(2) (Manual adjustment)
ADJ 11G Printer image 11G Printer density adjustment (Low density section 67-36
quality adjustment (1) density adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
(Individual 11G Printer high density image density reproduction 67-34
adjustment) (2) setting (Supporting the high density section tone gap)
(No need to adjust normally)
11G Printer gamma adjustment for each dither (Automatic 67-54
(3) adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
ADJ12 Image send, FAX send mode, ADJ12A Color image send mode, image density and gradation adjustment (by each mode) 46-4
image quality adjustment ADJ12B Monochrome image send mode, image density and gradation adjustment (by each 46-5
mode)
ADJ12C Image send mode, image gray balance adjustment 46-8
ADJ12D FAX send mode, image sharpness adjustment 46-39
ADJ13 FAX send mode image quality ADJ13A Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode 46-40
adjustment (Collective adjustment of all the FAX modes)
ADJ13B Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode (Normal mode) 46-41
ADJ13C Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode (Fine mode) 46-42
ADJ13D Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode 46-43
(Super fine mode)
ADJ13E Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode (Ultra fine mode) 46-44
ADJ13F Image density and gradation adjustment in the IFAX send mode (600dpi mode) 46-45
ADJ14 Setting of the auto exposure mode operating conditions in copy, scan, and FAX 46-19
ADJ15 Paper size detection ADJ15A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment 40-2
adjustment ADJ15B Paper feed tray 4 paper width sensor adjustment 40-12
ADJ15C DSPF paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ16 Document size detection ADJ16A Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
adjustment (Document table
mode)
ADJ17 Touch panel coordinate adjustment 65-1
ADJ18 Fusing paper guide position adjustment (Manual adjustment of fusing paper guide position)

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 2
3. Details of adjustment
1-B Developing bias voltage adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
ADJ 1 High voltage values adjustment * The high voltage PWB has been replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
1-A Main charger grid voltage adjustment * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
* When the MC high voltage PWB is replaced. 1) Enter the Sim. 8-1 mode.
* U2 trouble has occurred. 2) Select the output mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. Actual voltage
Item/Display Setting
Content 65cpm 75cpm
1) Enter the Sim. 8-2 mode. (mode) range
machine machine
2) Select the output mode to be adjusted with the scroll button. MID A MIDDLE K developing 0 - 600 -500V -500V
DLE SPEED bias set value +/- 5V +/- 5V
Actual voltage DVB_K at middle
Item/Display Setting
Content 65cpm 75cpm speed
(mode) range
machine machine LOW A LOW K developing 0 - 600 -500V -500V
MID A MIDDLE K charging/ 150 - -663V -667V SPEED bias set value +/- 5V +/- 5V
DLE SPEED grid bias set 850 +/- 5V +/- 5V DVB_K at low speed
GB_K value at
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
middle speed
speed mode and press [OK] key.
LOW A LOW K charging/ 150 - -663V -663V
SPEED grid bias set 850 +/- 5V +/- 5V Enter the adjustment value of each color mode is specified on
GB_K value at low the label attached on the MC high voltage power PWB.
speed
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle DV-:XXX
speed mode and press [OK] key.
Enter the adjustment value of each color mode is specified on EUK9MHC54HB
the label attached on the MC high voltage power PWB.
D V - : 5 0 6 G B K : 6 5 9

GBK:XXX

EUK9MHC54HB
6 65 5 GG BB+ + 0 0 0 0
D V - : 5 0 6 G B K : 6 5 9 7 5 G B + 0 4

6 65 5 GG BB+ + 0 0 0 0 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-
7 5 G B + 0 4 dure 3) is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce- CAUTION: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on
dure 3) is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is saved. the MC high voltage [Link] the adjustment value
label is attached on the MC high voltage PWB, the PWB
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
must be removed in order to check the adjustment
value. This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is
The default values specified for each model must be changed advisable to put down the adjustment value in advance.
as follows: When the adjustment value (specified value) of the mid-
65cpm machine: + 0 dle speed mode is set, the adjustment values of the
75cpm machine: + 4 other modes are automatically set according to the mid-
dle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.
CAUTION: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on
the MC high voltage [Link] the adjustment value CAUTION: Since the MC high voltage output cannot be checked
label is attached on the MC high voltage PWB, the PWB with a digital multimeter in this model, a judgment of the
must be removed in order to check the adjustment output must be made by checking the print image qual-
value. This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is ity.
advisable to put down the adjustment value in advance.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the mid-
dle speed mode is set, the adjustment values of the
other modes are automatically set according to the mid-
dle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.
CAUTION: Since the MC high voltage output cannot be checked
with a digital multimeter in this model, a judgment of the
output must be made by checking the print image qual-
ity.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 3
 * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
1-C Transfer current and voltage adjustment
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
1) Enter the Sim. 8-6 mode.
* The high voltage PWB has been replaced.
2) Select the output mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.
* U2 trouble has occurred.

Setting Default value

Item/Display Contents
range 65cpm 75cpm
A TC PLAIN BW SPX Transfer bias reference value Standard paper 1 Front surface 0-255 113 129
B TC PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 0-255 113 129
C TC PLAIN 2 BW SPX Standard paper 2 Front surface 0-255 113 129
D TC PLAIN 2 BW DPX Back surface 0-255 113 129
E TC HEAVY1 BW SPX Heavy paper 1 Front surface 0-255 129 129
F TC HEAVY1 BW DPX Back surface 0-255 129 129
G TC HEAVY 2 BW SPX Heavy paper 2 Front surface 0-255 129 129
H TC HEAVY 2 BW DPX Back surface 0-255 129 129
I TC HEAVY3 BW Heavy paper 3 0-255 113 113
J TC HEAVY4 BW Heavy paper 4 0-255 113 113
K TC OHP BW OHP 0-255 113 113
L TC THIN BW Thin paper 0-255 97 129
M TC GLOSSY PAPER BW Glossy paper 0-255 129 129
N TC LABEL BW Label 0-255 129 129
O TC FRONT EDGE LOW SPX Transfer front edge bias Low speed Front surface 0-255 0 0
P TC FRPNT EDGE LOW DPX Back surface 0-255 0 0
Q TC FRQNT EDGE MIDDLE SPX Middle speed Front surface 0-255 0 0
R TC FRRNT EDGE MIDDLE DPX Back surface 0-255 0 0
S TC ADSORPTION LOW Transfer current value at adsorption Low speed 0-255 113 113
T TC ADSORPTION MIDDLE Middle speed 0-255 113 129
U TC BACKEND LOW SPX Transfer rear bias Low speed Front surface 0-255 0 0
V TC BACKEND LOW DPX Back surface 0-255 0 0
W TC BACKEND MIDDLE SPX Middle speed Front surface 0-255 0 0
X TC BACKEND MIDDLE DPX Back surface 0-255 0 0
Y TC INTERVAL LOW Current value between papers Low speed 0-255 113 129
Z TC INTERVAL MIDDLE Middle speed 0-255 113 129
AA TC CLEANING AC Transfer cleaning AC bias Middle speed 0-255 218 218
AB TC CLEANING DC Transfer cleaning DC bias Middle speed 0-255 36 36
AC TC CLEANING ROLLER + Cleaning positive bias Middle speed 0-255 128 128
AD TC CLEANING ROLLER - Cleaning negative bias Middle speed 0-255 128 128
AE PTDL SPX Discharges before transfer operation Middle speed Front surface 0-255 15 20
AF PTDL DPX Back surface 0-255 15 20
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button. When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
The adjustment value is set. saved and the transfer voltage is outputted simultaneously.
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is Since the actual output cannot be checked, if it is presumed to
outputted. be abnormal even though the adjustment value is set to the
default value, replace the high voltage pwb.

1) Enter the SIM 8-10 mode.

1-D MC total electric current output setting
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* When the MC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
* U2 trouble has occurred. set value is output for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. pressed during outputting, the operation is terminated.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
Setting Default Current value
Button Item Display Content
range value Variable range Minimum unit
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (middle speed mode) K 50 - 100 70 -500 - -1000A 10A
LOW1 A LOW1 SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (low speed 1 mode) K 50 - 100 70 -500 - -1000A 10A

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 4
 * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1-E Transcription Electric cleaning output
1) Enter the SIM 8-6 mode.
setting
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* When the transfer high voltage power PWB is replaced.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
* U2 trouble has occurred. set value is output for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. pressed during outputting, the operation is terminated.

Default
Item Display Content Content SPD Setting range
value
AC TC CLEANING ROLLER+ Transfer cleaning roller output Print mode - 0 - 255 128
AD TC CLEANING ROLLER- Cleaning mode - 0 - 255 128

ADJ 2 Toner density control reference ADJ 3 Print image distortion, position,
value setting magnification ratio adjustment
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: (Manual adjustment)
* When developer is replaced.
CAUTION: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer 3-A Print image distortion manual adjustment
is replaced. Never execute it in the other cases. (LSU parallelism adjustment)
CAUTION: During execution of this adjustment, do not insert the This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
toner cartridge. * When the LSU unit is replaced.
1) Remove the toner cartridge. * When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit.
2) With the right door open, enter SIM25-2. This adjustment should be followed by:
3) Close the right door. 1) Enter the Sim.64-2 mode.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Set the conditions as shown below.
5) After [EXECUTE] key is highlighted, it is highlighted. The
Set
developing roller rotates, and the toner density sensor detects Item Display Item Description
value
toner density, and the output value is displayed.
A PRINT Used to specify the print pattern. 1
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the aver- PATTERN (* For details, refer to the following
age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set descriptions.)
(saved) as the reference toner density control value. B DOT1 Used to set the print dot number. (Self 1
However in case this work is performed under high tempera- print pattern: for m by n)
ture environment (with the humidity approximately 80% or C DOT2 Used to set the empty dot number. (Self 254
print pattern: for m by n)
more), this movement continues for five more minutes to stabi-
D DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 255
lize developer.
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation 3) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 X 17) paper in it by
is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight. changing the value of G.
This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is The grid pattern image is outputted.
completed or not. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
In case this adjustment stops before finish (by turning the The check pattern is printed out.
power off etc.), execute the adjustment again. 5) Check the printed image for any skew.
CAUTION: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the Measure the right angle level by using the printed cross pat-
adjustment result is not reflected. tern.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the 6) Fit the side of A3 (11 X 17) paper to the long side of the rectan-
operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the gle print pattern.
normal display.
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EC] is displayed, setting of
the reference toner density control value is not com-
Comparison line
pleted normally.

Error
Error name Detail of error 0.5mm or less
display
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level than 26, or sensor
control voltage level over 197
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 200, or sensor Direction A Direction B
control voltage level less than 49
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level: other than 120 +/- 5
6) Cancel SIM25-2.
7) Open the front cover and insert toner cartridge.
8) Close the front cover.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 5
7) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper and When the set value is increased, the main scanning direction
side of the rectangle print pattern. image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is
If the above distance is0.5mm or less, there is no need to increased. When the set value is decreased, the main scan-
adjust. ning direction image magnification ratio in the main scanning
If not, execute the following procedures. direction is decreased.
Repeat procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is
8) Loosen screws ① , ② and adjust the right side up and down by
obtained.
a direction slipping off and do screw flagging [Link] the
screw in order of ① , ② .
3-C Print image position (main scanning
<Adjustment procedure>
direction, sub scanning direction)
[Link] it slips off in A, send you to the (a) direction.
adjustment (print engine) (manual
[Link] it slips off in B, send you to the (b) direction.
adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases
* When LSU unit has been replaced or removed
* When paper tray has been replaced
* When paper tray section has been disassembled
* When manual feed tray has been replaced
* When manual feed tray has been disassembled
ĭ Ĭ * When duplex mode paper transport section has been disassem-
bled
* When registration roller section has been disassembled
* When U2 trouble has been occurred
* When PCU PWB has been replaced
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB has been replaced

9)

Check to insure the following item before execution of this adjust-

3-B Print image magnification ratio manual ment
adjustment (Main scanning direction) • ADJ3B Print image magnification ration adjustment (main scan-
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: ning direction) (manual adjustment) has been properly adjusted
* LSU (write) unit has been replaced. 1) Enter Sim 50-10 mode
* U2 trouble has occurred. 2) Set A4 (11”x8.5”) paper in the paper feed tray
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. 3) Select the paper feed tray set in step2) with scroll key
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 4) Tap [EXECUTE] key
Check pattern is printed out
1) Enter the Sim.50-10 mode.
5) check that the items below are in the range of the standard val-
2) Select A4 (11 X 8.5) paper.
ues
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The check pattern is printed out.
Z1 2.0mm
4) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240
 0.5mm.

X Y
4.0±1.0mm 2.0 5.0mm

Z2 2.0mm

Content Standard adjustment value

X Lead edge void area 4.0±1.0mm
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
Y Rear edge void area 2.0mm~5.0mm
5) Change the set value of set item A.
Z1 / Z2 FRONT/REAR void area Total 4.0±2.0mm
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
by 0.1mm.
steps

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 6
6) change setting value and tap [EXECUTE] key to print check
pattern. Repeat step3) – step6) until the condition of step5)is Z1 (2.0mm)
satisfied
When the set value is changed by 1 the shift distance is
changed by 0.1mm
Main scanning direction: setting value is increased, image
position is shifted to rear side
Sub scanning direction: setting value is increased, image posi-
tion is shifted to rear side of paper transport direction

Main scanning direction MAIN-MFT Manual tray

MAIN-CS1 Tray 1
MAIN-CS2 Tray 2
MAIN-CS3 Tray 3
MAIN-CS4 Tray 4
MAIN-LCC LCC
MAIN-ADU Back side of duplex
Sub scanning direction SUB-MFT Manual tray
SUB-CS1 Tray 1 Z2 (2.0mm)
SUB-CS2 Tray 2 Z1+Z2=4.0mm±2.0mm
SUB-CS3 Tray 3
SUB-CS4 Tray 4 7) Shift the paper feed tray paper guide position and the paper
SUB-LCC LCC feed tray base plate back and forth to adjust the off-center.
SUB-ADU Back side of duplex Adjust so that the adjustment pattern comes virtually to the
Main scanning direction MAIN-STD All tray center.
Sub scanning direction SUB-STD All tray
(No. 1 paper feed tray)
* Front frame side
MAIN-STD and SUB-STD are changed image position of all Loosen the paper guide fixing screw, and shift the paper guide
trays. position back and forth.

3-D Paper feed off-center manual adjustment

Paper guide
(No.1 - 4 paper feed unit in main unit)
(Mechanical adjustment)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When the paper feed tray section is replaced.
* When the paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When it can not be adjusted with ADJ 3-C.
1) Enter the Sim. 50-10 mode.
2) Select a paper feed source for an adjustment target with the
scroll button.
3) Set A4 (11 X 8.5) or A3 (11 X 17) paper on the paper feed tray
selected in the procedure 2). Paper guide fixing screw
ȚȸȑȸǬǤȉ‫ܭ׍‬ȓǹ
4) Enter 50 as default value of off-center adjustment, and press
[OK] button. * Rear frame side
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. After removing the protector, loosen the paper guide fixing
screw and shift the paper guide position back and forth.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
6) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
Paper guide
rect position. Protector
When the adjustment pattern is printed virtually at the center,
go to the procedure 10).
If not, go to the procedure 7).

Paper guide fixing screw

ȚȸȑȸǬǤȉ‫ܭ׍‬ȓǹ

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 7
 (No. 2 paper feed tray) When the adjustment value is increased, the image is shifted
* Front frame side to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, the image is shifted to the front frame side.
Loosen the paper guide fixing screw, and shift the paper guide
position back and forth. A change in the adjustment value by 1 corresponds to a shift
by about 0.1mm.
Paper guide 11) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
rect position.
Measure the void area sizes of the adjustment pattern on the
front edge and the rear edge, and check that the sizes satisfy
all the following conditions.

4mm±2mm (Z1+Z2)

X Y
4.0mm± More than 2mm,
Paper guide fixing screw
ȚȸȑȸǬǤȉ‫ܭ׍‬ȓǹ 1.0mm less than 5mm

* Rear frame side

Loosen the paper guide fixing screw, and shift the paper guide
position back and forth.

Paper guide fixing screw

ȚȸȑȸǬǤȉ‫ܭ׍‬ȓǹ

4mm±2mm (Z1+Z2)

Content Standard adjustment value

X Lead edge void area 4.0mm±1.0mm
Y Rear edge void area more than2mm, less than 5mm
Z1 / Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 4mm +/- 2mm less (Z1+Z2)
Paper guide Perform the procedures 10 and 11 until the above conditions
are satisfied.
(No. 3 paper feed tray / No. 4 paper feed tray)
Loosen the paper feed tray base plate fixing screw, and shift
the paper feed tray base plate position back and forth.

Paper feed tray

base plate fixing screw

Paper feed tray base plate

8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
9) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
rect position.
Perform the procedures 7 thru 9 until the adjustment pattern
comes virtually at the center.
10) When the adjustment pattern comes virtually to the center by
the adjustment, perform the fine adjustment with the simula-
tion.
Enter the adjustment value, and press [EXECUTE] button.
The adjustment pattern is printed.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 8
Sim. 50-10.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio 60 - 140 105
B MAIN-STD Combined correction value Standard correction amount (Off center direction) 1 - 99 46
C SUB-STD Standard correction amount (Paper feed direction) 1 - 99 47
D MAIN-SFT Print position correction Back surface correction (Off center direction) 0-3 0
E SUB-SFT Back surface correction (Paper transporting direction) 0-3 0
F MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment Manual paper feed 1 - 99 61
G MAIN-CS1 value Tray1 1 - 99 60
H MAIN-CS2 Tray2 1 - 99 58
I MAIN-CS3 Tray3 1 - 99 59
J MAIN-CS4 Tray4 1 - 99 58
K MAIN-LCC LCC 1 - 99 60
L MAIN-ADU ADU 1 - 99 57
M SUB-MFT Registration motor ON Manual paper feed 1 - 99 54
N SUB-CS1 timing adjustment Tray1 1 - 99 54
O SUB-CS2 Tray2 1 - 99 51
P SUB-CS3 Tray3 1 - 99 53
Q SUB-CS4 Tray4 1 - 99 50
R SUB-LC LCC 1 - 99 54
S SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 51
T SUB-HV-A Shifting amount value Heavy1,2 1 - 99 52
U SUB-HV-B Heavy3,4 1 - 99 56
V SUB-GLOSSY PAPER Gross 1 - 99 52
W SUB-OHP OHP 1 - 99 50
X MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
Y PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 3 (CS2)
CS1 Tray1 2
CS2 Tray2 3
CS3 Tray3 4
CS4 Tray4 5
LCC LCC 6
Z DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1
AA ALT FEED NORMAL Other tray selection Normal 0-1 0 0
ALL OTHER All trays except "PAPER" 1 (NORMAL)

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 9
 3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion side of the scanner unit B.
adjustment (OC mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
* When a distortion is produced in copy and scan images.

4-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this procedure, remove the document table
glass.
1) Remove the LED lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which
are fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the
scanner unit A from the drive wire.

4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
5) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.

2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.

4-B Scan image main scanning direction

distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)

If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

L L

L = 10mm

2) Set the test chart made in the procedure 1) on the document

table, and make a copy on A3 (11” X 17”) paper.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 10
3) Check for any distortion in the main scanning direction.
If the four angles of the copy image (rectangle) is right angles, ADJ 5 Scan image distortion
there is no distortion. (Work completed) adjustment (DSPF mode)
5-A DSPF level adjustment
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
* When a DSPF JAM is generated.
* When a skew is generated in the document feed operation.
* When there is a distortion (skew) in the scan image in the DSPF
unit.
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform
1) Close the DSPF unit and check the clearance between the
the following procedures.
projections in the front side and the rear side and the SPF
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand glass holding resin surface.
and right-hand side images distortions.
Cut copy paper in the longitudinal direction.
Lc Lc

Copy A Copy B

Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.
(The distortions are balanced.) If the above condition is satis-
fied, go to the procedure 6). If not, perform the following proce- 2) Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1mm or less
dures. and the clearance B is 0mm (in contact). If the above require-
5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front ment is not met, do step 3).
frame side.

1mm

0mm B

Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the

scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail. Repeat the proce-
dures 2) - 5) until the difference between the image distortions
(distortion balance) is deleted.
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side, change the overall height.
7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range. Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the dis-
tortion in the main scanning direction is in the specified range.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 11
3) Turn the height adjustment screw to adjust the DSPF front/rear
frame horizontal level. 5-B DSPF skew adjustment
(Front surface mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
L * The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Make an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
R Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.

A Paper pass direction

When the front frame side is higher (there is a clearance in B):

Turn the height adjustment screw R of the DSPF rear frame
clockwise. When the rear frame side is higher (clearance A is
more than 1mm): Turn the height adjustment screw L of the
DSPF rear frame counterclockwise. Repeat steps 2) to 3) until
an acceptable result is obtained.
4) After adjustments of A and B, check to insure that the projec- B
tion on the front right side is in contact with the glass surface of
the main unit.

2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF/RSPF duplex mode, and then check the image
for skews (Set in the DSPF/RSPF feed tray so that the mark
on the adjustment chart is at the edge).
* Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm

A B

a b

(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm

C D

c d

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 12
 [Check Method 2] 5) Adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw on the right
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction side of the DSPF rear frame.
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
1.0mm.

1.0

If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the

front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ 5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)".
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the
procedures of step 3).
3) Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments. 5-C DSPF skew adjustment
(Back surface mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
ĭ * The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
Ĭ 1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.

A Paper pass direction

4) Open the DSPF unit and loosen the screw.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 13
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17") 4) Turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw on the CCD unit to
paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for adjust.
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
* Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]

(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm

A B

a b A B

(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm

C D
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment
c d
6-A Image focus adjustment (Document table
[Check Method 2] mode/DSPF front surface mode)
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within * The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
1.0mm. * The CCD unit has been replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
1.0 ning direction is not properly adjusted.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
1) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
A Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.

If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the

front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ 5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)".
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the
procedures of step 3) or later.
3) Open the upper door and remove the adjustment cover.

4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.

Jump to the copy mode, and make a copy.
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
(Example)
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the
copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 14
 11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
100mm scale
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110 than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
1.0mm scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
Copy image in procedure 9).
(1mm (1%)
10 20 90 100 110
shorter than
the original)

If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the B

following procedures.
7) Remove the document table glass.
8) Remove the dark box cover.
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below. A

12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 +/-
0.8%, repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is
satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 +/- 0.8%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.

6-B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back

surface mode)
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is * When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
replaced. * When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws. adjusted.
* When the DSPF unit is removed.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
is satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3) Open the door. Remove the screws and transport PG upper.

* Never loosen the screws marked with X.

If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 15
4) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
CCD unit base as shown below. tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 +/- 0.8%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.

ADJ 7 Scan image magnification ratio

adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of
5) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When the copy image magnification ratio in the sub scanning
direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.

7-A Main scanning direction image

* Never loosen the screws marked with 5. magnification ratio adjustment (Manual
Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD adjustment) (Document table mode)
unit base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
changed, it cannot be corrected through on-site adjust- below.
ments. Solving such a problem requires the replacement of
the entire scanner unit.
6) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position. When the copy
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

image is longer than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the
direction B. When the copy image is shorter than the original
scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A. One scale of mark-
off line corresponds to 0.2%. At that time, fix the CCD unit so
that it is in parallel with the scale on the front and the rear side
of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 4).

2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Jump to the copy mode, and make a copy.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 +/- 0.8%). If the copy magnification ratio is within
the specified range (100 +/- 1.0%), the adjustment is com-
pleted. If the copy magnification ratio is not within the specified
range, perform the following procedure.
A 5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
B tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
is within the specified range (100 +/- 0.8%).

7) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.

If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 +/-
0.8%, repeat the procedures of 4) - 6) until the condition is sat-
isfied.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 16
7-B Sub scanning direction image 7-C Main scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Manual magnification ratio adjustment (Manual
adjustment) (Document table mode) adjustment)
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure (DSPF mode)
below. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched.
* When the DSPF is disassembled.
a. Adjustment procedures
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
ment tray of the DSPF/RSPF. The adjustment chart is pre-
pared by the following procedures. Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper,
and put marks on both sides and both surfaces of the paper at
10mm from each edge.

Paper pass direction

A4 size
2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Jump to the copy mode, and make a copy.
(Both the front surface
(Original dimension - Copy dimension) and the back surface)
Copy magnifi- 10mm 10mm
cation ratio 100%
Original dimension
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
(Example 1) images.
Copy A
10 20 90 100 110
(Shorter than
the original)
original

Scale copy
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
10 50 100 150 200 250

10 50 100 150 200 250

(Example 2)
Copy B 4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than formula:
the original)
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
range (100 +/- 0.8%). If the copy magnification ratio is within If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
the specified range (100 +/- 0.8%), the adjustment is com- (100  0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
pleted. If the copy magnification ratio is not within the specified
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
range, perform the following procedure.
cedures.
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased. When the
the scroll key.
adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio
is changed by about 0.1%. SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Front surface)
SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
(Back surface)
within the specified range (100 +/- 0.8%).
7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%.
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 7) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 17
1 : ‘19/March.
NOTE: When jump to the normal operation mode, under this state, 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
copy check can be normally performed. When the system 6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
key is pressed, the machine returns to the simulation
mode. SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Front surface/Back surface) 1
7-D Sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Manual 7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-
key, and press [OK] key.
adjustment) (DSPF mode)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.01%.
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. Repeat the procedures of 1) - 7) until a satisfactory result is
* When U2 trouble occurs. obtained.
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched.
* When the DSPF is disassembled.
a. Adjustment procedures
ADJ 8 Print/scan image off-center,
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
lead edge position adjustment
ment tray of the DSPF. The adjustment chart is prepared by (Manual adjustment)
the following procedures. Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of
marks on both sides and both surfaces of the paper at 10mm
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result.
from each edge.

8-A Scan image off-center adjustment

10mm (Document table mode)
Paper pass direction This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
A4 size * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the
10mm adjustment mode (document table).

2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.

3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
images.
A
10
50

A=B
100
10

original
150
50

B
200
100

copy
150

2) Check the copy image center position.

If A' - B' = 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
200

4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following

formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%) A'
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
(100 +/- 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment. A' - B' = 1.0mm
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro- (100%)
cedures.
B'

If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 18
3) Enter the SIM 50-12 mode. 3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the

 front surface and the back surface of the copy paper.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖2&
$˖
˷̚˹
 %˖ ˖63) 6,'(

&˖ ˖63) 6,'( original copy

a

2. b

4) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.

5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
The entered value is set. When the set value is increased, the
If the difference is within the range of 0  2.7mmm there is no
main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by
need to perform the adjustment. If the adjustment is required,
0.1mm.
perform the following procedures.
6) Jump to the copy mode and make a copy. Repeat the proce-
4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode.
dures of 2) - 6) until the above condition is satisfied.
5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
8-B Scan image off-center adjustment (SIM50-12)
(DSPF mode) SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode

* When the scan control PWB is replaced. (SIM50-6)

* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced. 6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
* When U2 trouble occurs. (Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
* When the DSPF section is disassembled. (When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is
* When the DSPF unit is replaced. shifted to the rear.) Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a sat-
isfactory result is obtained.
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ 8A
Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode)
must have been properly adjusted.
a. Adjustment procedures
ADJ 9 Print/scan image lead edge
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
position, off-center,
Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur- magnification ratio adjustment
face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport (Automatic adjustment)
direction.
The following adjustment items can be automatically performed
with Sim. 50-28.
Paper transport direction
* ADJ 3B Print image magnification ratio manual adjustment (Main
Front surface Back surface scanning direction)
* ADJ 3C Print image lead edge void area manual adjustment/
Front-rear void area, rear edge void area manual adjustment
Automatic adjustment items of Sim. 50-28 and the correspond-
ing manual adjustment items, simulation

Corresponding manual
Automatic adjustment items
adjustment items, simulation
BK-MAG/STD ADJ (Corresponding to ADJ3B)
SETUP/PRINT ADJ (Corresponding to ADJ3C)
1) Select an adjustment item with the menu button.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
Draw a line at the center of the
front surface and the back surface 3) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
of paper in parallel with the paper 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
transport direction.
5) Press [OK] key.
2) Set the adjustment chart to the DSPF.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 19
(Sim 50-28 mode menu)
Standard image loss, void area
Adjust
Section Adjustment item ment LV : Lead edge void area 4.0 +/- 1.0mm
menu TV : Rear edge void area 2.0- 5.0mm
Engine - Main scanning direction print BK-MAG/ LV+TV : 8mm or less
image magnification ratio STD ADJ FV+RV: FRONT/REAR void area 4.0 +/- 2.0mm
adjustment LIL : Lead edge image loss 4.0 +/- 1.0mm
MFT Print image lead edge SETUP/
position adjustment PRINT
Print image off-center ADJ
adjustment
CS1,2,3,4 Print image lead edge
position adjustment
Print image off-center
adjustment
ADU Print image lead edge
position adjustment
Print image off-center
adjustment
LCC Print image lead edge
position adjustment
Print image off-center
adjustment

ADJ 10 Image position, image loss,

and void area adjustment
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown below.
Set the scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
10-A Copy mode image loss void area and the scale tip is in close contact with the document guide
adjustment (Document table mode) plate.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Place white paper on the document table so that the scale tip
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. can be seen.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the LSU is replace or removed.
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. 10

* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.

* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
NOTE:
Before execution of this adjustment, the following adjustment must
have been completed:
* ADJ3A Print image distortion adjustment (LSU parallelism
adjustment)
* ADJ3B Print image magnification ratio manual adjustment (Main
2) Enter the Sim. 50-1 mode.
scanning direction)
3) Set the items RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
* ADJ3C Print image lead edge void area manual adjustment/
Front-rear void area, rear edge void area manual adjustment Setting
Item Display/Item Content Default
range
Lead edge A RRCA Document lead 10 - 99 50
adjustment (ADJUSTM edge reference
value ENT) position (OC)
Void B DEN-B Print rear edge void 1 - 99 35
quantity (VOID) quantity adjustment
setting C FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 35
REAR quantity adjustment
(VOID)

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 20
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment
10-B Document scan position adjustment
Shift to the copy mode and make a copy at 100% in the docu-
ment table mode (Scanner scanning position adjustment
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper the lead edge when scanning the front surface in the
image from 4.0mm is not copied in 100% copy scale DSPF mode)
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
Repeat the above steps until satisfactory result is obtained * The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.
Scale image 4.0mm position * The scan control PWB has been replaced.
Paper lead * The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
edge * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
 * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
100% * When the DSPF section is disassembled.
5mm 10mm
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
This adjustment is used to adjust the scanner reading position
5) Image loss adjustment when scanning the front surface in the DSPF mode.
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the If this adjustment is improper, the scanner stop position is shifted to
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state, if it is not in the specified position, and a shade of the document table may be
the below standard state or when it is set to a desired value, copied in the lead edge section of the scan image in the DSPF
change these adjustment items (front surface) mode.
(Note)
Paper lead edge
After completion of this adjustment, be sure to perform the “ADJ9C
Copy image position and image loss adjustment (manual adjust-
ment) (DSPF mode)”.
Copy area  (The value of "SIDE2" in Sim. 50-6 is adjusted.)
Make a copy of white paper in the DSPF (front surface) mode, and
check to confirm that no shade is printed in the lead edge section of
1 2 3 4 the copy image.
5mm 10mm

Void area: 4.0mm Image loss: 4.0mm Papar lead edge

Standard
Item / Setting Default Image area
Content adjustment
Display range value
value
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0~99 40 4.0±1.0mm
adjustment image loss
SIDE Side image 0~99 20 2.0±1.0mm Shadow image of SPF
loss
When the value is increases the image loss is increased
When the value is decreased the image loss is decreased
When the value is changed by 1 the void area is changed by If the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image con-
0.1mm tains a shadow of the original table, then do the following steps.
(In the case of the manual adjustment)
1) Enter the Sim. 53-8 mode.
2) Press the manual button to select the manual mode.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner reading
position when scanning the front surface in the DSPF mode is
shifted further from the scanner home position.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the scanner read-
ing position when scanning the front surface in the DSPF
mode is shifted by 0.1mm.
4) Select the copy mode, and check the adjustment result.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 21
 2) Enter Sim 50-6 mode
10-C Copy image position and image loss
adjustment (manual adjustment) (DSPF Item / Display Content
Setting Default
mode) range value
A SIDE1 Front surface document 1~99 50
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases scan position (CCD)
* When SCN-Mother PWB has been replaced B SIDE2 Back surface document 1~99 50
* When EEPROM on the SCN-Mother PWB has been replaced scan position (CCD)
C LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0~99 20
* When scanner (reading) section has been disassembled
(SIDE1) image loss amount
* When scanner (reading) unit has been replaced D FRONT_REAR Front surface side image 0~99 20
* When U2 trouble has been occurred (SIDE1) loss amount
* When DSPF section has been disassembled E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0~99 40
(SIDE1) image loss amount
* When DSPF unit has been replaced
F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0~99 40
1) Make adjustment chart (SIDE2) image loss amount
Use A4 (11”x8.5”) paper and draw arrow marks vertically and G FRONT_REAR Back surface side image 0~99 20
horizontally on the front and back surface (SIDE2) loss amount
At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge, H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 0~99 20
(SIDE2) image loss amount
the front end, the rear end as well as the identification marks of
the front surface and the back surface * Item A, B: When the value is increased the scan timing is
delayed
* ItemC~H: When the value is increased the image loss is
R Front surface increased
(#%'

Lead edge image loss adjustment

1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment value (LEAD EDGE
L T SIDE1/SIDE2) on the front surface and the back surface to the
following values
When the set value is increased the lead edge image loss is
Put increased
the position (Standard set value)
marks. LEAD EDGE(SIDE1): 20 Lead edge image loss set value
F
(front surface)
Draw arrows. LEAD EDGE(SIDE2): 40 Lead edge image loss set value
(back surface)
4 Back surface 2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to
$#%-
confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 4.0±1.0mm on
the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead edge
must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge
L 6

Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be

Put aligned with the image lead edge.
the position
marks.
F

Draw arrows.

Copy image

Image loss
4.0±1.0 mm

If above condition is not satisfied perform the following step

3) Enter value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10 key and tap [OK] key
Adjust that the paper lead edge is aligned with the presumed
image lead edge
SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment
SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased the print image posi-
tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper
Repeat the step2) to 3) until satisfactory result is contained

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 22
Rear edge image loss adjustment
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to
confirm that rear edge image loss is 2.0?5.0mm on the front
surface and the back surface

Paper rear edge

Copy image

Image loss 2.0 - 5.0 mm

If the above condition is not satisfied perform the following step

2) Enter value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2) with 10 key and
tap [OK] key
TRAIL EDGE(SIDE1): Rear edge image loss adjustment value
(front surface)
TRAIL EDGE(SIDE2): Rea edge image loss adjustment value
(back surface)
When the adjustment value is increased the rear edge image
loss is increased
Repeat the step1) to 2) until satisfactory result is obtained
Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to
confirm that the image loss on the front frame side and the rear
frame side are 2.0±2.0mm on the front surface and the back
surface

Paper F Image loss

side edge 2.0 ± 2.0 mm

Copy image

Copy image

Paper R Image loss

side edge 2.0 ± 2.0 mm

If the above condition is not satisfied perform the following step

2) Enter the value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE1) / FRONTTRAIL
EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2) with 10 key and tap [OK] key
TRAIL EDGE(SIDE1): Front/rear image loss adjustment value
(front surface)
TRAIL EDGE(SIDE2): Front/rear image loss adjustment value
(back surface)
When the value is increased the front/rear image loss is
increased
Repeat the step1) to 2) until satisfactory result is obtained

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 23
 Write arrow marks on the four sides of the front surface and
10-D Image send mode, image loss adjustment the back surface.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 2) Scan the chart made in the procedure 1) by the SCAN to USB
* When shading is copied on the scanned image in the image send mode, SCAN to PC mode, and SCAN to e-MAIL mode in the
mode. following modes.
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced. * Original table mode
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced. * DSPF mode (Duplex mode)
* The scan control PWB has been replaced. 3) Open the scanned image file on PC, and check every edge of
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. the arrow marks to confirm that the image loss is "0" .
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled. (If there is no void on the arrow marks, it is judged that the
* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced. image loss is "0.")
* U2 trouble has occurred. If the above conditions are not satisfied, perform the following
procedure.
* When the DSPF section is disassembled.
4) Enter the Sim. 50-27 mode.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
5) Press [SCANNER] button, and select the image send mode
1) Use A3 (11X17) paper and make a chart shown below.
and the image loss adjustment mode.

6) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button

Display/Item Content Setting range Default

Image send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
mode image B quantity setting FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
loss adjustment C OC TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
(Except for FAX, D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
copy mode) quantity setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1)
E Front surface side image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
H quantity setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)

7) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
becomes greater. (Change rate for a change in the adjustment
value: 0.1mm/step)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 24
 1) Use A3 (11 X 17) paper to make a chart as shown below:
10-E FAX send mode image loss adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When a shade is copied on the scanned image in the FAX send
mode.
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The scan control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the DSPF section is disassembled.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
NOTE:
Normally the adjustment values are default values and there is no Write arrow marks on the four sides of the front surface and
need to adjust them. When, however, an image defect or a shade is the back surface.
generated on the received FAX, this adjustment must be per-
2) Send FAX of the chart image made in the procedure 1) in the
formed.
following modes.
However, check the printable reproduction area on the receiving
* Original table mode
FAX side and the setting conditions before performing this adjust-
ment. * DSPF mode (Duplex mode)
3) Check the received FAX image to confirm that the image loss
is "0" at every edge of the arrow marks.
(If there is no edge defect on the arrow marks, it is judged that
the image loss is "0.")
If the above conditions are not satisfied, perform the following
procedure.
4) Press FAX button to select the FAX send mode and the image
loss adjustment mode.

5) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button

Display/Item Content Setting range Default

FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 30 (3mm)
mode image B quantity setting FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss quantity setting 0-100 20 (2mm)
loss C OC TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 20 (2mm)
adjustment D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 20 (2mm)
E quantity setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss quantity setting 0-100 20 (2mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 30 (3mm)
H quantity setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss quantity setting 0-100 20 (2mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 20 (2mm)
6) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
becomes greater.
(Change rate for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 25
 (3) Copy gray balance and density check
ADJ 11 Gray balance/density NOTE: Before checking the copy gray balance and density, be
adjustment sure to execute the following jobs.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
(1) Note before execution of the gray balance/density
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
adjustment
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
* Requisite conditions before execution of the gray balance/den-
sity adjustment Method 1
Before execution of the gray balance/density adjustment, check Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ), and check
to insure that the adjustments which affect the gray balance/den- that they are proper.
sity have been completed properly. Note for checking the density
(Though the following items affect the gray balance/density, To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
there is no need to adjust them frequently. When, however, a and the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
trouble occurs, they must be checked and adjusted.) 0326FC11). Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/
1) The following items must be adjusted properly. Printed Photo mode (Manual).
In addition, all the gray balance adjustments in the user adjustment
Job
Adjustment item Sim
mode must be set to the default (center).
No
Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
ADJ High voltage ADJ Main charger grid voltage 8-2
1 value 1A adjustment In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
adjustment ADJ Developing bias voltage 8-1 the following conditions.
1B adjustment
ADJ Transfer current and voltage 8-6 (Black-and-white copy)
1C adjustment Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
ADJ Developing unit ADJ Developing doctor gap SHARP GRAY CHART
2 adjustment 2A adjustment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

ADJ Developing roller main pole

2B position adjustment
ADJ Toner density control reference 25-2
2C value setting
ADJ Scan image focus adjustment 48-1 Patch 3 is copied.

6 Patch 1 is not copied.

ADJ Gray balance/ ADJ Scanner calibration 63-3

11 density 11A
adjustment
Note for the gray balance/density check and adjustments
When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in the
automatic gray balance adjustment procedures, place 5 sheets of
white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to prevent back
copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as far as possible.
(2) Relationship between the servicing job contents and the
gray balance/density check and adjustment
Note that the jobs before and after execution of the gray balance/
density check and adjustment depend on the machine status and
the servicing conditions.
Follow the flowchart of the gray balance/density adjustment proce-
dures depending on the actual conditions.
There are following four, major cases.
1) When installing (When a printer option is installed)
2) When a periodic maintenance is performed.
3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
(When a consumable part is replaced.)
4) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.
(Without replacement of a consumable part)

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 26
Monochrome copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)

Display/Item Adjustment items

1 There are 12 void areas. ADJ3-A to C Sim50-10
2 The resolution of 5.0 (5 points) can be Check the dirt of the OC glass
seen. Clean the OC glass/mirror of the
scanner
3 The color difference in gray balance ADJ11-B ① Sim61-11
between the F and R sides is not so ADJ11-C Sim46-74
great. Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment
4 There are no white and black streaks. Clean the mirror of the LSU/Main
Charger/ the mirror of the scanner
5 The background density is not so light. ADJ11-C Sim46-74
Copy/Printer gray balance and density adjustment
6 The black low-density gradation is ADJ11-C Sim46-74
copied slightly. Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment

Void Void

Resolution Resolution

Density difference between the F and the R sides.

No white and black streaks

Resolution

Void Void

Low-density gradation

Background density

Resolution Resolution

Void Void

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 27
(4) Printer gray balance/density check (2) Adjustment step
NOTE: Before checking the copy gray balance and the density, be 1) Set the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) to the
sure to execute the following procedures in advance. reference position on the left rear frame side of the document
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) table
forcibly. (SIM 44-6) Set the chart in order that the arrow marks is placed on the left
* The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26) side
Method 1
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.

Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed.

The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.

11-A Scanner calibration

11-A (1) Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)

(document table mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases
* When CCD unit has been replaced
* When U2 trouble has been occurred
* When SCN-Mother PWB has been replaced
* When EEPROM on the SCN-Mother PWB has been replaced
(1) Note before adjustment
• Check that the table glass, No 1, 2, 3 mirror and the lens surface
are free from dirt and dust (when there is some dirt or dust clean
with ethanol alcohol) If the scanner adjustment chart is not available, execute Sim
63-5 to set the CCD gamma to the default. In this case, how-
• Check to confirm that the patches arrays of the scanner adjust-
ever the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with the
ment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) is free from dirt and scratch. If it
adjustment method using the scanner adjustment chart
is dirt, clear it. If it is scratched or streaked, replace with new one
2) Enter Sim 63-3 mode and tap [EXECUTE] key
Automatic operation is started during the adjustment [EXE-
CUTE] is highlighted, after completion of the adjustment [EXE-
Since the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) is easily CUTE] returns to the normal display
discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and
temperature, put it in a bag

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 28
11-A (2) Shading adjustment (calibration) (DSPF 11-A (3) Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)
mode) (DSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases This adjustment must be performed in the following cases
* When DSPF CCD unit has been replaced * When DSPF CCD unit has been replaced
* When U2 trouble has been occurred * When U2 trouble has been occurred
* When DSPF CNT PWB has been replaced * When DSPF CNT PWB has been replaced
(1) Note before adjustment (1) Note before adjustment
• Check that DSPF scanner glass, mirrors and the lens surface are * Check that DSPF scanner glass, mirrors and the lens surface are
free from dirt and dust (when there is some dirt or dust clean with free from dirt and dust (when there is some dirt or dust clean with
ethanol alcohol) ethanol alcohol)
(2) Adjustment step * Check to confirm that the patches arrays of the scanner adjust-
ment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) is free from dirt and scratch. If it
1) Open DSPF original scanner section, insert the shading
is dirt, clear it. If it is scratched or streaked, replace with new one
adjustment sheet (UKOG-0333FCZZ) and close DSPF original
scanning section

Since the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) is easily

discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and
temperature, put it in a bag

Insert the shading adjustment sheet along the rear edge frame
and set it in order that the rear edge of the shading adjustment
sheet is placed to the base of the actuator

(2) Adjustment step

1) Set the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) to the
paper feed tray of DSPF face down

2) Enter Sim 63-2 mode

3) Tap [DSPF SHADING] [EXECUTE] key
Shading adjustment starts

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 29
 If the scanner adjustment chart is not available, execute Sim
63-5 to set the CCD gamma to the default. In this case, how-
ever the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with the
adjustment method using the scanner adjustment chart
2) Enter Sim 63-3 mode and tap [DSPF] [EXECUTE] key
Automatic operation is started during the adjustment [EXE-
CUTE] is highlighted, after completion of the adjustment [EXE-
CUTE] returns to the normal display

11-B FR density variation correction

Make sure followings are confirmed prior to the adjustment
* Main charger unevenness has not been occurred
* Paper tray with A4 (11”x8.5”) paper is available
* Auto correction of FR density unevenness clear the correction
value in ADJ11B(2) FR density unevenness. Do not execute auto
correction if you maintain the manual correction value
6) Tap [RETRY] key and repeat the steps3) to 5) until satisfied
result is obtained
Execute Sim 61-13 if any one of DV unit, Drum process unit, trans-
fer roller and LSU unit has been replaced
Execute Sim 61-13 to clear auto/manual correction value to
11-B (1) FR density unevenness automatic default setting
correction 7) Execute Sim 46-74 (copy/printer gray balance adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases after completing all the adjustments
* Density unevenness toward main scanning direction has been
observed 11-B (2) FR density unevenness visual
1) Enter Sim 61-11 mode inspection correction
2) Tap [AUTO CORRECTION] key This adjustment must be performed in the following cases
Tap [DATA] key to confirm present auto correction value * Density unevenness toward main scanning direction has been
3) Select the density level to adjust and tap [EXECUTE] key observed
Adjustment pattern is printed 1) Enter Sim 61-12 mode
4) Place the adjustment pattern in the step3) and the arrows on 2) Tap [VISUAL INSPECTION] key
the adjustment pattern should be placed on left side (A4/LTR Tap [DATA] key to confirm present manual correction value
direction) on the document table and tap [EXECUTE] key and 3) Select density level to adjust and tap [EXECUTE] key
put 5 blank sheets on top of the adjustment pattern Adjustment pattern is printed
4) Check the adjustment pattern in the step3)
Select either [5POINT CORRECTION] or [32POINT COR-
RECTION] enter adjustment value and tap [EXECUTE] key
Larger the adjustment value the higher the density and vice
versa

5) After scanning the adjustment pattern the data is updated and

the adjustment result pattern is printed automatically. Check
whether density on front and rear side machine

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 30
5) Adjustment result pattern is printed automatically
Check whether density on front and rear side machine

6) After step5) if you furthermore require this adjustment, tap

[RETRY] key and repeat the step3) to 5)

Execute Sim 61-13 to clear auto/manual correction value to

default setting
7) Execute Sim 46-74 (copy/printer gray balance adjustment)
after completing all the adjustments

11-C Copy/Printer gray balance and density

adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(Basic adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
a. General
SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy gray balance and
density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer gray bal-
ance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
Since it is desirable to perform the copy gray balance adjustment
(automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer gray balance
and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
this mode.
This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
matic copy gray balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
the automatic printer gray balance and density adjustment (SIM67-
24). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
each of the auto copy/printer gray balance and the density adjust-
ment individually.
The gray balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
adjust the density automatically.
When this adjustment is executed, the gray balance adjustments of
all the copy/printer modes are revised.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 31
b. Adjustment procedures
(Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman)

Copy/printer gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-74) procedure flowchart

Start

Execute ADJ11B Copy gray balance and density/Printer gray balance and density
adjustment (automatic adjustment). (SIM46-74)

(Copy gray balance and density adjustment (automatic adjustment))

Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection)

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.)

Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*3)

(Printer gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment))

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.)

Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*3)

Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone image correction is automatically
performed.)

Press [EXECUTE] key. (Execute the halftone image correction.)

Cancel SIM46-74.

Check the copy gray balance and density adjustment result.

Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text

/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy gray balance and density.

Use SIM46-16 to print the gray balance check pattern, and check the patch gray *1:
balance and density. If the initial setting of the
halftone image correction is
not properly adjusted,
satisfactory gray balance and
Execute ADJ11D(2) (Copy gray balance and density cannot be obtained. In
Are the gray balance and density NO
density adjustment) (Manual adjustment). this case, check the print
at the specified level? engine for any problems.
(SIM46-16/44-21) (*2)
*2:
YES If satisfactory gray balance and
density are not obtained with
ADJ11D(2) (Copy gray balance
Check the printer gray balance and density adjustment result with the self print and density adjustment) (Manual
check pattern. adjustment) (SIM46-16/44-21),
check the print engine for any
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print problems.
check pattern, and check the printer
gray balance and density. *3:
If there is any streak or unclear
copy on the printed check
pattern, check the print engine
Execute ADJ11F(2) (Printer gray balance for any problems.
Are the gray balance and density NO
adjustment) (Manual adjustment).
at the specified level?
(SIM67-25)

YES

End

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 32
1) Enter the SIM46-74 mode. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The copy gray balance adjustment is automatically executed
The high density process control is performed, and the copy and prints the gray balance check patch image.
gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
(A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.) tern, check the print engine for any problems.

Low High
density density

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q

3) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
procedure 2) on the document table. The printer gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed
Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the out. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the gray patch selected.)
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed gray patch image
(adjustment pattern).

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 33
6) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the 8) The initial setting menu of the halftone image correction is dis-
procedure 5) on the document table. played. Press [OK] key.
Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the The initial setting of the halftone image correction is per-
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the gray patch formed.
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time, 9) Wait until [EXECUTE] key is displayed. When it is displayed,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed gray patch image press it.
(adjustment pattern).
The halftone image correction is performed.
10) When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the
adjustment operation is completed.
Cancel SIM46-74.
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes valid only when the both
adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer mode are
completed.
For example, if the copy gray balance adjustment (auto-
matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is can-
celed, the adjustment result is invalid.

11) Check the copy gray balance and density.

(Refer to the item of the copy gray balance and density check.)
When the gray balance and the density are unsatisfactory after
the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in pro-
cedure 4), execute the manual gray balance adjustment
(ADJ11D (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual gray balance adjustment (ADJ
11D (2)).
12) Check the printer gray balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the printer gray balance and density
check.)
If a satisfactory result on the gray balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 11F (2)).
When the gray balance is customized with the manual gray
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to exe-
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
request and the gray balance is registered as the service tar-
obtained, perform the manual gray balance adjustment (ADJ
get with SIM 67-27, if the gray balance is adjusted to that gray
11F (2)).
balance, select the [SERVICE] target.
If the gray balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even
The printer gray balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
performed and the gray balance check patch image is printed
may be another cause.
out.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
tern, check the print engine for any problems.

11-D Copy quality adjustment (Basic adjustment)

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
.QYFGPUKV[ *KIJFGPUKV[
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
Უ6JGOCZFGPUKV[UGEVKQPKUPQVDNWTTGF * The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
Უ2CVEJ#QT$KUXGT[UNKIJN[EQRKGF * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
Უȷ6JGRCVEJFGPUKV[KUKFGPVKECNDGVYGGPRCVEJGUQTPQVTGXGTUGF
ȷ6JGRCVEJFGPUKV[KUEJCPIGFITCFWCNN[

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 34
11-D (1)
Copy gray balance and density adjustment
(Automatic adjustment)
a. General
The gray balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density automatically.
When this adjustment is executed, the gray balance adjustments of
all the copy modes are revised.

There are following two modes in the auto gray balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24 is
used.)
2) Auto gray balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The gray balance target is the service target.)
The auto gray balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the copy gray balance is lost for some reason, the user can
use this gray balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
work effectively.
If the machine condition is dramatically changed, a fatal prob-
lem occurs, or the normal gray targets cannot be obtained, ser-
vice must recalibrate the machine to specification.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 35
b. Adjustment procedure
(Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman)

Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-24) procedure flowchart

Start

Execute ADJ11D(1) Copy gray balance and density adjustment

(automatic adjustment).

Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.

(Automatic selection)

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.

And press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is
automatically performed to print the check pattern.)

Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*2)

Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the halftone image correction
is automatically performed. (*1)

Cancel SIM46-24

Check the gray balance and density adjustment result.

Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a

copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy gray bal-
ance and density.

Use SIM46-16 to print the gray balance check pattern, and check the
patch gray balance and density in the process gray. (If the gray bal-
ance is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)

Check that the initial setting of the halftone image correction was properly
performed. (*1)

Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction.

(SIM44-21)

Execute the halftone image correction. (SIM44-26) *1:

If the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is not properly made, satisfactory
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) gray balance and density cannot be
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check obtained. In this case, check the print engine
the gray balance and density. for any problems.
*2:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the
printed check pattern, check the print engine
NO Are the gray balance and den- for any problems.
sity at the satisfactory level?

YES

End

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 36
1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is The copy gray balance adjustment is automatically executed
automatically selected.) to print the gray balance check patch image. Wait until the
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.

Low High
density density

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q

3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in pro- 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
cedure 2) on the document table. According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the
Place the printed patch image (adjustment pattern) paper on halftone image correction is performed.
the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are on NOTE:
the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
image (adjustment pattern) paper.
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
played. This operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
6) Check the gray balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the copy gray balance and density check.)
7) Use SIM44-26 to execute the halftone image correction.
(Forcible execution)
Enter the SIM44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
8) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
the copy gray balance and density. (Refer to the item of the
copy gray balance and density check.)
If the copy gray balance and density are not satisfactory, per-
form the following procedures.
9) Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
10) Execute the halftone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)
11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
the copy gray balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy
gray balance and density check.)
Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy gray
balance and density are not in the specified range, there may be
another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 37
When the gray balance and the density are unsatisfactory after the
automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in procedure
4), execute the manual adjustment (SIM46-16)(ADJ11D (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to execute
the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not obtained,
perform the manual gray balance adjustment (ADJ 11D(2)).

If the gray balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even

after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

11-D (2) Copy gray balance and density

adjustment (manual adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cass
* When gamma in copy mode needs to be changed
* When user has been requested
[Link]
The gray balance adjustment (manual adjustment) is used to adjust
the copy density. This is used at the following situation. When the
result of auto adjustment described above is not existing within the
range of reference when there is request from the user for chang-
ing (customizing) the gray balance
1) Enter Sim 46-16 mode
2) Select density level with scroll key

Density Setting Default

Item / Display
level range value
A POINT1 Point 1 1~999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 1~999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1~999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1~999 500
E POINT5 Point 5 1~999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1~999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1~999 500
H POINT8 Point 8 1~999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1~999 500
J POINT10 Point 10 1~999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1~999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1~999 500
M POINT13 Point 13 1~999 500
N POINT14 Point 14 1~999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1~999 500
P POINT16 Point 16 1~999 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 1~999 500
3) Enter the value with 10 key and tap [OK] key
When the value is increased the density is increased when the
value is decreased the density is decreased
When the arrow key is tapped the densities are collectively
adjusted. That is all the density levels (points) from the low
density point to the high density point can be adjusted collec-
tively
When tap [EXECUTE] key the adjustment pattern is printed.
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
returning to this printed adjustment pattern. However it is more
practical to make a copy and check it
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result
Shift simulation mode and the normal copy mode alternately
and adjust and check the adjustment result
Repeat shifting the simulation mode and normal copy mode
and changing the adjustment value and checking the copy until
satisfactory result is obtained

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 38
11-E Copy / Image send / FAX image quality
adjustment (Individual adjustment)
a. General
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the basic adjust-
ments ADJ 11C and ADJ 11D or there is a request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this adjustment.
In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.

Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE

Monochrome Monochrome
Color mode
mode mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-02 Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each monochrome copy mode)   - - - - - -
(separately for the low-density area and the high-density area) (No need to
adjust normally)
46-04 Color image send mode image density adjustment (for each mode) (No - -   - - - -
need to adjust normally)
46-05 Monochrome image send mode image density adjustment (for each mode) - - - -   - -
(No need to adjust normally)
46-08 Image send mode RGB gray balance adjustment (separately for the low- - -   - - - -
density area and the high-density area) (No need to adjust normally)
46-09 DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment        -
(No need to adjust normally)
46-10 Copy gray balance, gamma adjustment (for each copy mode) (No need to   - - - - - -
adjust normally)
46-16 Monochrome copy density, gamma adjustment (for each monochrome   - - - - - -
copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
46-19 Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode document density  - - -  -  -
scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
46-23 Copy high density image density reproduction setting   - - - - - -
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
46-24 Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)   - - - - - -
46-32 Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the  - - -  -  -
automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background density adjustment in the
scanning section)
46-37 Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document reproduction   - -    
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-39 FAX send image sharpness adjustment - - - - - -  -
46-40 FAX send image density adjustment - - - - - -  -
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)
46-41 FAX send image density adjustment (Normal text mode) - - - - - -  -
46-42 FAX send image density adjustment (Fine text mode) - - - - - -  -
46-43 FAX send image density adjustment (Super fine mode) - - - - - -  -
46-44 FAX send image density adjustment (Ultra fine mode) - - - - - -  -
46-45 FAX send image density adjustment (600dpi mode) - - - - - -  -
46-46 FAX send image density adjustment (RGB_RIP) - - - - - -  -
46-47 Copy image, image send image, FAX send image (JPEG) compression        
ratio setting (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
46-48 Copy output resolution setting   - - - - - -
46-51 Gamma manual adjustment for the copy mode heavy paper and the image   - - - - - -
process mode (dither) (No need to adjust normally)
46-52 Gamma default setting for the copy mode heavy paper and the image   - - - - - -
process mode (dither)
46-54 Copy gamma, gray balance adjustment for each dither (Automatic   - - - - - -
adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
46-55 Dropout color setting - - - - -  - -
46-60 Color (Scan) mode sharpness adjustment (No need to adjust normally) - -  - - - - 
46-61 Area separation recognition level adjustment (No need to adjust normally)       - -
46-62 ACS, area separation, background image process, automatic exposure       - -
mode operation conditions setting (Normally unnecessary to the setting
change)
46-63 Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment (for each mode)       - -
(No need to adjust normally)
46-66 Watermark adjustment   - - - - - -
46-74 Printer/Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)   - - - - - 
(Basic adjustment)
46-90 High-compression PDF image process operation setting (Normally - -   - - - -
unnecessary to the setting change)
46-91 Black text emphasis fine adjustment - -   - - - -

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 39
11-E (1) 11-E (2)
Monochrome copy density adjustment Copy gray balance, gamma adjustment
(for each monochrome copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
(separately for the low-density area and the This adjustment is used to execute the gray balance adjustment for
high-density area) each density level.
(No need to adjust normally) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. * When there is necessity to change the gray balance and gamma
by each the copy mode individually.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When there is request from the user.
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
density and high density part at each copy density individually. 1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode.
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
copy by each the copy mode individually. 3) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the key.
copy mode individually.
Density level Adjustment
* When there is request from the user. Item/Display Default
(Point) value range
1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode. A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
Setting D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
Display/Item Content Default
range E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50 F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50 H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
C AUTO3 Auto 3 LOW 1 - 99 50 J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
D TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
E TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
F TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
G PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
H PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
HIGH 1 - 99 50 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
I MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 sity is decreased.
HIGH 1 - 99 50 When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
J AUTO1 (COPY TO Auto 1 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 adjusted.
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
K AUTO2 (COPY TO Auto 2 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
L AUTO3 (COPY TO Auto 3 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 printed out.
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
This adjustment pattern can be used to check the gray balance
M TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
and the density for each density level (point).
(COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
N TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 5) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
PHOTO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
(COPY TO COPY) document) mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
P LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
mode and change the adjustment value.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased.
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 40
11-E (3) 11-E (4)
Monochrome copy density, gamma Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
adjustment (for each monochrome copy mode document density scanning
mode) (No need to adjust normally) operation (exposure operation) conditions
This adjustment is used to execute the density adjustment for each setting (Normally no need to set)
density level in each monochrome copy mode. Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.
* When it is required to change the gamma in each copy mode. When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
* When there is request from the user. ment, change the setting.
1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode. This setting is required in the following cases.
2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll * When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
key. automatic copy mode.
* When a document with images near its lead edge is copied.
Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default * When a document with colored background is copied.
(Point) value range
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 2) Select item and value.
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 Display/Item Content Set value Default
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1/MODE2/ MODE2
MODE3
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ PRESCA
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
Stop (for copy) STOP/PRESCAN N
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 ON/OFF
Stop (for FAX)
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500 Stop (for scanner) STOP/PRESCAN
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500 AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500 setting NORMAL
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500 SHARP
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 PART
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
NOTE:
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
MODE2: Normal gamma
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
sity is decreased. MODE3: Normal gamma (improves back image)
When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively STOP:
adjusted. Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of document,
decides the output image density according to the density of that
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
part. (The output image density is constant at whole area.)
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
REALTIME:
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
Reads the density of width of the document one by one, decides
printed out.
the output image density according to the density of each part of
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by the document. (The output image density may be not constant at
referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more whole area.)
practical to make a copy and check it.
PRESCAN:
This adjustment pattern can be used to check the gray balance Once the densities on the document surface are scanned, the out-
and the density for each density level (point). put image density is determined according to the average of the
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy surface.)Futhermore, automatically judge the classification of the
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. document and handle it with the most suitable document mode.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the normal AE WIDTH FULL:
copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
copy until a satisfactory result is obtained. mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE
AE WIDTH PART:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 41
Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:
Magical view is adopted for monochrome auto copy and the densi- 11-E (5)
ties of the all surface of document are scanned. Only for FAX and Document low density image density
monochrome scan, when the density of the document of the read reproduction adjustment in the automatic
area is dark, output image density is decreased by control. monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
Document table/DSPF mode
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
density in monochrome auto copy mode.
3 to 7mm
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
* When there is request from the user.
1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode.
AE WIDTH = FULL
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
ground and the low density image is decreased.
Document table mode
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
3 to 7mm A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
100mm
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
AE WIDTH = PART (SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
DSPF mode

3 to 7mm 11-E (6)

Copy/Scan low density image density
adjustment (for each mode)
(No need to adjust normally)
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
sity area in the copy/scanner mode.
100mm AE WIDTH = PART This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
* When there is request from the user.
1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode.
Document density detection area 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

Set
Display/Item Content Default
value
A COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text print 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
B COLOR PUSH:TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 5
C COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
D COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
E COLOR PUSH: Text/Photograph 1-9 5
TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
F COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 42
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
11-E (8)
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the Monochrome copy/color scan mode
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- sharpness adjustment
ground and the low density image is decreased. (No need to adjust normally)
Use for sharpness adjustment of the high density image in mono-
chrome copy/color scan mode.
11-E (7) This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image
Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color shade part.
document reproduction adjustment This adjustment is required in the following cases.
(No need to adjust normally) * When changing the sharpness of copy image in copy mode.
Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow (obtain crispy image) (decreases moire)
image when printing color document that included the red/yellow * When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image
image in monochrome copy mode. shade part (for decrease of asperity)
This adjustment is required in the following cases. * To make the black background and the dark area darker.
* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red * To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.
image in case of making a color copy of the color document in * When there is request from the user.
monochrome copy mode. 1) Enter the SIM 46-60 mode.
* When there is request from the user. 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. Item/ Setting Default
Content
Display range value
Setting Default A RGB Sharpness: The SOFT 1 2
Item/Display Content
range value FILTER sharpness is specified CENTER 2
A R-Ratio Default Gray making setting (R) 0~1000 135 LEVEL when the document HIGH 3
B G-Ratio Default Gray making setting (G) 0~1000 805 mode is judged as A5 or
A6 by the copy auto
C R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0~1000 243
mode.
Fluorescence Fluorescent pen
B CPY Sharpness: The SOFT 1 2
D G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0~1000 354
PUSH sharpness is specified CENTER 2
Fluorescence Fluorescent pen
AUTO when the document HIGH 3
E R-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (R) 0~1000 299
FILTER mode is judged as A5 or
F G-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (G) 0~1000 587 LEVEL A6 by the auto mode of
PUSH.
B-Ratio Default Gray making setting (B) C B/W Filter mixture, Register OFF 0 1
1000 - R-Ratio - G-Ratio COPY select pattern, ON 1
B-Ratio Gray making setting (B) Monochrome copy
Fluorescence 1000 - R-Ratio Fluorescence - G-Ratio Fluorescence D COLOR Filter mixture, Register OFF 0 1
B-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (B) PUSH select pattern, Color ON 1
1000 - R-Ratio - G-Ratio RIP RGB push
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. E B/W Filter mixture, Register OFF 0 1
PUSH select pattern, ON 1
When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased,
Monochrome push
copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment
F B/W Filter mixture, Register OFF 0 1
value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
PRINT select pattern, ON 1
When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased, Monochrome print
copy density of yellow image is decreased. When the adjust- 3) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
ment value is decreased, copy density of yellow image is
process mode).
increased.
• Adjustment item A:
4) Press [OK] key.
When selecting AUTO, filter is selected according to dot pat-
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode
tern state automatically and adjusts sharpness.
(manual), check the copy.
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37 numeric value to decrease moire.
mode and change the adjustment value.
• Adjustment item B:
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
Select HIGH to obtain clear images. Select SOFT to reduce
obtained.
moire.
• Adjustment item C - J:
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part
improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy and check the copy image.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-60 mode
and change the adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 43
 When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY
11-E (9) SIDEA:LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part,
Copy high density image density select "D (COPY SIDEA:HIGH)".
reproduction setting (Normally
Setting Default
unnecessary to the setting change) Item Button Display Content
range value
If a tone gap occurs on part of high density in copy mode, or if there A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density, SIDEA: exposure adjustment
change the setting. LOW (Low density side)
This setting is normally not required. When, however, there are B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
case of following, change the setting. SIDEA: exposure adjustment
LOW (Low density side)
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
* When there is a necessity to increase the density of the part of LOW exposure adjustment
high density. (Low density side)
* When there is request from the user. D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
a. Adjustment procedure
HIGH (High density side)
1) Enter the SIM 46-23 mode. E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key. SIDEA: exposure adjustment
HIGH (High density side)
Setting Default F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
Item Display Content
range value HIGH exposure adjustment
A K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1 (High density)
(0:ENABLE correction mode: Enable A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
1:DISABLE) 1 K engine highest density SIDEB: exposure adjustment
correction mode: Disable LOW (Low density side)
B BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
TARGET BLACK max. density SIDEB: exposure adjustment
correction LOW (Low density side)
C RATIO LOW The mixed ratio for max. 0 - 999 33 C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
density correction LOW LOW exposure adjustment
D RATIO HIGH The mixed ratio for max. 0 - 100 5 (Low density side)
density correction HIGH D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
E DITHER Dither threshold LOW 0 - 255 250 SIDEB: exposure adjustment
THRESHOLD HIGH (High density side)
F SLOPE Slope threshold HIGH 100 - 400 E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50
THRESHOLD 500 SIDEB: exposure adjustment
HIGH (High density side)
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone HIGH exposure adjustment
gap is better. (High density)
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1 G BALANCE DSPF gray balance 1 - 99 50
to item A. SIDEB: R R
H BALANCE DSPF gray balance 1 - 99 50
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
SIDEB: G G
NOTE: Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If I BALANCE DSPF gray balance 1 - 99 50
these values are changed, density of the high density part SIDEB: B B
is changed. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
If these values are changed, be sure to execute the copy In case of increase of image density, input large numeric
gray balance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment) value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small
numeric value.
4) Press [OK] key.
11-E (10) 5) Make a copy in the DSPF mode and check the copy.
DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-9 mode
adjustment (No need to adjust normally) and change the adjustment value.
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
cases, make changes to the setting:
* When copy in DSPF mode differs from copy in document table
mode.
* When copy density in DSPF mode is low or too high.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
* When the DSPF unit is disassembled.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
a. Adjustment procedure
1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 44
11-E (11) 11-E (12)
Automatic gray balance adjustment by the Copy gamma, gray balance adjustment for
user (Copy gray balance automatic each dither (Automatic adjustment)
adjustment ENABLE setting and a. General
adjustment) This simulation is used to improve the image quality in a certain
a. General mode. (Refer to the list in procedure 6.)
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto gray cali- b. Adjustment procedures
bration (auto adjustment of the copy gray balance and density). 1) Enter the SIM46-54 mode.
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera- 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
tion with SIM 26-53. A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed.
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
gray balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged adequate enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully
explained to the user.
b. Setting procedure
1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode.
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
(Yes).
3) Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto gray calibration
(automatic adjustment of copy gray balance and density) is not dis-
played in the user program mode.

(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto gray balance adjust-

ment))
NOTE: This adjustment is based on the service target gray bal-
ance set with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the
above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment
cannot be made properly.
3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
dure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
1) Enter the system setting mode. printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
2) Enter the copy setting mode. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
3) Press the auto gray calibration key. (adjustment pattern).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
5) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in proce-
dure 4) on the document table.
Set the patch image so that the thin line is on the left side as
shown in the figure.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above gray
patch image (adjustment pattern).
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy gray balance adjustment
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.
The message, "Will you go on to the printer gray balance
adjustment?" is displayed.
To execute the printer gray balance adjustment successively,
perform the procedures same as the above.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 45
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 8) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
The gray balance and the density are automatically adjusted. dure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
mality.
(adjustment pattern).
5) Press [OK] key.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).

Select item
Content
(Mode/Image)
Heavy Paper *1 Adjustment item to improve the gray balance in the
heavy paper mode
B/W Ed Adjustment item to improve the gray balance in the text
mode, Text/Photograph mode, Light density document
mode and the map mode.
B/W 1200 Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome printed photo mode and the
photography mode.
WOVEN1 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark density
in the watermark mode 1
WOVEN2 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark density
in the watermark mode 2
WOVEN3 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark density
in the watermark mode 3
WOVEN4 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark density
in the watermark mode 4
B/W 600 LOW Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome printed photo mode and the
photography mode.
*1: When performing adjustments in the heavy paper mode,
load paper in the tray 3, 4.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected. 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. The gray balance and the density are automatically adjusted,
and the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
To complete the adjustment and enable the adjustment result,
press [OK] key.
10) Make a copy, and check the copy image quality.
(Refer to the item of the printer gray balance and density
check.)
NOTE: Use SIM46-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
values.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 46
11-E (13)
Dropout color adjustment
(Normally not required)
a. General
This adjustment is used to adjust the range of reproduction of color
document images as monochrome images in the image send mode
(monochrome manual text mode).
In other words, it is used to adjust the level of chroma of color
images which are reproduced as monochrome images.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When there is request from the user.
b. Adjustment procedures
1) Enter the SIM 46-55 mode.
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout
becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the
adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult
to widen the reproduction range.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
3) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome
manual text mode) and check the adjustment result.

When black characters When the color section is not

are fainted, Document dropped out,

Decrease the adjustment value. Color dropout Increase the value.

Reproduced
image

SIM value 0 SIM value 6

SIM value 3
(Minimum value) (Maximum value)
(Default)

The reproduction range is widened. The reproduction range is narrowed.

Effect and adverse effect when decreasing the value Effect and adverse effect when increasing the value
[Effect] [Effect]
When black characters are fainted by color shift, etc, the black area Colors (of low chroma) which are difficult to be dropped out can be
is outputted clearly. dropped out.
[Adverse effect] [Adverse effect]
Dropout of color sections becomes difficult. Black characters are fainted or cracked.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 47
11-E (14)
Watermark adjustment
(Normally not required)
b. Adjustment procedures
a. General
1) Enter the SIM 46-66 mode.
This adjustment is used to adjust the reproduction capability of the
2) Select the PATTERN mode, then select an adjustment item in
watermark in the copy/printer mode.
the following list according to the situation.
This adjustment is used for watermark documents (primary output).
The result of this adjustment affects the result of watermark print NOTE: Normally there is no need to adjust the PATTERN mode
(secondary output). (items E and F), the COPY MODE, and the POSITION
mode.
In the printer mode, the watermark density can be adjusted by the
printer driver. That adjustment is based on the result of this adjust-
ment.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When there is request from the user. (When a satisfactory result
is not obtained from the adjustment in the system setting mode.)
* When there is request from the user. (When a satisfactory result
is not obtained from the adjustment with the printer driver.)

Setting Default
Category Item Display Content
range value
PATTERN A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level (Black LOW) 0 - 255 15
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level (Black MIDDLE) 0 - 255 19
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level (Black HIGH) 0 - 255 23
D CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2
E HT TYPE (POSI) For halftone index watermark type positive 42 - 43 42
F HT TYPE (NEGA) For halftone index watermark type negative 42 - 43 42

Changing adjustment values of adjustment items A - C 4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result.
and trade off Descriptions on the watermark

Kinds of
watermarks Adjustment Containing
(Mode Density values of characters
Effect Copy / Print Copy
selected in value adjustment
the watermark items A - C
copy mode)
COPY INHIBITED
Characters Decrease. The adjustment The watermark images
appearing. value is become easy to
COPY INHIBITED
decreased. disappear.
The containing
COPY INHIBITED
characters become
lighter.
Increase. The adjustment The containing Document Watermark document Watermark copy
value is characters become (Copy document or (Primary output) (Secondary output)
increased. darker. Print data) (Copy or Printer output) (This machine or other
The watermark images (This machine) company's machine)
become difficult to
disappear. Containing Characters embedded in a watermark, such as "COPY
Background Decrease. The adjustment The containing characters INHIBITED," are called containing characters.
appearing. value is characters become easy Kinds of There are two kinds: "Character appearing" and
decreased. to disappear. watermarks "Background appearing."
The watermark images When a watermark of "Character appearing" is copied, the
become easy to background disappears and the containing characters
disappear. appear.
Increase. The adjustment The watermark images When a watermark of "Background appearing" is copied,
value is become darker. the watermark of the character area disappears and the
increased. The containing containing characters become outline characters.
characters become Principle of A watermark is composed of two dots: fine dots and rough
difficult to disappear. watermarks dots.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. Since fine dots disappear when copied, they are called
disappearing patterns.
Since rough dots remain when copied, they are called
remaining patterns.
In a watermark of "Character appearing," the background is
a disappearing pattern and the containing characters are
remaining patterns.
In a watermark of "Background appearing," the background
is a remaining pattern and the containing characters are
disappearing patterns.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 48
NOTE: Watermarks have the following characteristics:
11-F Printer image quality adjustment
Note for * A watermark is presumed to be synthesized with text
watermarks documents. If it is used with photos or images, the (Basic adjustment)
containing characters may be seen in the watermark Requisite condition before execution of the printer gray bal-
document (primary output) or the containing characters ance/density adjustment
may not appear properly in the watermark copy
(secondary output). Before execution of the printer gray balance/density adjustment,
* When a watermark is synthesized with newspapers or the copy gray balance/density adjustment must have been com-
other dark-background documents, the containing pleted properly.
characters may not appear in the watermark copy
(secondary output).
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* Containing characters may not appear in the watermark
copy (secondary output) depending on the kind of the * Basically same as when the copy gray balance/density adjust-
copier which makes the watermark copy (secondary ment is required.
output) and the copy mode. * After the copy gray balance/density adjustment.
* Containing characters may not appear clearly in the
watermark copy (secondary output) depending on the
copy mode in which the watermark document (primary 11-F (1)
output) is made. Printer gray balance adjustment
* When the print engine status changes, the containing
characters may not be concealed properly in the
(Automatic adjustment)
watermark document (primary output). In this case, a. General
follow the procedures below to conceal the containing The gray balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
characters. the print density of automatically with SIM 67-24 or the user pro-
* Use SIM46-24 to execute the gray balance
gram.
adjustment.
* Use SIM46-54 to execute the gray balance adjustment When this adjustment is executed, the gray balance adjustments of
for each dither. all the print modes are revised.
* Adjust the watermark print contrast in the system
setting.
There are following two modes in the auto gray balance adjust-
* The preview screen of the watermark only indicates the
setting of the watermark color, and does not indicate an ment.
actual copy image. 1) Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24 is
* When the document control (printer mode) is used used.)
together, it is advisable to use "Characters appearing"
2) Auto gray balance adjustment by the user (The user program
setting. If "Background appearing" setting is used
mode is used.) (The gray balance target is the service target.)
together, the detection accuracy of document control
may be reduced. The auto gray balance adjustment by the user is provided to
* In the printer mode watermark, setting of 1200dpi and a reduce the number of service calls.
watermark cannot be used together. If the print gray balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
Watermark adjustment in the system setting use this gray balance adjustment to recover the balance.
System setting  Security setting  Watermark print  When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
Contrast tab machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
work effectively.
Watermark kind
Density Adjustment On the other hand, the auto gray balance adjustment by the
mode selection
serviceman functions to recover the normal gray balance
Character To increase the Decrease the contrast value.
appearing text density (Default: 5) though the machine condition is greatly changed. If the
To decrease the Increase the contrast value. machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
text density (Default value: 5) the normal gray balance.
Background To increase the Increase the contrast value. To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
appearing text density (Default value: 5) understood.
To decrease the Decrease the contrast value.
text density (Default: 5)
NOTE:
Note for adjusting the watermark with SIM46-54
When the gray balance automatic adjustment is executed with
SIM46-74 or SIM46-24 but the containing characters are
reproduced, use SIM46-54 to execute the gray balance auto-
matic adjustment for each dither.
However, note the following items.
* When either of item E or F of the PATTERN mode is 42, the
adjustment must be executed for the both modes of
WOVEN1 and WOVEN2 of SIM46-54.
* When either of item E or F of the PATTERN mode is 43, the
adjustment must be executed for the both modes of
WOVEN3 and WOVEN4 of SIM46-54.
* WOVEN1 and WOVEN2 must be adjusted in a pair as well
as WOVEN3 and WOVEN4.
If it is ignored, the containing characters remain reproduced.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 49
b. Adjustment procedure
(Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman)

Printer gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) procedure

flowchart (SIM67-24)

Start

Execute ADJ11F(1) (Printer gray balance adjustment)

(Automatic adjustment).

Enter the SIM67-24 mode, and select A4

(11" x 8.5") paper.

Press [EXECUTE] key.

(The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern
is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically
performed to print the check pattern.)

Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or

unclear copy. (*3)

Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone

image correction is automatically performed.) (*1)

Cancel SIM67-24.

Execute ADJ11F(2) (Printer gray balance adjustment)

Check the self print check pattern to check the printer (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25) (*2)
gray balance and density adjustment.

*1:
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print check pattern, If the initial setting of the halftone image correction is not
and check the printer gray balance and density. properly adjusted, satisfactory gray balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for
any problems.
*2:
If satisfactory gray balance and density are not obtained
Are the gray balance and NO with ADJ11F(2) (Printer gray balance adjustment)
density at the satisfactory (Manual adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the print engine for
level? any problems.
*3:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check
YES pattern, check the print engine for any problems.

End

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 50
1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode. 4) Select [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is When the gray balance is customized with the manual gray
automatically selected.) balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. request and the gray balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 67-27, if the gray balance is adjusted to that gray
balance, select the service target.
The copy gray balance adjustment is automatically executed
and prints the gray balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed.

3) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in

procedure 2) on the document table.
Place the printed gray patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
gray patch image (adjustment pattern) paper. 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
NOTE:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
6) Check the gray balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the printer gray balance and density
check.)
If a satisfactory result on the gray balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 11F (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual gray balance adjustment (ADJ
11F (2)).
If the gray balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 51
 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is
11-F (2) automatically selected.)
Printer gray balance adjustment The gray balance adjustment pattern is printed.
(Manual adjustment) 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the gray
a. General balance is satisfactory.
The gray balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to adjust If not, execute the following procedures.
the printer density. This is used at the following situation. When the
result of auto adjustment described above is not existing within the
range of reference. When a fine adjustment is required. When
there is request from the user for changing (customizing) the gray
balance.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the gray patch which could
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the gray balance is improper, execute the automatic gray balance
adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better effi-
ciency. .QYFGPUKV[ *KIJFGPUKV[

b. Adjustment procedure # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3

Უ6JGOCZFGPUKV[UGEVKQPKUPQVDNWTTGF

Უ2CVEJ#QT$KUXGT[UNKIJN[EQRKGF
Printer gray balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure
flowchart (SIM67-25) Უȷ6JGRCVEJFGPUKV[KUKFGPVKECNDGVYGGPRCVEJGUQTPQVTGXGTUGF
ȷ6JGRCVEJFGPUKV[KUEJCPIGFITCFWCNN[
Start

Execute ADJ11F(2) (Printer gray balance adjustment

(Manual adjustment). (*1)

Enter the SIM67-25 mode, and select A4

(11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection.)

Press [EXECUTE] key.

(The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Refer to the printed adjustment check pattern.

The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
Select a target adjustment density level with the level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
scroll key. not be reversed.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. Patch B may not be copied.
Press [EXECUTE] key.
Patch A must not be copied.
(The adjustment pattern is printed.) When, however, the gray balance is adjusted according to a
Check the gray balance and density in the gray
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
balance check pattern. gray balance stated above.
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
Are the gray balance
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
NO
and density at the sati- SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic gray balance and
sfactory level?
density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
YES
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Cancel the SIM67-25 mode.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 4) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer gray balance and
density adjustment.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
check pattern, and check the printer gray balance and density.
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
NO way of adjustment.
Are the gray balance and
density at the satisfactory 5) Check the gray balance and density.
level?
(Refer to the item of the printer gray balance and density
check.)
YES
NOTE:
If the gray balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register
End
the gray balance as the service target.
If the gray balance is not customized, this procedure is not
*1: required.
If satisfactory gray balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print If the customized gray balance is registered as the service tar-
engine for any problems. get, the automatic gray balance adjustment can be made in
the next gray balance adjustment.
1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 52
 NOTE: If the setting values of item B is changed, density of the
11-G Printer image quality adjustment high density part is changed.
(Individual adjustment) When these values are changed, be sure to perform the
a. General printer gray balance and density adjustment. (Automatic
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each adjustment)
mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the
basic adjustments ADJ 11F (1) and ADJ 11F (2) or there is a 11-G (3)
request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this Printer gamma adjustment for each dither
adjustment.
(Automatic adjustment)
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
(No need to adjust normally)
a. General
11-G (1)
This adjustment is used to adjust the gray balance and the density
Printer density adjustment
in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode, and the gloss
(Low density section density adjustment) paper mode.
(No need to adjust normally) This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den- and images.
sity area in the printer mode. b. Adjustment procedures
Adjust to reproduction setting of the low density image. 1) Enter the SIM67-54 mode.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* When it is required not to reproduce images in the low density A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
section, or to reproduce low-density images. The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
* When there is request from the user.
1) Enter the SIM 67-36 mode.
2) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key.
In case of increase of the image density on low density part,
increase the adjustment value. For diluting the image density
on low density part, decrease the adjustment value.

11-G (2)
Printer high density image density
reproduction setting (Supporting the high
density section tone gap)
(No need to adjust normally)
When a tone gap is generated in the high density section in the
printer mode, the setting is changed to lower the density in the high
density section.
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following
cases, a change of setting must be made.
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.
3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
* To lower the density in the high density section.
dure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
a. Adjustment procedure printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
1) Enter the SIM 67-34 mode. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key. (adjustment pattern).

Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A K K engine highest density 0 1
(0: ENABLE correction mode: Enable
1: DISABLE) K engine highest density 1
correction mode: Disable
B BLACK MAX Scanner target value 0 - 999 500
TARGET maximum density correction
C RATIO LOW Ratio value for high 0 - 999 33
density correction
D RATION HIGH Ration value for high 0 - 999 5
density correction
E DITHER Dither threshold value 0 - 999 250
THRESHOLD
F SLOPE Slope threshold value 0 - 999 400
THRESHOLD
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better.
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
to item A and B.
The tone gap may occur in high density part.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 53
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The gray balance adjustment is automatically performed.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
mality.
5) Press [OK] key.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).

Select item
Content
(Mode/Image)
HEAVY PAPER For improving the gray balance in the heavy paper
mode
4BIT HIGH For improving the gray balance in 600 dpi mode
4BIT SHIGH For improving the gray balance in 600 dpi mode (super
fine text)
1200DPI LOW For improving the gray balance in 1200 dpi mode
1200DPI HIGH For improving the gray balance in 1200 dpi mode
1200DPI For improving the gray balance in 1200 dpi mode (super
SHIGH fine text mode)
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.

9) Press [EXECUTE] key.

The gray balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
press [EXECUTE] key.
After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
tered.
11) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
(Refer to the item of the printer gray balance and density
check.)
NOTE: Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
values.

8) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-

dure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
(adjustment pattern).

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 54
ADJ 12 Image send, FAX send mode 12-B Monochrome image send mode, image
density and gradation adjustment
image quality adjustment (by each mode)
Normally, there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
12-A Color image send mode, image density and ing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed.
gradation adjustment (by each mode) * When the user requests to perform the adjustment.
Normally, there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow- * When there is a defective copy in a scan image.
ing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed.
* When the scan image density is too light.
* When the user requests to perform the adjustment.
1) Enter the Sim. 46-5 mode.
* When there is a defective copy in a scan image.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.
* When the scan image density is too light.
1) Enter the Sim. 46-4 mode. Item/
Display
Document Setting Default
Mode mode rage value
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.
A LOW AUTOTEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
Item/ Document Setting Default B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
Display
Mode mode rage value C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50
A LOW AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 PHOTO Photo
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 D TEXT/PHOTO Text/ 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/ Text/Printed 1 - 99 50 Photograph
PRINTEDPHOTO Photo E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/ 1 - 99 50 F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
Photograph G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 1 - 99 50 H RIP - 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 A HIGH AUTOTEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50 B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
H RIP - 1 - 99 50 C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50
A HIGH AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 PHOTO Photo
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 D TEXT/PHOTO Text/ 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50 Photograph
PHOTO Photo E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/ 1 - 99 50 F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
Photograph G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 1 - 99 50 H RIP - 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
H RIP - 1 - 99 50
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button. image density is decreased.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is 4) Scan a monochrome document in the color scan mode (Scan
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the to PC or Scan to e-Mail), and check the density of the received
image density is decreased. image.
4) Scan the color document in the color scan mode (Scan to PC Check can be made also in the copy mode by the following
or Scan to e-Mail), and check the density of the received procedure.
image. 4) Jump to the normal copy mode, and make a copy and check
Check can be made also in the copy mode by the following the adjustment result.
procedure. The scanned image, however, is in monochrome. Switch alternatively between the simulation mode and the nor-
4) Jump to the normal copy mode, and make a copy and check mal copy mode, and adjust and check the adjustment result
the adjustment result. with an actual copy.
Switch alternatively between the simulation mode and the nor- Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 until a satisfactory result is
mal copy mode, and adjust and check the adjustment result obtained.
with an actual copy.
Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 55
 Setting
12-C Image send mode, image gray balance Display/Item Content Default
range
adjustment H 600 X 600 [DPI] OFF 600 X 600 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
Normally, there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
I 600 X 600 [DPI] ON 600 X 600 [DPI] 0-2 1
ing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed.
Half-tone ON mode
* When the user requests to perform the adjustment.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
* When the scan image gray balance is defective.
To increase the sharpness, increase the adjustment value. To
1) Enter the Sim. 46-8 mode. decrease the sharpness, decrease the adjustment value.
2) Select a color to be adjusted with [R], [G], [B] buttons. 4) Send a FAX message.
3) Select a mode (low density section or high density section) to 5) Check the sharpness of the received FAX image.
be adjusted with the scroll button. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Setting
Display/Item Content Default
range
A LOW DENSITY Low density section 1 - 99 50
POINT gray balance ADJ 13 FAX send mode image quality
adjustment value
B HIGH DENSITY High density section 1 - 99 50
adjustment
POINT gray balance Normally this adjustment is not required. However, perform this
adjustment value
adjustment in the following cases:
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. * When the user request for performing this adjustment.
To increase the density of the target color, increase the adjust- * When the FAX send image density is low or high.
ment value. To decrease the density of the target color,
NOTE:
decrease the adjustment value.
Normally, the adjustment value may be set to the default value and
5) Scan a color document in the color scan mode (Scan to PC or
there is no need to make this adjustment. When, however, the
Scan to e-Mail), and check the density of the received image.
image density on the receiving FAX side is unsatisfactory, perform
Check can be made also in the copy mode by the following this adjustment.
procedure. The scanned image, however, is in monochrome.
Before execution of this adjustment, however, be sure to confirm
5) Jump to the normal copy mode, and make a copy and check that the receiving FAX operates normally.
the adjustment result.
Switch alternatively between the simulation mode and the nor- 13-A Image density and gradation adjustment in
mal copy mode, and adjust and check the adjustment result
with an actual copy.
the FAX send mode (Collective adjustment
Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 until a satisfactory result is
of all the FAX modes)
obtained. 1) Enter the Sim. 46-40 mode, and select the I-FAX or FAX.
2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
12-D FAX send mode, image sharpness The adjustment pattern is printed.
adjustment 3) Check the print density in the adjustment pattern.
Normally, there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow- If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory,
ing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed. perform the following procedure.
* When the user requests to perform the adjustment. 4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
* When the sharpness in the FAX send mode is too low.
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
Note: image density is decreased.
Normally this adjustment value may be set to the default and there Repeat the procedures 2 thru 4 until a satisfactory result is
is no need to perform the adjustment. When, however, the sharp- obtained.
ness of a printed image on the receiving FAX side to too low, per-
form this adjustment. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
When performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the receiv- range value
ing side FAX is normal. A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50
LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective
1) Enter the Sim. 46-39 mode.
adjustment of all the modes)
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.

Setting
Display/Item Content Default
range
A 200 X 100 [DPI] OFF 200 X 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
B 200 X 200 [DPI] OFF 200 X 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
C 200 X 200 [DPI] ON 200 X 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone ON mode
D 200 X 400 [DPI] OFF 200 X 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
E 200 X 400 [DPI] ON 200 X 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone ON mode
F 400 X 400 [DPI] OFF 400 X 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
G 400 X 400 [DPI] ON 400 X 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone ON mode

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 56
13-B Image density and gradation adjustment in 13-C Image density and gradation adjustment in
the FAX send mode (Normal mode) the FAX send mode (Fine mode)
1) Enter the Sim. 46-41 mode, and select the I-FAX or FAX. 1) Enter the Sim. 46-42 mode, and select the I-FAX or FAX.

2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button. 2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.

Setting
Setting Display/Item Content Default
Display/Item Content Default range
range
A AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
A AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
send image density
send image density
(Fine mode)
(Normal mode)
B EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
image density (Fine mode)
image density
(Normal mode) C EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
image density (Fine mode)
C EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
image density D EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50
(Normal mode) image density (Fine mode)
D EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50
image density image density (Fine mode)
(Normal mode) F EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50 image density (Fine mode)
image density G AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
(Normal mode) H_TONE send image density
F EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Fine mode)
image density H EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
(Normal mode) H_TONE image density
G EXECUTE AUTO 1 1 (Half-tone/Fine mode)
MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO) I EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
H_TONE image density
EXP2 3
(Half-tone/Fine mode)
EXP3 4
J EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50
EXP4 5
H_TONE image density
EXP5 6 (Half-tone/Fine mode)
3) Press [EXECUTE] button. K EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50
The adjustment pattern is printed. H_TONE image density
(Half-tone/Fine mode)
4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern.
L EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50
If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory, H_TONE image density
perform the following procedure. (Half-tone/Fine mode)
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button. M EXECUTE AUTO 1 1
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO)
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the EXP2 3
image density is decreased. EXP3 4
EXP4 5
Repeat the procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is
EXP5 6
obtained.
AUTO H_TONE 7
To select the exposure mode actually used in the FAX send
EXP1 H_TONE 8
mode, select item G and enter the set value corresponding to
EXP2 H_TONE 9
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button.
EXP3 H_TONE 10
EXP4 H_TONE 11
EXP5 H_TONE 12
3) Press [EXECUTE] button.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern.
If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory,
perform the following procedure.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image density is decreased.
Repeat the procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
To select the exposure mode actually used in the FAX send
mode, select item M and enter the set value corresponding to
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 57
13-D Image density and gradation adjustment in 13-E Image density and gradation adjustment in
the FAX send mode (Super fine mode) the FAX send mode (Ultra fine mode)
1) Enter the Sim. 46-43 mode. 1) Enter the Sim. 46-44 mode.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button. 2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.

Setting Setting
Display/Item Content Default Display/Item Content Default
range range
A AUTO FAX auto mode send image 1 - 99 50 A AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
density (Super fine mode) send image density
B EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density B EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
(Super fine mode) image density
C EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density C EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
(Super fine mode) image density
D EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density D EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50
(Super fine mode) image density
E EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density E EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50
(Super fine mode) image density
F EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density F EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50
(Super fine mode) image density
G AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE send image density G AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE send image density
H EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density H EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE image density
I EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density I EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE image density
J EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density J EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE image density
K EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density K EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE image density
L EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density L EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE image density
M EXECUTE AUTO 1 1 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO) M EXECUTE AUTO 1 1
EXP2 3 MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO)
EXP3 4 EXP2 3
EXP4 5 EXP3 4
EXP5 6 EXP4 5
AUTO H_TONE 7 EXP5 6
EXP1 H_TONE 8 AUTO H_TONE 7
EXP2 H_TONE 9 EXP1 H_TONE 8
EXP3 H_TONE 10 EXP2 H_TONE 9
EXP4 H_TONE 11 EXP3 H_TONE 10
EXP5 H_TONE 12 EXP4 H_TONE 11
EXP5 H_TONE 12
3) Press [EXECUTE] button.
The adjustment pattern is printed. 3) Press [EXECUTE] button.
4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern. The adjustment pattern is printed.
If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory, 4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern.
perform the following procedure. If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory,
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button. perform the following procedure.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
image density is decreased. increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image density is decreased.
Repeat the procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is
obtained. Repeat the procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
To select the exposure mode actually used in the FAX send
mode, select item M and enter the set value corresponding to To select the exposure mode actually used in the FAX send
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button. mode, select item M and enter the set value corresponding to
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [EXECUTE]
button.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 58
13-F Image density and gradation adjustment in ADJ 14 Setting of the auto exposure
the IFAX send mode (600dpi mode)
1) Enter the Sim. 46-45 mode.
mode operating conditions in
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button. copy, scan, and FAX
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
Setting
Display/Item Content Default * When the U2 trouble occurs.
range
A AUTO IFAX 600dpi mode/ 1 - 99 50 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
Auto exposure mode send * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
image density
* When the SCANNER CONTROL PWB is replaced.
B EXPOSURE1 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50
level 1 send image density * When the EEPROM on the SCANNER CONTROL PWB is
C EXPOSURE2 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50 replaced.
level 2 send image density 1) Enter the Sim. 46-19 mode.
D EXPOSURE3 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50 2) Select the auto mode exposure operating condition of each
level 3 send image density
mode with the mode button.
E EXPOSURE4 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50
level 4 send image density Item/Display Content Set value Default
F EXPOSURE5 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50 AE_MODE Auto exposure MODE1, MODE2, MODE2
level 5 send image density mode MODE3
G AUTO IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 AE_STOP_CO Auto exposure REALTIME/STOP/ PRESCAN
H_TONE Auto exposure mode send PY mode document PRESCAN
image density density detecting
H EXPOSURE1 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 condition setting (for
H_TONE Exposure level 1 send image copy)
density AE_STOP_FA Auto exposure ON/OFF ON
I EXPOSURE2 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 X mode document
H_TONE Exposure level 2 send image density detecting
density condition setting (for
J EXPOSURE3 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 FAX)
H_TONE Exposure level 3 send image AE_STOP_SC Auto exposure REALTIME/STOP/ STOP
density AN mode document PRESCAN
K EXPOSURE4 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 density detecting
H_TONE Exposure level 4 send image condition setting (for
density scanner)
L EXPOSURE5 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
H_TONE Exposure level 5 send image setting NORMAL
density SHARP
M EXECUTE AUTO 1 1 AE_WIDTH Auto exposure FULL/PART FULL
MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO) mode document
EXP2 3 density detecting
EXP3 4 width setting
EXP4 5
EXP5 6
AUTO H_TONE 7
EXP1 H_TONE 8
EXP2 H_TONE 9
EXP3 H_TONE 10
EXP4 H_TONE 11
EXP5 H_TONE 12
3) Press [EXECUTE] button.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern.
If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory,
perform the following procedure.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image density is decreased.
Repeat the procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
To select the exposure mode actually used in the FAX send
mode, select item M and enter the set value corresponding to
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 59
 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ADJ 15 Paper size detection [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
adjustment display. The minimum width position detection level of the
manual paper feed guide is recognized. If the above operation
is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. When the
15-A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor operation is completed normally, the above data are saved to
adjustment the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled. 15-B Paper feed tray 4 paper width sensor
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced. adjustment
* U2 trouble has occurred. This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. * When the paper feed tray 4 section is disassembled.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. * When the paper feed tray 4 section is replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 40-2 mode. * When the U2 trouble occurs.
2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi- * When the PCU PWB is replaced.
tion. 1) Enter the Sim. 40-12 mode.
2) Set the paper feed guide to the maximum width, and press
[EXECUTE] key.

3) Press [EXECUTE] key.

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display. The maximum width position detection level of the
manual paper feed guide is recognized.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. When the maximum width
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
detection level adjustment value is saved, [EXECUTE] key
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. returns to the normal display.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display. The A4 size width position detection level of the man-
Adjustment steps and display contents
ual paper feed guide is recognized.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size. Display/Item Content
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. MAX POSITION Maximum width detection level adjustment
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal MIN POSITION Minimum width detection level adjustment
display. Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the 3) Set the paper feed guide to the minimum width, and press
A4R size. [EXECUTE] key.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi- [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. When the minimum width
tion. detection level adjustment value is saved, [EXECUTE] key
returns to the normal display.

After completion of the adjustment, "COMPLETE" is displayed.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 60
15-C DSPF paper feed tray paper width sensor ADJ 16 Document size detection
adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
adjustment
* The DSPF paper feed tray section has been disassembled. (Document table mode)
* The DSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When a U2 trouble occurs. * When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced. * When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced. * When U2 trouble has occurred.
1) Enter the SIM 53-6 mode. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
2) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi- * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
tion.
16-A Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
sensor
1) Enter the SIM 41-2 mode.
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.
With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT PHOTO
SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED" is displayed.

ADJ 17 Touch panel coordinate

3) Press [EXECUTE] key. adjustment
The maximum width detection level is recognized.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
4) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
* The operation panel has been replaced.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
* The MFPC PWB has been replaced.
6) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
* The EEPROM on the MFPC PWB has been replaced.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Enter the SIM 65-1 mode.
The A5R width detection level is recognized.
8) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
* When each of the above operations has been completed,
the "COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the oper-
ations has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.

2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).

When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen. In
case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 61
ADJ 18 Fusing paper guide position
adjustment
(Manual adjustment of fusing
paper guide position)
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When the lead edge of paper is folded in the fusing section.
* When skew is generated in the fusing section.
* When blur or improper focusing is generated on the lead edge
section or the rear edge section of an image on paper.
* When wrinkle is generated on paper.
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Loosen the screw.
3) Slide the fusing paper guide up or down to adjust the position.
* Check and mark the scale position before the adjustment
(with a pencil, etc.), and slide to the left and the right evenly.

4) Tighten the screw, and fix the fusing paper guide.

5) Install the fusing unit to the main unit, and check the adjust-
ment result in the copy mode.
* There is no jam.
* The paper lead edge is not folded.
* There is no skew.
* There is no blur of improper focusing on the lead edge and
the rear edge of an image on paper.
* There is no wrinkle on paper.

MX-M7570 ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 62
MX-M7570
[6] SIMULATION Service Manual

1. General and purpose

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage and to efficiently setup and adjust the machine
for improved serviceability.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting clear
6) Machine operating conditions (histories) data check, clear
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc) data
transport. Ver
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine.

There are two simulation modes.

Easy Displays commonly used simulations for each category,

mode allowing easy access for technicians to change settings,
perform maintenance and adjustments.
Classic All simulations are listed and can be accessed by entering the
mode main code, then sub code as per previous model series.

2. Function of each key

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

3) Touch the (#) key → Asterisk (*) key → Clear key → Asterisk
(*) key → Ready for input of main code of simulation.

No. Name Function

1 TEST key Change test mode
2 Mode setting key Change Easy mode, Classic mode
3 Language setting key Change language in simulation mode
4 INFO key Display operation of current display
5 EXIT key Exit from simulation mode
6 BACK key Back to the previous display
7 Clear key Clear input value

3. Starting the simulation

Entering the simulation mode.
1) Double-click the HOME key
2) Touch the Ver display section (10-key mode input mode
screen)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 1
4. List of simulation codes (2) List of menu (Maintenance)

A. List of easy mode The second

SIM
The first menu num SIM Title
(1) List of menu (Installation) menu
ber
1 Data 1 Counter 22-1 Counter display
SIM display display 22-8 Org./staple counter display
The second
The first menu num SIM Title
menu 22-9 Paper feed counter display
ber
22-13 Process cartridge display
1 Adjustment 1 Process 25-2 Automatic developer
2 JAM 22-3 JAM history data display
adjustment
history data 22-12 SPF JAM history data
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto
display display
adjustment
3 System/ 22-5 ROM version data display
2 Positioning 50-10 Manual image position
Version 22-10 Machine system display
adjustment
3 Copy 46-16 Monochrome copy gradation 4 List printing 22-6 Data print mode
manual adjustment 23-2 JAM/trouble data print mode
4 Printer 67-25 Printer gradation manual 5 USB 56-99 Export all log data
adjustment storage
64-5 Printer self print (PCL) 2 Adjustment 1 Positioning 50-10 Manual image position
5 Image 63-2 Shading execution adjustment
Quality 63-3 Scanner color balance auto 2 Process 25-2 Automatic developer
Adjustment adjustment adjustment
44-6 High density / engine 44-2 Process control gain
halftone process control adjustment
compulsory execution 46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto
44-26 Half tone density correct adjustment
execution 3 Image 44-2 Process control gain
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto Quality adjustment
adjustment Adjustment 44-6 High density / engine
2 Registration 1 Function/ 26-1 Paper output system setup halftone process control
Settings Option compulsory execution
26-2 Size setup
settings 44-26 Half tone density correct
26-3 Auditor setup
execution
26-50 Function setting
61-13 Laser power correction data
26-65 Finisher alarm mode setup
clear
(staple limit)
61-11 Laser power auto correction
26-78 ROPE password setting
63-3 Scanner color balance auto
2 Counter 26-5 A3(11x17) countup
adjustment
mode 26-8 Banner size countup
63-5 Standard scanner gamma
26-52 A blank paper count mode setup
setup
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto
3 FAX/Image 66-1 Image send software SW. adjustment
send setting
4 Cleaning 6-4 Charger cleaner check
settings
43-31 Fuser web cleaning check
4 Toner 26-18 Toner save mode setup
5 Replacing 25-2 Automatic developer
setting 26-69 Toner near end setting
developer adjustment
5 FSS setting 27-2 FSS function setup (input)
3 Counter 24-1 JAM/trouble counter data
27-4 FSS function setup clear clear
27-7 FSS function setup (function) 24-2 Paper feed counter clear
27-9 FSS function adjustment 24-3 Org./output counter data
27-14 FSS test mode setup clear
27-15 FSS connect status 24-4 Maintenance counter clear
27-16 FSS alert setting 4 Registration 21-1 Maintenance cycle setup
27-17 FSS paper order alert setting Settings
3 Data 1 Counter 22-1 Counter display 5 Version 49-1 Firmware update
display display 22-9 Paper feed counter display upgrade 49-7 Preinstall data update
22-13 Process cartridge display 6 Error 13 U1 trouble cancellation
2 System/ 22-5 ROM version data display release 14 Trouble cancellation (other)
Version 22-10 Machine system display 15 Paper feed trouble
3 List printing 22-6 Data print mode cancellation
23-2 JAM/trouble data print mode 16 U2 trouble cancellation
4 USB 56-99 Export all log data
storage (3) List of menu (Adjustment and Settings)
4 Version 49-1 Firmware update
upgrade 49-7 Preinstall data update SIM
The second
The first menu num SIM Title
5 Error 13 U1 trouble cancellation menu
ber
release 14 Trouble cancellation (other)
1 Adjustment 1 Positioning 50-1 Copy edge adjustment
15 Paper feed trouble
50-5 Print edge adjustment
cancellation
50-6 SPF edge adjustment
16 U2 trouble cancellation
50-10 Manual image position
6 Ready for 6-90 Load move for shipment
adjustment
transport
50-12 Original center offset setup
48-1 Ratio adjustment
48-5 Motor speed adjustment

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 2
 SIM
The second
The first menu num SIM Title
menu
ber
1 Adjustment 2 Image 61-11 Laser power auto correction
Quality 46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto
Automatic adjustment
Adjustment
3 Image 61-14 Laser power setting
Quality collective input
Adjustment 61-11 Laser power auto correction
61-13 Laser power correction data
clear
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto
adjustment
46-54 Copy gradation auto
adjustment (at dither)
46-52 Copy gradation data clear (at
dither)
67-54 Printer gradation auto
adjustment (at dither)
67-52 Printer gradation data clear
(at dither)
2 Process 25-2 Automatic developer
adjustment
44-2 Process control gain
adjustment
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto
adjustment
3 Scanner/ 41-1 PD sensor check
SPF 41-2 Document size photo-sensor
setup
46-9 Exposure adjustment (SFP)
63-2 Shading execution
53-6 SPF tray adjustment
53-8 SPF scanning position
adjustment
63-3 Scanner color balance auto
adjustment
63-5 Standard scanner gamma
setup
4 Paper 40-2 Bypass tray adjustment
feeding, 40-12 Tray adjustment
Transport 3-10 Finisher adjustment
and paper 3-42 Folding unit adjustment
ejection
5 Copy 46-16 Monochrome copy gradation
manual adjustment
44-21 Half tone process control
standard value register setup
46-24 Copy gradation auto
adjustment
46-54 Copy gradation auto
adjustment (at dither)
63-11 Copy gradation auto
adjustment target select
6 Printer 67-24 Printer gradation auto
adjustment
67-25 Printer gradation manual
adjustment
67-26 Printer gradation auto
adjustment target select
7 Touch 65-1 Touch panel adjustment
panel
8 Function/ 64-2 Self print (B/W) : service
Option
settings
9 Data 1 Counter 22-1 Counter display
display display 22-9 Paper feed counter display
22-13 Process cartridge display
2 System/ 22-5 ROM version data display
Version 22-10 Machine system display
3 List printing 22-6 Data print mode
23-2 JAM/trouble data print mode
4 USB 56-99 Export all log data
storage

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 3
B. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. DSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section and DSPF
the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. DSPF
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
30 Inserter sensor check Inserter
31 Inserter individual load check Inserter
40 Paper folding unit sensor check Paper folding unit
41 Paper fold unit individual load check Paper folding unit
42 Paper folding unit adjustment Paper folding unit
50 Decurler sensor check Decurler
51 Decurler individual load check Decurler unit
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
control circuit of those.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
those.
5 Used to check the operations of the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC). Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the Paper transport/Paper exit
control circuits. section
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the transport unit and the control circuit. Process (Transfer)
4 Used to check the cleaning operation of the main charger. Process
90 Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position) Scanner
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) DSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control circuit. Process (Developing)
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the control Process (Charging)
circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transfer)
10 Main charger total current output setting Process
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and Duplex
its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit. Duplex
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Toner supply section
2 Used to check the operations of the toner remaining quantity sensor and the control circuit. Toner supply section
13 - Used to cancel the self- diagram U1 trouble.
14 - Used to cancel the self-diagram H3, H4, H5 troubles.
15 - Used to cancel the self-diagram U6, F3 trouble. LCC/LCT
*The trouble state mentioned above is memorized in power supply OFF.
16 - Used to cancel the self-diagram U2 trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU
PWB
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total number of miss feed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check miss feed positions and the miss feed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diagram) history.
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version, and
the counter list.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scan (reading) unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU, LCC
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX
12 Used to check the DSPF miss feed positions and the number of miss feed at each position. (When the DSPF
number of miss feed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 4
Main Sub Functions Section
22 13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the fusing Process
unit
14 Used to display the use status of the toner cartridge. Process
18 Used to display the user data delete history.
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
40 Used to display the error code list and the contents.
41 Used to display the JAM code list and the contents.
42 Used to check the JAM/trouble data.
43 JAM data details display
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and miss feed. (If the number of troubles of miss feed is
considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the paper transport section.
81 Backup the paper feed time data to the USB memory
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher, DSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter value and the toner hopper remaining quantity counter.
(After replacing developer, clear these counters.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
Used to clear the counter value of the toner hopper remaining quantity. (Clear the data after replacing or
cleaning the toner hopper.)
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
12 Used to clear the document filing counter.
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
35 Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photo conductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
4 Used to display the operation data of the toner supply quantity. (Not used in the market.) Process
10 Use to set the serial No. of the developer/drum. (Not used in the market)
26 1 Used to set Yes/No of installation of the right paper exit tray. Paper exit
2 Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size is changed, this simulation Paper feed
must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
7 Used to set the machine ID.
8 Counter mode setting (Long scale)
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start to
drive the fusing heater lamp)
32 Used to set the specifications of the fusing cleaning operation. Fusing
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There are
two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center binding
mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set functions.
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
66 Set simulation password
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
79 Used to set security settings.
85 Used to set the function of the simulation mode.
27 2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) (FSS Communication (RIC/MODEM)
function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert call out. (FSS function)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 5
Main Sub Functions Section
27 9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry
number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history.
(FSS function)
12 Used to check the high density, halftone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error
history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors.(FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
15 Used to display the FSS connection status.
16 Used to set the FSS alert send.
17 Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
30 Used to check the operation of the motion sensor.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
12 Used to adjust the tray 4 width detection level. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
2 Used to set the fusing operation and preheating.
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1.
32 Used to set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. Fusing
34 Used to check the fusing lower web cleaning motor operation. Fusing
35 Fusing nip operation check Fusing
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photo conductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
2 Used to adjust the light quantity adjustment of the process control computer sensor and groundwork reading. Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photo conductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor Image process (Photo conductor/
(registration sensor). Developing)
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum,
development)/Fusing/LSU
15 Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. Process
17 Process refresh execution Process
21 Used to set the halftone process control target. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the halftone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the halftone process control operation. Process
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the halftone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the halftone process control compulsory. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the halftone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
62 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
46 2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.(Monochromatic copy)
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.(Color scanner)
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.(Monochromatic scanner)
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the scan image density.
10 used to adjust the copy gray balance and gamma (for each copy mode)
16 Used to perform the engine gray balance manual adjustment (monochrome, all modes).
19 Used to set the monochrome auto exposure mode.
23 Used to perform the half tone highest density correction.
24 Used to perform the engine half tone auto density adjustment.
32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of monochrome mode color.
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 6
Main Sub Functions Section
46 42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
46 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (RGB RIP)
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
48 Used to set the copy output resolution setting.(Change 600DPI/1200DPI every picture mode.)
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode.
52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode.
(After execution of either SIM46-54 or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset to the initial value.)
54 Used to perform the engine halftone automatic density adjustment (dither).
55 Used to adjust the drop out color in the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode).
58 Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolution. (Smoothing process)
60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and the
auto exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
66 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
68 Used to adjust the automatic resolution judgment.
74 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
90 Used to set the process operation of high-compression PDF images.
91 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of black text.
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
7 Used to perform the pre-installed data update.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (DSPF mode) DSPF
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transport voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the DSPF registration
roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image position on the
paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the DSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the DSPF document size width sensor.
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the DSPF mode document scan position.
9 DSPF dirt detection setting.
10 DSPF dirt detection execution.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
10 Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)
56 1 Used to transport data between Storage - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM and Storage to the USB memory.
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
5 Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.
6 Used to output the JAM/trouble data.
7 Used to backup the SYS log data to the USB memory.
15 Used to restore the data of MFP EEPROM.
99 Used to backup all log data.
60 1 Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power
11 Used to correct the laser power automatically.
12 Laser power manual correction LSU
13 Used to clear the laser power correction value.
14 Used to set the laser power correction.
62 1 Used to format the Storage. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data)
3 Used to check read/write of the Storage. (all areas).
4 Used to check each partition and do theoretical format.
7 Used to print the Storage. self diagnostics error log.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 7
Main Sub Functions Section
62 9 Used to delete the storage data.
12 Used to set the automatic format at storage trouble.
14 Used to delete the document filing management data. HDD
21 Used to display the information on the MFP storage.
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
11 Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
64 2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
66 1 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while checking FAX
with the LCD.
2 Used to enter a country code and set the default value for the country code. FAX
3 Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and display the result. FAX
4 Used to send the selected signals to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: max.) FAX
5 Used to send the selected signal to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
(For the kinds of send signals, refer to SIM66-04.)
6 Used to print the confidential registration check table (BOX NO., BOX name, pass code. (If there is no FAX
confidential registration, no print is made.)
7 Used to output all image data saved in the image memory. (Confidential data are also outputted.) FAX
8 Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
9 Used to send the selected sound message to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For details of sound messages, refer to the sound message table of SIM66-08.
10 Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.) FAX
11 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
12 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps, refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal table.
13 Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be registered.) FAX
14 Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
15 Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
16 Used to execute the DTFM signal send test and to adjust the send level. FAX
17 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
18 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
21 Used to print the selected items (system error, protocol monitor). FAX
22 Used to set the handset sound volume. (This simulation can be executed even though the handset setting is FAX
set to NO. When, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume cannot be checked.)
(Japan model only)
29 Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion table, FAX
the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the meta data,
InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).
30 Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, The display is highlighted by status change. FAX
31 Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to TEL/LIU. FAX
32 Used to check the fixed data received from the line and to display the result. FAX
33 Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display the detection result. When FAX
a signal is detected, the display is highlighted.
36 Used to check send and receive data from the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line or the FAX
command line individually.
39 Used to check and change the destination setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX. FAX
42 Used to rewrite the program to power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
43 Used to write the adjustment value into the power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
61 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
62 Used to import the FAX receive data into a USB memory in PDF file type. FAX
67 17 Printer reset Printer
24 Printer gray balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Printer
25 Printer gray balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Printer
26 Used to set the target gray balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer
33 Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. Printer
(Support for the high density section tone gap)
36 Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Printer
46 Used to adjust the printer image enhancement.
52 Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
54 Printer gray balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither) Printer

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 8
5. Details of simulation
2
1
2-1

1-1 Purpose Operation test/check

Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
matic document feeder and the control cir-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner cuit.
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
Section DSPF
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the The DSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
scan resolution (operation speed). ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
ation speed).
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
(372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI Item/Display Operation mode Default value
(372.0mm/s) (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
600DPI 600DPI (496.0mm/s) (496.0mm/s)
(264.0mm/s) 400DPI 400DPI
1200DPI 1200DPI (396.0mm/s)
(132.0mm/s) 600DPI 600DPI
(264.0mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(496.0mm/s) (496.0mm/s)
1-2 400DPI 400DPI
(396.0mm/s)
Purpose Operation test/check 600DPI 600DPI
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner (264.0mm/s)
(reading) section and the related circuits.
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure 2-2
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. Purpose Operation test/check
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
tion.
sors and the detectors in the automatic
document feeder section and the control
circuits.
1-5
Section DSPF
Purpose Operation test/check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
(reading) unit and the control circuit. played.
Section Scanner (reading) The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
Operation/Procedure are highlighted.
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
Display Content
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. SSET DSPF installation detector
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan SOCD DSPF open/close sensor
resolution (operation speed). SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close sensor
SPED1 DSPF document empty sensor
Item/Display Operation mode Default value SPED2 DSPF document sensor
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1
(372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s) SPPD2 DSPF document pass sensor 2
400DPI 400DPI SPPD3 DSPF document pass sensor 3
(372.0mm/s) SPPD4 DSPF document pass sensor 4
600DPI 600DPI SPPD5 DSPF document pass sensor 5
(264.0mm/s)
SPOD DSPF document exit sensor
1200DPI 1200DPI
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor
(132.0mm/s)
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor
STMPU DSPF stamp unit installation detection

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 9
 2-3 Display Content
FN1DPS Push SW1 detection sensor
Purpose Operation test/check FN2DDS DIP SW2 detection sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads FN2DO Stack tray paper surface sensor 2
in the automatic document feeder and the FN2DPS Push SW2 detection sensor
control circuit. FN3DDS DIP SW3 detection sensor
Section DSPF FN4DDS DIP SW4 detection sensor
FNAMS Manual staple switch
Operation/Procedure
FNB Buffer sensor
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel FNDCN Alignment unit detection signal
key. FNDCP Punch detection signal
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. FNDCS Saddle detection signal
The selected load performs the operation. FNDES Staple empty detection sensor
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. FNDFET Escape tray full detection sensor
FNDOCFD Front cover sensor
Display Content FNDOHS Staple cuing detection sensor
SPFM DSPF document feed transport motor FNDPMS Manual staple paper detection sensor
SPOM DSPF document exit motor FNDPOPT Process tray paper detection sensor
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor FNE Entry port sensor
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan motor FNEE Escape paper exit sensor
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch FNFMTLC Load tray full (Large coated paper) sensor
SRRC DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch FNFMTLS Load tray middle (Large coated paper) sensor
STRRC DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch FNFMTSS Load tray lower limit (Small coated paper) sensor
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch FNHPAR Rear edge assist home position sensor
STMPS Stamp solenoid FNHPCSLS Staple-free stapling clinch home position sensor
FNHPDSS Stapler home position sensor
FNHPFECE Escape/saddle home position sensor
3 FNHPFR
FNHPGKS
Rear paper edge flap home position sensor
Return roller lift home position sensor
FNHPJF Front alignment plate home position sensor
3-2 FNHPJR Rear alignment plate home position sensor
Purpose Operation test/check FNHPMSS Stapler shift home position sensor
FNHPMT Load tray home position sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
FNHPP Paddle home position sensor
sors and the detectors in the finisher and
FNHPS Oscillation home position sensor
the control circuit.
FNHPTF Front tongue home position sensor
Section Finisher FNHPTR Rear tongue home position sensor
Operation/Procedure FNMCSLS Staple-free stapling motor clock sensor
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- FNOCFD Front cover switch
played. FNSSS Staple safety switch
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active FNTBP Preprocessing timing sensor
are highlighted. FNULMT Load tray upper limit sensor

NOTE: When the punch module is installed, the code names are Finisher (MX-FN35)
displayed at the back of the sensor display. Display Content
Inner finisher FN1DDS DIP SW1 detection sensor
FN1DO Stack tray paper surface sensor 1
No./Display item Content
FN1DPS Push SW1 detection sensor
1 FABHS Paper alignment belt HP sensor
FN2DDS Stack tray paper surface sensor 2
2 FAPHPS_F Paper alignment plate HP sensor F
FN2DO Stack tray paper surface sensor 2
3 FAPHPS_R Paper alignment plate HP sensor R
FN2DPS Push SW2 detection sensor
4 FDRPS Paper exit roller position sensor
FN3DDS DIP SW3 detection sensor
5 FDTLLS Paper exit tray lower limit sensor
FN4DDS DIP SW4 detection sensor
6 FDTPD Delivery tray paper detector
FNAMS Manual staple switch
7 FDTULS Paper exit tray upper limit sensor
FNB Buffer sensor
8 FFL Fan lock signal
FNDCN Alignment unit detection signal
9 FPLD1 Paper height sensor 1
FNDCP Punch detection signal
10 FPLD2 Paper height sensor 2
FNDCS Saddle detection signal
11 FPPD1 Paper entry sensor
FNDES Staple empty detection sensor
12 FSED Staple empty sensor
FNDFET Escape tray full detection sensor
13 FSHPS Staple HP sensor
FNDOCFD Front cover sensor
14 FSLD Staple lead edge sensor
FNDOHS Staple cuing detection sensor
15 FSSHPS Staple shift home position sensor
FNDPMS Manual staple paper detection sensor
16 FSSS Staple safety sensor
FNDPOPT Process tray paper detection sensor
17 FSSW Safety switch
FNE Entry port sensor
18 FSTPD Staple tray paper sensor
FNEE Escape paper exit sensor
19 FTPS Tray position sensor
FNFMTLC Load tray full (Large coated paper) sensor
Finisher (MX-FN34) FNFMTLS Load tray middle (Large coated paper) sensor
FNFMTSS Load tray lower limit (Small coated paper) sensor
Display Content FNHPAR Rear edge assisit home position sensor
FN1DDS DIP SW1 detection sensor FNHPCSLS Staple-free stapling clinch home position sensor
FN1DO Stack tray paper surface sensor 1 FNHPDSS Stapler home position sensor

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 10
 Display Content No,/Display item Content
FNHPFECE Escape/saddle home position sensor 19 FNS134 Staple cart sensor
FNHPFR Rear paper edge flap home position sensor 20 FNS132 Staple lead edge position detection
FNHPGKS Return roller lift home position sensor 21 FNS133 Staple empty detection
FNHPJF Front alignment plate home position sensor 22 FNS104 Tray 1 paper detection
FNHPJR Rear alignment plate home position sensor 23 FNS105 Tray 2 paper detection
FNHPMSS Stapler shift home position sensor 24 FNS130 Tray 3 paper detection
FNHPMT Load tray home position sensor 25 FNPCH_CON Punch unit connection detection
FNHPP Paddle home position sensor 26 FNSW2 PUSHSW2 detection
FNHPS Oscillation home position sensor 27 FNSW1 PUSHSW1 detection
FNHPTF Front tongue home position sensor 28 FNS107 Staple shift home position detection
FNHPTR Rear tongue home position sensor 29 FNS108 Alignment plate front home position sensor
FNMCSLS Staple-free stapling motor clock sensor 30 FNS109 Alignment plate rear home position sensor
FNOCFD Front cover switch 31 FNS106 Shutter open detection
FNSSS Staple safety switch 32 FNS110 Oscillation guide open detection
FNTBP Preprocessing timing sensor 33 FNSW3-1 DIPSW1 detection
FNULMT Load tray upper limit sensor 34 FNSW3-2 DIPSW2 detection
FSDU Saddle detection sensor 35 FNSW3-3 DIPSW3 detection
FSE Saddle entry port sensor 36 FNSW3-4 DIPSW4 detection
FSEB Saddle folding bundle paper exit sensor 37 FNS129 Finisher front cover sensor
FSEPB Saddle folding bundle load paper empty sensor 38 FNSW103 Stapler safety switch
FSESFS Saddle staple front staple empty sensor 39 FNSW101 Finisher front cover switch
FSESRS Saddle staple rear staple empty sensor 40 FNS148 Shutter close detection
FSHPDSS Saddle staple drive home position sensor 41 FNSW102 Oscillation guide switch
FSHPEL Saddle switch lever home position sensor 42 FNS125 Tray 2 area 1 sensor
FSHPG Saddle gripper home position sensor 43 FNS126 Tray 2 area 2 sensor
FSHPJ Saddle alignment plate home position sensor 44 FNS127 Tray 2 area 3 sensor
FSHPP Saddle paddle home position sensor 45 FNS113 Rear edge falling home position sensor
FSHPSR Saddle rear edge stopper home position sensor 46 FNS138 YO rear home position sensor
FSHPT Saddle pushing home position sensor 47 FNS139 YO front home position sensor
FSMCE Saddle paper exit motor clock sensor 48 FNS136 Guide sub rear home position sensor
FSMCF Saddle folding motor clock sensor 49 FNS137 Guide sub front home position sensor
FSPV Saddle vertical path sensor 50 FN24V-DET 24V-DETECT
51 FN24V1-DET 24V1-DETECT
Finisher punch unit (MX-PN16)
52 FNAC-RELAY-ON Relay on signal
Display Content 53 FNS115 Gripper home position sensor
FCDFWP Punch dust full detection sensor 54 FNS140 Gripper front/rear sensor
FCEP Punch encoder sensor 55 FNS116 Gripper base front sensor
FCHPP Punch home position sensor 56 FNS117 Gripper base rear sensor
FCHPR Punch shift home position sensor 57 FNM19-LD Load tray upper motor arm
FC1DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 1 58 FNM20-LD Load tray lower motor arm
FC2DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 2 59 FNFAN2-ALM Power supply fan alarm
FC3DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 3 60 FNFAN1-ALM PWB cooling fan alarm
FC4DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 4 61 FNFAN5-ALM Upper tray fan alarm
FC5DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 5 62 FNFAN4-ALM Lower tray fan alarm
63 FNS200 Cut staple sensor
Paper pass unit (MX-RB26) 64 FNSDL_CON Saddle connection detection
Display Content 65 FNFOLD_CON Folding unit connection detection
PDOS Cover open sensor 66 FNGBC_CON GBC punch connection detection
PDPPD1 Paper pass detector 1 (paper input) 67 FNFLD-ETR-ST- Folding unit EntryStartAck signal
PDPPD2 Paper pass detector 2 (paper out put) ACK
68 FNFLD-EJCT-ST Folding unit EjectStart signal
Finisher (100-sheet stapling) 69 PIS150 Transfer unit bus sensor
70 PISW200 Transfer unit front cover switch
No,/Display item Content
71 PIUNITMOT_ALM Transfer unit transport motor lock detection
1 FNS103 Staple tray paper sensor signal
2 FNS122 Finisher tray 1 area 1 sensor 72 PIPASSUNIT-CON Transfer unit connection detection
3 FNS123 Finisher tray 1 area 2 sensor
4 FNS124 Finisher tray 1 area 3 sensor Saddle finisher (100-sheet stapling)
5 FNS146 Discharge paper surface detection
No,/Display item Content
6 FNS149 YO paper surface sensor
1 FSS213 Pushing clock sensor
7 FNS118 Process tray paper surface sensor
2 FSS214 Folding clock sensor
8 FNS143 Lower tray paper surface sensor
3 FSS228 Saddle tray paper sensor
9 FNS114 YOHP sensor
4 FSS219 Rear edge holding shift home position
10 FNS112 Take-up switch home position sensor
5 FSS221 Rear edge holding home position
11 FNS135 Paper holding lever home position sensor
6 FSS206 Alignment plate home position
12 FNS111 Roller nip home position sensor
7 FSS205 Lead edge stopper home position
13 FNS142 Buffer flapper home position sensor
8 FSS222 Pulling separation home position
14 FNS102 Discharged paper detection
9 FSS229 Folding home position sensor
15 FNS101 Entry port paper detection
10 FSS223 Staple drive home position sensor
16 FNS131 Staple drive home position detection
11 FSS208 Pushing home position
17 FNS128 Staple area sensor
12 FSS203 Vertical path sensor
18 FNSW110 Tray 1 interference switch

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 11
 No,/Display item Content No,/Display item Content
13 FSS226 Bundle paper exit path sensor 1 10 FTSW1-1 DIPSW1 detection
14 FST-CON Trimmer connection detection 11 FTSW1-2 DIPSW2 detection
15 FSS225 Staple 2 sensor 12 FTSW1-3 DIPSW3 detection
16 FSS224 Staple 1 sensor 13 FTSW1-4 DIPSW4 detection
17 FSS207 Roller guide home position sensor 14 FTSW2 PUSHSW detection
18 FSS227 Bundle paper exit bus sensor 2
19 FSS218 Rear edge sorting home position
20 FSS201 Entry port path sensor
21 FS24V-DET Interlock power supply (24V) detection 3-3
Purpose Operation test/check
Punch module (Finisher (100-sheet stapling))
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
No,/Display item Content the finisher and the control circuit.
1 FCS105 Punch motor clock detection
Section Finisher
2 FCPCB2 Punch dust sensor
3 FCS104 Punch home position detection Operation/Procedure
4 FCS101 Punch horizontal registration home position detection 1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
5 FCPCB31 Punch horizontal registration A3 sensor 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
6 FCPCB32 Punch horizontal registration LD sensor The selected load performs the operation.
7 FCPCB33 Punch horizontal registration B4 sensor
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
8 FCPCB34 Punch horizontal registration A4R sensor
9 FCPCB35 Punch horizontal registration B5R sensor Inner finisher
10 FCS102 Punch hole motor position sensor
No./Display item Content
11 FCS103 Punch hole motor 2-hole/3-hole sensor
1 FCF Cooling fan
12 FCSW1-1 Punch DIPSW1
2 FDRLM Paper exit roller lift motor
13 FCSW1-2 Punch DIPSW2
3 FPAM_F Paper alignment motor F
4 FPAM_R Paper alignment motor R
Folding unit (100-sheet stapling)
5 FPAS Paper alignment solenoid
No,/Display item Content 6 FPDM Paper exit motor
1 FLENTRY Paper transfer start request 7 FPGS Paper gate solenoid
2 FLEXIT_ACK Paper exit start response 8 FPLDS Paper height detector solenoid
3 FLS30 Speed reduction timing sensor 9 FPS Paddle solenoid
4 FLS31 Separation timing sensor 10 FPTM Paper transport motor
5 FLS32 Folding position accurate detection sensor 11 FSM Staple motor
6 FLS33 Upper stopper section paper sensor 12 FSSM Staple shift motor
7 FLS25 Lead edge guide home position sensor 13 FTLM Tray lift motor
8 FLS24 Internal 3-fold stopper home position sensor
9 FLS23 Upper stopper section home position sensor Finisher (MX-FN34)
10 FLS22 Discharged 1 paper sensor Display Content
11 FLS28 Internal 3-fold tray (intermediate tray) home FNCDP Paddle drive clutch
position sensor
FNCDRUS Oscillation lower roller drive clutch
12 FLS26 Internal 3-fold tray (paper exit tray) full sensor
FNCEDCE Escape transport drive switch clutch
13 FLS27 Internal 3-fold tray (intermediate tray) paper
FNMAR Rear edge assist motor
sensor
FNMB Buffer motor
14 FLS29 Folding unit pull-out sensor
FNMDT Tray auxiliary guide motor
15 FLORIHAN_LOCK Brushless motor lock detection signal
FNME Discharge motor
16 FLSW1 Front cover sensor
FNMEC Entry port transport motor
17 FLS20 Entry port sensor
FNMFECES Escape/Saddle motor
18 FLS21 Discharged paper 2 sensor
FNMFR Paper rear edge flap motor
19 FLSW3-1 DipSW1
FNMGMT Tray lift motor
20 FLSW3-2 DipSW2
FNMGRS Return roller lift motor
21 FLSW3-3 DipSW3
FNMJF Front alignment motor
22 FLSW3-4 DipSW4
FNMJR Rear alignment motor
23 FLSW3-5 DipSW5
FNMMSS Stapler shift motor
24 FLSW3-6 DipSW6
FNMS Oscillation motor
25 FLSW3-7 DipSW7
FNMSLS Stapler free staple motor
26 FLSW3-8 DipSW8
FNMSS Staple motor
27 FLSW1 PushSW1
28 FLSW2 PushSW2 Finisher (MX-FN35)
29 FLFAN3_LOCK Power supply fan lock detection signal
Display Content
Trimming module (100-sheet stapling) FNCDP Paddle drive clutch
FNCDRUS Oscillation lower roller drive clutch
No,/Display item Content
FNCEDCE Escape transport drive switch clutch
1 FTS108 Cutter motor clock sensor
FNMAR Rear edge assist motor
2 FTS105 Registration home position sensor
FNMB Buffer motor
3 FTS106 Press motor home position sensor
FNMDT Tray auxiliary guide motor
4 FTS104 Rear estrangement motor home position sensor
FNME Discharge motor
5 FTS102 Front estrangement motor home position sensor
FNMEC Entry port transport motor
6 FTS103 Paper delivery sensor
FNMFECES Escape/Saddle motor
7 FTS101 Inlet sensor
FNMFR Paper rear edge flap motor
8 FTS111 Waste paper full sensor
FNMGMT Tray lift motor
9 FTS109 Waste paper box detection sensor

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 12
 Display Content No,/Display item Content
FNMGRS Return roller lift motor 14 FSM214 Pull-in roller (separation) motor
FNMJF Front alignment motor 15 FSM209 Staple motor
FNMJR Rear alignment motor 16 FSM206 Folding motor
FNMMSS Stapler shift motor 17 FSM205 Push motor
FNMS Oscillation motor
FNMSLS Stapler free staple motor Folding unit (100-sheet stapling)
FNMSS Staple motor No,/Display item Content
FSMC Saddle transport motor 1 FLSOL2 Folding/Straight branch solenoid
FSMDLE Saddle switching lever motor 2 FLSOL3 Separation solenoid
FSME Saddle discharge motor 3 FLSOL5 Internal 3-fold stopper solenoid
FSMF Saddle folding motor 4 FLM11 Folding transport motor
FSMG Saddle gripper motor 5 FLM15 Folding position adjustment motor
FSMJ Saddle alignment motor 6 FLM13 Exit port motor 2
FSMS Saddle staple motor 7 FLM14 Exit port motor 1
FSMSR Saddle rear edge stopper motor 8 FLM5 Inlet port motor
9 FLSOL4 Internal 3-fold tray branch solenoid
Finisher punch unit (MX-PN16)
10 FLM8 Upper stopper motor
Display Content 11 FLM9 Internal 3-fold stopper adjustment motor
FCMR Punch shift motor 12 FLM10 Lead edge holding guide motor
FCP Punch motor 13 FLM7 Internal 3-fold tray (intermediate tray) motor
14 FLCL3 Folding position adjustment clutch (normal)
Paper pass unit (MX-RB26) 15 FLCL4 Folding position adjustment clutch (reverse)
Display Content
PDPTM Transport motor Trimming module (100-sheet stapling)
No,/Display item Content
Finisher (100-sheet stapling) 1 FTM101 Trimmer transport motor
No,/Display item Content 2 FTM103 Inlet port separation motor
1 FNM101 Entry port transport motor 3 FTM104 Paper delivery separation motor
2 FNM104 Paper delivery transport motor 4 FTM102 Registration motor
3 FNM108 Front alignment motor 5 FTM106 Cutter motor
4 FNM107 Stapler shift motor 6 FTSL101 Registration solenoid
5 FNM105 Load tray upper motor 7 FTM105 Press motor
6 FNM115 Staple motor 8 FTSL102 Paddle solenoid
7 FNM110 Oscillation guide motor
8 FNM102 Buffer transport motor
9 FNM106 Load tray lower motor
10 FNM119 Roller nip motor 3-10
11 FNM114 YO motor Purpose Adjustment
12 FNM120 Guide motor
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
13 FNM113 Rear edge falling motor
14 FNM117 Gripper belt motor Section Finisher
15 FNM116 Gripper arm motor Operation/Procedure
16 FNM121 Take-up transport motor 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
17 FNM112 Take-up swing motor panel.
18 FNM118 Paper holding lever motor
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
19 FNM109 Rear alignment motor
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
20 FNCL102 Shutter clutch
21 FNM122 Paper delivery lower transport motor Inner finisher (MX-FN33)
22 FNSL101 Oscillation safety switch solenoid
Setting Default
23 FNFAN102 PWB cooling fan Item/Display Content
range value
24 FNFAN103 Upper tray cooling fan
FRONT Alignment position
25 FNFAN104 Lower tray cooling fan A 2 - 18 100
ADJUST adjustment (front)
26 PIM301 Transfer unit transport motor lock (*1) REAR ADJUST Alignment position
B 2 - 18 100
adjustment (rear)
*1: Operates only when the transport unit is installed.
STAPLE REAR Staple binding position
Saddle stitch finisher (100-sheet stapling) C adjustment (one position at 68 - 132 100
the rear)
No,/Display item Content STAPLE Staple binding position
1 FSM200 Entry port transport motor D FRONT adjustment (one position at 68 - 132 100
2 FSM201 Transport motor the front)
3 FSM212 Alignment roller (lead edge roller) motor STALE BOTH Staple binding position
4 FSSL206 Inlet port path select solenoid E adjustment (center position 68 - 132 100
5 FSSL205 Lead edge stopper solenoid of two positions binding)
6 FSSL203 Lead edge separation solenoid 1 STAPLE Staple binding position
7 FSSL204 Lead edge separation solenoid 2 F PITCH adjustment (staple pitch of 68 - 132 100
8 FSM202 Alignment motor two positions binding)
9 FSM203 Lead edge stopper motor
10 FSM204 Roller guide motor
11 FSM210 Rear edge holding motor
12 FSM211 Rear edge shift motor
13 FSM213 Flapping motor

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 13
3K Finisher (MX-FN34) / 3K Saddle finisher (MX-FN35) Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Setting Default
Item/Display Content SADDLE Saddle alignment width
range value AC 80 - 120 100
ALIGNMENT adjustment
ALIGNMENT Alignment position
A 50 - 150 100 STITCHING Saddle staple folding
adjustment AD 30 - 70 50
AND FOLDING position adjustment
FRONT Front alignment position
B 50 - 150 100 SADDLE Saddle folding position
ADJUST adjustment
AE FOLDING(A4- adjustment A4-R/8.5 x 30 - 70 50
REAR ADJUST Rear alignment position
C 50 - 150 100 R/8.5 x 11R) 11R
adjustment
SADDLE Saddle folding position
ALIGNMENT Alignment position center
D 90 - 110 100 AF FOLDING(B4/ adjustment B4/8.5 x 14 30 - 70 50
CENTER adjustment
8.5 x 14)
STAPLE Stapling position
SADDLE Saddle folding position
E FRONT adjustment (one position in 50 - 150 100
AG FOLDING(A3/ adjustment A3/11 x 17 30 - 70 50
front)
11 x 17)
STAPLE Stapling position
SADDLE Saddle folding position
F REAR adjustment (one position at 50 - 150 100
AH FOLDING(12 x adjustment 12 x 18 30 - 70 50
the rear)
18)
STAPLE Stapling position
SADDLE Saddle folding position
G BOTH adjustment (staple pitch of 50 - 150 100
AI FOLDING(CUS adjustment Custom size 30 - 70 50
two positions binding)
TOM)
MANUAL Manual stapling position
H STAPLE adjustment 80 - 120 100 Finisher (100-sheet stapling)
POSITION
STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling Setting Default
Item/Display Content
I STAPLE position adjustment 80 - 115 100 range value
POSITION A BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
BUFFER Buffer paper shift quantity SHIFT1 adjustment 1
J 40 - 160 100
SHIFT(1-2) adjustment (1-2 sheets) B BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
BUFFER Buffer paper shift quantity SHIFT2 adjustment 2
K 40 - 160 100
C ALIGNMENT Alignment width adjustment 50 - 150 100
SHIFT(2-3) adjustment (2-3 sheets)
PUNCH X Punch hole position D STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
L adjustment (X : Sub 80 - 120 100 FRONT (Front 1 position/Small width)
scanning direction) (S-WIDTH)
PUNCH Y Punch hole position E STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
M adjustment (Y : Main 97 - 115 100 FRONT (Front 1 position/Wide width)
scanning direction) (W-WIDTH)
EJECTING Paper exit roller height F STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
N 70 - 130 100
ROLLER adjustment REAR (Rear 1 position/Small width)
KNURLING Take-up knurling height (S-WIDTH)
O 0 - 150 100
ROLLER (1) adjustment G STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
KNURING Take-up knurling REAR (Rear 1 position/Wide width)
P ROLLER (65) evacuation height 0 - 150 100 (W-WIDTH)
adjustment H STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 85 - 115 100
KNURLING Take-up knurling CENTER (Center 2 positions)
Q ROLLER evacuation height 0 - 200 100 I PUNCH Y *1 Punch hole position 85 - 115 100
RETREAT adjustment adjustment
STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling (Y: Main scanning direction)
R STAPLE welding pressure 85 - 115 100 J PUNCH X *1 Punch hole position 50 - 150 100
PRESSURE adjustment (Motor rotation) adjustment
DELIVERY Paper exit speed (X: Sub scanning direction)
S SPEED(NON- adjustment (Non-sort) 90 - 110 100 K PUNCH Punch mode skew 80 - 120 100
SORT) SKEW *1 adjustment
DELIVERY Paper exit speed L PUNCH Punch mode skew 80 - 120 100
T SPEED(ESCA adjustment (Escape) 90 - 110 100 SKEW SHIN *1 adjustment (thin paper)
PE)
EJECTING Bundle paper eject speed *1: Not saved when the punch is not installed.
U SPEED(SHIFT) adjustment (Shift bundle 95 - 105 100
Saddle stitch finisher (100-sheet stapling)
ejection)
EJECTING Bundle paper eject speed Setting Default
Item/Display Content
V SPEED(STAPL adjustment (Staple bundle 95 - 105 100 range value
E) ejection) A BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
MANUAL Manual staple time out SHIFT1 adjustment 1
W 1-5 2
STAPLE TIME setting B BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
MANUAL Manual staple pull out time SHIFT2 adjustment 2
STAPLE out setting C ALIGNMENT Alignment width adjustment 50 - 150 100
X 0 - 10 0
PULLOUT D STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
TIME FRONT (Front 1 position/Small
STITCHING Saddle staple position (S-WIDTH) width)
Y 80 - 120 100
UNIT adjustment E STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
STITCHING Saddle staple position FRONT (Front 1 position/Wide
Z 80 - 120 100
UNIT THIN adjustment (Thin paper) (W-WIDTH) width)
FOLDING Saddle folding position F STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
AA 80 - 120 100
UNIT adjustment REAR (Rear 1 position/Small
FOLDING Saddle folding position (S-WIDTH) width)
AB 80 - 120 100
UNIT THIN adjustment (Thin paper)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 14
 Setting Default Display Sensor name
Item/Display Content
range value LWRLMT2 No. 2 lower limit detection
G STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100 LWRLMT1 No. 1 lower limit detection
REAR (Rear 1 position/Wide width) UPRLMT2 No. 2 upper limit detection
(W-WIDTH) UPRLMT1 No. 1 upper limit detection
H STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 85 - 115 100 INSHP2 No. 2 pickup arm HP detection
CENTER (Center 2 positions)
INSHP1 No. 1 pickup arm HP detection
I PUNCH Y *2 Punch hole position 85 - 115 100
INSEXT Outlet port sensor
adjustment (Y: Main
INSSZ13 No. 1 paper size sensor 3
scanning direction)
INSSZ12 No. 1 paper size sensor 2
J PUNCH X *2 Punch hole position 50 - 150 100
adjustment (X: Sub INSSZ11 No. 1 paper size sensor 1
scanning direction) PPRLNG2 No. 2 length sensor
K PUNCH Punch mode skew 80 - 120 100 PPRLNG1 No. 1 length sensor
SKEW *2 adjustment PPREND2 No. 2 paper end detection
L PUNCH Punch mode skew 80 - 120 100 PPREND1 No. 1 paper end detection
SKEW SHIN *2 adjustment (thin paper) NEREND2 No. 2 near end detection
M SDL FOLD Saddle folding position 80 - 120 100 FECVROP1 No. 1 paper size sensor
adjustment INSSZ25 No. 2 paper size sensor 5
N SDL STPL Saddle stitch position 80 - 120 100 INSSZ24 No. 2 paper size sensor 4
adjustment INSSZ23 No. 2 paper size sensor 3
O SDL DIVIDE Saddle separation position 85 - 115 100 INSSZ22 No. 2 paper size sensor 2
adjustment INSSZ21 No. 2 paper size sensor 1
P SDL WIDTH Saddle alignment width 80 - 120 100 INSSZ15 No. 1 paper size sensor 5
adjustment
INSSZ14 No. 1 paper size sensor 4
Q STPL/FOLD 1 Stapling/Folding position 42 - 58 50
INSFDRSW Front door SW
adjustment value 13x19
VTRCVRSW Vertical transport cover SW
R UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
FECVROP2 No. 2 cover open detection
FOLD 1 adjustment value A4R/LTRR
S UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
FOLD 2 adjustment value B4/LGL
T UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
3-31
FOLD 3 adjustment value A3/LDR
U UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50 Purpose Operation check
FOLD 4 adjustment value SRA3/ Function (Purpose) Inserter individual load check
12x18
V UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
Section Inserter
FOLD 5 adjustment value 13x19 Operation/Procedure
W UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50 1) Press the name of the signal to which a load is applied with the
FOLD 6 adjustment value (User- touch panel key.
defined size)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation.
X TRIMMER Trimmer registration position 50 - 150 100
REG S *1 adjustment (Small size) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key again to stop the operation.
Y TRIMMER Trimmer registration position 50 - 150 100
[Display items]
REG L *1 adjustment (Large size)
Z TRIMMER Trimmer cut position 50 - 150 100 Display Content
CUT S *1 adjustment (Small size) TRSH_M Horizontal transport motor
AA TRIMMER Trimmer cut position 50 - 150 100 TRSV_M Vertical transport motor
CUT L *1 adjustment (Large size) PLOUT2_M No. 2 pull-out motor
PLOUT1_M No. 1 pull-out motor
*1: Setting can be made only when the trimmer unit is installed.
FEED2_M No. 2 paper feed motor
*2: Not saved when the punch is not installed. FEED1_M No. 1 paper feed motor
PIKUP2_M No. 2 pickup motor
PIKUP1_M No. 2 pickup motor
3-30 TRYLFT2M No. 2 lift motor
TRYLFT1M No. 1 lift motor
Purpose Operation check
Function (Purpose) Inserter sensor check
Section Inserter
Operation/Procedure 3-40
1) When each sensor is turned ON, the sensor name displayed Purpose Operation check
on the screen is highlighted. Function (Purpose) Paper folding unit sensor check
2) Use the touch panel scroll key to shift between pages. Section Paper folding unit
Display Sensor name
Operation/Procedure
INSENT Inlet port sensor 1) When each sensor is turned ON, the sensor name displayed
INSOUT Paper exit sensor on the screen is highlighted.
VTRS2 No. 2 vertical transport sensor 2) Use the touch panel scroll key to shift between pages.
VTRS1 No. 1 vertical transport sensor
PLOUT2 No. 2 pull-out sensor Sensor name Content
PLOUT1 No. 1 pull-out sensor (Display)
INSFEED2 No. 2 paper feed sensor FLENTRY Paper reception start request
INSFEED1 No. 1 paper feed sensor FLEXIT_ACK Paper exit start response
NEREND1 No. 1 near end detection FLS30 Speed reduction timing sensor
FLS31 Separation timing sensor

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 15
 Sensor name Content
Setting Default
(Display) Item/Display Content
range value
FLS32 Folding position accurate sensor
A FOLD S1 A3 A3 Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLS33 Upper stopper section paper sensor position adjustment
FLS25 Lead edge hold guide HP sensor B FOLD S2 A3 A3 Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLS24 Internal 3-fold stopper HP sensor position adjustment
FLS23 Upper stopper section HP sensor C FOLD S1 B4 B4 Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLS22 Paper exit 1 paper sensor position adjustment
FLS28 Internal 3-fold tray (Intermediate tray) HP sensor D FOLD S2 B4 B4 Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLS26 Internal 3-fold tray (Paper exit tray) full sensor position adjustment
FLS27 Internal 3-fold tray (Intermediate tray) paper sensor E FOLD S1 A4R A4R Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLS29 Folding unit pull-out sensor position adjustment
FLORIHAN_LOCK Brushless motor lock detection signal F FOLD S2 A4R A4R Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLFSW1 Front cover sensor position adjustment
FLS20 Inlet port senor G FOLD S1 LDR LDR Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLS21 Paper exit 2 sensor position adjustment
FLSW3-1 DipSW1 H FOLD S2 LDR LDR Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
position adjustment
FLSW3-2 DipSW2
I FOLD S1 LGL LGL Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLSW3-3 DipSW3
position adjustment
FLSW3-4 DipSW4
J FOLD S2 LGL LGL Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLSW3-5 DipSW5
position adjustment
FLSW3-6 DipSW6
K FOLD S1 LTRR Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLSW3-7 DipSW7 LTRR position adjustment
FLSW3-8 DipSW8 L FOLD S2 LTRR Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLSW1 PushSW1 LTRR position adjustment
FLSW2 PushSW2 M FOLD IN T1 A4R internal 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
FLFAN3_LOCK Power fan lock detection signal A4R folding position adjustment
N FOLD IN T2 A4R internal 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
A4R folding position adjustment
O FOLD IN T1 LTRR internal 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
3-41 LTRR folding position adjustment
Purpose Operation check P FOLD IN T2 LTRR internal 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
LTRR folding position adjustment
Function (Purpose) Paper fold unit individual load check
Q FOLD OUT A4R external 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
Section Paper folding unit T1 A4R folding position adjustment
Operation/Procedure R FOLD OUT A4R external 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
T2 A4R folding position adjustment
1) Press the name of the signal to which a load is applied with the
S FOLD OUT LTRR external 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
touch panel key.
T1 LTRR folding position adjustment
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation. T FOLD OUT LTRR external 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
3) Press [EXECUTE] key again to stop the operation. T2 LTRR folding position adjustment
U FOLD Q1 A4R 4-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
[Display item] A4R position adjustment
No,/Display Content V FOLD Q2 A4R 4-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
1 FLSOL2 Folding/Straight branch solenoid A4R position adjustment
2 FLSOL3 Separation solenoid W FOLD Q1 LTRR 4-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
3 FLSOL5 Internal 3-fold stopper solenoid LTRR position adjustment
4 FLM11 Folding transport motor X FOLD Q2 LTRR 4-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
LTRR position adjustment
5 FLM15 Folding position adjustment motor
Y FOLD Q1 LGL LGL 4-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
6 FLM13 Outlet port motor 2
position adjustment
7 FLM14 Outlet port motor 1
Z FOLD Q2 LGL LGL 4-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
8 FLM5 Inlet port motor
position adjustment
9 FLSOL4 Internal 3-fold tray branch solenoid
AA FOLD H1 A4R A4R 2-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
10 FLM8 Upper stopper motor position adjustment
11 FLM9 Internal 3-fold stopper adjustment motor AB FOLD H1 LTRR 2-fold first position 50 - 150 100
12 FLM10 Lead edge hold guide motor LTRR adjustment
13 FLM7 Internal 3-fold tray (Intermediate tray) motor AC FOLD IN S Z-fold X position fine 46 - 53 50
14 FLCL3 Folding position adjustment clutch (Normal) FINE adjustment designation data
15 FLCL4 Folding position adjustment clutch (Reverse) AD FOLD IN T Internal 3-fold X position fine 36 - 60 48
FINE adjustment designation data
AE FOLD OUT T External 3-fold X position 36 - 60 48
FINE fine adjustment designation
3-42 data
AF FOLD Q1 4-fold X position fine 46 - 60 48
Purpose Adjustment
FINE adjustment designation data
Function (Purpose) Paper folding unit adjustment AG FOLD Q2 4-fold Y position fine 50 - 60 52
Section Paper folding unit FINE adjustment designation data
AH FOLD H FINE 2-fold X position fine 46 - 54 50
Operation/Procedure
adjustment designation data
1) Select an adjustment item with the touch panel scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 16
 Variation
Item Content
value
N When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.
O When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
Variation a is decreased.
Item Content P When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
value
A When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm b is increased.
a is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of b is decreased.
a is decreased.
B When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.
C When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased.
D When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm Variation
b is increased. Item Content
value
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
Q When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is decreased.
a is increased.
E When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is increased. a is decreased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
R When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is decreased.
b is increased.
F When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is increased. b is decreased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
S When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is decreased.
a is increased.
G When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is increased. a is decreased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
T When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is decreased.
b is increased.
H When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is increased. b is decreased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.
I When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased.
J When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.
K When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of Variation
Item Content
a is decreased. value
L When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm U When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased. a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased. a is decreased.
V When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.
W When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased.
X When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
Variation b is decreased.
Item Content
value
Y When the adjustment value is increased, the length of
M When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm a is increased.
a is increased. 0.1mm
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of a is decreased.
a is decreased.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 17
 Variation
Item Content Variation
value Item Content
value
Z When the adjustment value is increased, the length of
AF When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
b is increased.
0.1mm a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.
a is decreased.

Variation
Item Content
value Variation
Item Content
AA When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm value
b is increased. AG When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of b is increased.
b is decreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
AB When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm b is decreased.
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.

Variation
Item Content
value
AH When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
a is increased.
Variation When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
Item Content
value a is decreased.
AC When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased. 3-50
Purpose Operation check
Function (Purpose) Decurler sensor check
Section Decurler
Operation/Procedure
1) When each sensor is turned ON, the sensor name displayed
on the screen is highlighted.
Item Content Variation
value
2) Use the touch panel scroll key to shift between pages.
AD When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
No,/Sensor name (Display) Content
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of 1 DCS100 Decurler unit transport path sensor
a is decreased. 2 DCTRS_MOT_FAULT Decurler transport motor driver IC error
detection signal
3 DCSW100 Decurler unit front cover switch
4 DCMOT_FAN_LOCK Decurler unit fan 3 alarm signal
5 DCTOP_FAN_LOCK Decurler unit fan 1 alarm signal
6 DCBTM_FAN_LOCK Decurler unit fan 2 alarm signal
7 DCSW1-1 DIPSW1detection
8 DCSW1-2 DIPSW2 detection
9 DCSW1-3 DIPSW3 detection
Variation 10 DCSW1-4 DIPSW4 detection
Item Content
value
11 DCSW2 PUSHSW detection
AE When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
12 PDPPD1 Finisher paper relay paper transport
a is increased.
detector 1
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
13 PDPPD2 Finisher paper relay paper transport
a is decreased.
detector 2
14 PDOS Finisher paper relay cover open/close
sensor
15 FFANLK Finisher fan motor lock detection

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 18
3-51
Purpose Operation check 4-3
Function (Purpose) Decurler individual load check Purpose Operation test/check
Section Decurler unit Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
Operation/Procedure in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and
1) Press the name of the signal to which a load is applied with the the control circuit of those.
touch panel key. Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation. Operation/Procedure
3) Press [EXECUTE] key again to stop the operation. 1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
[Display item] touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
No./Display Content
1 DCM100 Decurler transport motor The selected load performs the operation.
2 DCFAN100 Decurler unit fan 1 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
3 DCFAN101 Decurler unit fan 2
A4LCC
4 DCFAN103 Decurler unit fan 3
5 PDPTM Finisher paper relay paper transport motor Display Content
6 PDPGS Finisher paper relay paper gate solenoid LPFM LCC transport motor
LLM LCC lift motor
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
LTRC LCC transport clutch
4 A3LCC
Display Content
4-2
LPFM LCC transport motor
Purpose Operation test/check LLM LCC lift motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
sors and detectors in the desk/large capac- LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
ity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of LTRC LCC transport clutch
those. LTLED LCC tray LED lamp
LTLS LCC tray lock solenoid
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
LFAN LCC separation auxiliary fan
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active 4-5
are highlighted. Purpose Operation test/check
A4LCC sensor Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the LCC
Display Content
paper transport clutch (LTRC).
LPFD LCC transport detector Section Large capacity tray (LCC)
LUD LCC tray upper limit detector Operation/Procedure
LDD LCC tray lower limit detector Check the ON operation
LPED LCC tray paper empty detector
Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.
LCLD LCC tray open/close detector
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection switch Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
LRE LCC lift motor encoder the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
L24VM LCC24V power monitor highlighted.
LLSW LCC upper limit switch Check the OFF operation
LCCD LCC main unit connection detection Press the highlighted button which is ON.
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
A3LCC sensor
returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
Display Content display is maintained.
LPFD LCC transport detector
LUD LCC tray upper limit detector Button Content
LDD LCC tray lower limit detector LTRC A4LCC, A3LCC, multi-stage LCT transport clutch
LPED LCC tray paper empty detector
LCLD LCC tray open/close detector
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection switch
LRE LCC lift motor encoder
L24VM LCC24V power monitor
LLSW LCC upper limit switch
LPUSW LCC paper upper surface detection switch
LRRSW LCC reverse winding detection switch
LTLSW LCC tray lift switch
LTLD LCC tray lock sensor
LIPSW LCC illegal paper detection SW
LTOD LCC main unit connection detection

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 19
 5-3
5
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
5-1
lamp and the control circuit.
Purpose Operation test/check
Section Scanner (reading)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
Operation/Procedure
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
cuit. 1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Operation panel
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX - Descriptions of loads (for DSPF)
MIN - the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted. Display Content
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are OC COPY LAMP OC copy lamp
checked. DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp

ǂǂNO.05-01
ǂǂǂSIMULATION
7(67
5-4
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis-
charge lamp and the control circuit.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Item name Content
7(67
DL1 Discharge lamp
PTDL Before-transfer discharge lamp

6
6-1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits.
5-2
Section Paper transport/Paper exit section
Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
lamp and the control circuit. 1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Fusing
The selected load performs the operation.
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
Load operation check method:
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF. there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. sound.
Heater lamp operation check method:
Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray, and the
lighting status of each heater lamp can be checked through the
clearance between the fusing pressure release drive gear and the
frame fusing section.

Display Content
HL_UM Heater lamp main (Front surface of paper heat roller)
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub (Front surface of paper heat roller)
HL_UW Upper assist heater lamp (Warm-up)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 20
 Item display name Content 6-3
Transport/ PFM PS front motor Purpose Operation test/check
process RRM Registration motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the transfer
POMF Paper exit motor (normal rotation)(*1)
unit and the control circuit.
POMR Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)(*1)
FUM Fusing motor Section Process (Transfer)
WTM Waste toner transport motor Operation/Procedure
PTRC1 Tray vertical transport clutch 1) Select the item to operation checked with the touch panel key.
PTRC2 Vertical transport clutch upper
PSPS Detachment solenoid 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
HPFM Horizontal transport motor The selected load performs the operation.
TTRC Tandem transport clutch When [EXCUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Paper feed CPFM Paper feed motor
T1LUM Tandem tray 1 lift motor Button Content Remarks
T2LUM Tandem tray 2 lift motor PAGE1 JOINT Transfer unit pressure welding
C3LUM Tray 3 lift motor RELEASE Transfer unit estrangement
C4LUM Tray 4 lift motor PAGE2 JOINT Transfer unit pressure welding Rotary
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch movement
T1PUC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch RELEASE Transfer unit estrangement
T2PUC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch Rotary movement
C3PUC Tray 3 paper feed clutch
C4PUC Tray 4 paper feed clutch 6-4
MPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid Purpose Operation test/check
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid
T1PUS Tray 1 pickup solenoid
Function (Purpose) Used to check the cleaning operation of the
T2PUS Tray 2 pickup solenoid
main charger.
C3PUS Tray 3 pickup solenoid Section Process
C4PUS Tray 4 pickup solenoid Operation/Procedure
*1: If "Normal rotation" and "Reverse rotation" of a same load are 1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
displayed as different items, when the both are selected at the 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
same time, "Normal rotation" is performed. In addition, a 3) When cleaner movement is finished normally, [OK] is dis-
change in the rotating direction is accepted only when the [Link] an error is finished, one of [NG] is displayed.
operation is stopped. * When I stop it forcibly, [INTERRUPTION] is displayed.
* As for the counter level, cleaning movement is improved after
arrival by R → F.
6-2
Purpose Operation test/check 6-90
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan Purpose Setting
motor and its control circuit. Function (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory
Section Others setting. (The scanner is set to the lock
Operation/Procedure enable position)
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. Section Scanner
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
The selected load performs the operation. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped.
Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
Load operation check method:
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, 7
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound. 7-1
Display Content Purpose Setting
POFM1 Paper exit section cooling fan motor 1 Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
POFM3 Paper exit section cooling fan motor 3 aging.
POFM4 Exit tray cooling fan motor Section Others
OZFM Ozone fan motor
Operation/Procedure
PSFM Power source cooling fan motor
LSUFM LSU fan motor 1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel key.
PROFM Process cooling fan motor 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
FUFM Fusing cooling fan motor 1,2 The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
DVFM1 Development cooling fan motor 1 The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
DVFM2 Development cooling fan motor 2 after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
POFM56 Paper cooling fan motor F,R
AGING Aging operation setup
INTERVAL Intermittent operation setting
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection ignoring setting
FUSING DISABLE Fusing unit ignoring setting
WARMUP DISABLE Warming up ignoring setting

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 21
 DV CHECK DISABLE Developing unit ignoring setting 3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
SHADING DISABLE Shading correction operation omitting setting label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment omitting setting * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
7-6 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Setting The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging output for 30 sec.
cycle. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Section Setting Default
Button Item Display Content
Operation/Procedure range value
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10- MIDDLE A MIDDLE K developing 0 - 700 506
key. SPEED bias set value at
DVB_K middle speed
2) Press [OK] key.
LOW A LOW K developing 0 - 700 506
The time entered in procedure 1) is set. SPEED bias set value at
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec). DVB_K low speed 1
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here- *The low-speed setting is coordinated at the same time by doing
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. adjustment of middle speed.
Item Display Setting range Default value
A CYCLE TIME(SEC) 1 - 900 3 8-2
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
7-8 Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
Purpose Operation display the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
Section low speed are also adjusted simultane-
Operation/Procedure ously.
Press [EXECUTE] key. Section Process (Charging)
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for Operation/Procedure
warm-up is displayed 1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited. panel.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
7-12 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
Purpose Operation test/check on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
setting (for aging operation) item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Section DSPF 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
(Setting range:0 - 255) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved. Default value
Item/ Setting
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here- Button Content
Display range 65cpm 75cpm
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. MIDDLE A MIDDLE K charging/grid 150 - 669 673
SPEED bias set value at 850
Setting Default GB_K middle speed
Item Display Content
range value LOW A LOW1 K charging/grid 150 - 669
A ORIGINALS Document scan quantity 0 - 255 0 SPEED bias set value at 850
specification (for aging) GB_K low speed 1

*The low-speed setting is coordinated at the same time by doing

8 adjustment of middle speed.

8-1
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage in each print mode
and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simultane-
ously.
Section Process (Developing)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
panel.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 22
 8-6
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transfer electric current and the control
circuit.
Section Process (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.

Setting Default value

Item/Display Contents
range 65cpm 75cpm
A TC PLAIN BW SPX Transfer bias reference value Standard paper 1 Front surface 0-255 113 129
B TC PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 0-255 113 129
C TC PLAIN 2 BW SPX Standard paper 2 Front surface 0-255 113 129
D TC PLAIN 2 BW DPX Back surface 0-255 113 129
E TC HEAVY1 BW SPX Heavy paper 1 Front surface 0-255 129 129
F TC HEAVY1 BW DPX Back surface 0-255 129 129
G TC HEAVY 2 BW SPX Heavy paper 2 Front surface 0-255 129 129
H TC HEAVY 2 BW DPX Back surface 0-255 129 129
I TC HEAVY3 BW Heavy paper 3 0-255 113 113
J TC HEAVY4 BW Heavy paper 4 0-255 113 113
K TC OHP BW OHP 0-255 113 113
L TC THIN BW Thin paper 0-255 97 129
M TC GLOSSY PAPER BW Glossy paper 0-255 129 129
N TC LABEL BW Label 0-255 129 129
O TC FRONT EDGE LOW SPX Transfer front edge bias Low speed Front surface 0-255 0 0
P TC FRPNT EDGE LOW DPX Back surface 0-255 0 0
Q TC FRQNT EDGE MIDDLE SPX Middle speed Front surface 0-255 0 0
R TC FRRNT EDGE MIDDLE DPX Back surface 0-255 0 0
S TC ADSORPTION LOW Transfer current value at adsorption Low speed 0-255 113 113
T TC ADSORPTION MIDDLE Middle speed 0-255 113 129
U TC BACKEND LOW SPX Transfer rear bias Low speed Front surface 0-255 0 0
V TC BACKEND LOW DPX Back surface 0-255 0 0
W TC BACKEND MIDDLE SPX Middle speed Front surface 0-255 0 0
X TC BACKEND MIDDLE DPX Back surface 0-255 0 0
Y TC INTERVAL LOW Current value between papers Low speed 0-255 113 129
Z TC INTERVAL MIDDLE Middle speed 0-255 113 129
AA TC CLEANING AC Transfer cleaning AC bias Middle speed 0-255 218 218
AB TC CLEANING DC Transfer cleaning DC bias Middle speed 0-255 36 36
AC TC CLEANING ROLLER + Cleaning positive bias Middle speed 0-255 129 129
AD TC CLEANING ROLLER - Cleaning negative bias Middle speed 0-255 129 129
AE PTDL SPX Discharges before transfer operation Middle speed Front surface 0-255 15 20
AF PTDL DPX Back surface 0-255 15 20

8-10
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Main charger total current output setting
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.

Current value
Setting Default
Button Item Display Content Minimum
range value Variable range
unit
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (middle speed mode) K 50 - 100 70 -500 - -1000A 10A
LOW1 A LOW1 SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (low speed 1 mode) K 50 - 100 70 -500 - -1000A 10A

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 23
 10-2
9 Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
9-2 remaining quantity sensor and the control
Purpose Operation test/check circuit.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Section Toner supply section
sors and detectors in the paper reverse Operation/Procedure
section (duplex section) and its control cir- Press [EXECUTE] key to display "No toner remaining" or "Toner
cuit. remaining" in the toner hopper.
Section Duplex No toner remaining: Reversing display during practice -Normal dis-
Operation/Procedure play-turn into reversing display
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- Toner remaining: As reversing display during the practice
played.
Display Content
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active TFSD Hopper remaining quantity sensor
are highlighted.

APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1

APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2 13
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close detector
13--
9-3 Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in Section
the paper reverse section (duplex section)
Operation/Procedure
and its control circuit.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Duplex
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. Target trouble code Content
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. U1-01 FAX Battery trouble
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
14
Display Content
ADUM1 ADU motor 1 14--
ADUM2 ADU motor 2
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5
troubles.
10 Section
Operation/Procedure
10-1 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Operation test/check 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner Target trouble code Content
supply mechanism (toner motor) and the H3-00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM)
related circuit. H3-02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US)
Section Toner supply section H4-00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM)
Operation/Procedure H4-02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US)
H4-30 Upper main thermistor differential input
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
abnormality (TH_UM)
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
H4-32 Upper sub thermistor differential input abnormality
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (TH_US1)
The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec. H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
toner cartridges. 15
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing 15--
unit, resulting in over toner. Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)

Display Content Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6" trouble.
TNHM1 Toner hopper motor (Supply) Section LCC
TNHM2 Toner hopper motor (Stirring) Operation/Procedure
TNM Toner motor (Bottle)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
TNM_H Toner motor (Bottle) (High speed)
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 24
 Display
Target trouble code Content
Target Default range/
U6-09 LCC lift motor trouble Display Description
counter value No. of
F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble digits
F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble Print PRINT (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
print counter
Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
16 filing document filing
print counter
Other OTHER (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
16-- other counter
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. 22-2
Section MFPC PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of miss
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. feed and troubles. (When the number of
total jam is considerably great, it is judged
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
as necessary for repair.)
Section
21 Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.

21-1 Display Content Default value

Purpose Setting MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter 0
RSPF/DSPF JAM SPFJAM counter 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
TROUBLE Trouble counter 0
Section
Operation/Procedure
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance
counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean- 22-3
ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
clarify. Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch misfeed count of each position.
panel. * Presumption of the faulty point by this
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. data is possible.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Section
Operation/Procedure
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value The paper jam and miss feed history is displayed from the latest
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: Default 400K one up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
COUNTER counter (Total) 1 - 500: 1K - 500K
(TOTAL) 999: Free
22-4
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
22 Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
tory.
22-1
Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/ Operation/Procedure
Check
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
section and each operation mode.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Section 22-5
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Others
Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each
Display unit (section).
Target
Display Description
Default range/ Section Firmware
counter value No. of
Operation/Procedure
digits
Total output TOTAL OUT Total output 0 Max. 8 The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.
quantity (BW) quantity of black When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
and white check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use quantity 0 Max. 8
quantity of color Display Contents
TOTAL (COL) Total use quantity 0 Max. 8 S/N Serial No.(The codes for November and
of black and white December are "X" and "Y" respectively.)
Copy COPY (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8 BUNDLE Bundle version
copy counter ICU-MAIN ICU (Main section)
ASIC-MAIN ASIC (Main section)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 25
 Display Contents 22-8
ASIC-SUB ASIC (Sub section)
IMAGE DATA Image processing data
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
LANGUAGE Language support data version Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations
LANGUAGE(LIST) Language data for list printing (counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF,
EOSA ESCP font ROM and the scan (reading) unit.
UICONTENTS Contents data for display Section
SIM-TEXT Language data for simulation
Operation/Procedure
PCL(PROFILE) Color profile data
POWER-CON Power controller program
The counter values of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scanner
FONT BARCODE Font data for bar code
related counters are displayed.
FONT PS PS font data
Display Content
FONT PCL PCL font data
SPF Document feed quantity
FONT SPDL Simple PDL font data
SCAN Scan counter
FONT OFFICE Office Direct font data
STAPLER Staple counter
WATER MARK Water mark data
PUNCHER Puncher counter
E-MANUAL Users manual data
STAMP Stamp counter
OCR-DIC OCR dictionary data
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
SCU SCU
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
DSPF DSPF
COVER Cover open/close counter
PCU PCU
HP_ON HP detection count
LCT / LCC / LCC
TRIMMER Trimmer counter
LCT(A LCC)
FOLDING Paper folding counter
FINISHER / Finisher
FINISHER(3KFIN) / INSERTER Inserter counter (Tray 1)
FINISHER(INNER) / INSERTER2 Inserter counter (Tray 2)
FINISHER(FIN100) INSERTER OFF Inserter offline counter
FIN-SUB 3K Finisher sub DECURLER De-curler counter
SADDLE / Saddle unit OC LAMP TIME Displays the total lighting time of the lamp in the
SADDLE(FIN100) OC section.
PUNCH / Punch unit DSPF LAMP TIME Displays the total lighting time of the lamp in the
PUNCH(3K) DSPF section.
TRIMMER Trimmer unit FIN OUTPUT Finisher output counter
INSERTER Inserter STAPLESS STAPLE Stapleless staple counter
FOLDING UNIT Folding unit MANUAL STAPLE Manual staple counter
DECURLER Decurler unit
The lamp lighting time is displayed in ** hours ** minutes.
FAX FAX
FAX OPT1 FAX 1-Line (Option section) The lamp lighting time is accumulated in all the modes.
FAX OPT2 FAX 2-Line (Option section)
FONT UNICODE UniCode font data
22-9
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
22-6 Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check quantity) of each paper feed section.

Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data Section Paper feed, ADU, LCC
(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the Operation/Procedure
firmware version, and the counter list. The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
Section
Display Content
Operation/Procedure
TRAY1 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 1)
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print TRAY2 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 2)
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing. TRAY3 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 3)
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.) TRAY4 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 4)
1) Select the print list mode with 10-key. MFT Manual paper feed counter
LCC LCC paper feed counter
Item Print list mode Print content ADU ADU paper transport counter
DATA PATTERN NO.1 Firmware version, counter data, etc. TRAY1_TTL Accumulated tray 1 paper feed counter
NO.3 Data related to the process control TRAY2_TTL Accumulated tray 2 paper feed counter
2SIDED PRINT 1-SIDED Simplex surface print (Default) TRAY3_TTL Accumulated tray 3 paper feed counter
2-SIDED Duplex surface print TRAY4_TTL Accumulated tray 4 paper feed counter
MFT_TTL Accumulated manual paper feed counter
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step
LCC_TTL Accumulated side LCC paper feed counter
1).
ADU_TTL Accumulated ADU paper feed counter
TRAY1_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 1)
TRAY2_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 2)
TRAY3_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 3)
TRAY4_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 4)
MFT_RETRY Manual paper feed retry counter
LCC_RETRY LCC paper feed retry counter

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 26
22-10 22-11
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/
(option, internal hardware). receive) of FAX.
Section (Only when FAX is installed)
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
The system configuration is displayed. Operation/Procedure
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis- The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
played.) are displayed.

Item display Default

Display content Content Display Content
name value
MACHINE MX-M6570 Main unit FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1) 0
MX-M7570 FAX SEND FAX send counter 0
SPF STANDARD Duplex single pass feeder FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter 0
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1) 0
LCC MX-LC18 A4 large capacity tray SEND TIME FAX send time 0
MX-LC19 A3 large capacity tray RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time 0
PUNCHER MX-PN16B Punch module
MX-PN16C
MX-PN16D
MX-PN13A
22-12
MX-PN13B Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
MX-PN13C Function (Purpose) Used to check the DSPF misfeed positions
MX-PN13D and the number of misfeed at each posi-
FINISHER MX-FN34 3K finisher tion. (When the number of misfeed is con-
MX-FN35 3K saddle finisher siderably great, it can be judged as
MX-FN21 4K finisher (100 sheets staple) necessary for repair.)
MX-FN22 4K saddle finisher
(100 sheets staple)
Section DSPF
MX-FN33 Inner finisher Operation/Procedure
INSERTER MX-CF11 Inserter The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
FOLDING UNIT MX-FD10 Folding unit up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
FAX1 MX-FX11 Facsimile expansion kit
PS STANDARD PS expansion kit
XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit
SECURITY MX-FR60U Data security kit (commercial
version)
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
ICU_PWB *****MB ICU_REUS capacity
(REUS)
ICU_PWB *****MB ICU_SOC capacity
(SOC)
STRAGE *****MB Storage capacity
ICU DRIVER ****MB eMMC capacity
NIC STANDARD NIC
BARCODE MX-PF10 Barcode font kit
INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
ACM(*1) MX-AMX2 Application communication module
EAM(*1) MX-AMX3 External account module
OFFICE DRT STANDARD Office Direct expansion kit
SHC-PDF STANDARD Soft high compression PDF
CURL MX-RB15 Curl correction unit
TRIMMING MX-TM10 Trimming module
(100 sheets saddle finisher)
FOLDING UNIT MX-FD10 Paper folding unit
OCR STANDARD OCR expansion

*1: Option units are displayed only when they are installed.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 27
22-13
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge) and the fusing unit
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process
section are displayed.

Number of Life meter (+/- Number of

Display item Content Counter RPM
use days 1% unit) remaining days
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) MAX. 10 Not displayed MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
PRESSURE ROLLER Pressure roller MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
SEPARATE PAWL(U) Separation pawl upper MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
SEPARATE PAWL(L) Separation pawl lower MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING WEB UNIT(U) Fusing upper web unit MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING WEB UNIT(L) Fusing lower web unit MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TC BELT Transfer belt MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TC ROLLER Transfer roller MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TC CL ROLLER Transfer cleaning roller MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
PS PAPER PS paper dust removing MAX. 10 Not displayed MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter MAX. 10 Not displayed MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DEVE CTRG(K) Developer cartridge K MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM(K) Drum cartridge K MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MAIN CHARGER(K) Main charger K MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MC CLEAN(K) MC cleaner (K) Not displayed MAX. 10 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
DRUM BLADE(K) Drum blade K MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TONER CTRG(K) Toner cartridge K MAX. 10 MAX. 10 MAX. 10 0 - 100(%) Not displayed

*1: For outside the range, "-----" is displayed.

22-14
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner
cartridge.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.

Accumulated No. of Accumulated No. of near Accumulated No. of Remaining quantity

Display item Content installed cartridges (Unit) near end (Unit) end (Unit) (Unit: %)
INSTALL NN END END RESIDUAL
TONER (K) Toner cartridge use counter (K) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510 0-25%
25-50%
50-75%
75-100%

22-18
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed.

Display item
Content
Item name Date
START Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time of operation start)
END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time of operation end)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 28
22-19
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters
related to the scan - image send.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner
Change the display with scroll key.

No. of Default
Display Content
digits value
Network scanner NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity counter (B/W scan job) 8 0
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity counter (Color scan job) 8 0
Internet FAX INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Number of internet FAX output 8 0
INTERNET FAX SEND OP Number of internet FAX sending page 8 0
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE Number of internet FAX receive 8 0
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send 8 0
E-Mail MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send 8 0
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send 8 0
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send 8 0
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage 8 0
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job) 8 0
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) 8 0
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (Color) 8 0

22-40 22-41
Purpose Error contents display Purpose JAM contents display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the Function (Purpose) Used to display the JAM code list and the
contents. contents.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the main error code. 1) Select the main error code.
The sub error code and the contents are displayed. The sub error code and the contents are displayed.

22-42
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the JAM/trouble data
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
2) Printable with [START] keys.

Counter Content Max.

JAM CODE/ number
Display data TOTAL TOTAL Remarks
Display Content TROUBLE DATE/TIME of
COUNT(BW) COUNT(CL)
CODE histories
PAPER JAM PAPER JAM Number of Generated Generated Total output Total output The head is the latest, and the
COUNT machine JAM JAM code date/time quantity of quantity of 50 bottom is the oldest. The max.
troubles (Machine) (YY/MM/DD black and color number of histories is 50.
SPF JAM SPF JAM Number of Generated HH:MM:SS) white When 50 is exceeded, the
COUNT SPF JAM JAM code 50 oldest one is not displayed
troubles (SPF) sequentially.
TROUBLE TROUBLE Number of Generated The head is the latest, and the
COUNT troubles trouble code bottom is the oldest. The max.
number of histories is 30.
30
When 30 is exceeded, the
oldest one is not displayed
sequentially.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 29
 Detail display content of HISTORY1
22-43
Display Content
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
NON Inch series No paper size
Function (Purpose) JAM data details display WLG fixed form Double Legal
Section WLR Double Legal-R
Operation/Procedure LD Ledger
LDR Ledger-R (Double Letter)
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
LG Legal
When [COUNTER] key is pressed, the JAM counter, the paper LGR Legal-R
feed counter, and the paper feed retry counter are displayed. FC Foolscap
When [HISTORY1] key is pressed, the JAM history is dis- FCR Foolscap-R
played. LT Letter
When [HISTORY2] key is pressed, the temperature and LTR Letter-R
humidity data are displayed. IV Invoice (Mini)
2) Printable with [START] keys. IVR Invoice-R (Mini)
EC Executive
Display data and contents (COUNTER) ECR Executive-R
Item Content A3W A3W (12x18 in)
PAPER JAM COUNT Number of machine JAM troubles AWR A3W (12x18 in)-R
PAPER FEED COUNTER Paper feed counter (Similar with 012 22x17
SIM22-09 display content) 013 22x17R
PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER Paper feed retry counter (Similar 014 22x34
with SIM22-09 display content) 015 22x34R
016 34x44
Display data and contents (HISTORY1) 017 34x44R
Item Content Description 018 44x68
NO No History number 019 44x68R
JAM CODE JAM Code Jam code main 01A 9x12
DATE/TIME Date/Time Occurrence date 01B 9x12R
TOTAL_BW Total Count (BW) Total counter (B/W) 01C 13x19
TOTAL_CL Total Count (CL) Total counter (color) 01D 13x19R
P_S (*1) Paper Size Paper size MLG Mexican-Legal
P_T (*1) Paper Type Paper type MLR Mexican-Legal-R
JOB (*1) Job Mode Job mode ALG Asian-Legal
JN Job No First after JOB start or not ALR Asian -Legal-R
OF Offset Paper exit: Offset EXT Other Extra (Special)
EP Exit Position Paper exit: Exit position A1 AB series A1
PC Punch Paper exit: Punch A1R fixed form A1R
SP Staple Paper exit: Staple A2 A2
A2R A2R
*1: Refer to the detail display content of HISTORY1. A3 A3
Display data and contents (HISTORY2) A3R A3R
A4 A4
Display item Contents A4R A4R
NO. History number A5 A5
DATA/TIME Occurrence date A5R A5R
TH_RA Room temperature sensor temperature A6 A6
D value
A6R A6R
HUD_RA Room humidity sensor humidity
B3 B3
D value
B3R B3R
TH_CL Process temperature sensor temperature
B4 B4
D value
B4R B4R
HUD_CL Process humidity sensor humidity
D value B5 B5
TH_UM Fusing upper main thermistor temperature B5R B5R
D value B6 B6
TH_UM_CS Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation) B6R B6R
temperature 054 A0x2
D value 055 A0x2 R
TH_US1 Fusing upper sub thermistor 1 temperature A0 A0
D value A0R A0R
TH_US1_CS Fusing upper sub thermistor 1 (compensation) B0 B0
temperature B0R B0R
D value B1 B1
TH_US1_D Fusing upper sub thermistor 1 (differential) AD value B1R B1R
TH_US2 Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 temperature B2R B2
D value
B2R B2R
TH_LM Fusing lower main thermistor temperature
K8 K8
D value
K8R K8R
K16 K16
16R K16R
K32 K32
32R K32R

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 30
Display Content Display Content
066 AB series SRA3 0DC Oversea Inch series panorama size
067 fixed form SRA3R 0DD special Inch series name card large
068 SRA4 0DE (Envelope) Inch series identification photo
069 SRA4R 0DF Inch series name card small
06A 318 x 469 mm 0EC Other Extra (Special large size)
06B 469 x 318 mm 0ED Extra (Special small size)
06C 234 x 318 mm 0EF Extra (Special/Not fixed)
06D 318 x 234 mm 0F0 Long size
06E 312 x 440 mm 0FF JAM (Used for canceling temporary charging in
06F 440 x 312 mm a coin vendor.)
070 220 x 312 mm
Display content detail: Paper type (P_T)
071 312 x 220 mm
082 Domestic DBL Postcard Display Content
083 special DBL Postcard-R UST User type
084 (Envelope) Postcard LHP Letter head paper
085 Postcard-R PNP Perforated sheet
087 119 x 277 mm RCL Recycled paper
089 120 x 235 mm COL Color paper
08B 90 x 205 mm PLN Standard paper
08D 90 x 185 mm PRP Pre printed
08F 240 x 332 mm OHP OHP Transparency
091 216 x 277 mm HV Heavy paper
093 197 x 267 mm LBL Label sheet
095 190 x 240 mm ENV Envelope
097 162 x 229 mm HG Postcard
099 142 x 205 mm TAB Tab sheet
09B 119 x 197 mm THN Thin paper
09D 120 x 176 mm US1 User type 1
09F 114 x 162 mm US2 User type 2
0A1 98 x 148 mm US3 User type 3
0A3 105 x 235 mm US4 User type 4
0A5 95 x 217 mm US5 User type 5
0A7 98 x 190 mm US6 User type 6
0A9 92 x 165 mm US7 User type 7
0AA AB series E-version US8 User type 8
0AB AB series L-version US9 User type 9
0AC AB series panorama size USA User type 10
0AD AB series name card size USB User type 11
0AE AB series identification photo HV2 Heavy paper 2
0AF AB series name card small PL2 Plain paper 2 (not used)
0B0 Other A3 width HV3 Heavy paper 3
0B1 B4 width HV4 Heavy paper 4
0B2 A4 width GLS Glossy paper
0B3 A3 width (Long size)
0B4 B4 width (Long size) Display content detail: Job mode (JOB)
0B5 A4 width (Long size) Display Content
0BC Custom (Large size) SHD Shading.
0BD Custom (Small size) PCL Process control
0BF Custom SIM Test mode (Sim)
0C2 Oversea Monarch ICP Interruption copy
0C3 special Monarch-R CP Copy
0C4 (Envelope) DL FXS FAX send scan
0C5 DL-R AXS AXIS
0C6 C4 FXP FAX reception print
0C7 C4-R PR Printer
0C8 C5 FXC FAX communication report print
0C9 C5-R 00A Zaurus print
0CA C6 SLF Self/Test print
0CB C6-R 00C Document counter
0CC C65 RMT Remote maintenance
0CD C65-R 00E SIM 52-01
0CE ISOB5 00F Tandem (Cordless handset)
0CF ISOB5-R CFP Confidential print
0D0 Size6-1/2 NET Network scanner
0D1 Size6-1/2-R PRF Proof print
0D2 Size9
0D3 Size9-R
0D8 Com-10
0D9 Com-10-R
0DA Inch series E-version
0DB Inch series L-version

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 31
22-90
23
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
23-2
Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
1) Change the display with scroll key. paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel. troubles of misfeed is considerably great,
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list. the judgment is made that repair is
required.)
Category Item Content
Section
Machine status MACHINE STATUS LIST Machine status list
list (*1) Operation/Procedure
Printer test PCL SYMBOL SET LIST SPDL symbol set list Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
page PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST SPDL internal font list The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed.
PCL EXTENDED FONT SPDL extended font list
LIST Item Button display Content
PS FONT LIST PS internal font list DATA PATTERN NO.1 JAM/Trouble history print
KANJI FONT LIST PS KANJI font list NO.2 Paper feed counter, JAM history
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST PS extended font list details, and temperature/humidity
NIC PAGE NIC page history print
Address INDIVIDUAL LIST Address registration list
registration list GROUP LIST Group list
(*1) MEMORY BOX LIST Memory box list
Document DOCUMENT FILING Document filing folder 23-80
filing list (*1) FOLDER LIST list Purpose Operation test/check
Common PAPER SETTING LIST Paper setting list
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed
MACHINE Machine identification
and paper transport in the paper feed sec-
IDENTIFICATION settings list
tion and the paper transport section. Used
SETTINGS LIST
to output the list of the operation status of
OPERATION SETTINGS Operation settings list
LIST the sensor and the detectors in the paper
KEYBOARD SETTINGS Keyboard settings list feed section and the paper transport sec-
LIST tion.
DEVICE CONTROL LIST Device control list Section Paper feed, Paper transport
Home screen HOME SCREEN LIST Home screen list Operation/Procedure
Copy setting COPY SETTINGS LIST Copy settings list
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
Printer setting PRINTER SETTINGS LIST Printer settings list
paper transport is outputted.
FAX/Image METADATA SET LIST Meta data set list
send SCAN SETTINGS LIST Scan settings list Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors
FAX SETTINGS LIST Fax settings list in the paper feed and transport section.
I-FAX SETTINGS LIST Internet fax settings list The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the
Document DOCUMENT FILING Document filing settings latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.
filing list SETTINGS LIST list Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending
SHARP OSA SHARP OSA SETTINGS SHARP OSA settings list on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen-
setting LIST sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ.
Network NETWORK SETTINGS Network settings list
setting LIST JAM CODE JAM code
Security SECURITY SETTINGS Security settings list DATE / TIME JAM occurrence date/time
setting LIST MODE Printing mode when JAM occurs
Energy save ENERGY SAVE LIST Energy save settings list SIZE Paper size
setting
TYPE Paper type
Image quality IMAGE QUALITY Image quality
PIC TRAY Paper feed tray
adjustment ADJUSTMENT LIST adjustment list
OUT TRAY Paper exit tray
Image sending IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
INF1 (ILLEGAL) Illegal detection information
activity report ACTIVITY REPORT (FAX) report (FAX)
INF2(SENSOR) Sensor information
IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
ACTIVITY REPORT (SCAN) report (scanner)
IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
ACTIVITY REPORT report (Internet FAX)
(INTERNET FAX)
Transfer table ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER Receive rejection
list LIST number table
ALLOW/REJECT MAIL & Receive rejection/allow
DOMAIN NAME LIST address
INBOUND ROUTING LIST Transfer table list
DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST To administrator transfer
list

*1: When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
model, this setting is invalid.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 32
 Display Display
24 INSERTER Inserter counter (Tray 1)
INSERTER2 Inserter counter (Tray 2)
INSERTER OFFLINE Inserter offline counter
24-1
DECURLER De-curler counter
Purpose Data clear OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou- DSPF LAMP TIME DSPF section lamp total lighting time
ble counter. (After completion of mainte- STAPLELESS STAPLE Stapleless staple counter
nance, clear the counters.) MANUAL STALPLE Manual staple counter
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 24-4
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Purpose Data clear
3) Press [YES] key. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
The target counter is cleared. printer counters of the transport unit and
the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte-
MACHINE Machine JAM counter nance, clear the counters.)
SPF DSPF JAM counter
Section
TROUBLE Trouble counter
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
24-2
3) Press [YES] key.
Purpose Data clear The target counter is cleared.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
ber of prints) of each paper feed section. Display Contents
Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter)
Section
ALL Maintenance counter (Total) (Number
Operation/Procedure of use days)
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Fusing FUSING Fusing roller (Counter)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. ROLLER Fusing roller (Accumulated traveling
distance)
3) Press [YES] key.
Fusing roller (Number of use days)
The target counter is cleared.
PRESSURE Pressure roller (Counter)
ROLLER Pressure roller (Accumulated traveling
Display Content
distance)
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
Pressure roller (Number of use days)
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
SEPARATE Upper separation pawl (Counter)
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
PAWL U Upper separation pawl (Accumulated
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
traveling distance)
MFT Manual paper feed counter (*1)
Upper separation pawl (Number of use
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC or A3 LCC) days)
ADU ADU paper feed counter SEPARATE Lower separation pawl (Counter)
PAWL L Lower separation pawl (Accumulated
*1: Displayed only when the option is installed.
traveling distance)
Lower separation pawl (Number of use
days)
24-3 FUSING WEB Fusing upper web unit (Counter)
UNIT U Fusing upper web cleaning send
Purpose Data clear
counter (Counter)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, DSPF, and the Fusing upper web unit (Number of use
scan (reading) unit counter. days)
Section FUSING WEB Fusing lower web unit (Counter)
UNIT L Fusing lower web cleaning send
Operation/Procedure
counter (Counter)
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Fusing lower web unit (Number of use
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. days)
3) Press [YES] key. Transfer TC ROLLER Transfer roller (Counter)
The target counter is cleared. Transfer roller (Accumulated traveling
distance)
Display Display Transfer roller (Number of use days)
SPF Document feed quantity TC CL ROLLER Transfer CL roller (Counter)
SCAN Number of times of scan Transfer CL roller (Accumulated
STAPLER Staple counter traveling distance)
PUNCHER Puncher counter Transfer CL roller (Number of use
days)
STAMP Number of stamps
TC BELT Transfer belt (Counter)
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
Transfer belt (Accumulated traveling
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
distance)
COVER Cover open/close counter
Transfer belt (Number of use days)
HP_ON HP detection count
TRIMMER Trimmer counter
FOLDING Paper folding counter

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 33
 Display Contents
Other PS PAPER PS paper dust removing (Counter) 25
PS paper dust removing (Number of
use days)
25-1
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter (Counter)
Ozone filter (Number of use days) Purpose Operation test/check
Process DRUM K Drum cartridge K (Counter) Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
Drum cartridge K (Accumulated oping section.
traveling distance)
Section Process (Developing section)
Drum cartridge (Number of use days)
Main MAIN Main charger K (Counter) Operation/Procedure
charger CHARGER K Main charger K (Accumulated traveling 1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys.
distance) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Main charger K (Number of use days)
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
MC CLEAN K MC cleaner L (RPM)
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis-
Drum blade DRUM BLADE Drum blade K (Counter)
played.
K Drum blade K (Accumulated traveling
distance) Sensor
Drum blade (Number of use days) name Sensor name
(Display)
* The winding counter for the fusing web cleaning is cleared by
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
being synchronized with the fusing web cleaning feed counter.
TSG_K Toner sensor control voltage input value (K)
* When "MAIN CHARGER K" is cleared, "MC CLEAN K" is also
cleared.
Display Default
Content
item value
LOW Process speed: Low speed Middle
24-5 MIDDLE Process speed: Medium speed speed
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter value
and the toner hopper remaining quantity
25-2
counter. (After replacing developer, clear
these counters.) Purpose Setting
Section Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
density when replacing developer. (Auto-
Operation/Procedure
matic adjustment)
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
3) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure
The target counter is cleared.
1) Confirm power supply OFF.
NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, the counters related to devel- 2) Open the right door. Input the DV unit.
oper are automatically cleared.
3) Power supply ON.
Button 4) Enter the simulation mode and close the right door.
Content
display 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
DV_K Developer cartridge print counter (K) The developing motor rotates for 1 min 40 sec, and the toner den-
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) sity sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level
Number of day that used developer (day) (K) is displayed.
HP_K Toner remaining amount counter in intermediate hopper (K)
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
Hopper loop count (K)
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
NOTE: The "developer cartridge life meter" counter displayed in trol level.
SIM22-13 is not displayed in this simulation, but it is not CAUTION: In case this adjustment stops before finish (by turning
cleared when this simulation is executed. the power off etc.), execute the adjustment again. Also
when error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is dis-
played, the reference toner density level is not set nor-
24-35 mally.
Purpose Data clear CAUTION: Do not execute this simulation except when new devel-
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status oper is supplied. If it is executed in other cases, under-
data. toner or overtone may occur, causing a trouble.

Section CAUTION: The toner cartridge must be removed before executing

this simulation.
Operation/Procedure
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the develop-
2) Press [YES] key. ing unit, resulting in overtoner and a trouble.
The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.
CAUTION: Execute without insertion of the toner cartridge.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 34
Result display item name
Item/Display Content
Display Default A 0 YES Paper exit tray: YES
Display item Content
range value 1 NO Paper exit tray: NO
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128
adjustment value at
low speed
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128
26-2
adjustment value at
middle speed Purpose Setting
AT DEVE VO_L_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128 Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large
adjustment control capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size
voltage in low speed is changed, this simulation must be exe-
AT DEVE VO_M_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128 cuted to change the paper size in software.)
adjustment control
voltage in middle Section Paper feed
speed Operation/Procedure
Select a paper size and a weight system to be changed.
Display during execution of the simulation
Sensor Item Setting value Content
name Sensor name TRAY1(TAMDEM) 0 8.5 x 11
(Display) 1 A4
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K) 2 B5
TSG_K Toner sensor control voltage input value (K) A4 LCC 0 8.5 x 11
1 A4
Error content
2 B5
Error G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
Error name Details of error display
display 1 LBS
EE-EL EL abnormality The sensor output level is less than 26, or the
control voltage exceeds 197.
Setting value
EE-EU EU abnormality The sensor output level exceeds 200, or the Destination
TRAY1(TANDEM) A4 LCC G/LBS SET
control voltage is less than 49.
U.S.A 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
EE-EC EC abnormality The sensor output level is outside of 128 +/-
10. CANADA 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
INCH 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
JAPAN B5 A4 GRAM
TAIWAN A4 A4 GRAM
25-4 EUROPE A4 A4 GRAM
U.K. A4 A4 GRAM
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
AUS. A4 A4 GRAM
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the AB A4 A4 GRAM
toner supply quantity. (Not used in the mar- CHINA A4 A4 GRAM
ket.) KOREA A4 A4 GRAM
Section Process BRAZIL A4 A4 GRAM
Operation/Procedure
The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed.
26-3
Purpose Setting
25-10
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check (Setting must be made according to the
Function (Purpose) Used to set the serial no. of the developer/ auditor use conditions.)
drum. (Not used in the market) Section Auditor
Section Process Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure Select an item to be set with the touch panel.

Default
Item/Display Content
value
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
26 AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.

26-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the
right paper exit tray.
Section Paper exit
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
This setting is required to use the right paper exit tray unit.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 35
 Default *2: Details of the vendor mode
Item/Display Content
value Details of the vendor mode
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
AUDITOR vendor is used. Completion Insufficient money during Completion
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode of the copy job of the
(Only the copy mode can specified specified
BW/Color Color
be controlled.) quantity. quantity.
(no money (Money
(Money (No money
P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which remaining) remaining)
remaining) remaining)
signals for the intercard
connected to the PCU are Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
used for communication in MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
parallel I/F. MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
P OTHER Mode for an external MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
auditor connected to the
SCU. Operation 1:
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
(*1) which can be changed in the system setting.
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job Operation 2:
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode Auto clear is not made.
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode
Operation 3:
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF
The display is shifted to the initial screen.
document filing print
OFF No support for the auditor in
document filing print
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF 26-5
performed in the duplex
Purpose Setting
print mode.
OFF Continuous printing is not Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
performed in the duplex counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/
print mode. 11x17 size)
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE Section
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
Operation/Procedure
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
COUNTUP FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection EXIT_ 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
TIMING timing of the paper lead OUT 2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
edge by the sensor after the 1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
paper passes the fusing
3) Press [OK] key.
section is used as the
money charging timing. The set value in step 2) is saved.
FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear Item/Display Content Default value
edge by the sensor after the A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 2
paper passes the fusing C MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
section is used as the E DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
money charging timing.
EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear
edge by the paper exit 26-6
sensor of the right paper
exit tray or of the after Purpose Setting
process unit is used as the Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed
money charging timing. magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
IMS ON There is some restriction in OFF
CONTROL the image send mode.
Section
OFF There is no restriction in the Operation/Procedure
image send mode. 1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
PRINTER MODE1 All the items in OUTSIDE MODE 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
CONTROL AUDITOR and VENDOR 1
MODE are allowed to The selected set content is saved.
select.
MODE2 (“OUTSIDE AUDITOR” is U.S.A. United States of America
always set to “P CANADA Canada
VENDOR1”. Other buttons INCH Inch series, other destinations
are grayed out. JAPAN Japan
“VENDOR MODE” is TAIWAN Taiwan
always set to “MODE3”. EUROPE Europe
Other buttons are grayed U.K. United Kingdom
out.)
AUS. Australia
MODE3 (“OUTSIDE AUDITOR” is
AB AB series, other destinations
always set to “P OTHER”.
CHINA China
Other buttons are grayed
out. KOREA Korea
“VENDOR MODE” is BRAZIL Brazil
always set to “MODE3”.
Other buttons are grayed
out.)

*1: Displayed only when EQUITRAC.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 36
26-7 26-10
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine ID. Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
Section scanner.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Enter the machine ID with the 10-key. Operation/Procedure
Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
inputted. 2) Press [OK] key.
To select a desired character, press the 10-key repeatedly. The set value in step 1) is saved.
Refer to the following list and enter characters.
TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting
Touch the "CONFIRM" section every time a character is input- A
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default)
ted.
To modify an inputted character, delete it with "CLEAR" key
and enter the correct character.
2) Press [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1). 26-18
NOTE: Purpose Setting
The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service mode Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
function. save mode operation.
Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web Page (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
function. In this mode, this function is made available in the simula- Section
tion mode. Operation/Procedure
Number of times of key input 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
10-key
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1 1 - - - - - - - - - 3) Press [OK] key.
2 A B C a b c 2 - - - The set value in step 2) is saved.
3 D E F d e f 3 - - -
4 G H I g h i 4 - - - Item/ Setting Default
Content
5 J K L j k l 5 - - - Display range value
6 M N O m n o 6 - - - A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode 0-3 0
7 P Q R S p q r s 7 - (0: OFF NOT available
8 T U V t u v 8 - - - 1: SV1 1 Copy toner save mode 1
9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 - 2: SV2 2 Copy toner save mode 2
0 0 - - - - - - - - - 3: SV3) 3 Copy toner save mode 3
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode 0-3 0
(0: OFF NOT available
1: SV1 1 Printer toner save mode 1
26-8 2: SV2 2 Printer toner save mode 2
3: SV3) 3 Printer toner save mode 3
Purpose Setting
C COPY TS 0 Setting of copy toner save 0-1 Linked with
Function (Purpose) Counter mode setting (Long scale) DISPLAY is displayed. the set
Section (0: YES 1 Setting of copy toner save value of
1: NO) is not displayed. SIM26-6.
Operation/Procedure
D PRINTER 0 Setting of printer toner 0-1 Linked with
1) Select a setting item with the scroll key.
TS save is displayed. the set
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. DISPLAY 1 Setting of printer toner value of
1 = 1 count up, 2 = 2 count up (0:YES save is not displayed. SIM26-6.
1:NO)
3) Press [OK] key.
NOTE: mode1 of toner save is low toner save and mode3 is high
Default
Setting Default toner save
Item/Display Content value
range value
(Taiwan) ***
A TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
LONG Total counter (B/W) Destination Default value C Default value D
SIZE(S) U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
B MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2 CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
(B/W) LONG Maintenance INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
SIZE(S) counter (B/W) JAPAN 1 (Not Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed)
C DEV(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2 TAIWAN 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
LONG Developer counter EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
SIZE(S) (B/W) U.K. 1 (Not Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed)
D TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
LONG Total counter (B/W) AB 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
SIZE(L)
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
E MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
KOREA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
(B/W) LONG Maintenance
BRAZIL 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
SIZE(L) counter (B/W)
F DEV(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
LONG Developer counter
SIZE(L) (B/W)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 37
26-30 26-38
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre- Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the
sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety maintenance life is reached.
standards). (For slow start to drive the fus- Section
ing heater lamp)
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The set value in step 1) is saved.
0 Control allowed
A Default
1 Control inhibited Item/Display Content
value
A MAINTENANCE 0 Setting of Print Continue/ 0
2) Press [OK] key.
LIFE OVER Stop when the maintenance
The set value in step 1) is saved. (0: CONTINUE life is over (Print Continue)
* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due 1: STOP) 1 Setting of Print Continue/
to the power frequency, etc. Stop when the maintenance
life is over (Print Stop)
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported) B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 1
CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported) (0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 1 (CE not supported) 1: STOP) (Print Continue)
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB 0 (CE supported) 1 Continue/Stop setting of print
TAIWAN 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported) when the fusing web is end
(Print Stop)
KOREA 1 (CE not supported) BRAZIL 1 (CE not supported)

26-41
26-32
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the fusing
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
cleaning operation.
in the center binding mode.
Section Fusing
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enable/Disable of the user fusing cleaning function is set.
2) Press [OK] key. 0 AMS Disable
A
1 AMS Enable
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value 2) Press [OK] key.
CLEANING User fusing cleaning 0 YES 0 The set value in step 1) is saved.
PRINT SET function is Enable. (YES)
A <Default value of each destination>
User fusing cleaning 1 NO
function is Disable. U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB 0 (Disable)
26-35 TAIWAN 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)
Purpose Setting KOREA 0 (Disable) BRAZIL 0 (Disable)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
trouble history when a same trouble
occurred repeatedly. There are two display
modes: display as one trouble and display 26-49
as several series of troubles. Purpose Setting
Section Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
Operation/Procedure mode.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section
Operation/Procedure
0 Only once display.
A Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)
1 Any time display.
Item Setting Default
2) Press [OK] key. Content
value value
The set value in step 1) is saved. LOW Postcard copy speed LOW LOW
POSTCARD
HIGH Postcard copy speed HIGH

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 38
 *3:
26-50
Purpose Setting Target Target paper setting
paper 0 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
Inner Postcard The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
Section finisher 10 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
Operation/Procedure discharged continuously. When, stopped when
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch however, different kinds of the paper exit
sheets are mixed and tray is full or
panel.
discharged and 10 or less when 250
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. sheets of a kind are sheets are
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) continuously discharged, the discharged.
operation is stopped by the
Default paper exit tray full detection.
Item/Display Content
value Label The operation is stopped when
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer to sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
1 BW reverse copy Enable *1 tab sheet, discharged continuously. When,
OHP however, different kinds of
B FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0
sheets are mixed and
FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer to
discharged and 100 or less
limited. *3
sheets of a kind are
1 Finisher special paper
continuously discharged, the
The number of paper exit is
operation is stopped by the
not limited.
paper exit tray full detection.
C FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
65 Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
COLOR ON during paper feed
sheets Label 100 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
1 Paper feed tray color display binding sheet, discharged continuously. When, stopped when
OFF during paper feed finisher tab sheet, however, different kinds of the paper exit
D LONG SIZE PRINT 0 Long size print disable 0 OHP sheets are mixed and tray is full or
1 Long size print enable 100 discharged and 100 or less when 750
E WIRELESS SET 0 Disables wireless LAN 0 (NO) sheets sheets of a kind are sheets are
setting. binding continuously discharged, the discharged.
1 Enables wireless LAN finisher operation is stopped by the
setting. paper exit tray full detection.
F POWER 0 Disables auto power shut-off 0 (NO)
SHUT-OFF SET display setting.
1 Enables auto power shut-off
display setting. 26-52
G USB DEVICE 0 USB device setting disabled. 0 Purpose Setting
1 USB device is enabled.
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
H PUNCH UNIT 0 No destination 0
DESTINATION (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
1 2 holes
or not.
2 2,3 holes
3 2,4 holes Section
4 4 holes (4 holes wide) Operation/Procedure
I INNER FIN SETTING 0 Inner finisher is disabled. 0 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1 Inner finisher is enabled.
0 Count up
Destination Default value A Default value F 1 No count up
U.S.A 1 1
2) Press [OK] key.
CANADA 1 1
INCH 1 1 The set value in step 1) is saved.
JAPAN 1 1
Destination Default
TAIWAN 1 1
U.S.A 0 (Counted)
EUROPE 1 0
CANADA 0 (Counted)
U.K. 0 0
INCH 0 (Counted)
AUS. 1 1
JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
AB 1 1
TAIWAN 0 (Counted)
CHINA 1 1
EUROPE 0 (Counted)
KOREA 1 1
U.K. 0 (Counted)
BRAZIL 1 1
AUS. 1 (Not counted)
AB 0 (Counted)
CHINA 0 (Counted)
KOREA 1 (Not counted)
BRAZIL 0 (Counted)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 39
26-65 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Setting B REMAINING 30% 5 Toner preparation at 0-9 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode. TONER remaining toner
LEVEL level of 30%
Section
35% 6 Toner preparation at
Operation/Procedure remaining toner
Use the touch key to set. level of 35%
40% 7 Toner preparation at
Setting Default remaining toner
Item Content
range value level of 40%
LIMIT COPIES Number of sheets of stapling: ON or ON 45% 8 Toner preparation at
Limited OFF remaining toner
Number of sets of stapling: Not level of 45%
Limited 50% 9 Toner preparation at
SADDLE Number of sets loaded in the ON or ON remaining toner
COPIES saddle staple: Limited OFF level of 50%
Number of sets loaded in the C TONER NEAR 0 The toner near end 0-1 0
saddle staple: Not Limited END(0:YES 1:NO) message is
displayed.
* Limit load of folded paper on paper exit and limit load on 65- 1 The toner near end
sheet staple saddle finisher are set in SADDLE COPIES. message is not
displayed.
D TONER END 1 Operation Enable in 1-3 2
TONER END*1
26-66 2 Operation STOP in
Purpose Setting TONER END*2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password for the simula- 3 Operation STOP in
TONER END*3
tion.
E TONER END 1 Remaining toner 1-2 1
Section JUDGMENT counter
Operation/Procedure (accumulated
rotation time of the
1) The current password for the simulation is displayed.
toner hopper)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2 Toner end judgment
3) Tap [SET] key. by ATC (Exhaust
use in the toner
hopper)
F TONER E-MAIL 0 E-mail alert Toner 0-1 1
26-69 ALERT Low status send
Purpose Setting timing near near
toner end
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for
1 E-mail alert Toner
toner near end. Low status send
Section timing near toner
Operation/Procedure end
G TONER MIB UNIT 0 Receive the 0-2 0
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. remaining toner
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. level MIB in 1%
3) Press [OK] key. increment.
1 Receive the
The set value in step 2 is saved.
remaining toner
level MIB in 5%
Setting Default
Item/Display Content increment.
range value
2 Receive the
A TONER 0 The toner 0-1 1
remaining toner
PREPARATION preparation
level MIB in 25%
(0:YES 1:NO) message is
increment.
displayed.
H MIB TONER LOW 0 Get toner remaining 0-1 0
1 The toner
INDICATION quantity from toner
preparation
MIB when toner low
message is not
detects.
displayed.
1 Get toner low from
B REMAINING 5% 0 Toner preparation at 0-9 1
toner MIB when
TONER remaining toner
toner low detects.
LEVEL level of 5%
10% 1 Toner preparation at
remaining toner
level of 10%
15% 2 Toner preparation at
remaining toner
level of 15%
20% 3 Toner preparation at
remaining toner
level of 20%
25% 4 Toner preparation at
remaining toner
level of 25%

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 40
26-73 Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Purpose Setting
A DISP SET User data delete result YES 1 0 (NO)
Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide pop-up display ON
copy mode image loss (shade delete quan- User data delete result NO 0
tity) adjustment pop-up display OFF
Section B SIM Simulation start password YES 1 0
PASSWOR input display ON
Operation/Procedure
D DISP Simulation start password NO 0
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. input display OFF
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
26-85
(shade delete quantity) is increased.
Purpose Setting
Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the function of the simulation
Item/Display Content Default value
range
mode.
A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment Section
(M) (shade delete amount: Operation/Procedure
quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment 2) Tap [OK] key.
(S) delete quantity) amount:
adjustment 0.1mm/step) Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A DISP SET Password input display for YES 1 0
transferring between each
simulation ON
26-74
Password input display for NO 0
Purpose Setting transferring between each
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode. simulation OFF
B SIM EASY MODE 1 0
Section MODE CLASSIC MODE 0
Operation/Procedure SETING
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value 27
A OSA TRIAL MODE 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
(0: YES 1: NO) OSA trial mode.
27-2
1 OSA trial mode is
canceled. Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
ber and the HOST server telephone num-
ber. (FSS function)
26-78
Section
Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
operation panel.
[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
Section 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure 3) Press [SET] key.
1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits) The set value in step 2) is saved.
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW".
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
* If the connection process is not completed
2) Press [SET] key.
normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
HOST may be continuously made every time when
the power is turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted.
26-79 In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
HOST.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display
of user data delete result.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The value for the display operation specification after comple-
tion of user data delete is set.
2) Press [OK] key.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 41
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range Remarks
value
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0-3 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2 For convenience stores
NFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3 For convenience stores
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retry
C TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retry
E TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of times
G TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0- 0 1
TIMING(K) NEAR_END timing setting (K) Near end 11 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
H TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity history 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.
I LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]
J TONER ORDER TIMING Toner order timing Toner order alert send at the fixed 0-1 0 0
CONTROL control toner remaining quantity
Toner under alert send when 1
presuming the toner consumption
K REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE Pull type firmware update is inhibited or not allowed. 0-1 0 1 0 : Allowed
(PULL) 1 1 : Inhibited
L FIRMWARE VER. SEARCH Firmware search interval setting 1 - 90 7 Unit: Date
INTERVAL

27-5 27-6
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func- Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.
tion allows the host computer to check the (FSS function)
machine tag No.) (FSS function) Section
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.
Setting Default
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW". Item/Display Content
range value
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key A (0:YES 1:NO) 0 Manual service call 0-1 0
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. Enable
2) Press [SET] key. 1 Manual service call
Disable

2) Press [OK] key.

The set value in step 1) is saved.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 42
27-7 27-10
Purpose Setting Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert call out. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
(FSS function) information. (FSS function)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [OK] key. The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Target history Serial communication retry history
Setting Default High density process control error history
Item/Display Content
range value Halftone process control error history
A FUNCTION FSS function enable 0 1 (NO) Scanner gain adjustment retry history
(0:YES 1:NO) FSS function disable 1 DSPF gain adjustment retry history
B ALERT Alert call enable 0 0 (YES) Paper transport time between sensors
(0:YES 1:NO) Alert call disable 1
C CONNECTION FAX connection enable 0 2
(0: FAX Not used. 1 (HTTP)
1: No Use HTTP connection enable 2 27-11
2: HTTP) Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached. ment retry number history. (FSS function)
Service call When pressing Service call.
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
Section
reached. Operation/Procedure
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
a new product) gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
Alert resend
Display item
Occurrence date Retry Content
Item name
(Display) number
27-9 LSU1 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits Serial
Purpose Setting LSU2 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits communication
DESK1 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits retry number
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record- history display
DESK2 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits
ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
FINISHER1 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits
gain adjustment retry number.
FINISHER2 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits
(FSS function)
DSPF1 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits
Section DSPF2 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits
Operation/Procedure SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits Scanner gain
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits adjustment retry
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits history
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits
3) Press [OK] key.
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits
The set value in step 2) is saved. DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits DSPF gain
DSPF GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits adjustment retry
Setting Default history display
Item/Display Content DSPF GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits
range value
DSPF GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits
A FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%)
DSPF GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits
transport time between
sensors (SPF) TONER ORDER(K) 99/99/99 [Link] 8 digits Black toner order
alert call date/
B GAIN Threshold value of the gain 0 - 20 11
time
ADJUSTMENT adjustment retry number (TIMES
RETRY )
C JAM ALERT Alert judgment threshold 1 - 20 10
value for occurrence of (TIMES
continuous jams )
Alert judgment threshold
value for occurrence of
continuous jams
(Setting of the number of
times of continuous jams as
the alert for continuous jams)
D JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert period 0 - 99 30
PERIOD setting (DAYS)

* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;

100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
retry is actually not registered.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 43
27-12
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high density, halftone
process control and the automatic registra-
tion adjustment error history. (FSS Func-
tion)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The high density, halftone process control and the automatic regis-
tration adjustment error history is displayed.

Display item Content Occurrence date (Display) Error code (digits)

HV_ERR1 High density error history 1 99/99/99 [Link] Max. 4 digits
HV_ERR2 High density error history 2 99/99/99 [Link] Max. 4 digits
HV_ERR3 High density error history 3 99/99/99 [Link] Max. 4 digits
HV_ERR4 High density error history 4 99/99/99 [Link] Max. 4 digits
HV_ERR5 High density error history 5 99/99/99 [Link] Max. 4 digits
H_TONE ERR1 Halftone error history 1 99/99/99 [Link] Max. 4 digits
H_TONE ERR2 Halftone error history 2 99/99/99 [Link] Max. 4 digits
H_TONE ERR3 Halftone error history 3 99/99/99 [Link] Max. 4 digits
H_TONE ERR4 Halftone error history 4 99/99/99 [Link] Max. 4 digits
H_TONE ERR5 Halftone error history 5 99/99/99 [Link] Max. 4 digits

27-13 27-15
Purpose Others Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport Function (Purpose) Used to display the FSS connection status.
time between sensors. (FSS function) Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure The FSS operating status is displayed.
Change the display with scroll key.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
Item/Display Content value
FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 FSS CONNECTION Used to display the 0 Not 0
FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 FSS connection operated
FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 status. 1 Operated
FEED TIME4 History of paper transport time between sensors 4
FEED TIME5 History of paper transport time between sensors 5
FEED TIME6 History of paper transport time between sensors 6
FEED TIME7 History of paper transport time between sensors 7
27-16
FEED TIME8 History of paper transport time between sensors 8 Purpose Setting
FEED TIME9 History of paper transport time between sensors 9 Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send.
FEED TIME10 History of paper transport time between sensors 10
Section
Operation/Procedure
27-14
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Setting
The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection
2) Press [OK] key.
test mode.
Section Setting Default
Item/Display Content
Operation/Procedure range value
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance Alert send 0 0
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
ALERT alert send Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Disable
range value
B TONER Toner order Alert send 0 0
A CONNECTION 1 The FSS connection test 0-1 0
ORDER ALERT alert send Enable
TEST MODE mode is enable. (OFF)
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
(1: ON 0: OFF) 0 The FSS connection test
Disable
mode is disable. (*1)
C TONER CTRG Toner Alert send 0 0
*1: The FSS connection test mode can be changed only from Disable to
ALERT cartridge Enable
Enable, and cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.
(0:YES 1:NO) replacement Alert send 1
2) Press [OK] key. alert send Disable
Enable setting
The set value in step 1) is saved.
D JAM ALERT Continuous Alert send 0 0
(0:YES 1:NO) JAM alert Enable
send Enable Alert send 1
setting Disable

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 44
 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value 30
E TROUBLE Trouble alert Alert send 0 0
ALERT send Enable Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) setting 30-1
Alert send 1
Disable Purpose Operation test/check
F PAPER ORDER Paper order Alert send 0 0 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
ALERT alert send Enable
sors and the detectors in other than the
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
paper feed section and the control circuits.
Disable
Section
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
27-17
played.
Purpose Setting The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert. lighted.
Section
PPD2 Resist detector
Operation/Procedure POD1 Fusing rear detector
1) Select an item to be set. POD2 Main unit paper exit detector
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. POD3 Right tray paper exit detector
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification TFD2 Main unit paper exit full detector
is set. TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detector
DSW_R Right door open/close detector
3) Press [SET] key.
DSW_F1 Front door open/close detector
Item/ Setting Default DSW_RL1 Right lower door open/close detector 1
Content NOTE WTFD Waste toner full detector
Display range value
PAPER Setting of paper kind for 0-2 0 0: Standard --------- Unused
TYPE paper order alert paper and LPPD LCC paper entry detector
SET recycled paper T2PPD1 Tandem tray 2 transport detector
1: Standard T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 paper entry detector 1
paper only PRTPD Right paper exit paper empty detector
2: Recycled WEB_END1 Web end detector 1
paper only WEB_END2 Web end detector 2
A3 Paper order number 500 - 1250 Unit: No. of WTSD Waste toner shutter open/close detector
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box PTCMD PTC cleaner shift detector
sheets] (A3)
FPFD Fusing upper paper entry detector
A4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
DSW_C2 Inner cover open/close detector
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
BESTD Belt estrangement sensor
sheets] (A4)
B4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (B4)
B5 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of 30-2
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box Purpose Operation test/check
sheets] (B5)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
sors and the detectors in the paper feed
FIRST number setting (A3) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time section and the control circuits.
sheets) Section
A4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert Operation/Procedure
FIRST number setting (A4) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
sheets) played.
B4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
FIRST number setting (B4) 10000 sheets for the lighted.
(Number of used first time
sheets) MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection
B5: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert MPLD Manual feed paper length detection
FIRST number setting (B5) 10000 sheets for the MTOP1 Manual paper fees tray pull-out position detector 1
(Number of used first time MTOP2 Manual paper fees tray pull-out position detector 2
sheets)
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection (Detection at "1")
TNDSET Tandem tray close detection
T1SPD Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
T1LUD Tray 1 upper limit detection
T1PED Tray 1 paper empty detection
T2SPD Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
T2LUD Tray 2 upper limit detection
T2PED Tray 2 paper empty detection
C3PFD Tray 3 transport detection
C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detection
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detection
C3SPD Tray 3 paper remaining quantity detection
C3SS1 Tray 3 paper size detection 1

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 45
 C3SS2 Tray 3 paper size detection 2 40-7
C3SS3 Tray 3 paper size detection 3
C3SS4 Tray 3 paper size detection 4
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
C4PFD Tray 4 transport detection Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detection manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detection Section Paper feed
C4SPD Tray 4 paper remaining quantity detection
Operation/Procedure
C4SS1 Tray 4 paper size detection 1
C4SS2 Tray 4 paper size detection 2
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
C4SS3 Tray 4 paper size detection 3 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
C4SS4 Tray 4 paper size detection 4 3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.

Default
30-30 Item/Display Content
value
Purpose Operation test/check A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
B P1 POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) 231
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the motion
C P2 POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R) 140
sensors, the detectors and the related cir-
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19
cuits.
Section
Operation/Procedure
When you enter this simulation, the current status of the sensor is 40-12
displayed. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the tray 4 width detection
level.
Section Paper feed
40 Operation/Procedure
1) Set the tray 4 paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
40-2 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor 3) Set to the tray 4 paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
adjustment. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Paper feed The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
Operation/Procedure When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
MAX POSITION Tray 4 max. width
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. MIN POSITION Tray 4 min. width
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized. 41
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R).
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. 41-1
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized. Purpose Operation test/check
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN). Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
8) Press [EXECUTE] key. ment size sensor and the control circuit.
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized. Section
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is Operation/Procedure
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R) lighted.
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
Close: Highlighted
PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
sensor status Document present: Highlighted

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 46
41-2 Setting
Display Content Default
range
Purpose Adjustment
PLAIN Used to change the fusing -20 0
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor PAP&WUP&RDY GR temperature setting of -15
detection level. plain paper 1, WUP, and -10
Section Ready series -5
Operation/Procedure 0
1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without +5
place a document on the document table. +10
+15
The sensor level without document is recognized.
+20
2) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and press PLAIN PAPER 2 Used to change the fusing -20 0
[EXECUTE] key. temperature setting of -15
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed. plain paper 2 -10
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed. -5
0
Sensor name Content +5
PD1 Document sensor 1 +10
PD2 Document sensor 2 +15
PD3 Document sensor 3 +20
PD4 Document sensor 4 HEAVY PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
PD5 Document sensor 5 temperature setting of -15
PD6 Document sensor 6 heavy paper series -10
PD7 Document sensor 7 -5
0
+5
+10
41-3 +15
Purpose Operation test/check +20
THIN PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
temperature setting of thin -15
ment size sensor and the control circuit. paper series -10
Section -5
Operation/Procedure 0
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document +5
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time. +10
The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128) +15
+20
Item/Display Content Detection level range RECYCLED PAPER Used to change the fusing -20 0
OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close) GR temperature setting of -15
recycled paper series -10
PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255
PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255 -5
PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255 0
PD4 Document detection 4 0 - 255 +5
PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255 +10
PD6 Document detection 6 0 - 255 +15
PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255 +20
GLOSSY PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
temperature setting of -15
gloss paper series
43 -10
-5
0
43-1 +5
Purpose Setting +10
+15
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
+20
mode.
OHP PAPER Used to change the fusing -20 0
Section temperature setting of -15
Operation/Procedure OHP paper -10
1) Select the SW-A or the SW-B. -5
2) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. 0
+5
3) Select an item to be set with displayed value.
+10
The set value in step 3) is saved. +15
+20
FUSING CONDITION Fusing condition 0 0
ADJ adjustment setting 1
2
3
4
5

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 47
 Setting Setting
Display Content Default Display Content Default
range range
WUP&RDY GR ADJ WUP/Ready LL -10 0 SPECIAL PAPER ADJ Special paper HH -10 0
LL environment fine -7 HH environment fine -7
adjustment -5 adjustment -5
-3 -3
0 0
+3 +3
+5 +5
+7 +7
+10 +10
PLAIN PAP ADJ LL Normal paper LL -10 0
environment fine -7 SW-A Setting value when plain paper (60-89g/m2) is selected in the
adjustment -5 System setting/Common Settings/Device setting/Paper Weight
setting.
-3
SW-B Setting value when plain paper (90-105g/m2) is selected in the
0
System setting/Common Settings/Device setting/Paper Weight
+3
setting.
+5
+7
+10
HEAVY PAPER GR Heavy paper LL -10 0
ADJ LL environment fine -7
adjustment -5
-3
0
+3
+5
+7
+10
SPECIAL PAPER ADJ Special paper LL -10 0
LL environment fine -7
adjustment -5
-3
0
+3
+5
+7
+10
WUP&RDY GR ADJ WUP/Ready HH -10 0
HH environment fine -7
adjustment -5
-3
0
+3
+5
+7
+10
PLAIN PAP ADJ HH Normal paper HH -10 0
environment fine -7
adjustment -5
-3
0
+3
+5
+7
+10
HEAVY PAPER GR Heavy paper HH -10 0
ADJ HH environment fine -7
adjustment -5
-3
0
+3
+5
+7
+10

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 48
43-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing operation and pre-
heating.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.

65 ppm machine 75 ppm machine

Default value Default value Default value Default value
(SWA) (SWB) (SWA) (SWB)
Setting
Item/Display Content

Group A

Group B

Group C

Group A

Group B

Group C

Group A

Group B

Group C

Group A

Group B

Group C
range

A WARMUP FUMON Fusing motor previous rotation start 30 - 200 150 155 155 100 100 100 155 160 160 100 100 100
HL_UM T TH_US set value
B WARMUP FUMOFF Fusing motor previous rotation 0 - 255 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
complete time
C WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time 1 - 255 20 16 16 20 20 20 20 16 16 20 20 20
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM preliminary rotation start TH_UM 30 - 200 150 155 155 100 100 100 155 160 160 100 100 100
when warming up at alpha degrees C
or above
E HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when 0 - 255 20 16 16 20 20 20 20 16 16 20 20 20
Warm-Up at alpha degrees C or above
F LO_WARMUP_TIME Setting value applying time in warm-up 0 - 255 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
of 120 degrees C or below (Timer from
Ready completion)
G HI_WARMUP_TIME Setting value applying time in warm-up 0 - 255 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
of 120 degrees C or above (Timer from
Ready completion)
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to apply the 1 - 119 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
setting value in warm-up of alpha
degrees C or above
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME After-rotation time after completion of a 0 - 255 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
job
J HL_UM E-STAR TH_UM set value when preheating 30 - 200 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165
K HL_US E-STAR TH_US set value when preheating 30 - 200 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165
L HL_UM PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set 30 - 200 190 195 195 200 200 200 195 200 200 200 200 200
value

Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

SW-A Setting value when plain paper (60-89g/m2) is selected in the System setting/Common Settings/Device setting/Paper Weight setting.
SW-B Setting value when plain paper (90-105g/m2) is selected in the System setting/Common Settings/Device setting/Paper Weight setting.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN - - - - - - -
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH - - - - -
Group C TAIWAN EUROPE U. K AUS. AB CHINA KORIA BRAZIL

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 49
43-20
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-2) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)

Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99

Setting
Item/Display Content Default value
range
A WARMUP FUMON HL_US T Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 10
LL
B WARMUP FUMOFF LL Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under LL environment 1 - 99 50
C WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment 1 - 99 80
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_UM in Warm-Up at alpha degrees C or 1 - 99 10
above under LL environment
E HI_WU_END_TIME_LL Correction value for Warm-Up completion time in Warm-Up at alpha degrees C or above 1 - 99 50
under LL environment
F LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value of the setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees C or below 1 - 99 60
under LL environment (Timer from Ready completion)
G HI_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value of the setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees C or above 1 - 99 60
under LL environment (Timer from Ready completion)
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL Correction value of the threshold value alpha to apply the setting value in warm-up of 1 - 99 50
alpha degrees C or above under LL environment
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL Correction value for the after rotation time when completing a job under LL environment 1 - 99 50
J HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
K HL_US E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
L HL_UM PRE-JOB LL Correction value for the set value of TH_UM when restoring from preheating under LL 1 - 99 55
environment

Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 50
43-21
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)

Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A WARMUP FUMON HL_US T HH Fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
B WARMUP FUMOFF HH Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 1 - 99 50
C WARMUP END TIME HH Warm-up complete time 1 - 99 50
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP HH FM preliminary rotation start TH_UM when warming up at alpha degrees C 1 - 99 50
or above
E HI_WU_END_TIME HH Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha degrees C or above 1 - 99 50
F LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH Correction value for AF - AH application time (timer from Ready complete) 1 - 99 50
G HI_WARMUP_TIME HH Correction value for AJ - AL application time (timer from Ready complete) 1 - 99 50
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER_HH Threshold value alpha to which AN - AP is applied 1 - 99 50
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME HH After-rotation time after completion of a job 1 - 99 50
J HL_UM E-STAR HH TH_UM set value when preheating 1 - 99 50
K HL_US E-STAR HH TH_US set value when preheating 1 - 99 50
L HL_UM PRE-JOB HH Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50

Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 51
43-24
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)

Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99

65 ppm machine / 75 ppm machine

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value (SWA/B)
Group A Group B Group C
A COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool down time (Heavy paper) 1 - 60 5 5 5
B COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool down time (OHP) 1 - 60 10 10 10
C FUS_MOTOR(U) Fusing upper web motor operating interval (*1) 3 - 200 60 80 80
D FUS_MOTOR(L) Fusing lower web motor operating interval (*1) 1 - 20 7 9 9
E POWER_SET Power voltage setting 1-3 1 2 3
1: 100V, 2: 110 - 120V, 3: 220V - 240V

*1: When the web feed amount is changed (increased), the web life will be shortened to cause the machine to stop by detecting "End" before
display of "Near End." In addition, the life meter of the fusing web unit in SIM22-13 will not be displayed normally.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN - - - - - - -
Group B U.S.A CANADA INCH - - - - -
Group C TAIWAN EUROPE U. K AUS. AB CHINA KOREA BRAZIL

43-31 43-32
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the fusing web Function (Purpose) Used to set various items related to the
cleaning motor. forcible operation of web cleaning when job
Section Fusing end.
Operation/Procedure Section Fusing
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
Perform the fusing web cleaning motor drive. 1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2) When driving the fusing web cleaning motor is completed, 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
"COMPLETE" is displayed. 3) Press [OK] key.

NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an The set value in step 2) is saved.
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
trouble may be occur. ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
trouble may be occur.
Fusing web unit
installation detection Operation Remark Setting Default
state Item/Display Item
range value
Fusing web unit mot Not operate * During this operation A JOB END Fusing web motor Enable 0-1 0 1
installed the fusing web COMP ACT forcible operation Disable 1
Fusing web unit 10sec continuous cleaning feed counter CHECK condition when job end
installed rotation is not counted up. B JOB END Interval of the print quantity of 1 - 255 110
COMP ACT compulsory action of the fusing
INTERVAL web motor at job end
C JOB END Number of forcible operations of 1 - 10 5
COMP ACT the fusing web motor when job
CNT end

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 52
43-34 43-35
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment and setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check the fusing lower web clean- Function (Purpose) Fusing nip operation check
ing motor operation. Section Fusing
Section Fusing Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Prepare a black-background image, and put it on the cassette
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. with the black background facing upward.
The fusing lower web cleaning motor is driven. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (The cassette is specified.)
2) When driving the fusing web cleaning motor is completed, 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
"COMPLETE" is displayed. 4) [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and printing is started.
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an When printing is executed, a jam is always generated. (As
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- shown in the photo below.)
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a 5) Leave the jam paper for about 30sec, then remove the jam
trouble may be occur. paper.
6) Measure the width of the gloss change section (nip) of the jam
Fusing web unit
installation Operation Remarks paper, and check to confirm that it is in the range of about
detection state 10.5mm - 12mm.
Fusing lower web Does not operate * During this operation, the * If the difference between F and R is considerably great, the
unit not installed fusing web cleaning feed fusing pressure may be insufficient.
Fusing lower web Driven by a certain counter is counted up.
unit installed pulse numbers Setting Default
Item/Display item Content
range value
A PAPER MFT Cassette selection 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 2
CS2 3
CS3 4
CS4 5

"LACK BACKGROUND
0APER FEED DIRECTION

'LOSS CHANGE
SECTION

.IP WIDTH

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 53
44
44-1 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Purpose Setting NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func- cially required.
tion in the image forming (process) section.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)

Setting
Item Content Default Remarks
range
HV Enable/Disable setting of the high density process control Black text Allow
in normal operation on white
HT Enable/Disable setting of the medium density process background Allow
control in normal operation (Inhibit:
TN_FB Enable/Disable setting of FEEDBACK toner supply control 0=NO) Allow When set to Disable, toner supply is not made by the
White text process control feedback.
TN_INT Enable/Disable setting of the interval toner supply control on black Allow When set to Disable, toner supply is not made by the
background developer traveling distance.
(Allow:
TN_HUM Enable/Disable setting of the toner density humidity Allow
1=YES)
correction
TN_AREA Enable/Disable setting of the toner density area correction Allow
TN_LIFE Enable/Disable setting of the toner density life correction Allow When set to Disable, toner supply is not made by the
developer traveling distance.
TN_COV Enable/Disable setting of the toner density print ratio Allow
correction
TN_ENV Toner density environment multi correction Allow
TN_DRIP Enable/Disable setting of toner drip supply Allow
TN_SPEND Enable/Disable setting of toner supply by the process Allow
control result
TN_ABS Enable/Disable setting of toner unconditional supply Allow
TN_P_RET Enable/Disable setting of the toner difference return Allow
correction
TN_VREF Enable/Disable setting of the ⊿ Verf correction Allow
TN_DISCHAR Enable/Disable setting of the background discharge Allow
GE
PRT_HT Enable/Disable setting of printer correction feedback of Allow
half-tone process control
MD VG Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease grid Allow
voltage correction
MD EV Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease Allow
environment grid voltage correction
MD LD Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease laser Allow
power voltage correction
MD LD EV Enable/Disable setting of environmental area and the Allow
membrane decrease count laser power voltage correction
MD LD HV Enable/Disable process control laser power voltage Allow
correction
MD DL Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease Allow
discharge light quantity correction
MD DL EV Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease Allow
environment discharge quantity correction
MD MC Enable/Disable setting of the MC total current correction by Allow
an increase in the resistance
MD MC EV Enable/Disable setting of the MC total current correction by Allow
environmental change
PTDL Enable/Disable setting of the PTDL correction Allow
TC Enable/Disable setting of the transfer output correction Allow A variation of the transfer efficiency is corrected with
temperature and humidity (absolute moisture).
Enable/Disable setting. Correction of the output
voltage of the high transfer voltage.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 54
44-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image
density sensor (registration sensor).
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto-
matically.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis-
played.
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.

Setting Default Memor

Classification Item/Display Content
range value y
PROCON A PCS_K LED ADJ Image density sensor sensitivity (light quantity) adjustment value 1 - 255 21 Yes
B PCS_K DARK Image density sensor dark voltage 0 - 255 0 No
C PCS_K GRND OPC drum surface detection level when the adjustment of item A is completed 0 - 255 0 No
D PCS_K DRUM MAX OPC drum surface detection level Max. value 0 - 255 0 No
E PCS_K DRUM MIN OPC drum surface detection level Min. value 0 - 255 0 No
F PCS_K DRUM DIF OPC drum surface detection level differential (Item D - Item E) 0 - 255 0 No

Error name Error content

Sensor adjustment abnormality PCS_K LED ADJ error
The adjustment target level is not reached by three times of retry operations.
Surface scanning abnormality PCS_K GRND error
The difference between the max. value and the min. value of the OPC drum surface detection level is out of
the specified range in detection of one circle of the OPC drum surface.

44-4 44-6
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den- Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
sity process control operation. control forcibly.
Section Process Section Process
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
3) Press [OK] key. In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
(Refer to the table below.)
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required. In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.

Default Result display Content description

Item/Display Content
value COMPLETE Normal complete
A PCS TARGET Sensor target value 210 ERROR Abnormal end
B LED K OUTPUT Sensor light emitting quantity 21 INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
value
C PCS ADJUSTMENT Sensor adjustment target limit 10 Details of error display Content description
LIMIT value
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black image sensor adjustment abnormality
D DRM GROUND DIF Effective difference of the 1
K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
upper and lower value of drum
TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
element surface
E BIAS BK STANDARD Bias reference calculation 0
DIF difference
F BIAS PATCH INTERVAL Patch bias output interval 45
G K PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard value 50
H K PAT TARGET ID Patch density correction value 100
LOW1
I HV BK GROUND LIMIT Surface light reception 29
effective area value at the
patch position
J SDVB Optimum developing potential 47
K LED ADJUSTMENT LED fine adjustment step 1
FINE STEP
L LED ADJUSTMENT LED rough adjustment step 2
ROUGH STEP
M LED UPPER LIMIT LED upper limit value 255
N LED LOWER LIMIT LED lower limit value 5

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 55
44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.

Mode Page Item display Description of items

CPY/PRN 1/1 P BLACK_P : GB ***/ *** DV ***/ *** High density process control
*1 (PROCON) GB/DV data (K)
N(M) BLACK_M : GB ***/ *** DV ***/ *** High density normal (display for middle speed)
(NORMAL GB/DV data (K)
(MIDDLE))
N(L) BLACK_L : GB ***/ *** DV ***/ *** High density normal (display for lower speed)
(NORMAL (LOW)) GB/DV data (K)
OTHER 1/2 TN/TC LEFT TN HUD AREA Toner control display humidity area
TN HUD DATA Toner control display humidity AD value
TC TMP AREA Transfer display temperature area
TC TMP DATA Transfer display temperature AD value
RIGHT TC HUD AREA Transfer display humidity area
TC HUD DATA Transfer display humidity AD value
MD EV AREA Membrane decrease display humidity area 1
MD EV AREA2 Membrane decrease display humidity area 2
DRUM LEFT MD K DRUM COUNT Membrane decrease correction count (K)
LIFE MD K REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M *** LIFE grid voltage correction display (K)
EV MD K REVISE(EV) : L *** M *** Environment grid voltage correction display (K)
VG_DV MD K REVISE(VG_DV) : L *** M *** Grid voltage slope correction display (K)
VG_MC MD K REVISE(VG_MC) : L *** M *** Grid voltage correction display (K) with total current correction
ALL MD K REVISE(ALL) : L *** M *** Grid voltage correction ALL display (K)
LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** Membrane decrease laser power voltage correction (K)
LD EV MD K REVISE(LD EV) : L *** M *** Drum environment laser power voltage correction
2/2 LD DVB MD K REVISE(LD DVB) : L *** M *** Laser power correction from developing bias (K)
LD EHT MD K REVISE(LD EHT) : L *** M *** Laser power correction from the engine halftone process control (K)
DL MD K REVISE(DL) : L *** M *** Membrane decrease discharge light quantity correction (K)
DL EV MD K REVISE(DL EV) : L *** M *** Environment discharge light quantity correction (K)
MC MD K REVISE(MC) : L *** M *** Total current correction display (K) by membrane decrease and
discharge time
MC EV MD K REVISE(MC EV) : L *** M *** Total current correction indication by environment (K)
CNT PROCON COUNT HV : ******** High density process control execution number
PROCON COUNT HT : ******** Halftone process control execution number

*1: The left of the correction value is the result of execution. The right is the reference value.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 56
44-12 44-14
Purpose Operation data display Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem-
high density process control and the image perature and humidity sensor.
density sensor (registration sensor). Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- LSU
ing) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys. temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.

Display Display Default Display Display

Item Content Description Refer
item range value item range
TARGET ADK_SL(K) Development –9.99 - 0 TH_RA Room temperature sensor 0.0 - 150.0 Temperature
characteristics gradient 9.99 (degrees C)
coefficient (K) 0 - 1023 AD value
ADK_INT(K) Developing –999.9 - 0 HUD_RA Room humidity sensor 0.0 - 100.0 Humidity (%)
characteristics intercept 999.9 0 - 1023 AD value
coefficient (K) TH_CL Process temperature sensor 0.0 - 150.0 Temperature
TARGET (K) Sensor target value set 0.00 - 0 (degrees C)
value 255.00 0 - 1023 AD value
PCS_K_ Black sensor dark 0 - 255 0 HUD_CL Process humidity sensor 0.0 - 100.0 Humidity (%)
DARK potential
0 - 1023 AD value
PATCH n-1 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
TH_UM Fusing upper main thermistor 0.0 - 255.0 Temperature
1-5 patch 1 (n=1-5)
(detection) (degrees C)
n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
0 - 1023 AD value
patch 2 (n=1-5)
TH_UM_ Fusing upper main thermistor 0.0 - 255.0 Temperature
n-3 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
CS (compensation) (degrees C)
patch 3 (n=1-5)
0 - 1023 AD value
n-4 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
TH_UM_ Fusing upper main thermistor 0 - 1023 AD value
patch 4 (n=1-5)
D (differential)
PATCH n-1 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
TH_US1 Fusing upper sub thermistor 1 0.0 - 255.0 Temperature
6-10 patch 1 (n=6-10)
*sensor 2 pieces (Non-contact) (degrees C)
n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
(detection) 0 - 1023 AD value
patch 2 (n=6-10)
TH_US1_ Fusing upper sub thermistor 1 0.0 - 255.0 Temperature
n-3 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
CS (compensation) (degrees C)
patch 3 (n=6-10)
0 - 1023 AD value
n-4 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
patch 4 (n=6-10) TH_US1_ Fusing upper sub thermistor 1 0 - 1023 AD value
D (differential)
ENGINE PATCH(1) Patch data of h1 patch 0 - 255 0
HALFTO (77) TH_US2 Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 0.0 - 255.0 Temperature
NE *sensor 2 pieces (Non-contact) (degrees C)
PATCH(2) Patch data of h2 patch 0 - 255 0
(detection) 0 - 1023 AD value
(103)
PATCH(3) Patch data of h3 patch 0 - 255 0 TH_LM Fusing lower main thermistor 0.0 - 255.0 Temperature
(127) (degrees C)
TARGET(1) Target registration value 0 - 255 0 0 - 1023 AD value
of h1 patch (77)
TARGET(2) Target registration value 0 - 255 0
of h2 patch (103)
TARGET(3) Target registration value 0 - 255 0
of h3 patch (127)
TARGET_L Target registration value 0 - 255 0
OW(1) of h1 patch (77) (low
speed)
TARGET_L Target registration value 0 - 255 0
OW(2) of h2 patch (103) (low
speed)
TARGET_L Target registration value 0 - 255 0
OW(3) of h3 patch (127) (low
speed)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 57
44-15 44-21
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. Function (Purpose) Used to set the halftone process control tar-
Section Process get.
Operation/Procedure Section Process
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [OK] key. The halftone process control target is set and the operation data
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required. are displayed.

Display Content
Item/ Setting Default
Content COMPLETE Normal complete
Display range value
A TIME Idle rotation interval (time interval 0 - 255 6 ERROR COLOR SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
between the previous OPC drum idle ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
rotation and the next one) setting (h) ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
B AREA1 Environmental area difference 0-5 2 ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
judgment threshold value setting [K] Halftone process control error [K]
(difference between the previous OTHER Other errors
OPC drum idle rotation and the
current one)
44-22
C AREA2 Environmental area conditions (AND 1 - 15 1
condition of the previous OPC drum Purpose Operation data display
idle rotation and the current one) Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density
D CYCLE Previous rotation time setting (sec) 0 - 255 0 level in the halftone process control opera-
in the process control when tion.
recovered from power ON,
preheating/sleep mode. Section Process
E FLAG OPC drum idle rotation is allowed or 0-1 0 Operation/Procedure
disabled. (0:Allow 1) The toner patch density level made in the halftone process
1:Disable)
control operation is displayed.

Display item Content

ID_n Patch data display (n = 1 - 12)
44-17 BASE1 Substrate data (START)
Purpose Setting BASE5 Substrate data (LAST)
Function (Purpose) Process refresh execution
Section Process 44-24
Operation/Procedure Purpose Operation data display
1) Select a refresh item with the touch panel key. Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. the correction level in the halftone process
control operation.
3) The refresh operation is executed.
Section Process
NOTE: Do not execute this simulation unless specially required.
Operation/Procedure
Display items and descriptions of contents 1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
Display Content 2) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
DEVE REFRESH Development refresh
* DEVE REFLESH execution consume Category Display item Content
W-Letter A3 100% worth of toner. Coefficient EX-LOW Coefficient value of the
approximate formula of the
Display of results and descriptions of items minimum density
LOW Coefficient of the approximation
Display Content
formula of the low density
COMPLETE Normal completion
CONNECT1 Coefficient of the approximation
ERROR Abnormal end
formula of when connecting the
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption low density and the medium
density
MID Coefficient of the approximation
formula of when connecting the
low density and the medium
density
CONNECT2 Coefficient of the approximation
formula of when connection the
medium density and high
density
HIGH Coefficient of the approximation
formula of the high density
CONNECT POINT Each density section connection
output ratio
Reference SENSOR_TARGET Halftone process control
value reference value

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 58
 Category Display item Content 44-26
Correction S_VALUE Half tone process control
value correction value Purpose Adjustment/Setup
For copier PRINTER_S_VALUE Printer half tone process control Function (Purpose) Used to execute the halftone process con-
correction value trol compulsory.
PRINTER_BASE_ Printer half tone process control
Section Process
DITHER_VALUE reference dither value
PRINTER_AUTO_ Printer auto density adjustment Operation/Procedure
HT_VALUE correction value Press [EXECUTE] key.
Previous BEFORE S_VALUE Previous half tone process The halftone process control is performed and the operation data
correction control value
are displayed.
value
COMPLETE Normal complete
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
44-25
[K] Halftone process control error [K] error
Purpose Setting OTHER Other errors
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the
correction value for the halftone process
control.
44-27
Section Process
Purpose Data clear
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half-
1) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
tone process control.
touch panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section Process
3) Press [OK] key. Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required. 2) Press [YES] key.
The correction data of the halftone process control are cleared.
Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
A LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 98
LOWER LIMIT approximate expression
data lower limit value
B LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 60
UPPER approximate expression
LIMIT data upper limit value
C MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 90
LOWER approximate expression
LIMIT data lower limit value
D MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 7
IPPER approximate expression
LIMIT data lower limit value
E HILIGHT Reference point of the 1-8 7
POINT highlight correction
amount
F HILIGHT 0 - 128 20
Highlight correction
VALUE
amount limit value
LIMIT
G MAX VALUE Maximum density value 0 - 128 20
LIMIT correction limit value
H HIGH FIELD High density 0 - 255 15
LOWER LIMIT approximate expression
data lower limit value
I HIGH FIELD High density 0 - 255 1
UPPER LIMIT approximate expression
data lower limit value

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 59
44-28
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.

Default
Item/Category Display Content Setting range
value
A Process INITIAL YES When warming up after clearing the Enable 0-1 0 0
control NO OPC drum and the developer unit Disable 1
Enable/ counters
B Disable SW ON When supplying the power (when Process control 1-3 1 2
setting canceling power shut-off) Disable
BK process 2
control Enable
Pixel count 3
judgment
C TIME After passing the specified time from Process control 1-3 1 2
leaving READY continuously (Time Disable
can be changed by INTERVAL BK process 2
TIME) control Enable
Pixel count 3
judgment
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when Process control 1-2 1 2
turning ON the power and after Disable
passing TIME. BK process 2
control Enable
E HUM The temperature and humidity in the Process control 1-2 1 2
machine are monitored in every 2 Disable
hours only during a job, and the BK process 2
change in the temperature/humidity control Enable
is above the specified level
compared with that in execution of
the previous process control.
F REV1 YES When a certain level of the Allow 0-1 0 0
NO accumulated traveling distance of Inhibit 1
BK or M position OPC drum unit is
reached after the power is supplied.
G REV2_BK YES When a certain level of the Allow 0-1 0 0
NO accumulated traveling distance of Inhibit 1
BK position OPC drum unit is
reached after execution of the
previous density correction.
H REFRESH MODE YES YES/NO setting of the display of the Key operation 0-1 0 1
manual process control key by key display YES
NO operations Key operation 1
display NO

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 60
 Default
Item/Category Display Content Setting range
value
I Process DAY After color job after passing a certain 0: Disable of the 0 - 999 0 1
control days from execution of the previous specified days
execution color process control. When next judgment
condition warming up if there is no color job. 1 - 999: 1 - 999 999
setting days passing
J HI-COV The average print ratio is monitored Process control 0-2 0 0
in a certain interval, and the high interval setting
print process control execution is for every 10
judged. pages
High print 1
judgment
disable
Judgment at the 2
30th paper
(continuous).
K LO-COV Low print document continuous Allow 0-1 0 1
printing process control execution Inhibit 1
judgment
L TonerCA-END When the toner cartridge remaining Allow 0-1 0 1
quantity reached 25% or below, the Inhibit 1
process control interval is changed.
M JOB STOP Enable/Disable setting of execution Allow 0-1 0 0
[REV2_BK], [REV2_CL], [HI-COV], Inhibit 1
and [LO-COV] judgment during a
job.
N AVERAGE-PAGE Average print ratio paper number 1: 10 pages - 1-5 1 5
setting 5: 50 pages
Corresponds to 5
1 step/
10 pages.
O LIMIT PAGE Setting of the job connection number 1: 10 pages - 1 - 99 1 10
of sheets/limitation of the number of 99: 990 pages
sheets Corresponds to 99
1 step/
10 pages.
P PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count 1 - 999 10
specified value
When 100 is entered, it corresponds to 1kp at 5% print.
Q INTERVAL TIME Setting of the leaving time when turning ON the power 1 - 255 2
(including the sleep recovery time) (h: hour) (1 - 255; 1 - 255h passed)
R HUM HOUR [HUM] temperature/humidity monitoring time 1 - 24 2
Interval setting (10 minutes unit)
S HUM_DIF Area difference specified value when compared with the 1-9 2
execution of the previous process control of "HUM"
T BK_RATIO [REV2_BK] BK position OPC drum traveling distance 1 - 999 40
value magnification ratio setting (%) (Entry of 20 corresponds to
10,000mm.)
U REV1_RATIO [REV1_BK] BK position OPC drum traveling distance 1 - 255 72
value magnification ratio setting (%) (Entry of 100 corresponds to
70,000mm.)
V LOW_RATIO Low mode process control execution interval 1 - 255 40
W HT_DIF Used to judge the execution of HT process control. 1 - 255 60
X MC cleaner MC_CLEAN_TIME MC automatic cleaning 0: Not executed 0 - 99 0 10
control execution interval 1 - 99: Executed 1 - 99
Y MC_CLEAN_DURING_JOB MC automatic cleaning ON 0-1 0 0
execution setting during OFF 1
JOB
Z MC_DISCHARGE_TIME_1 Discharge time after auto 0: 0 - 999 0 0
cleaning Do not perform discharge
1 - 999: Discharge time 1 - 999
AA MC_DISCHARGE_TIME_2 Discharge time after 0: Not executed 0 - 999 0 0
cleaning in SIM 1 - 999: Executed 1 - 999
AB MC_DISCHARGE_TIME_3 Discharge time after 0: Not executed 0 - 999 0 0
cleaning at the power on 1 - 999: Executed 1 - 999
after dormancy or after
recovery from sleep mode
AC Process DRUM_REVERSE Drum reverse rotation Enable 0-1 0 1
control setting Disable 1

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 61
44-29
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
process control during a job.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.

Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A COPY During copy 0- 0: No execution 2
job 2 1: HV only
B PRINTER During print 2: HV - HT 2
job
C FAX During FAX 2
print job
D SELF During self 2
PRINT print
E CPY TO Copier - 0- 0: CALCULATED 0
PRT printer 1 (Color balance
TABLE conversion calculation value
table select (Revised every time
when SIM46-74 is
executed.))
1: DEFAULT
(Default (Fixed value))
F HT_RET Half-tone 0- 0: Allow 0
RY_SET process 1 1: Inhibit
control retry
setting
G HT_RET Retry 1- 20
RY_DIF condition of 255
the half-
tone
process
control

HV: High density process control

HT: Halftone process control

2) Select a target item with scroll keys.

44-37
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc-
tion level in the continuous printing opera- NOTE: When the print density is varied in the continuous printing
tion. operation, this simulation is used.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel.

Button Item Display Content Setting range Default value

K A DV_ADJ_K_L_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in printing (low speed) 0-5 0
B DV_ADJ_K_L_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in printing (low speed) 0-5 0
C DV_ADJ_K_L_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in printing (low speed) 0-5 0
D DV_ADJ_K_M_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
E DV_ADJ_K_M_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
F DV_ADJ_K_M_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
G DV_ADJ_START_K_L_1 DV bias correction data 1 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 4
H DV_ADJ_START_K_L_2 DV bias correction data 2 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 3
I DV_ADJ_START_K_L_3 DV bias correction data 3 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 1
J DV_ADJ_START_K_L_4 DV bias correction data 4 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 1
K DV_ADJ_START_K_M_1 DV bias correction starting position data 1 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 4
L DV_ADJ_START_K_M_2 DV bias correction starting position data 2 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 3
M DV_ADJ_START_K_M_3 DV bias correction starting position data 3 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 1
N DV_ADJ_START_K_M_4 DV bias correction starting position data 4 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 1

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 62
 1) Select the execution frequency of the process control.
44-43
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Data display
3) Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa-
NOTE:
tion of the developing unit.
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions.
Section Developing system
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver-
Operation/Procedure sion.
The identification number and the identification signal level of the
developing unit are displayed.

Display
Item/Display Content
range
NOTE
46
A DVCH K developing unit 1-9 The model
KIND K identification number identification number
of the developing unit
46-2
which is backed up in Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)
the EEPROM of the
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
machine.
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content
1 MX-M6570 / MX-M7570 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
9 There is no developing unit. panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
44-62 * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Purpose Setup/Adjustment
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions. To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
Section Process in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
Operation/Procedure adjustment value.
This simulation allows collective change in the set contents of When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
SIM44-4 and SIM44-28. increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
A suitable one is selected among a number of options depending sity is decreased.
on the condition.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Select an item to be set. A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
• To change the image density in the high density area, select HIGH 1 - 99 50
PROCON TARGET. B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
• To change the frequency of the process control operations, HIGH 1 - 99 50
select PROCON MODE. C AUTO3 Auto 3 LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Display/Item Content D TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
PROCON ID DOWN(-2) The registered value of the process HIGH 1 - 99 50
TARGET ID DWUN(-1) control reference value are E TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
ID UP(+1) collectively changed PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
ID UP(+2) F TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50
NORMAL(0) The registered values of the process Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50
control reference values are G PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
collectively changed to the default HIGH 1 - 99 50
value
H PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
CUSTOM The value set by SIM44-4 is restored
HIGH 1 - 99 50
PROCON
I MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
PROCON HIGH The values of the density correction
HIGH 1 - 99 50
MODE QUALITY(+2) execution timing mode are
collectively changed J AUTO1 (COPY TO Auto1 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
QUALITY(+1)
PRINT K AUTO2 (COPY TO Auto2 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
PERFORMANCE COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
(-1) L AUTO3 (COPY TO Auto3 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
PRINT COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
PERFORMANCE M TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
(-2) COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
NORMAL The value of the density correction N TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
execution timing mode are PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
collectively changed to the default COPY) document)
value O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
CUSTOM The value set by SIM44-28 is stored (COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
document)
When PROCON TARGET is selected. P LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
1) Select the density level. HIGH 1 - 99 50
When PROCON MODE is selected.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 63
46-4 46-5
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
send mode. send mode.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel. panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa. increased, and vice versa.

Ite Setting Default Ite Setting Default

Mode Display Content Mode Display Content
m range value m range value
A LOW AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 A LOW AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50 C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo PHOTO Photo
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50 G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
H RIP - 1 - 99 50 H RIP - 1 - 99 50
A HIGH AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 A HIGH AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50 C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo PHOTO Photo
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50 G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
H RIP - 1 - 99 50 H RIP - 1 - 99 50

46-8
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color
balance RGB.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch
panel.
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
area and the high density area.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
target color is increased, and vice versa.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density 1 - 99 50
correction amount
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density 50
correction amount

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 64
46-9 46-10
Purpose Adjustment (DSPF mode) Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy gray balance and
Section the gamma (for each gray copy mode).
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch Operation/Procedure
panel. 1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Select 600dpi or 1200dpi with the resolution select button.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
mode, and the fax mode. When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
increased, and vice versa.
AUTO Text
Setting Default TEXT Text
Item Button Display Content
range value TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47 TEXT/ PHOTO Text
SIDEA: exposure adjustment PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo
LOW (Low density side) PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47 MAP Map
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
LIGHT Light document
LOW (Low density side)
COPY ORG Copy document
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side) Density level
Item/Display Setting range Default value
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52 (Point)
SIDEA: exposure adjustment A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
HIGH (High density side) B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52 C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: exposure adjustment D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
HIGH (High density side) E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52 F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
HIGH exposure adjustment
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
(High density)
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
LOW (Low density side) J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47 K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
SIDEB: exposure adjustment L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
LOW (Low density side) M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47 N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
LOW exposure adjustment O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
(Low density side) P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50 Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
HIGH (High density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
HIGH (High density side)
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
HIGH exposure adjustment
(High density)
G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: R R
H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: G G
I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: B B

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 65
 NOTE:
46-16
Purpose Adjustment MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy den- MODE 2 Normal gamma
sity and the gamma (for each monochrome MODE 3 Normal gamma (improves back image)
copy mode). STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is
scanned, and the output image density is determined
Section according to the scanned density. (The output image
Operation/Procedure density is even for all the surface.)
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined
panel.
according to the density in each area of document. (The
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. output image density may not be even for all the
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each surface.)
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
according to the average of the scanned densities. (The
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is output image density is even for all the surface.)
increased, and vice versa. Furthermore, automatically judge the classification of the
document and handle it with the most suitable document
Density level mode.
Item/Display Setting range Default value
(Point) AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 FULL auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 document width. This is not related to the PRESCAN
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 mode.
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 PART auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x
100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
46-23
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500 Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500 high density section (High density tone gap
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500 supported).
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
Section
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.

0 Enable
46-19 1 Inhibit

Purpose Setting 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the
density scanning (exposure) of mono- Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
chrome auto copy mode documents.
A K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1
Section (0: ENABLE correction mode: Enable
Operation/Procedure 1: DISABLE) 1 K engine highest density
correction mode: Disable
Select an item to be set with touch panel.
B BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is TARGET BLACK maximum density
saved. correction
C RATIO LOW High density correction ration 0 - 100 33
Default (LOW)
Item/Display Content Set value
value
D RATIO HIGH High density correction ration 0 - 100 5
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1/ MODE2 (HIGH)
MODE2/
E DITHER Dither threshold 0 - 255 250
MODE3
THRESHOLD
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ PRESCA
F SLOPE Slope threshold 100 - 400
Stop (for copy) STOP/ N
THRESHOLD 500
PRESCAN
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/ ON * When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A
Stop (for FAX) OFF to "0".
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
Stop (for scanner) STOP/
PRESCAN gap is better.
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT/ NORMAL * To increase the density in the high density area further, set items
setting NORMAL/ A to "1".
SHARP The tone gap may occur in high density part.
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/ FULL
PART NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these
values are changed, the density in the high density area is
changed.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 66
46-24
An individual adjustment is available in each of the copy mode and
Purpose Adjustment the printer mode.
Function (Purpose) Copy gray balance adjustment
(Auto adjustment) Item/Display Content
Setting Default
range value
Section
A R-Ratio Default Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 135
Operation/Procedure B G-Ratio Default Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 805
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. C R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 243
The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. Fluorescence Fluorescent pen
D G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 354
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table.
Fluorescence Fluorescent pen
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. E R-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 299
The copy gray balance automatic adjustment is performed, F G-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 587
then the adjustment result pattern is printed.
4) Press [OK] key. B-Ratio Default Gray making setting (B)
The halftone correction target registration is processed. 1000 - R-Ratio Default - G-Ratio Default
B-Ratio Gray making setting (B)
Fluorescence 1000 - R-Ratio Fluorescence - G-Ratio Fluorescence
B-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (B)
46-32 1000 - R-Ratio RIP - G-Ratio RIP
Purpose Adjustment/Setup When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background values (Default).
density reproducibility in the monochrome When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased,
auto copy mode. the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment
Section value is decreased, the density is increased.
Operation/Procedure When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased,
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjust-
panel. ment value is decreased, the density in also decreased.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
46-39
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the Purpose Adjustment/Setup
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send
and the low density image is decreased. images.
Section
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Operation/Procedure
range value
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(SIDE1) surface)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF back 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) surface) Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 numeric value to decrease moire.
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) front surface) Setting Default
Item/Display Content
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196 range value
(SIDE2) back surface) A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 halftone OFF
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196 B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
(SIDE1) surface) halftone OFF
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF back 1 - 250 196 C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
(SIDE2) surface) halftone ON
D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone OFF
E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON
46-37
F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup halftone OFF
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
of monochrome mode color. halftone ON
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
Section
halftone OFF
Operation/Procedure I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. halftone ON
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
4) Press [YES] key.
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow
images when copying color documents with red and yellow images
in the monochrome mode.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 67
46-40 46-42
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Collective adjustment of all the modes) (Fine)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set. 2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.

Setting Default Setting Default

Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50
LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
adjustment of all the modes) C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
46-41 G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Halftone
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone
(Normal)
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
Section Halftone
Operation/Procedure J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
1) Set the document on the document table. Halftone
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set. Halftone
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key Halftone
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1
MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO)
and the scanned document image is outputted.
Exposure 1
Setting Default EXP2 Fine/ 3
Item/Display Content Exposure 2
range value
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 EXP3 Fine/ 4
Exposure 3
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
EXP4 Fine/ 5
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
Exposure 4
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
EXP5 Fine/ 6
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
Exposure 5
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
AUTO Fine/ 7
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1 H_TONE Automatic/
MODE EXP1 mode Exposure 1 2 (AUTO) halftone
EXP2 Exposure 2 3 EXP1 Fine/ 8
EXP3 Exposure 3 4 H_TONE Exposure 1/
EXP4 Exposure 4 5 Halftone
EXP5 Exposure 5 6 EXP2 Fine/ 9
H_TONE Exposure 2/
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu- Halftone
ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F, EXP3 Fine/ 10
and press [EXECUTE] key. H_TONE Exposure 3/
Halftone
EXP4 Fine/ 11
H_ONE Exposure 4/
Halftone
EXP5 Fine/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5/
Halftone

To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-

ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 68
46-43 46-44
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Super Fine) (Ultra fine)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set. 2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.

Setting Default Setting Default

Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
Exposure 1 C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
Exposure 2 E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
Exposure 3 G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 Halftone
Exposure 4 H EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 1/Halftone
Exposure 5 I EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 2/Halftone
Auto/Halftone J EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 3/Halftone
Exposure 1/Halftone K EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 4/Halftone
Exposure 2/Halftone L EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 5/Halftone
Exposure 3/Halftone M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
Exposure 4/Halftone EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 1
Exposure 5/Halftone EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 3
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine/ 1- 1 1 Exposure 2
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO) EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 4
EXP1 Super Fine/ 2 Exposure 3
Exposure 1 EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5
EXP2 Super Fine/ 3 Exposure 4
Exposure 2 EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6
EXP3 Super Fine/ 4 Exposure 5
Exposure 3 AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7
EXP4 Super Fine/ 5 H_TONE Auto/
Exposure 4 Halftone
EXP5 Super Fine/ 6 EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8
Exposure 5 H_TONE Exposure 1/
AUTO Super Fine/ 7 Halftone
H_TONE Auto/ EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 9
Halftone H_TONE Exposure 2/
EXP1 Super Fine/ 8 Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 1/ EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 10
Halftone H_TONE Exposure 3/
EXP2 Super Fine/ 9 Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 2/ EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 11
Halftone H_TONE Exposure 4/
EXP3 Super Fine/ 10 Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 3/ EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 12
Halftone H_TONE Exposure 5/
EXP4 Super Fine/ 11 Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 4/
Halftone To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
EXP5 Super Fine/ 12 ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
H_TONE Exposure 5/ and press [EXECUTE] key.
Halftone

To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-

ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 69
46-45 46-46
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(600dpi). (RGB RIP)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Select a target mode for adjustment.
2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set. 2) Set the document on the document table.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 4) Press [OK] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When the set value is increased, the density becomes higher.
and the scanned document image is outputted. When the set value is decreased, the density becomes lower.

Setting Default Setting Default

Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50 A STANDARD RIP For Normal/ 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Halftone OFF
C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 mode
D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 B FINE RIP For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 OFF mode
F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 C FINE RIP H_TONE For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50
ON mode
G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone 1 D SUPER FINE RIP For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone OFF
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
mode
Halftone
E SUPER FINE RIP H_TONE For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone ON
Halftone
mode
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
F ULTRA FINE RIP For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone
Halftone OFF
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
mode
Halftone
G ULTRA FINE RIP H_TONE For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone ON
Halftone
mode
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/ 1- 1 1
H 600DPI RIP For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
Halftone OFF
EXP1 600dpi/ 2 mode
Exposure 1
I 600DPI RIP H_TONE For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50
EXP2 600dpi/ 3 Halftone ON
Exposure 2 mode
EXP3 600dpi/ 4
Exposure 3
EXP4 600dpi/ 5
Exposure 4 46-47
EXP5 600dpi/ 6
Exposure 5 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
AUTO 600dpi/ 7 Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy
H_TONE Auto/ and scan images (JPEG).
Halftone
Section
EXP1 600dpi/ 8
H_TONE Exposure Operation/Procedure
1/Halftone 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
EXP2 600dpi/ 9 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
H_TONE Exposure
2/Halftone 3) Press [OK] key.
EXP3 600dpi/ 10 The set value is saved.
H_TONE Exposure
3/Halftone Setting Default
Item/Display Content
EXP4 600dpi/ 11 range value
H_TONE Exposure A FILLING (C) LOW Low compres-sion 0 0 (LOW)
4/Halftone (Color)
EXP5 600dpi/ 12 MIDDLE Medium compres- 1
H_TONE Exposure sion (Color)
5/Halftone HIGH High compres-sion 2
(Color)
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- B FILLING (G) LOW Low compres-sion 0 0 (LOW)
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, (Halftone)
and press [EXECUTE] key. MIDDLE Medium compres- 1
sion (Mono-chrome
halftone mode)
HIGH High compres-sion 2
(Mono-chrome
halftone mode)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 70
 Setting Default 46-51
Item/Display Content
range value
C PRINT (C) LOW Low compres-sion 0 0 (LOW) Purpose Adjustment/Setup
(Color) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy
MIDDLE Medium compres- 1 mode heavy paper mode and the image
sion (Color) process mode.
HIGH High compres-sion 2
(Color)
Section
D PRINT (G) LOW Low compres-sion 0 0 (LOW) Operation/Procedure
(Halftone) 1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key
MIDDLE Medium compres- 1 [PAPER/DITHER].
sion (Mono-chrome
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key.
halftone mode)
HIGH High compres-sion 2 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(Mono-chrome 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key.
halftone mode) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out-
E SCAN (C) MIDDLE Medium compres- 0 1 putted.
(*1) 1 sion mode 1 (MIDDLE
Low compres-sion 2) When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is
MIDDLE Medium compres- 1 made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust
2 sion mode 2 the image density.
Medium compres-
sion Item/Display Content Color
MIDDLE Medium compres- 2 HEAVY Copier heavy paper gamma K
3 sion mode 3 DITH4 Monochrome error diffusion K
High compres-sion DITH7 Monochrome dither(1200dpi) K
F SCAN (G) MIDDLE Medium compres- 0 1 DITH9 Monochrome dither(600dpi LOW) K
(*1) 1 sion mode 1 (MIDDLE
Low compres-sion 2)
Density level Default
MIDDLE Medium compres- 1 Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
2 sion mode 2
Medium compres- A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
sion B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
MIDDLE Medium compres- 2 C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
3 sion mode 3 D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
High compres-sion E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
46-48 I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
Purpose Setting J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Set the output resolution in each copy
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
mode.
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
Section N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
1) Select the output resolution of each copy mode with the key. P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
In order to change the reproducibility of line images, change Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500

this setting.
46-52
600dpi mode: Line images becomes thicker. The reproducibility of
line images is increased. 1200dpi mode: Line images are repro- Purpose Data clear/Reset
duced finer than 600dpi mode. Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy
mode heavy paper and the image process
Item Button Content Default mode. (After execution of either SIM46-54
display value
the adjustment value is reset to the initial
AUTO 600DPI ED Automatic 600DPI DT
value.)
600DPI DT
TEXT/PRT 600DPI ED Text Printed 600DPI DT Section
PHOTO 600DPI DT Operation/Procedure
1200DPI DT 1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
TEXT/PHOTO 600DPI DT Text photograph 600DPI DT To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
1200DPI DT
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
PRINTED PHOTO 600DPI DT Printed photo 1200DPI DT
1200DPI DT 3) Press [YES] key.
PHOTO 600DPI DT Photograph 1200DPI DT
Display Content
1200DPI DT
Dither HEAVYPAPER Copier heavy paper gamma
* ED: Error diffusion DT: Dither. B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
B/W 1200 Monochrome dither(1200dpi)
B/W 600DPI LOW Monochrome dither(600dpi LOW)
WOVEN1 Watermark mode 1
WOVEN2 Watermark mode 2
WOVEN3 Watermark mode 3
WOVEN4 Watermark mode 4

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 71
46-54 46-58
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine halftone auto- Function (Purpose) Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolu-
matic density adjustment (dither). tion. (Smoothing process)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select an item (mode) to be set with the button and the scroll
The high density process control is started to make 48 patch key.
self print. (A4 (11" x 8.5") or A3 (11" x 17") paper in the paper 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
feed tray is used.) 3) Press [OK] key.
2) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press 1(ON): 9600 (equivalent) x 600 dpi
[EXECUTE] key.
0 (OFF): 600 x 600 dpi
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
The setting is reflected only the image edge area.
After scanning the 48 patch self print, the 17 patch self print is
automatically printed. Content Setting Default
Item/Display
3) Press [OK] key. (copy mode) range value
A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF)
After completion of the correction amount registration, the
ON 1
screen shifts to the dither selection menu.
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON)
4) Select an item (dither) to be adjusted. ON 1
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
The 48 patch self print is printed. ON 1
6) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press D PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
[EXECUTE] key. ON 1
E TEXT PHOTO Text photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
ON 1
After scanning the patch, the screen automatically shifts to the F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
dither selection menu. ON 1
7) After completion of the adjustment of all the density adjustment G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON)
items (dither), press [OK] key. ON 1
H LIGHT Light document OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
46-55 I CPY TO CPY/ Auto (copy OFF 0 0 (OFF)
AUTO document) ON 1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
J CPY TO CPY/TEXT Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the drop out color in the document) ON 1
image send mode (monochrome manual K CPY TO CPY/TXT Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
text mode). PRT (copy document) ON 1
Section L CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo (copy OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO document) ON 1
Operation/Procedure
In the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode), the
range where color images are reproduced as monochrome images
is adjusted.
1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout
becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the
adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult
to widen the reproduction range.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3

2) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome

manual text mode), and check the adjustment result.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 72
46-60
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color
auto copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
process mode).
3) Press [OK] key.
This is used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode
and the smoothness (roughness) in the dark area.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A RGB FILTER LEVL SOFT RGB Filter for the COPY/PUSH/FAX SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
CENTER CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
B CPY PUSH AUTO SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the automatic push scan SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
FILTER LEVEL CENTER mode (Text, Printed Photo / Printed Photo images) CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
C B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome copy mode OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON ON 1
D COLOR PUSH : RGB OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan color OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON mode ON 1
E B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON monochrome mode ON 1
F B/W PRINT OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON print images ON 1

46-61 Setting Default

Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF:
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni- E [TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send 0-1 0
tion level. SEND] dots
Detection level
Section SEGMENT: ADJUST
F adjustment: Black 1 - 99 50
[BK TXT 1]
Operation/Procedure text 1
1) Select an adjustment mode. Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
G adjustment: Color 1 - 99 50
2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch [CL TXT 1]
text 1
panel.
Detection level
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. SEGMENT: ADJUST
H adjustment: Black 1 - 49 25
[BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2]
4) Press [OK] key. text 2, Color text 2
Detection level
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- SEGMENT: ADJUST
I adjustment: Thine 1 - 99 50
cially required. [THIN LINE]
line
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ- Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur J adjustment: Text 1 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR 1]
for some documents. on dots
Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
Item/Display Content K adjustment: Text 2 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR 2]
COLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto on dots
TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print) Detection level
COPY(TPP) [Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print) SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment:
L 1 - 15 8
[TXT ON SCR AREA 1] Detection area 1 of
MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto
text on dots
TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print)
Detection level
COPY(TPP) [Monochrome] Copy document (Text print)
SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment:
M 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR AREA 2] Detection area 2 of
Setting Default text on dots
Item/Display Content
range value Detection level
SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment: High
A 0-1 0 N 1 - 49 25
[TXT ON SCR] Text on dot [HIGH LPI] line number
SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: judgment
B 0-1 0
[LINE SCR] line screen Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: O adjustment: No 1 - 99 50
C 0-1 0 [BK]
[SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area chrome judgment
Detection ON/OFF: Detection level
SEGMENT: SWITCH SEGMENT: ADJUST
D High line number 0-1 0 P adjustment: Chrome 1 - 99 50
[HIGH LPI] [CL]
judgment select judgment

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 73
 Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
Detection level H AE_LV_CS AE background 0-8 4
SEGMENT: ADJUST
Q adjustment: Text on 1 - 99 50 detection division result
[TXT ON BG]
background adjustment:
Detection level For color scan
SEGMENT: ADJUST
R adjustment: High 1 - 49 25 I AE_LV_MS AE background 0-8 4
[SCR 1 HIGH]
density dots 1 detection division result
Detection level adjustment:
SEGMENT: ADJUST
S adjustment: Medium 1 - 49 25 For monochrome scan
[SCR 1 MIDDLE]
density dots 1 J AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0-4 0
Detection level _LV_L_U density threshold value
SEGMENT: ADJUST
T adjustment: Low 1 - 49 25 adjustment (lower limit)
[SCR 1 LOW]
density dots 1 K AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0 - 10 0
SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level LV_L_O density threshold value
U 1 - 15 8
[SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2 adjustment (upper limit)
SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5
V 1 - 15 8
[SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3 LV_C detection level
Detection level adjustment (chroma)
SEGMENT: ADJUST
W adjustment: line 1 - 49 25 M AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
[LINE HALFTONE]
screen _ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
Detection level _CC For color copy
SEGMENT: ADJUST
X adjustment: Small 1 - 49 25 N AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
[SMALL SCR 1]
Dot Area 1 _ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
Detection level _MC For mono-
SEGMENT: ADJUST chrome copy
Y adjustment: Small 1 - 99 50
[SMALL SCR 2]
Dot Area 2 O AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
Image Quality _ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
SEGMENT: SWITCH Priority ON/OFF : _CS For color scan
Z 0-1 0
[LOCK] Image Quality P AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
Priority lock _ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
_MS For mono-
chrome scan
Q BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
46-62 LV_L adjustment (value)
R BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
LV_C adjustment (chroma)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 developing 0-6 0
ACS, the area separation, the background paper mode select
image process, and the auto exposure T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 developing 0-6 0
mode. paper mode select
Section U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 developing 0-6 0
paper mode select
Operation/Procedure V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 developing 0-6 0
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch paper mode select
panel. W SW_CHANGE_ Mode 0: Mode judgment 0-6 0
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. MODE0 select
X SW_CHANGE_ Mode 1: Mode judgment 0-6 1
3) Press [OK] key.
MODE1 select
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- Y SW_CHANGE_ Mode 2: Mode judgment 0-6 2
cially required. MODE2 select
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ- Z SW_CHANGE_ Mode 3: Mode judgment 0-6 3
ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur MODE3 select
for some documents. AA SW_CHANGE_ Mode 4: Mode judgment 0-6 4
MODE4 select
Setting Default AB SW_CHANGE_ Mode 5: Mode judgment 0-6 5
Item/Display Content MODE5 select
range value
A SW_ACS ACS judgment 0-1 1 AC SW_CHANGE_ Mode 6: Mode judgment 0-6 6
reference area select MODE6 select
B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment 0-6 3
priority level adjustment
C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment 0-6 4
priority level adjustment
D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1
threshold value
adjustment
E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment 0-6 3
target area adjustment
F AE_LV_CC AE background 0-8 4
detection division result
adjustment:
For color copy
G AE_LV_MC AE background 0-8 4
detection division result
adjustment:
For monochrome copy

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 74
46-63 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
A COLOR PUSH: Text print 1-9 5
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
density section. B COLOR PUSH: TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 5
Section C COLOR PUSH: PRINTED Printed photo 1-9 5
Operation/Procedure PHOTO (color PUSH)
D COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
panel. E COLOR PUSH: Text/Photograph 1-9 5
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
3) Press [OK] key. F COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
and the low density image is decreased.

46-66
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the
copy/printer mode.
1) Select the adjustment mode.
2) Select an adjustment item according to the necessity.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result.

Setting Default
Category Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
PATTERN A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level (Black LOW) 0 - 255 15 The adjustment value is changed to
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level (Black MIDDLE) 0 - 255 19 increase or decrease the density of
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level (Black HIGH) 0 - 255 23 the watermark of background
documents (primary output).
To increase the watermark density,
increase the adjustment value.
To decrease the watermark density,
decrease the adjustment value.
NOTE:
When the adjustment value is
increased, the watermark area which
is originally not reproduced becomes
difficult to disappear.
When the adjustment value is
decreased, the watermark area
which is originally reproduced
becomes easy to disappear.
J CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2 This is used to adjust the variation in
the watermark density when the
adjustment value of the watermark
print/contrast adjustment in the
system setting is changed by 1.
When this value is increased, the
variation is also increased. When the
value is decreased, the variation is
also decreased.
When the adjustment value is 0, the
result of the contrast adjustment is
not reflected. (* The adjustment
value must be set to 1 or greater.)
K HT TYPE (POSI) For halftone index watermark type positive 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing
L HT TYPE (NEGA) For halftone index watermark type 42 - 43 42 characters of watermark copy
negative (secondary output) more clearly, set
to 43.
In that case, however, the containing
characters of the watermark
document (primary output) can be
easily reproduced.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 75
 Setting Default
Category Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
COPY MODE A TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo OFF 0-1 0 1 Normally set to the default.
mode select ON 1 No need to change in the market.
Enable/Disable
B TEXT Text mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
D PHOTOGRAPH Photograph mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph OFF 0-1 0 1
mode select ON 1
Enable/Disable
F MAP Map mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
G LIGHT Light density OFF 0-1 0 1
document mode ON 1
select Enable/
Disable
H TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Copy document: OFF 0-1 0 1
(CPY TO CPY) Enable/Disable of ON 1
selection of the text
print mode
I TEXT (CPY TO CPY) Copy document: OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable of ON 1
selection of the text
mode
J PRINTED PHOTO (CPY Copy document: OFF 0-1 0 1
TO CPY) Enable/Disable of ON 1
selection of the
printed photo mode
K AUTO Automatic mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
L DEFAULT MODE When the default TEXT/ 0-5 0 0
exposure mode PRINTED PHOTO
background is ON, TEXT 1
the exposure mode PRINTED PHOTO 2
to be set is PHOTOGRAPH 3
specified.
TEXT/PHOTO 4
MAP 5
POSITION A LINE SPACE 1 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(24P - 36P)(*1)
B LINE SPACE 2 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(37P - 48P)(*1)
C LINE SPACE 3 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(49P - 64P)(*1)
D LINE SPACE 4 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(65P - 80P)(*1)
E BLANK H/B 1 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 10
watermark print box (24P - 36P)(*2)
F BLANK H/B 2 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 10
watermark print box (37P - 48P)(*2)
G BLANK H/B 3 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 10
watermark print box (49P - 64P)(*2)
H BLANK H/B 4 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 10
watermark print box (65P - 80P)(*2)
I BLANK L/R 1 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 60
print box (24P - 36P)(*3)
J BLANK L/R 2 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 90
print box (37P - 48P)(*3)
K BLANK L/R 3 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 120
print box (49P - 64P)(*3)
L BLANK L/R 4 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 150
print box (65P - 80P)(*3)

*1: When the adjustment value is varied by +/-1, the line space is varied by 0.1mm.
*2: When the adjustment value is varied by +/-1, the upper and the lower margins are varied by 0.1mm.
*3: When the adjustment value is varied by +/-1, the left and the right margins are varied by 0.1mm.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 76
46-68 46-90
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the automatic resolution Function (Purpose) Used to set the process operation of high-
judgement. (For MX-xx70 series) compression PDF images.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch 1) Select a target adjustment mode.
panel. 2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Tap [OK] key. 4) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.

Setting Default Setting Default

Item/Display Content Mode Item / Display Content
range value value value
RESULT HIGH Judgement result : High COLO LUMINANCE Luminance
A 0-3 3 A 0-4 2
RESOLUTION resolution R ADJUSTMENT adjustment
RESULT MID Judgement result : CHROMA Chroma
B 0-3 2 B 0-2 1
RESOLUTION1 Slight high resolution INTENT selection
RESULT MID Judgement result : BG BG LAYER Speed priority
C 0-3 1 A 0-2 1
RESOLUTION2 Slight low resolution LAYER INTENT 1 setting
RESULT LOW Judgement result : Low BG LAYER Image quality
D 0-3 1 B 0-2 1
RESOLUTION1 resolution INTENT 2 priority setting
RESULT UNKNOWN Judgement result : SOFT SKEW Skew correction
E 0-3 1 A 0-1 0
RESOLUTION Cannot judge CIC CORRECTION switch
F LANGUAGE SEL Language setting 0-1 0 B FILTER Filter switch 0-1 0
AUTO RESOLUTION Automatic resolution High
G 0-2 1
MODE judgement mode C CIC MODE compression 0-1 0
mode switch
OUTPUT Resolution
D 0-3 0
RESOLUTION setting
46-74
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy gray balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)/Printer gray balance adjust-
ment (Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin-
uously.
To perform both the copy gray balance adjustment (Automatic
adjustment) and the printer gray balance adjustment (Automatic
adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is
performed. Then, the copy gray balance adjustment pattern is
printed.
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy gray balance adjustment
is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer gray balance adjust-
ment pattern is printed.
5) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer gray balance adjust-
ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment
result pattern is printed.
7) Press [OK] key, and the halftone correction target is registered.
8) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it.
When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust-
ment is completed.
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes effective only when the
adjustment procedure for both copy and print mode have
completed successfully. For example, when the copy gray
balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed
and the simulation is canceled, the adjustment result is not
effective.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 77
46-91
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of black text.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set.
When COLOR key or MONO key is pressed, the adjustment value
is set and a copy is made simultaneously.

Setting Default
Item Display Content Description
range value
A SEGMENT PARAM COMMON Area separation setting select 0: Other than image send mode black text 0-1 0
SPECIAL emphasis (simple, high compression)
1: Image send mode black text
emphasis (simple, high compression)
B BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [COL: COMPACT] JPEG recompression level adjustment The JPEG compression ratio of the 0-2 1
[Color: High compression mode] background layer is selected.
C BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [COL: ULTRA FINE] JPEG recompression level adjustment 0: Low 0-2 1
[Color: Ultra fine mode] 1: Middle
D BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [GRY: COMPACT] JPEG recompression level adjustment 2: High 0-2 1
[Gray: High compression mode]
E BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [GRY: ULTRA FINE] JPEG recompression level adjustment 0-2 1
[Gray: Ultra fine mode]
F FG: TARGET AREA TYPE0 Front ground extraction area select 0: type0 0-2 0
TYPE1 1: type1
TYPE2 2: type2
G FG: TEXT DENSITY [COL] Front ground black text density The black text density in the front ground 0 - 10 5
adjustment [Color] layer is changed.
H FG: TEXT DENSITY [GRY] Front ground black text density 0: Dark - 5: Default - 10: Light 0 - 10 5
adjustment [Gray]
I ULTRA FINE MODE OFF High compression/Ultra Fine mode 0: High compression mode 0-1 0
ON select 1: Ultra fine mode

NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is specially required.
When the adjustment value is changed greatly from the initial value, an image quality trouble may occur.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 78
 48-5
48
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi-
48-1
cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
Purpose Adjustment
Section Scanner section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
Operation/Procedure
tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
and the sub scanning direction). 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
Section
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
The set value is saved.
panel.
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
3) Press [OK] key. fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
The set value is saved. this adjustment.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
ratio is increased. change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre- is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio. the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B or D corresponds
Setting Default
to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio. Item/Display Content
range value
Setting Default A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
range value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50 C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(CCD) (High speed)
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment (Reference speed)
(CCD)
C SPF (MAIN) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scan)
D SPF (SUB) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scan)
E SPFB (MAIN) DSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scan)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 79
48-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
motor.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [MID] [LOW A] [LOW B]
[LOW C] keys on the touch panel.
2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.

Setting Default
Mode Select Item/Display Content
range value
MONO MID A RRM Registration motor correction value 1 - 99 47
HEAVY1,2 LOW A 47
HEAVY3 LOW B 49
HEAVY4 LOW C 49
MONO MID B DM Drum motor correction value 1 - 99 48
MONO MID C DVM Developing motor correction value 1 - 99 50
MONO MID D FUM Fusing motor correction value 1 - 99 37
HEAVY1,2 LOW A B 36
HEAVY3 LOW B 36
HEAVY4 LOW C 36
MONO MID E CPFM Paper feed motor correction value 1 - 99 50
MONO MID F PFM PS front motor correction value 1 - 99 47
MONO MID G HPFM Horizontal transport motor correction value 1 - 99 50
MONO MID H POM Paper exit motor correction value 1 - 99 50
MONO MID I FUSER-SETTING Fusing speed switch timing value 1 - 99 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A C 41
HEAVY3 LOW B 41
HEAVY4 LOW C 41
MONO MID J FS-OFFSET FUM acceleration ratio 1 - 99 40
HEAVY1,2 LOW A D 70
HEAVY3 LOW B 70
HEAVY4 LOW C 70
HEAVY1,2 LOW A E RRM-START RRM acceleration start timing 0 - 255 160
HEAVY3 LOW B 160
HEAVY4 LOW C 160
HEAVY1,2 LOW A F RRM-END RRM acceleration end timing 0 - 255 200
HEAVY3 LOW B 200
HEAVY4 LOW C 200
HEAVY1,2 LOW A G RRM-OFFSET RRM acceleration ratio 1 - 99 80
HEAVY3 LOW B 80
HEAVY4 LOW C 80
MONO MID K COR-PP Paper transport motors all correction values 1 - 99 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A H 50
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50

*1: Common items for color, monochrome, and heavy paper. The items are displayed only when the color button is highlighted.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 80
 49-7
49
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the preinstalled data
49-1
update.
Purpose
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update.
Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
Operation/Procedure 2) Select the button of the folder to perform the update.
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory. 3) The current version and the update version are displayed.
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the 4) Tap [EXECUTE] key.
operation panel section.)
5) Tap [YES] key.
3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel.
The selected item is updated.
4) Select a target firmware.
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively. E-manual
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. Watermark
OCR
6) Press [YES] key.
Sound
The selected firmware is updated.
When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis-
played.

Error display in
Item/Display Content
case or abnormality
UPSIDE BUNDLE Bundle version (Upper) UPBDL
BOTTOM BUNDLE Bundle version (Lower) BTMBDL
ICU-MAIN ICUM main program ICUM
ICU-LOGO ICUM logo data DtLogo
ASIC-MAIN AISC main program ASICM
ASIC-SUB ASIC sub program ASICS
IMAGE DATA Image processing data IMG
LANGUAGE Language support data LANG
program
LANGUAGE(LIST) List print language data LANGL
EOSA Embedded OSA program EOSA
UICONTENTS UI display program UICON
SIM-TEXT Simulation language data SIMT
PCL (PROFILE) PCL color profile PCLP
SCU SCU program SCU
DSPF DSPF program DSPF
PCU PCU program PCU
LCC LCC program LCC
LCT(A3LCC) LCC program A3LCC
FINISHER(3KFIN) 3K Finisher program FIN3M
FINISHER(INNER) Inner Finisher program INFIN
FINISHER(FIN100) 100 sheets Finisher FIN100
program
FIN-SUB 3K Finisher sub program FINS
SADDLE Saddle program SDL
SADDLE(FIN100) 100 sheets Finisher SDL100
saddle program
PUNCH(3K) 3K Punch unit program 3PUN
TRIMMER Trimmer program TRIM
INSERTER Inserter program INS
FOLDING UNIT Folding unit program FOLD
DECURLER Decurler unit program DEC
FAX Standard Fax unit FAX
program
FAX OPT1 Option Fax 1st line FXOT1
program
FAX OPT2 Option Fax 2nd line FXOT2
program

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 81
 A.(RRC-A)
50 The timing of detection of the image lead edge after starting the
document scan is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
50-1 * When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When the
value is increased, the timing is delayed.
Purpose Adjustment
B. (LEAD)
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
ment
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
Section
C. (SIDE)
Operation/Procedure
The side image loss amount is adjusted.
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel. * When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
(0.1mm/step)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
D. (DEN-A)
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
default. The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment E. (DEN-B)
SIDE: Side image loss adjustment The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
F.(FRONT/REAR)
Setting Default The void amount on the right and left edges of paper is adjusted.
Item/Display Content
range value
(0.1mm/step)
A Lead edge RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
adjustment reference position
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
value (OC)

B Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40

area loss area setting
C setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
value area adjustment
D Void area DENA Print lead edge 1 - 99 40
adjustment adjustment
E DENB Sub scanning 1 - 99 35
direction print range
adjustment
F FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 25
REAR area adjustment
G Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjustment OC center adjustment
H Magnificati SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
on ratio SPEED_ magnification ratio
correction OC adjustment (CCD)
I Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
scanning correction value
J direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
K correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
value value
L DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
value
M DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value
N DENB-LC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
value
O DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 50
value
P DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
correction value

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 82
50-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the
touch panel.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 4.0+/-2.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.

Default
Item/Display Content Setting range Remarks
value
A DEN-C Printer print lead edge adjustment 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value for fitting the print lead edge for the
printer.
When the adjustment value of this item is decreased
by 1, the printer print start position in the paper
transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by
0.1mm
B DEN-B Sub scanning direction print range 1 - 99 35 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge.
adjustment When the adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is
decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in
the sub scanning direction for the paper transport
direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 - 99 25 The void amount made at the right and the left edges
of paper is adjusted. When the value is increased,
the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed correction value 1 - 99 50
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction value 1 - 99 50
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction value 1 - 99 50
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction value 1 - 99 50
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction value 1 - 99 50
I DENB-LC LCC manual paper feed correction value 1 - 99 50
J DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 50
K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value 1 - 99 50
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
M PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2(CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*1) 6
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print Select 0-1 0 1(NO)
NO selection Not select 1

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 83
50-6 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
Purpose Adjustment range value
F Image loss
LEAD_ Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 40
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and amount EDGE image loss amount
the image loss. (DSPF mode) setting (SIDE2) setting
Section DSPF G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20
REAR image loss amount
Operation/Procedure
(SIDE2) setting
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20
panel. EDGE image loss amount
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (SIDE2) setting
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
Setting Default
Item/Display Content J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
range value
document off-center
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
adjustment
document scan position
adjustment (CCD) K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification
B SIDE2 Back surface document 1 - 99 50
ratio (Sub scan)
scan position
adjustment (CCD)
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing
C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
is delayed.
amount EDGE image loss amount
setting (SIDE1) setting Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20 is increased.
REAR image loss amount Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
(SIDE1) setting increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
E TRAIL_ Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 40
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
EDGE image loss amount
(SIDE1) setting *1: Displayed only when A4/A3 LCC is connected.
*2: Displayed only when 2-stage LCT is installed.
*3: Displayed only when two units of 2-stage LCT are connected.

50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)

Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio 60 - 140 105
B MAIN-STD Combined correction value Standard correction amount (Off center direction) 1 - 99 46
C SUB-STD Standard correction amount (Paper feed direction) 1 - 99 47
D MAIN-SFT Print position correction Back surface correction (Off center direction) 0-3 0
E SUB-SFT Back surface correction (Paper transporting direction) 0-3 0
F MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment Manual paper feed 1 - 99 61
G MAIN-CS1 value Tray1 1 - 99 60
H MAIN-CS2 Tray2 1 - 99 58
I MAIN-CS3 Tray3 1 - 99 59
J MAIN-CS4 Tray4 1 - 99 58
K MAIN-LCC LCC 1 - 99 60
L MAIN-ADU ADU 1 - 99 57
M SUB-MFT Registration motor ON Manual paper feed 1 - 99 54
N SUB-CS1 timing adjustment Tray1 1 - 99 54
O SUB-CS2 Tray2 1 - 99 51
P SUB-CS3 Tray3 1 - 99 53
Q SUB-CS4 Tray4 1 - 99 50
R SUB-LC LCC 1 - 99 54
S SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 51

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 84
 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
T SUB-HV-A Shifting amount value Heavy1,2 1 - 99 52
U SUB-HV-B Heavy3,4 1 - 99 56
V SUB-GLOSSY PAPER Gross 1 - 99 52
W SUB-OHP OHP 1 - 99 50
X MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
Y PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper ffe 1-6 1 3 (CS2)
CS1 Tray1 2
CS2 Tray2 3
CS3 Tray3 4
CS4 Tray4 5
LCC LCC 6
Z DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1
AA ALT FEED NORMAL Other tray selection Normal 0-1 0 0
ALL OTHER All trays except "PAPER" 1 (NORMAL)

50-12 Setting Default

Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center center adjustment
position adjustment. (The adjustment is B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
made separately for each scan mode.) center adjustment
Section C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
1step = 0.1mm

2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch

50-27
panel.
Purpose Adjustment 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
of scanned images in the FAX or image
send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
key.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
C TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
E amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
When image A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
send mode B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
(Except for C TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX and D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
copy) amount setting
E FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)

A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 85
50-28
51
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image
51-1
loss, void area, image off-center, and image
magnification ratio. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Section Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
transport voltage.
Operation/Procedure
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with Section
SIM50-28. Operation/Procedure
* Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, off- 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
center adjustments (Manual adjustments) panel.
1) Select an adjustment item with the menu button. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
3) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim-
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned. ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
increased, the timing is delayed.
5) Press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
Item/Display Content Content by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
BK-MAG/STD ADJ BK Main scanning BK main scanning direction
magnification image magnification ratio Default
Item/Display Content
correction/Standard adjustment and Standard value
print position printing position adjustment A TC ON TIMING Transfer voltage ON timing setting 53
adjustment. of (STD) B TC OFF TIMING Transfer voltage OFF timing setting 70
SETUP/PRINT ADJ Printing position Print image edge C FRONT EDGE ON Front edge bias ON timing setting 50
adjustment adjustment / all tray print TIMING
off-center adjustment D BACKEND OFF Rear edge bias OFF timing setting 30
(individual tray, ADU) TIMING
DATA Data display Used data for the
adjustment is displayed.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 86
51-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
the DSPF registration roller.
(This adjustment is performed when there
is a considerable variation in the print
image position on the paper or when paper
jams frequently occur.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
[ENGINE] keys.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Content Transport Setting Default

Item/Button Display item
(Mode, document, paper feed speed) direction range value
A REGI1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A REGI2 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 70
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 70
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 70
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 70
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 87
 Content Transport Setting Default
Item/Button Display item
(Mode, document, paper feed speed) direction range value
A ENGINE TRAY1 PLAIN PAPER (S) Tray 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Plain paper/Small size) less
B TRAY2 PLAIN PAPER (S) Tray 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Plain paper/Small size) less
C MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Plain paper/Small size) less
D MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Plain paper/Large size) above
E MANUAL HEAVY A PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
(Heavy paper A/Small size) less
F MANUAL HEAVY A PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
(Heavy paper A/Large size) above
G MANUAL HEAVY B PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
(Heavy paper B/Small size) less
H MANUAL HEAVY B PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
(Heavy paper B/Large size) above
I MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 10
J MANUAL LABEL Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Label) - 1 - 99 10
K ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Plain paper/Small size) less
L ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Plain paper/Large size) above
M ADU HEAVY A PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
(Heavy paper A/Small size) less
N ADU HEAVY A PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
(Heavy paper A/Large size) above
O TRAY3/4(S) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Plain paper/Small size) less
P TRAY3/4 HEAVY A PAPER (S) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
(Heavy paper A/Small size) less
Q TRAY3/4(L) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Plain paper/Large size) above
R TRAY3/4 HEAVY A PAPER (L) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
(Heavy paper A/Large size) above
S TRAY4 OHP Tray 4/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 10
T TRAY4 LABEL Tray 4/deflection adjustment value (Label) - 1 - 99 10
U LCC (S) LCC, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Plain paper/Small size) less
V LCC HEAVY A PAPER (S) LCC, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 50
(Heavy paper A/Small size) less
W LCC (L) LCC, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Plain paper/Large size) above
X LCC HEAVY A PAPER (L) LCC, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 50
(Heavy paper A/Large size) above

Note on "Large size" and "Small size"

Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm).
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm).
* The adjustment unit is a distance of 0.1mm unit.
* The smaller the set value of the warp amount for each of the specified items is, the smaller the warp is. The greater the set value is, the
greater the warp is.
* DSPF REGI1 is the registration amount adjustment in the paper feed side. DSPF REGI2 is the registration amount adjustment at just before
scanning.

Adjustment value
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount is
decreased.
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 88
 53-8
53
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref-
53-6
erence and the DSPF mode document
Purpose Adjustment scan position.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the Section
DSPF document width.
Operation/Procedure
Section Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
Operation/Procedure AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment
1) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width. (Auto adjustment)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
The maximum width detection level is recognized. table.
3) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. adjustment value is saved.)
The A4R width detection level is recognized. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
5) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width. range value
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit)
The A5R width detection level is recognized.
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
7) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width. reference position
8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
MANUAL: DSPF mode document scan position adjustment
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally, 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value range value
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value A ADJUST DSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 10
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
stop position adjustment)
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
• When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-
tion in the DSPF mode is shifted to the right.
• When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
53-7
shifted by 0.1mm.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF document size
width sensor.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Setting Default
Item/Display
range value
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 66
B AD_P1 Intermediate position (L) 0 - 1023 438
C AD_P2 Intermediate position (S) 0 - 1023 699
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 893

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 89
53-9
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) DSPF dirt detection setting
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.

Setting Default
Item/Display item, Details of display Content
range value
A SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_START OFF DSPF front surface optimum scan position OFF 0-1 0 0
ON detection setting (when starting) ON 1 (OFF)
B SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_JOB OFF DSPF front surface optimum scan position OFF 0-1 0 1
ON detection setting (After a job) ON 1 (ON)
C SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_LV WEAK DSPF front surface optimum scan position Low 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE detection level setting Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
D OC_DIRT_LV WEAK OC dirt level setting Low 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
E SIDEA_DIRT_ALARM_LV WEAK DSPF front surface dirt alarm level setting Low 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
F SIDEB_DIRT_ALARM_LV WEAK DSPF back surface dirt alarm level setting Low 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
G SIDEA_DIRT_SHADING_SET OFF DSPF front surface streak delete shading setting OFF 0-1 0 1
ON ON 1 (ON)
H SIDEB_DIRT_SHADING_SET OFF DSPF back surface streak delete shading setting OFF 0-1 0 1
ON ON 1 (ON)
I SIDEB_EXT_SHADING_SET DSPF back surface expansion shading setting Default 0-4 0 0
Both OFF 1
Both ON 2
Power on ON/ 3
OFF after JOB
Power on OFF/ 4
ON after JOB

53-10 55-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
Function (Purpose) DSPF dirt detection execution. required.)

Section Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-

ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure
Item Content
OC Forcible execution of OC/DSPF SIDE A and the result
display are made.
55-3
DSPF Forcible execution of DSPF SIDE B and the result display
are made. Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
ler operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
55 Operation/Procedure

55-1
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
control operations. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 90
55-10
56
Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan
56-1
only)
Purpose Backup
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
Operation/Procedure
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key. PWB.)
2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key.
Section
3) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default 1) Select a target content of data transfer.
Item/Display Content
range value 2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1 Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
B 2ND DIGIT Second digit
32 [blank: When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
C 3RD DIGIT Third digit
20H] displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit
65 - 90
E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit EEPROM - HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
[Alphabet:
F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right edge) HDD - EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
41H("A") -
5AH("Z")]
48 - 57
[Numeral:
30H("0") - 56-2
39H("9")]
Purpose Data backup
G TYPE PATTERN Print Edging type 0 1
1 com- Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.
PATTERN posing OR process 1 ICU DRIVE,STRAGE.
2 method type (including user authentication data and
PATTERN No-delete- 2 address data) to the USB memory.
3 compo-
Section
sition type
Operation/Procedure
Input value 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Print Blank A B C D E F 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
Input value 32 65 66 67 68 69 70 • STORAGE IMPORT
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM  STORAGE
Print G H I J K L M
Input value 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 • EEPROM&ICU DRIVE IMPORT
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM  ICU DRIVE
Print N O P Q R S T • STORAGE EXPORT
Input value 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 From EEPROM  STORAGE To USB MEMORY DEVICE
• EEPROM&ICU DRIVE EXPORT
Print U V W X Y Z 0
Input value 85 86 87 88 89 90 48 From EEPROM  ICU DRIVE To USB MEMORY DEVICE
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Print 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
Input value 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Print 8 9
(Machine with the DSK installed)
Input value 56 57
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
<STORAGE IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM,STORAGE.
<EEPROM&ICU DRIVER IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM,ICU DRIVER.
<STORAGE EXPORT>
From EEPROM,STORAGE to USB MEMORY DEVICE.
<EEPROM&ICU DRIVER EXPORT>
From EEPROM,ICU DRIVER to USB MEMORY DEVICE.
3) Enter the password with 10-key.
4) Press [SET] key.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 91
56-3 56-7
Purpose Data backup Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to Function (Purpose) Import the syslog data to a USB memory.
the USB memory. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. 2) Select SYSLOG EXPORT to be imported.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
• DOC FIL IMPORT 4) Press [YES] key.
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM  STORAGE
• DOC FIL EXPORT
From EEPROM  STORAGE To USB MEMORY DEVICE 56-15
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Purpose Backup
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. Function (Purpose) MFP EEPROM data restore
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is Section
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Confirm that new EEPROM attached on the PWB.
2) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and tap [YES] key.
56-4
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Purpose Data backup
displayed, in case of an abnormal end "ERROR" is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
USB memory.
Section 56-99
Operation/Procedure Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. Function (Purpose) Used to import the log data to a USB flash
2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key. drive.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Section
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. Operation/Procedure
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is 1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
2) Select the log item data to be imported.
3) Tap [EXECUTE] key, and tap [YES] key.

56-5 Item Contents

Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check SIM00-11 Import SIM00-11 data.
SIM56-2 Perform simplified output of SIM56-2.
Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB
SIM56-4 Import SIM56-4 job log data.
memory in the TEXT format.
SIM56-5 Import SIM56-5 data.
Section SIM56-6 Import SIM56-6 data.
Operation/Procedure SIM56-7 Import SIM56-7 system log data.
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. 60
Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is 60-1
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the memory operations
(read/write) of the MFP PWB.
56-6 Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to output the JAM/trouble data. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Start the test.
Operation/Procedure
Result display Description
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. OK Success
2) Select the output target item with the touch panel key. NG Fail
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble)
4) Press [YES] key. INVALID Execution disable

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 92
61
61-1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
tion and laser detection.
Section LSU
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.

Display Content
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)

61-3
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/
FAX], [PR1200] on the touch panel.
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
line images are increased.

Setting Default value

Mode Item/Display Content
range 65 cpm 75 cpm
COPY600 A LASER POWER MIDDLE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed/BW 0 - 255 115 125
B LASER POWER LOW(BW) Laser power setting low speed/BW 0 - 255 115 115
C LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW) Laser duty select middle speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
D LASER DUTY LOW(BW) Laser duty select low speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
E LASER POWER K1 Laser power setting K1 0 - 255 100 100
F LASER POWER K2 Laser power setting K2 0 - 255 100 100
G LASER POWER K3 Laser power setting K3 0 - 255 100 100
H LASER POWER K4 Laser power setting K4 0 - 255 100 100
COPY1200 A LASER POWER MIDDLE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed/BW 0 - 255 115 125
B LASER POWER LOW(BW) Laser power setting low speed/BW 0 - 255 115 115
C LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW) Laser duty select middle speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
D LASER DUTY LOW(BW) Laser duty select low speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
PRINTER A LASER POWER MIDDLE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed/BW 0 - 255 115 125
600/FAX B LASER POWER LOW(BW) Laser power setting low speed/BW 0 - 255 115 115
C LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW) Laser duty select middle speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
D LASER DUTY LOW(BW) Laser duty select low speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
PRINTER A LASER POWER MIDDLE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed/BW 0 - 255 115 125
1200 B LASER POWER LOW(BW) Laser power setting low speed/BW 0 - 255 115 115
C LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW) Laser duty select middle speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
D LASER DUTY LOW(BW) Laser duty select low speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 93
61-11 Items Contents Outline
DATA Data display screen Data display during
Purpose Adjustment execution of the manual
Function (Purpose) Used to correct the laser power automati- correction
cally.
*: Since a special tool is required for measurement, this simulation
Section is executed only in the factory.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with touch panel key.
61-13
Items Contents Outline
Purpose Adjustment
AUTO Automatic correction Adjustment by scanner
CORRECTION Function (Purpose) Used to clear the laser power correction
DATA Data display screen Data display when value.
executing the automatic
Section
correction
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [AUTO CORRECTION] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Select the adjustment density pattern. 2) Press [YES] key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Reference value reset item
5) The adjustment pattern is printed out.
Laser power automatic correction amount (K) 32 data (point)
6) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table
Laser power manual correction amount (K) 32 data (point)
(A4R direction), and press [EXECUTE] key.
The automatic correction of the laser power is performed, and
then the adjustment result pattern is outputted.
7) To perform the correction again, press [RETRY] key. 61-14
8) When [DATA] key is pressed on the initial screen, the display is Purpose Adjustment
shifted to the automatic adjustment result display screen. Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power at once.
Section
Operation/Procedure
61-12
This Sim mode allows change of laser power settings easily, and all
Purpose Adjustment at once. However, this change will not change the initial value of
Function (Purpose) Laser power manual correction SIM 61-3 (Laser power settings).
Section LSU The laser power set in this Sim mode will be:
Operation/Procedure Initial value of Sim 61-3 x Initial value of Sim 61-14 (%)
Press an item button to be adjusted. 1) Tap a target item.
When [MEASURING INSTRUMENT] is pressed:
Item Setting range Default
1) Select the adjustment density pattern. K/BW -2 Fine (80%) 0
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. -1 Slight fine (90%)
3) The adjustment pattern is printed out. 0 Normal (100%)
4) Enter the adjustment value by the density meter. 1 Slight thick (110%)
2 Thick (120%)
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the
adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis-
played.
6) To perform the correction again, press [RETRY] key.
When [VISUAL INSPECTION] is pressed:
1) Select the adjustment density pattern.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) The adjustment pattern is printed out.
4) Press [5POINT CORRECTION] or [32POINT CORRECTION].
5) Enter an adjustment value.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the
adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis-
played.
7) To perform the correction again, press [RETRY] key.
When [DATA] is pressed:
The display is shifted to the manual adjustment result display
screen.

Items Contents Outline

MEASURING Density meter correction * Adjustment with the
INSTRUMENT density meter.
VISUAL Visual check adjustment Adjustment by visual
INSPECTION check

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 94
 Display Item Contents
62 Storage read/write check Storage self-diagnosis SHORT Normal
(SMART (SHORT)) OK
Storage read/write check Storage self-diagnosis EXTENDED
62-1
(SMART (EXTENDED)) NG Abnormal
Purpose Data clear Storage read/write check Storage self-diagnosis EXTENDED
Function (Purpose) Used to format the storage. (SMART (EXTENDED)) OK Normal

Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be formatted with the touch panel key. 62-4
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Purpose Operation test/check
3) Press [YES] key. Function (Purpose) Used to perform the storage theory check
Used to execute the storage format. and theoretical format.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the Section
normal display. Operation/Procedure
Choose FORMAT or CHECK
Display item Contents
ALL AREA Storage format
In the case of FORMAT, a partition list is displayed.
EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA Storage format 1) Select the partition and press [EXECUTE] key.
(Except system area) 2) Press [YES] key.
PREINSTALL DATA Storage format The format of the selected partition is performed.
(Pre-installation data area)
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
Incase of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
Display Item Contents
Storage format (ALL AREA) NG Storage format abnormal In the case of CHECK,
Storage format (ALL AREA) OK Storage format normal 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Storage format Storage format 2) Press [YES] key.
(EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) NG (Except system area) abnormal
Partition check is performed.
Storage format Storage format
(EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) OK (Except system area) normal When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
Storage format Storage format Incase of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
(PREINSTALL DATA) NG (Pre-installation data area) abnormal
Storage format Storage format
(PREINSTALL DATA) OK (Pre-installation data area) normal
62-7
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to print the self diagnostics error log.
62-3
Section
Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the storage (all 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
areas).
Error log printing operation is performed.
Section
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
Operation/Procedure normal display.
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key. 62-9
Read/write operations are performed. Purpose Data clear
<ITEM LIST> Function (Purpose) Used to clear the job competition data and
Display Item Contents
the document filing data.
ALL Storage read / write confirmation Section
(all areas check) Operation/Procedure
PART Storage read / write confirmation
1) Select the item you want to delete.
(partial check)
SMART (SHORT) Storage self-diagnosis SHORT When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
SMART (EXTENDED) Storage self-diagnosis EXTENDED 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
<RESULT DISPLAY AND DESCRIPTION>
Data delete is executed
Display Item Contents When the operation is completed, the execution result ("OK" /
Storage read/write check Storage read / write confirmation "NG") is displayed.
(ALL) NG (full area check) Abnormal
Storage read/write check Storage read / write confirmation
(ALL) OK (full area check) Normal
Storage read/write check Storage read / write confirmation
(PART) NG (partial check) Abnormal
Storage read/write check Storage read / write confirmation
(PART) OK (partial check) Normal
Storage read/write check Storage self-diagnosis SHORT
(SMART (SHORT)) NG Abnormal

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 95
62-12
63
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
63-1
in the storage trouble.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction
Operation/Procedure
result.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Section Scanner
2) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
The set value is saved.
1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
panel.
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
data storage area is cleared. Display
Button Description Remarks
item
Item Content Default value OC ANALOG Analog gain
A 0 Enable 1 GAIN ODD adjustment value
1 Disable (odd number)
ANALOG Analog gain
GAIN adjustment value
EVEN (even number)
62-14 DIGITAL Digital gain
Purpose Data clear GAIN ODD adjustment value
(odd number)
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing manage- DIGITAL Digital gain
ment data. GAIN adjustment value
Section HDD EVEN (even number)
SMP AVE Reference plate
Operation/Procedure
ODD sampling average
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. value (odd number)
2) Press [YES] key. SMP AVE Reference plate
The document filing management data are cleared. EVEN sampling average
value (even number)
At the same time, the job log data are also cleared. TARGET Target value
VALUE
Display item Contents
BLACK Black output level
ALL CLEAR Delete all database files.
LEVEL
PART CLEAR Delete the selected database file.
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error
CHECK Check the tables used by all database users CODE 1: STAGE1. Loop
number over
This simulation is executed in the following trouble cases.
2: STAGE2. The
* The document filing function does not work normally. target value is less
* The job log is not recorded normally. than the specified
NOTE: level.
3: STAGE3. The gain
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions.
set value is
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver- negative.
sion. 4: END is not
asserted. (Gain
adjustment)
5: (reserve)
62-21
6: STAGE2.
Purpose Other Underflow
Function (Purpose) Used to display the storage information. 7: Black shading error
8: Other error
Section
9: END is not
asserted. (White
shading)
10: END is not
asserted. (Black
shading)
11: END is not
asserted. (Light
quantity correction)
12: END is not
asserted. (Scan)
13: Register check
error (When
starting/Gain)
14: Register check
error (Before light
quantity correction)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 96
 Display 63-2
Button Description Remarks
item
OC DSPF First scan DSPF Purpose Adjustment
FACE front surface white Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
WHITE reference level
LEVEL 1ST
Section
DSPF Second scan DSPF Operation/Procedure
FACE front surface white • DSPF-installed model
WHITE reference level
1) Select [OC SHADING] key or [DSPF SHADING] key, and
LEVEL 2ND
press [EXECUTE] key.
DSPF ANALOG Analog gain
GAIN ODD adjustment value Used to perform shading.
(odd number) When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
ANALOG Analog gain normal display.
GAIN adjustment value
EVEN (even number)
DIGITAL Digital gain
GAIN ODD adjustment value 63-3
(odd number) Purpose Adjustment
DIGITAL Digital gain
GAIN adjustment value
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal-
EVEN (even number) ance and gamma auto adjustment.
SMP AVE Reference plate Section Scanner
ODD sampling average Operation/Procedure
value (odd number)
SMP AVE Reference plate
1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) on the reference posi-
EVEN sampling average tion of the left rear frame side of the document table. For the
value (even number) DSPF mode, put the SIT chart backside up on the DSPF tray.
TARGET Target value 2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
VALUE 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
BLACK Black output level
LEVEL
The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error
formed.
CODE 1: STAGE1. Loop When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
number over normal display.
2: STAGE2. The After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the
target value is less adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data
than the specified display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key.
level.
3: STAGE3. The gain
set value is
negative. 63-4
4: END is not Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
asserted. (Gain
adjustment) Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5: (reserve) Section
6: STAGE2. Operation/Procedure
Underflow
7: Black shading error
1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) on the reference posi-
tion of the left rear frame side of the document table. For the
8: Other error
9: END is not
DSPF mode, put the SIT chart backside up on the DSPF tray.
asserted. (White 2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
shading) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
10: END is not
The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.
asserted. (Black
shading) When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
11: END is not the normal display.
asserted. (Light 4) Select a data display mode.
quantity correction)
12: END is not GAMMA THROUGH SIT chart scan data
asserted. (Scan) COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the SIT chart
13: Register check scan data
error (When SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of the SIT
starting/Gain) chart scan data
14: Register check SIT CHECK SIT chart scan data/Check result
error (Before light
quantity correction) Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys.
DSPF First scan DSPF
BACK back surface white
WHITE reference level
LEVEL 1ST
DSPF Second scan DSPF
BACK back surface white
WHITE reference level
LEVEL 2ND

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 97
63-5 63-11
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color Function (Purpose) Used to set the target gray balance of the
balance and gamma default setting. copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key 1) Select the target gray balance with the touch panel.
2) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the Default DEF 1.
default.

64
64-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 - 68 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22,29,33-35) (* For details, refer to the below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19,
21, 22, 29,33-35)
B DOT1 Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1 - 255 1
(DOT1>=2 IF A: 2, 11) (Self print pattern: For m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2 - 255
except above: 1 - 255)
C DOT2 Space dot number setting (N parameter) 0 - 255 236
(DOT2>=2 IF A: 2, 11) (Self print pattern: For m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2 - 255
except above: 0 - 255)
D DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 255
(FIXED "255" IF A:9) (Pattern 9: 255 Fixed
except above: 1 - 255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE NONE Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) TEXT/PRINTED specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 2
PHOTO except above: 1-8)
TEXT/PHOTO Text/ Photograph 3
TEXT Text 4
PHOTO Photograph 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1 (NO)
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN1 Paper type Standard paper 1 1-9 1 1
PLAIN2 Standard paper 2 2
HEAVY Heavy paper 3
OHP OHP 4
ENVELOPE Envelope 5
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 6
GLOSSY Glossy paper 7
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 8
HEAVY4 Heavy paper 4 9

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 98
Print pattern of Item A

M N
Pattern
Pattern Gradation Exposure parameter parameter
NO./Content generating
size select select Enable/ Enable/
section Default value Default value
Disable Disable
1 Grid pattern All surface LSU-ASIC  ×  1  236
* When the print width is 100 or above and all colors are selected, printing is made in the three colors
of CMY.
* Printing is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
* For the first writing, LD1 is fixed regardless of void.
2 Dot print All surface  ×  2  2
9 Each color 10% Fixed  ×  10  1
area (A4/4R) range * Each interval is 41.86mm (989dots).
density print * When m is out of the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
* K printing is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print Fixed  × × 1 × 1
range
11 4-color dot print All surface    2  2
(sub scan) (each * Each color is printed in 1/4 of the sub scan paper size.
color 1/4) * At N=0, 4 colors are printed in all the surface.
17 All background All surface Halftone   × 1 × 1
(halftone) (IMG-ASIC rear * When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
18 256 gradations Fixed process) ×  × 1 × 1
pattern (Other range * When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
dither) * 16 gradations are printed in the main scan direction, and the following 16 gradations are printed in
the next line. (16 x 16 patch print)
* Printing is started at 5mm from the paper lead edge.
* Printing is made from 255 gradation, and 0 - 254 gradations are printed.
19 256 gradations Fixed ×  × 1 × 1
pattern (Dither range Same as above.
for text)
21 4-point dot print All color LSU-ASIC  ×  2  2
(main scan) (each * Each color is printed in 1/4 of the main scan paper size.
color 1/4) * At N=0, 4 colors are printed in all the surface.
22 Slant line All surface LSU-ASIC  ×  1  254
29 Dot print All surface LSU-ASIC  ×  1  3
1200dpi * M=1 Fixation
* N=1 or 3
33 Halftone pattern Fixed Halftone ×  × 1 × 1
1200dpi (all over range (IMG-ASIC rear * 1200dpi dither
the page) process)
34 256 gradation Fixed ×  × 1 × 1
pattern 1200dpi range * 1200dpi dither
35 256 gradation Fixed ×  × 1 × 1
pattern (straight) range * 1200dpi dither
1200dpi

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 99
64-4
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-3 3
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray selection Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW Halftone Low line number 0 0
HIGH High line number 1 (LOW)
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard(600dpi, 1bit) 0 1
HIGHQUALITY High quality(600dpi, 4bit) 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra fine(1200dpi, 1bit) 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 0 1
CALIB correction Calibration 1 (CALIB)
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN1 Paper type Plain paper 1 0 0
PLAIN2 Plain paper 2 1 (PLAIN1)
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 3
GLOSSY Glossy paper 4
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 5
HEAVY4 Heavy paper 4 6

Print pattern of Item A

Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
2 Halftone pattern (B/W)
3 Background dot print

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 100

64-5
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-2 1
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 2
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (AUTO)
AUTO Auto (For Photo/For text) 2
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0 1
HIGHQUALITY High quality (600dpi, 4bit) 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither 0: Straight 0 1(CALIB)
CALIB correction 1: Calibration 1
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN1 Paper type Standard paper 1 0 0
PLAIN2 Standard paper 2 1 (PLAIN1)
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 3
GLOSSY Glossy paper 4
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 5
HEAVY4 Heavy paper 4 6
I TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 101

64-6
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-2 1
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 2
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (AUTO)
AUTO Auto (for photo/text) 2
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0 1
HIGHQUALITY High quality (600dpi, 4bit) 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither 0: Straight 0 1
CALIB correction 1: Calibration 1 (CALIB)
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN1 Paper type Standard paper 1 0 0
PLAIN2 Standard paper 2 1 (PLAIN1)
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 3
GLOSSY Glossy paper 4
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 5
HEAVY4 Heavy paper 4 6
I TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 102

 65-5
65
Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
65-1
input.
Purpose Adjustment
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
Operation/Procedure
play section) detection coordinates.
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
Section Operation panel section the screen.
Operation/Procedure If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
screen. is displayed.
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to <Check target key>
the simulation sub number entry menu.
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu. 10 Inch LCD model
HOME

66
66-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2
- 150) on the LCD to allow changing the
soft SW while checking with the LCD.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] is
cleared.
65-2 2) Press [DATA] key.
Purpose Operation check/test The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis- * When [SW NO] key is pressed, the display returns to the ini-
play section) detection coordinates. tial screen.
Section 3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
Operation/Procedure 10-key.
Touch the touch panel. * [1] - [0]
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of [0] - [1]
the touched position is displayed in real time. 4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the set-
ting is saved.
 After saving the setting, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal
;<
display.
 
 ;< 



66-2
     

     Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to enter a country code and set the
default value for the country code.




Section FAX


Operation/Procedure

1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-02, the following
screen is displayed.
* When [DEST CODE] key is pressed, the display is shifted to
the country code list screen.
* The currently set country code is displayed in the column of
"PRESENT:".
2) Enter the country code (8 digits) with 10-key([0]/[1]). The
entered country code is displayed in the column of "NEW:" and
[SET] key becomes active.
* When [C] key is pressed, the column of "NEW:" is cleared.
3) When [SET] key is pressed after entering the country code,
[EXECUTE] key becomes active. The country code is dis-
played in the column of "PRESENT:", and the column of
"NEW:" is cleared.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 103

4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and [YES]
66-3
and [NO] keys become active. The country name is displayed
on the tile line. Purpose Operation test/Check
5) When [YES] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the soft SW Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the EEPROM
corresponding to the country code is initialized. and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller
6) After completion of initialization of the soft SW, [EXECUTE], and display the result.
[YES], and [NO] keys become inactive. Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure (Shifting to the country page) 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-03, the following
* When [DEST CODE] key is pressed on the initial screen, the dis- screen is displayed.
play is shifted to the country code list screen. * Select the page of memory check item with the scroll key.
Use scroll keys to select the country select page. 2) When the memory check item button is selected, the display is
<Country code list> shifted to the memory check screen.
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the
JAPAN 00000000
memory check of the selected item is started.
U.S.A. 10110101
AUSTRALIA 00001001
4) After completion of memory check, [EXECUTE] key returns to
U.K. 10110100
the normal display and the result of memory check is dis-
FRANCE 00111101
played.
GERMANY 00000100 Memory check status
SWEDEN 10100101
NO CHECK No check
NEWZEALAND 01111110
CHECKING During checking
CHINA 00100110
OK Check complete OK
SINGAPORE 10011100
NG A## Check complete NG Error occurring address or data
TW 11111110
line is displayed for each item.
MIDDLEANDNEAREAST 11111101
SLOVAKIA 11111100 Check item
OTHER3 11111011
Check memory item Remark
FINLAND 00111100
1 All Memory Device Check (once) All the items are checked
NORWAY 10000010
once.
DENMARK 00110001
2 MODEM EEPROM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
NETHERLANDS 01111011
3 MODEM EEPROM <1> (repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
ITALY 01011001
4 MODEM SDRAM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
SWITZERLAND 10100110
5 MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
AUSTRIA 00001010
INDONESIA 01010100 The number in < > indicates the line.
THAILAND 10101001
MALAYSIA 01101100
INDIA 01010011
PHILIPPINES 10001001
66-4
HONGKONG 01010000 Purpose Operation test/Check
RUSSIA 10111000 Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signals to the
SOUTHAFRICA 10011111 line and the main unit speaker. (Send level:
SPAIN 10100000 max.)
PORTUGUESE 10001011
Section FAX
LUXEMBURG 01101001
BELGIUM 00001111 Operation/Procedure
CZECH 00101110 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-04, the screen on the
HUNGARY 01010001 right is displayed. (Default, left upper selected.)
GREECE 01000110 * Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
POLAND 10001010 2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-
BRAZIL 00010110 lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal
KOREA 01100001 display.
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signals
are sent.
4) To end signal send:
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal
send is interrupted.
<Signal send table>

NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34

26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100
0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT

DP MAKE DP BRK NO MSG

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 104

 <Sound message table>
66-5
NONE (Mute) PAUSE (Pause MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2
Purpose Operation test/Check
melody) (Message 1) (Message 2)
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal to the line MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6
and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft (Message 3) (Message 4) (Massage 5) (Message 6)
SW setting) (For the kinds of send signals, ALARM (Alarm) RINGER [Link]
refer to SIM66-04.) (Ringing sound ER (External
(Speaker)) telephone call)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-05, the following
screen is displayed. 66-9
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page. Purpose Operation test/Check
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high- Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound message
lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
display. Soft SW setting)
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signals * For details of sound messages, refer to
are sent. the sound message table of SIM66-08.
4) To end signal send: Section FAX
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal Operation/Procedure
send is interrupted. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-09, the following
screen is displayed.
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
66-6 highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
Purpose Data output/Check display.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the confidential registration 3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and a sound
check table (BOX NO., BOX name, pass- message is sent.
code. (If there is no confidential registra- 4) To end signal send:
tion, no print is made.) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal
Section FAX send is interrupted.
Operation/Procedure
1) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the con-
fidential checkable is printed. 66-10
* If there is no confidential registration, no print is made even Purpose Data clear
though [EXECUTE] key is pressed. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX and image send
2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor- image data. (The confidential data are also
mal display. cleared.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-7
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Data output/Check 2) Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to output all image data saved in the 3) After completion of clearing, press [CA] key to reboot the
image memory. (Confidential data are also machine.
outputted.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure 66-11
1) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and all Purpose Operation test/Check
image data saved in the image memory are outputted.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor- to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
mal display. Max.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-8
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-11, the following
Purpose Operation test/Check screen is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound mes- 2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
sages to the line and the speaker. (Send highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
level: Max.) display.
Section FAX 3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and a sound
Operation/Procedure message is sent.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-08, the following 4) To end signal send:
screen is displayed. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal
2) When the sound message button to be sent is selected, it is send is interrupted.
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal <300bps send signal table>
display.
NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000
010101 00001

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 105

66-12 66-15
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS)
to the line and the speaker. (Send level: send test and to adjust the make time.
Soft SW setting) Section FAX
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps,
Operation/Procedure
refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal
table. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-15, the following
screen is displayed.
Section FAX
2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the dial
Operation/Procedure pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-12, the following * The dial pulse in this example is up to 20 digits registered
screen is displayed.
with SIM66-13.
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] key again. The button
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
display.
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and a sound
message is sent.
66-16
4) To end signal send:
Purpose Adjustment
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal
send is interrupted. Function (Purpose) Used to execute the DTFM signal send test
and to adjust the send level.
Section FAX
66-13 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Setting 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-16, the following
screen is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-
14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be 2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the dial
registered.) pulse signal is sent from the line by the setting of high/low
group of the signal send level.
Section FAX
3) To terminate the dial test, press [EXECUTE] key. The button
Operation/Procedure
returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-13, the following
screen is displayed.
* The number saved in the memory is displayed in the column 66-17
of [PRESENT:]. (If there is no data, [-------] is displayed.)
Purpose Operation test/Check
2) Enter a number with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
The entered number is displayed in the column of [NEW:].
and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)
After entering 20 digits, 10-key is disabled (no response). Only
[C] key is enabled. (10-key [0] to [9], [*], [#], [C] key (back by Section FAX
one digit)) Operation/Procedure
3) When [SET] key is pressed after completion of entry, the 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-17, the following
entered number is displayed (registered) in the column of screen is displayed.
[PRESENT:]. The column of [NEW:] becomes blank. 2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
the previously set button returns to the normal display.
66-14 3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signals
Purpose Adjustment are sent.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) 4) To stop signal sending:
send test and to adjust the make time. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it returns to the normal dis-
Section FAX play and signal sending is interrupted.
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-14, the following
screen is displayed.
2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the dial
pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] key again. The button
returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 106

66-18 66-29
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Clear
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the telephone book data
and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW set- (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/
ting) Desktop expansion table, the group expan-
Section FAX sion table, the program registration table,
the interface memory box table, the meta
Operation/Procedure
data, InboundRouting, and the Document
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-18, the following Admin table).
screen is displayed.
Section FAX
2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
Operation/Procedure
the previously set button returns to the normal display.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signals
are sent. 2) Press [YES] key.
4) To stop signal sending: The telephone book data area cleared.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it returns to the normal dis- 3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] key returns to
play and signal sending is interrupted. the normal display and [YES] and [NO] keys gray out.

66-21 66-30
Purpose Check Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to print the selected items (system Function (Purpose) Used to display the TEL/LIU status change,
error, protocol monitor). The display is highlighted by status change.
Section FAX Section FAX
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) When an item button to be printed is selected, it is highlighted 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-30, the following
and the previously set button returns to the normal display. screen is displayed.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) HS1, HS2, RHS, and EXHS are highlighted when the signal is
detected, and displayed normally when the signal is not
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and printing is started.
detected.
3) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
mal display. <TEL/LIU status change item description>

<FAX information print content table> HS1 Polarity inversion signal

HS2 Polarity inversion signal
PROTOCOL LINE 1 SYSTEM ERROR LINE 1
RHS Handset hook SW
EXHS External telephone hook SW

66-22
Purpose Setting 66-31
Function (Purpose) Used to set the handset sound volume. Purpose Setting
(This simulation can be executed even
Function (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to
though the handset setting is set to NO.
TEL/LIU.
When, however, the handset is not
installed, the sound volume cannot be Section FAX
checked.) (Japan model only) Operation/Procedure
Section FAX 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-31, the following
screen is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
2) Change the port setting.
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the number of the set
sound volume is displayed. (In this example, MIDDLE is set as When a port is set to ON, the port display is highlighted.
the default sound volume.) 3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the changed setting is
2) Use 10-key to set the handset sound volume. (0: MIN 1:MID- reflected to the port which outputs to TEL/LIU.
DLE 2:MAX) 4) To terminate the process, press [EXECUTE] key again. [EXE-
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to deliver the selected on-hold tone. CUTE] key returns to the normal display.
* If, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume <Port which outputs to TEL/LIU>
cannot be checked. Execution is possible.
CION MR EC S.
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and delivery
of the on-hold tone is stopped.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 107

66-32 66-39
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check the fixed data received from Function (Purpose) Used to check and change the destination
the line and to display the result. setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
Section FAX Section FAX
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key to check the fixed data received from 1) When the machine enters the simulation, the currently set des-
the line. At that time, [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. tination button is highlighted. (In the default state, JAPAN is set
* Fixed data check procedure as the destination.)
• The data received from the line is checked of the following 2) Select a destination button to set the destination. (In this
fixed data status for minutes, then if they are in accord with example, USA/CANADA is selected.) The selected button is
"OK" is displayed on LCD, if not "NG" is displayed. highlighted and the previously selected button returns to the
normal display.
• The judgment is made in 2 minutes.
* When the destination button is changed, the new destination
Receive speed: 300BPS
setting is saved to EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
Receive data: 00H
<Destination setting table>
Judgment data: 100byte
2) After completion of check, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor- JAPAN U.S.A/CANADA EUROPE AUSTRALIA
mal display. The result is displayed as "OK" or "NG." CHINA ASIA&OTHERS

66-33
Purpose Operation test/Check 66-42
Function (Purpose) Used to execute detection of various sig- Purpose Setting
nals with the line connected and to display
the detection result. When a signal is Function (Purpose) Used to rewrite the program to power con-
trol installed in the FAX BOX.
detected, the display is highlighted.
Section FAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-33, the following
screen is displayed. YES] and [NO] keys become active.

2) The signal to be checked can be selected from the two 2) Press [YES] key.
options: "FNET" and "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF." The power control program is rewritten.
3) When a signal is detected, "FNET" and "BUSY TONE CNG 3) When rewriting of the power control program is normally com-
CED DTMF" are highlighted. When a signal is not detected, pleted, "OK" is displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the
they are normally displayed. normal display, and [YES] and [NO] keys gray out.
<Signal used for signal detection check>
(When "FNET" is selected)
66-43
FNET
Purpose Setting
(When "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF" is selected) Function (Purpose) Used to write the adjustment value into the
power control installed in the FAX BOX.
BUSY TONE CNG CED DTMF
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-43, the following
66-36 screen is displayed.
Purpose Operation test/Check * Use scroll keys to select the select item of the power control
Function (Purpose) Used to check send and receive data from adjustment value.
the MODEM controller to the MFP control- 2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and writing
ler or the data line or the command line to the power control is executed. When writing is normally
individually. completed, "OK" is displayed. When it is failed, "NG" is dis-
Section FAX played.
Operation/Procedure 3) After completion of writing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
mal display.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-36, the following
screen is displayed. <Set range and default value of each set value>
2) Operation check Item Set range Default value
Select an item to be checked on the screen. A CI_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 6
B CI_CYCLE_MIN 1 to 254 10
<MFP controller I/F check item table>
C CI_CYCLE_MAX 2 to 255 142
MFP < MDMC (DATA once) MFP > MDMC (DATA once) D CI_COUNT 2 to 15 3
Data line Once Data line Once E RES_3.3V_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 15
MFP < MDMC (DATA repeat) MFP > MDMC (DATA repeat) F EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 225 240
Data line Repeat Data line Repeat
G RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 2
MFP < MDMC (CMD once) MFP > MDMC (CMD once)
H SON_TIMEOUT 1 to 127 20
Command line Once Command line Once
MFP < MDMC (CMD repeat) MFP > MDMC (CMD repeat)
Command line Repeat Command line Repeat

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 108

66-61 67-24
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW Function (Purpose) Printer gray balance adjustment (Auto
(151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing adjustment)
the soft SW while checking with the LCD. Section Printer
Section FAX Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key. The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
2) Press [DATA] key. 2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table.
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with The printer gray balance auto adjustment is performed, and
10-key. the adjustment result is printed.
* [1] - [0] 4) Press [OK] key.
[0] - [1] The halftone correction target registration is processed.
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the set-
ting is saved.
67-25
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
66-62
Function (Purpose) Printer gary balance adjustment (Manual
Purpose Backup adjustment)
Function (Purpose) Used to import the FAX receive data into a Section Printer
USB memory in PDF file type.
Operation/Procedure
Section FAX 1) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
Operation/Procedure touch panel.
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Select data to be imported. * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Execute import of data selected in procedure 2). 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the operation is completed normally, [COMPLETE] is When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, [ERROR] is displayed. increased, and vice versa.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
Error display Content
the gray balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
ERROR: NO USB MEMORY DEVICE No USB memory installed
value.
ERROR: NO IMAGE DATA No image data
ERROR Other errors Item/Display Setting range Default value
A POINT1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 1 - 999 500
67 E POINT5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 1 - 999 500
67-17 G POINT7 1 - 999 500
H POINT8 1 - 999 500
Purpose Reset
I POINT9 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Printer reset J POINT10 1 - 999 500
Section Printer K POINT11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure
M POINT13 1 - 999 500
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
N POINT14 1 - 999 500
2) Press [YES] key. O POINT15 1 - 999 500
The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the P POINT16 1 - 999 500
NIC setting.) Q POINT17 1 - 999 500
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 109

67-26 Item/Display Content
SCREEN21 600 dpi 4bit super low
Purpose Adjustment/Setup SCREEN22 1200 dpi 1bit super low
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target gray balance of the SCREEN23 600 dpi 4bit extrahigh
printer mode auto gray balance adjustment.
* When "600dpi 1bit SCREEN" is displayed, [EXECUTE] key is
Section Printer grayed out, disabling the key operations.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the target gray balance with the touch panel.
Default DEF 1. 67-34
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
67-31 Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the
Purpose Data clear printer high density section. (Support for
the high density section tone gap)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
Section Printer
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key. 0 Enable
The printer calibration data (Halftone correction data) are 1 Disable
cleared.
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
(The printer gray balance correction is canceled.)
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
67-33 A K K engine highest density 0 1
(0: ENABLE correction mode: Enable
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 1: DISABLE) K engine highest density 1
Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer correction mode: Disable
screen. C BLACK MAX Scanner target value 0 - 999 500
Section Printer TARGET maximum density correction
D RATIO LOW Ratio value for high 0 - 999 33
Operation/Procedure density correction
1) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key. E RATION HIGH Ration value for high 0 - 999 5
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key. density correction
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. F DITHER Dither threshold value 0 - 999 250
THRESHOLD
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) F SLOPE Slope threshold value 0 - 999 400
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in THRESHOLD
the gray balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value. * When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set item
A to "0."
Item/Display Content
Setting Default The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone
range value gap is reduced.
A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128
* To increase the density in the high density section further, set
B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128
item A to "1.
C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128
D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128
F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128
G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128 Do not change the values of item B. If these values are changed,
H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128 the density in the high density area is changed.
I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128
K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128
67-36
L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128
M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den-
O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128 sity section.
P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128 Section Printer
Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
Item/Display Content
2) Press [OK] key.
HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper
SCREEN7 600 dpi 1bit photo When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images
SCREEN8 600 dpi 4bit photo are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
SCREEN9 1200 dpi 1bit photo low density are images are weakly reproduced.
SCREEN11 600 dpi 1bit graphics When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight
SCREEN12 600 dpi 4bit graphics section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble.
SCREEN13 1200 dpi 1bit graphics
SCREEN19 600 dpi 4bit SHIGH Setting Default
Item/Display Content
SCREEN20 1200 dpi 1bit SHIGH range value
A A PATCH INPUT A patch input value 0 - 13 1

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 110

67-46 67-54
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Printer image enhancement adjustment Function (Purpose) Printer gray balance adjustment
Section (Automatic adjustment for each dither)
Operation/Procedure Section Printer
1) Select a target item with scroll key. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter set value with 10 key. This simulation is used to adjust the gray balance, the density, and
3) Tap [OK] key. the gradation in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode,
the 1200dpi mode, and the 600dpi 1bit mode.
Setting Default This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
Item/Display Content
range value and images.
A CANCEL (600dpi) Edge cancellation 0 - 255 64 1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
B CANCEL (1200dpi) Edge cancellation 0 - 255 64 selected.)
The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
2) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
67-52 procedure 1) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed gray patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed gray
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the patch image (adjustment pattern).
printer screen.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Printer The gray balance adjustment is automatically performed.
Operation/Procedure The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
1) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel. mality.
Press [ALL] key to select all the modes. 4) Press [OK] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key. The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33, 5) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
SIM67-54, it is reset to the default.
Select item
Content
Display Content (Mode/Image)
Screen HEAVYPAPER Printer heavy paper automatic density HEAVY PAPER For improving the gray balance in the heavy paper
correction amount mode
600DPI_1BIT SCREEN7 (600dpi 1bit Photo) 4BIT HIGH For improving the gray balance in 600 dpi mode
SCREEN11 (600dpi 1bit Graphics) 4BIT SHIGH For improving the gray balance in 600 dpi mode (super
4BIT_HIGH SCREEN12 (600dpi 4bit Graphics) fine text)
4BIT_SHIGH SCREEN19 (600dpi 4bit SHIGH) 1200DPI LOW For improving the gray balance in 1200 dpi mode
1200DPI_LOW SCREEN9 (1200dpi 1bit Photo) 1200DPI HIGH For improving the gray balance in 1200 dpi mode
SCREEN22 (1200dpi 1bit SuperLow) 1200DPI For improving the gray balance in 1200 dpi mode (super
1200DPI_HIGH SCREEN13 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics) SHIGH fine text mode)
1200DPI_SHIGH SCREEN20 (1200dpi 1bit SHIGH)
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
The gary patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
7) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 6) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed gray patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed gray
patch image (adjustment pattern).
8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The gray balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
the gray balance check patch image is printed out.
9) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
press [EXECUTE] key.
After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
tered.
10) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
NOTE: Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
values.

MX-M7570 SIMULATION 6 – 111

[7] TROUBLESHOOTING
MX-M7570 D. Self diag
Service operation
Manual
The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
1. Error code and troubleshooting displays the trouble message.
A. General A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- nearly expired or is expired.
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user may not be stopped.
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the the LCD and lamp.
machine to minimize the damage. Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
B. Function and purpose ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
tion.
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
trouble.)
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is sages must be cleared by a simulation.
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, Monitors the machine
conditions.
improving the repair efficiency.)
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This Detects/analyzes
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con- the content.
sumable part.)

C. Self diag message kinds

Warning
࠙࣬
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below. Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬

Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the

user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration, Trouble
Πρήσ
etc.)
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others -
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
consumable part, etc.)
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Others - Warning No
࠙࣬ A consumable OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime

Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.

ਘၑ
Repair

Cancel the self-diagnostic

ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).

Reset
໘‫ܦ‬

Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 1
 3 : ‘21/Nov.
E. Breakdown sequence
(1) Trouble code and operatable mode

Operatable mode
Copy
Judg- scan
Scan
Trouble content ment Trouble code (includi Scan Scan List FAX FAX
To Print
block ng (Push) (Pull) print Send print
HDD
interrup-
tion)
Security • Security SCN E7 (C0,C1) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
abnormality module MFP
trouble abnormality
FAX board • FAX board F6 (00, 01, 04, 21, 30, 97,       1 1
trouble breakdown 98)
HDD trouble • eMMC E7 (A8) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
• HDD E7 (03, A5) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
• HDD-ASIC E7 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
Operation • OPU U9 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
communication communication
trouble trouble
Scanner • SCU A0 (02) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
communication communication E7 (80)
trouble trouble
Engine • PCU A0 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
communication communication E7 (90)
trouble trouble
Backup battery • Backup battery U1 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
voltage fall voltage fall
trouble_save
Operation • External serial U7 (50,51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble I/F
2 communication
error (RIC)
• Memory error U2 (00, 11, 40, 41, 42) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(included not
installed the
expansion
RAM)
3 • Connection A0 (06, 10, 15, 17, 18, 19, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble (ICU 20)
detection) E7 (60, 61)
• Serial number U2 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
data error
• HDD U2 (50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
registration
data check sum
error
Operation • Memory check E7 (96) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble error when
3 booting
• Image memory E7 (01, 49, 91, 92, 93, 94) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble, decode
error
Operation • Personal PC ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble counter not-
4 installed trouble
Power • Power L8 (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
controller controller
trouble trouble
Special • Special function U2 (60, 70)        
function trouble error *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16
Laser trouble • Laser PCU E7 (20, 21, 24, 28, 29, A0) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown L6 (10) *10
Engine trouble • Connection A0 (21) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
1 trouble (PCU E7 (50, 55)
detection) F1 (50)

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 2
 Operatable mode
Copy
Judg- scan
Scan
Trouble content ment Trouble code (includi Scan Scan List FAX FAX
To Print
block ng (Push) (Pull) print Send print
HDD
interrup-
tion)
Engine trouble • PCU troubles PCU C1 (01, 10, 40) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 (motor, fusing, C4 (20) *10
etc.) F2 (22, 40, 64, 70, 74)
H3 (00, 02)
H4 (00, 02, 30)
H5 (01)
H2 (00, 02, 03, 06)
H7 (10, 12)
L4 (02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 17,
31, 32, 34, 35, 38, 39, 40,
43, 44, 46, 50, 56, 58, 64)
L8 (01, 02)
U2 (90, 91)
Paper feed tray • Paper feed tray F3 (12) 3    3 3  3
1 trouble 1 breakdown *10
Paper feed tray • Paper feed tray F3 (22) 3    3 3  3
2 trouble 2 breakdown *10
Paper feed tray • Paper feed tray F3 (32) 3    3 3  3
3 trouble 3 breakdown *10
Paper feed tray • Paper feed tray F3 (42) 3    3 3  3
4 trouble 4 breakdown *10
Paper feed tray • Paper feed tray U6 (09, 20, 21, 22, 23, 51) 3    3 3  3
5 trouble 5 breakdown *10
Paper feed tray • Paper feed tray U6 (00, 10, 50, 52, 54, 55) 11    11 11  11
other troubles other *10
breakdown
Finisher trouble • After-process F0 (03, 08.10, 11, 14, 15, 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
breakdown 18, 19, 20, 23, 25, 28, 29, *10
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 37, 40,
41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47,
48, 49, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55,
56, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75,
76, 77, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84,
86)
F1 (00, 03, 04, 08, 10, 14,
15, 16, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23,
28, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 37,
38, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46,
47, 51, 53, 54, 60, 78, 83,
90, 97, 98, 99)
Inserter trouble • Inserter F1 (64, 65, 66, 67) 3    3 3  3
breakdown *10
(except for
communication
trouble)
Other troubles • Other troubles EE (EC, EL, EU)        
Process control • Process control F2 (39, 47, 58, 59, 78)        
trouble breakdown *12
(PCU
detection)
Operation • Connection SCN A0 (22) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble trouble (SCU MFP
detection)
Color system • SCU Color UC (02) 9 9 9 9   9 
trouble (SCU trouble (SCU
detection) detection)
Anti-copy • Anti-copy UC (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
trouble system
Scanner • EEPROM error U2 (80, 81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
trouble 1
Scanner • Scanner L1 (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
trouble 2 section L3 (00)
breakdown
(mirror motor,
lens, copy
lamp)
CCD trouble • CCD E7 (10, 11, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
breakdown
(shading, etc.)
SPF/DF • RSPF/DF U5 (00, 16, 20, 30, 31) 6 6 6 6   6 
trouble breakdown

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 3
 Operatable mode
Copy
Judg- scan
Scan
Trouble content ment Trouble code (includi Scan Scan List FAX FAX
To Print
block ng (Push) (Pull) print Send print
HDD
interrup-
tion)
SPF back • General trouble SCN E6 (10, 11, 14) 7 7 7 7   7 
surface trouble in the SPF back MFP
surface
scanning
section

Trouble where only history data are saved

Operatable mode
Copy
Judg- scan
Scan
Trouble content ment Trouble code (includi Scan Scan List FAX FAX
To Print
block ng (Push) (Pull) print Send print
HDD
interrup-
tion)
(only history data are saved) SCN U2 (05)        
(ICU detection) MFP

: Operation enabled ×: Operation disabled

1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. * However, it is valid
only when the escape tray setting has been made.
6: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enable in the OC mode.
7: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enable in the OC mode or one side scan mode.
9: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
*10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
11: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK.
*12: A trouble message is displayed. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
15: FAST notification function (When in U2-22, trouble notification cannot be made. If there is no abnormality in the FAX software or the
FAST data in U2-23, trouble notification can be made.)
*16: Print is enable displays with OK key "Call for service. CODE **_**"

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 4
(2) Trouble detection sequence and trouble cancel sequence when turning on the power

MFP event Each block

manager

(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, F3 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is preformed in each block, check is made in each block.
and the result is sent to the MFP. Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6 Saved in the PCU
F3 Saved in the PCU

(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16 sim task

SIM13: U1 trouble cancel

SIM14: H3, H4, H5
(Color mode inhibition) cancel
SIM15: LCC/LCT (U6) trouble cancel,
F3 trouble cancel Trouble cancel
SIM16: U2 trouble cancel Trouble cancel command
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
Trouble cancel status
is communicated.

The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the MFP.
When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed.

Process sequence Error code Content

U2 50 User authentication data check sum error
First
(Low priority) 30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
A0 15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware
 20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
 U2 11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
Last U1 01 Battery trouble
(High priority)
E7 60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection)

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 5
 3 : ‘21/Nov.
F. Error code list
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
A0 01 PCU ROM error MFPC 
02 SCU ROM error MFPC 
3 06 FAX ROM error MFPC 
10 Color profile error MFPC 
15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware MFPC 
17 Inconsistency between the UI data and the CPU firmware version MFPC 
18 ASIC MAIN firmware inconsistent error MFPC 
19 MFP boot error MFPC 
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFPC 
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU 
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU 
C1 01 Charger cleaner trouble PCU 
10 Main charger trouble PCU 
40 HV PWB trouble PCU 
41 HV MC/TC PWB trouble PCU 
C4 20 Transfer high voltage output trouble PCU 
40 HV TC PWB trouble PCU 
E6 10 Shading error (Black correction) (SPF) SCU 
11 Shading error (White correction) (SPF) SCU 
14 CCD-ASIC error (SPF) SCU 
E7 01 MFP image data error MFPC 
03 HDD trouble MFPC 
04 HDD-ASIC error MFPC 
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU 
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU 
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU 
20 LSU laser detection error (K) PCU 
21 LSU laser degradation error PCU 
24 LSU LD driver trouble (K) PCU 
28 Connection error between PCU and LSU PCU 
29 LSU-ASIC frequency error PCU 
49 Water Mark data error MFPC 
50 Combination error between PCU PWB and firmware PCU 
55 PWB information sum check error MFPC 
60 Combination error between MFP PWB and firmware MFPC 
61 Combination error between MFP and PCU MFPC 
80 Communication error between MFP and SCU MFPC 
90 Communication error between MFP and PCU MFPC 
91 FAX reception image data error MFPC 
92 Copy image data error MFPC 
93 Copy, image send, filing, print image data process error MFPC 
94 Image file data process error MFPC 
A0 LSU EEP-ROM/LD-Driver read write error (K) PCU 
A8 mSATA eMMC error MFPC 
C0 TPM PWB access error MFPC 
C1 Security check error MFPC 
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error (Sampling abnormal) PCU 
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (over toner) PCU 
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (under toner) PCU 
F0 03 Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble PCU 
08 Finisher stapler shift motor trouble PCU 
10 Finisher stapler motor trouble PCU 
11 Finisher bundle exit motor trouble PCU 
14 Finisher paper rear edge falling motor trouble PCU 
15 Finisher tray lift motor trouble PCU 
18 Finisher rear edge hold motor trouble PCU 
19 Finisher paper alignment motor F trouble PCU 
20 Finisher paper alignment motor R trouble PCU 
23 Shutter trouble PCU 
25 Finisher paper transport roller lift motor trouble PCU 
28 Finisher paper alignment roller lift motor trouble PCU 
29 Finisher pwb cooling fan trouble PCU 
30 Communication trouble between finisher and saddle PCU 
31 Finisher saddle folding motor trouble PCU 
32 Finisher paper pass unit transport motor trouble PCU 
33 Finisher punch shift motor trouble PCU 

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 6
 Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
F0 34 Finisher punch motor trouble PCU 
37 Finisher backup RAM trouble PCU 
40 Communication trouble between the saddle and the trimmer PCU 
41 Finisher saddle lead edge stopper motor trouble PCU 
42 Finisher saddle folding roller guide motor trouble PCU 
43 Finisher saddle alignment motor trouble PCU 
44 Finisher saddle rear edge hold motor trouble PCU 
45 Finisher saddle staple motor trouble PCU 
46 Finisher saddle rear edge shift motor trouble PCU 
47 Finisher saddle flap motor trouble PCU 
48 Finisher saddle push motor trouble PCU 
49 Finisher saddle separation motor trouble PCU 
51 Finisher trimmer cutter motor trouble PCU 
52 Finisher trimmer registration motor trouble PCU 
53 Finisher trimmer inlet port separation motor trouble PCU 
54 Finisher trimmer paper exit separation motor trouble PCU 
55 Finisher trimmer bundle press motor trouble PCU 
56 Finisher paper remaining trouble in the trimmer PCU 
70 Communication trouble between finisher and folding unit PCU 
71 Folding unit lead edge holding guide motor trouble PCU 
72 Folding unit back up RAM trouble PCU 
73 Folding unit power supply fan trouble PCU 
74 Folding unit folding tray paper exit motor trouble PCU 
75 Folding unit upper stopper motor trouble PCU 
76 Folding unit 3-fold stopper motor trouble PCU 
77 Folding unit transport motor trouble PCU 
80 Finisher power cooling fan motor trouble PCU 
81 Finisher upper tray fan trouble PCU 
82 Finisher lower tray fan trouble PCU 
83 Finisher paper guide motor trouble PCU 
84 Finisher grip trouble PCU 
86 Finisher discharged paper hold motor trouble PCU 
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU 
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU 
03 Finisher oscillation operation trouble (3K) PCU 
04 Finisher paddle trouble (3K) PCU 
08 Stapler shift trouble PCU 
08 Finisher staple shift operation trouble (3K) PCU 
10 Staple motor trouble PCU 
10 Finisher staple operation trouble (3K) PCU 
14 Finisher rear paper edge flap operation trouble (3K) PCU 
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU 
15 Finisher tray lift operation trouble (3K) PCU 
16 Finisher escape/saddle transport switch operation trouble (3K) PCU 
19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU 
19 Finisher front paper alignment operation trouble (3K) PCU 
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU 
20 Finisher rear paper alignment operation trouble (3K) PCU 
21 Finisher fan trouble PCU 
22 Finisher paper bundle exit operation trouble (3K) PCU 
28 Finisher stacking operation trouble (3K) PCU 
30 Communication trouble between Finisher and Saddle PCU 
31 Finisher paper exit operation trouble (3K) PCU 
32 Communication error between Finisher and Punch unit (3K) PCU 
33 Finisher punch unit shift operation trouble (3K) PCU 
34 Finisher punching operation trouble (3K) PCU 
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU 
37 Finisher backup memory error (3K) PCU 
38 Finisher punch backup memory error (3K) PCU 
41 Finisher saddle paper positioning operation trouble (3K) PCU 
42 Finisher saddle switching operation trouble (3K) PCU 
43 Finisher saddle alignment operation trouble (3K) PCU 
44 Finisher saddle gripper operation trouble (3K) PCU 
45 Finisher saddle staple operation trouble (3K) PCU 
46 Finisher saddle folding operation trouble (3K) PCU 
47 Finisher saddle paper transport operation trouble (3K) PCU 
50 Combination error Finisher and Main unit PCU 
51 Finisher communication error (3K) PCU 

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 7
 Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
F1 53 Finisher-Main machine inconsistent error PCU 
54 Finisher punch unit destination inconsistent error PCU 
60 Communication trouble between PCU 
64 Inserter No. 1 pickup motor trouble PCU 
65 Inserter No. 2 pickup motor trouble PCU 
66 Inserter No. 1 lift motor trouble PCU 
67 Inserter No. 2 lift motor trouble PCU 
78 Finisher staple free stapler operation trouble (3K) PCU 
83 Finisher guide operation trouble (3K) PCU 
90 Communication trouble between decurler and downstream unit PCU 
97 Decurler unit fan 1 trouble PCU 
98 Decurler unit fan 2 trouble PCU 
99 Decurler unit fan 3 trouble PCU 
F2 22 Discharge lamp trouble (K) PCU 
39 Process temperature sensor trouble PCU 
40 Toner density sensor trouble PCU 
47 Room temperature/humidity sensor trouble PCU 
58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble PCU 
59 Room temperature/humidity sensor trouble PCU 
64 Toner supply operation trouble PCU 
70 Improper toner cartridge detection PCU 
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error PCU 
78 Image density sensor adjustment trouble PCU 
91 High density process control high voltage error PCU 
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU 
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU 
32 Paper feed tray 3 lift operation trouble PCU 
42 Paper feed tray 4 lift operation trouble PCU 
F6 00 MFP - FAX communication trouble MFPC 
01 FAX EEPROM read/write error FAX 
04 FAX modem operation trouble FAX 
21 Combination error between TEL/LIU and FAX soft switch FAX 
30 FAX microprocessor access error FAX 
97 Incompatibility between FAX control and main machine MFPC 
98 Incompatible destination between FAX control and main machine MFPC 
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble TH_UM PCU 
02 Thermistor open trouble TH_US PCU 
03 Thermistor open trouble TH_UM_AD1 PCU 
05 Non-contact upper sub thermistor open PCU 
06 Contact upper sub thermistor open PCU 
07 Contact lower main thermistor open PCU 
H3 00 Upper main high temperature trouble PCU 
02 Upper sub high temperature trouble PCU 
H4 00 Upper main low temperature trouble PCU 
02 Upper sub low temperature trouble PCU 
30 Upper main thermistor differential input abnormal PCU 
32 Upper sub thermistor differential input abnormal PCU 
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU 
H7 10 Recovery error from low fuser temperature PCU 
12 Recovery error from low fuser temperature PCU 
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU 
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU 
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU 
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU 
04 Developing motor trouble PCU 
06 Transfer unit pressure welding or estrangement trouble PCU 
08 Waste toner transport motor lock PCU 
17 Drum motor lock trouble (BK) PCU 
31 Paper exit cooling fan motor 5 trouble PCU 
32 Power source cooling fan motor 1 trouble PCU 
34 LSU cooling fan motor trouble PCU 
35 Paper exit cooling fan motor 4 trouble PCU 
38 Paper exit cooling fan motor 3 trouble PCU 
39 Fuser cooling fan motor 1 trouble PCU 
40 Ozone fan motor 1 trouble PCU 
43 Paper exit cooling fan motor 6 trouble PCU 
44 Power source cooling fan motor 2 trouble PCU 
46 DV cooling fan motor 1 trouble PCU 

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 8
 Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
L4 50 Process fan motor 1 trouble PCU 
56 Paper exit cooling fan motor 1 trouble PCU 
58 Fuser cooling fan motor 2 trouble PCU 
64 DV cooling fan motor 2 trouble PCU 
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU 
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU 
02 Full wave signal error PCU 
20 Communication error of MFP/Mother board MFPC 
PC - No personal counter installed MFPC 
U1 01 Battery trouble MFPC 
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFPC 
05 Erroneous detection of account management data MFPC 
11 MFP EEPROM counter check sum error MFPC 
30 MFP and PCU manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFPC 
40 mSATA eMMC system storage data area error MFPC 
41 HDD system storage data area error MFPC 
42 Adjustment data error in system storage data area MFPC 
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error MFPC 
60 Watermark check error MFPC 
70 OCR dictionary check error MFPC 
80 SCU EEPROM read write error SCU 
81 SCU EEPROM check sum error SCU 
90 PCU EEPROM read write error PCU 
91 PCU EEPROM check sum error PCU 
U5 00 Document feed unit communication error SCU 
16 Document feed unit fan motor trouble SCU 
20 Document feed unit paper transport motor trouble SCU 
30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble SCU 
31 Document feed unit lift down trouble SCU 
U6 09 LCC lift motor trouble PCU 
20 Communication error between PCU and LCC unit PCU 
21 LCC paper transport motor trouble PCU 
22 LCC 24V line power trouble PCU 
23 A3 LCC tray descending trouble PCU 
24 A3 LCC tray lock detection trouble PCU 
51 Combination trouble between LCC and main machine PCU 
54 Option installation combination trouble PCU
U7 50 MFP and vendor machine communication error MFPC 
51 Vendor machine error MFPC 
U9 01 Touch panel trouble SCU 
UC 02 SCAN ASIC IPD error SCU 
12 SCAN ASIC IPD error (DSPF) SCU 
20 SCAN ASIC DOCC error SCU 
30 SCAN ASIC DOCC error (DSPF) SCU 

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 9
 3 : ‘21/Nov.
G. Details of error codes and countermeasures
A0-18 ASIC MAIN firmware inconsistent
error
A0-01 PCU ROM error
Trouble detection MFP
Detail MFP Cause Inconsistency of ASIC firmware version in MFP
Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute the firmware version
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc.
PCU PWB trouble. A0-19 MFP boot error
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
procedure again. Trouble detection MFP
Replace the PCU PWB. Cause ASIC trouble
Memory trouble
Check & Remedy Extract and insert eMMC PWB
A0-02 SCU ROM error (If it does not improve, the part must be returned to the
original part and then another part replaced.)
Detail MFP Replace eMMC PWB
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by Replace MFPC PWB
interruption of the power during the version-up Replace both eMMC PWB and MFPC PWB.
operation, etc.
Scan mother PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
procedure again. version (MFP)
Replace the Scan mother PWB.

Trouble content
3 Detail MFP
A0-06 FAX ROM error
Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
Trouble detection MFPC Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Cause The content of FAX ROM error
The firmware update is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the update operation. A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
FAX PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute the firmware update
version (PCU)
Replace FAX PWB
Trouble content
Detail PCU
A0-10 Color profile error Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
Trouble detection MFPC Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Cause The content of the color profile is abnormal
Combination inconsistency between MFPC firmware
and color profile A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute the firmware version up version (SCU)

Trouble content
A0-15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program Detail SCU
firmware Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Cause Installation of the normal firmware was performed with
a security kit enable.
Check & Remedy Stop installation of the normal firmware.

A0-17 Inconsistency between the UI data and

the CPU firmware version

Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Combination error between the UI contents data and
the CPU UI firmware version.
Check & Remedy Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up
mode.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 10
C1-01 Charger cleaner trouble C4-20 Transfer high voltage output trouble

Trouble content Trouble content When the transfer output is delivered, An abnormal
Detail PCU output has occurred.
Cause The main charger unit (K) is not installed properly. Cause Transfer unit abnormality.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (K). Transfer unit insertion trouble.
Connector connection trouble of the drum unit (K) HP TC output harness disconnection, breakage.
sensor. Transfer unit estrangement operation trouble.
Harness disconnection of the drum unit (K) HP OPC drum abnormality (Does not rotate.)
sensor. High voltage TC PWB trouble.
HP sensor dirt. PCU PWB trouble.
Charger cleaner motor (K) trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the transfer unit.
PCU PWB connector connection trouble/PWB trouble. Reinsert the transfer unit.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-4 to check the operation of the charger Check or replace the TC output harness.
cleaner. Replace the high voltage TC PWB.
Check disconnection of the main charger unit./ Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace.
Check for disconnection of the connector of the drum
unit (K) HP sensor. C4-40 HV TC PWB trouble
Check the harness of the drum unit (K) HP sensor.
Clean the HP sensor.
Trouble content
Check disconnection of the PCU PWB connector./
Replace PWB. Detail PCU
Replace the charger cleaner motor (K). Cause Input harness disconnection in the high-voltage TC
PWB.
Harness (TC_ERR) pin disconnection, breakage.
C1-10 Main charger trouble 24V fuses meltdown in the high-voltage TC PWB.
High-voltage error circuit (TC_ERR) breakage in the
high-voltage TC PWB.
Trouble content When the main charger out put is delivered, an Check & Remedy Check the harness and connector.
abnormal out put has occurred. Replace the harness.
Detail PCU Check the high-voltage TC PWB.
Cause The main charger unit (K) is not installed properly. Replace the high-voltage TC PWB.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (K).
High voltage MC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2. E6-10 Shading error (Black correction) (SPF)
Check the output of the developing bias with SIM8-1.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB Trouble content
connector./Replace. Detail SCU
Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
CCD unit trouble.
C1-40 High-voltage MC PWB trouble DSPF CNT PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness to the CCD
unit.
Trouble detection PCU Check the CCD unit.
Cause Input harness disconnection in the high-voltage MC Check the DSPF CNT PWB.
PWB.
Harness (MC_ERR) pin disconnection, breakage.
24V fuses meltdown in the high-voltage MC PWB E6-11 Shading error (White correction) (SPF)
High-voltage error circuit (MC_ERR) breakage in the
high-voltage MC PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector. Trouble content
Check or replace the harness. Detail SCU
Check the high-voltage MC PWB Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
Replace the high-voltage MC PWB Copy lamp lighting trouble.
Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
plate.
C1-41 HV MC/TC PWB trouble CCD unit trouble.
DSPF CNT PWB trouble.
Shading SIM not executed / Shading ROM
Trouble content abnormality.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness the CCD unit.
Cause PCU connector (CN3) disconnection. Check the installing state of the harness to the copy
Both input connectors disconnections of the high lamp unit.
voltage MC PWB and the high voltage TC PWB. Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white plate.
24V fuses meltdown in the high voltage MC PWB and Check the CCD unit.
the high voltage TC PWB. Check the DSPF CNT PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the connections of the connectors or connect
these connectors again.
Check the connectors of the high voltage MC PWB
and the high voltage TC PWB and connect these
connectors again.(MC PWB input connector CN1,TC
PWB)
Check or replace the high voltage MC PWB and the
high voltage TC PWB

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 11
E6-14 CCD-ASIC error (SPF) E7-11 Shading error (White correction)

Trouble content Trouble content

Detail SCU Detail SCU
Cause DSPF CNT PWB trouble. Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
Check & Remedy Check the DSPF CNT PWB. level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
E7-01 MFP image data error Scanner lamp lighting trouble.
Scanner lamp drive PWB trouble
CCD unit abnormality.
Trouble content Scan mother PWB abnormality.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Cause Image data transfer error in the MFPC PWB. Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp
MFPC PWB trouble. unit.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of Check or replace the scanner lamp.
the MFPC PWB. Check or replace the scanner lamp drive PWB.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB. Clean or replace the mirror, the lens, and the
reference white board.
Check or replace the CCD unit.
E7-03 HDD trouble Check or replace the Scan mother PWB.

Trouble content E7-14 CCD-ASIC error

Detail MFP
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFPC
PWB and HDD. Trouble content
HDD trouble. Detail SCU
MFPC PWB trouble. Cause Scan mother PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of Check & Remedy Check the Scan mother PWB.
the MFPC PWB and HDD. Replace the Scan mother PWB.
Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the
HDD.
Replace the HDD. E7-20 LSU laser detection error (K)
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.

Trouble content
E7-04 HDD-ASIC error Detail PCU
Cause Laser optical axis misalignment
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
Trouble content trouble.
Detail MFP LSU harness, connector trouble
Cause HDD-ASIC trouble. (MFPC PWB trouble.) BD board, LD board, LSUcnt board trouble
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
booting. Check or replace the LSU control PWB.
Check & Remedy Check or replace the MFPC PWB. Check connection of the LSU harness and connector.
Replace the LSU.

E7-10 Shading error (Black correction)

E7-21 LSU laser degradation error
Trouble content
Detail SCU Trouble content
Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the Detail PCU
scanner lamp is turned OFF. Cause Power reduction due to laser deterioration.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. Harness and connector disconnection/insertion
CCD unit abnormality. trouble between the LD PWB and the LSU control
Scan mother PWB abnormality. PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check the CCD unit. Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
Check the Scan mother PWB. LSU.
Replace the LSU.

E7-24 LSU LD driver trouble (K)

Trouble content The LSU LD is lighted, the initialization process of the

LD driver is not performed normally.
Detail PCU
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
trouble.
LSU connector trouble.
LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-01 to check the operations of the LSU.
Check or replace the LSU control PWB.
Check connection of the LSU harness.
Replace the LSU.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 12
E7-28 Connection error between PCU and E7-60 Combination error between MFP PWB
LSU and firmware

Trouble content Detail MFP

Detail PCU Cause A PWB/firmware which is not compatible with the
Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU machine specifications is detected in the MFPC PWB.
PWB and the LSU control ASIC. MFPC PWB trouble.
Improper connection of the communication connector Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
(interface PWB).
Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU
control PWB (interface PWB) E7-61 Combination error between MFP and
PCU PWB trouble.
LSU control PWB trouble.
PCU
LSU trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness Detail MFP
between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB. Cause Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the
Replace the LSU control PWB. PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. MFPC PWB trouble.
Replace the LSU. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and
the PCU PWB.
E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator used
E7-80 Communication error between MFP
in the LSU ASIC. and SCU
LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU control PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the LSU control PWB. Detail MFP
Cause Scan mother PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
Scan mother PWB trouble.
E7-49 Water Mark data error MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the Scan mother PWB and the
Trouble content MFPC PWB.
Detail MFP Check the ground.
Replace the Scan mother PWB.
Cause Watermark data trouble.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
HDD trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
Replace the HDD.
E7-90 Communication error between MFP
and PCU
E7-50 Combination error between PCU PWB
and firmware Trouble content
Detail MFP
Detail PCU Cause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause A PWB/firmware/LSU which is not compatible with the
MFPC PWB trouble.
machine specifications is detected.
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB and the MFPC
LSU trouble PWB.
Check the ground.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check or replace the LSU.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Check or replace the PCU PWB.

E7-55 PWB information sum check error E7-91 FAX reception image data error

Trouble content An error of FAX reception image data process occurs.

Detail PCU
Detail MFP
Cause EEPROM device trouble.
EEPROM device contact trouble. Cause Image data process abnormality
Device access error due to noises. HDD trouble
eMMC PWB trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Replace the PWB.
Image compression data corruption
MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
FAX control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
the memory.
Replace the HDD.
Replace or check installation of the eMMC PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Replace the FAX control PWB.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 13
E7-92 Copy image data error E7-C0 TPM PWB access error

Trouble content An error of copy image data process occurs. Trouble detection MFP
(In Non ERDH) Cause TPM PWB connection trouble
Detail MFP TPM PWB used in other MFP was attached
Cause Image data process abnormality Check & Remedy Power OFF/ON to cancel
HDD trouble Check connection state of TPM PWB connector,
Image compression data corruption harness
MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of E7-C1 Security check error
the memory.
Replace the HDD.
Trouble detection MFP
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory. Cause Program error
TPM PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Power OFF/ON to cancel
E7-93 Copy, image send, filing, print image Check connection state of TPM PWB connector,
harness
data process error

Detail MFP EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment

Cause Image data process abnormality. error (Sampling abnormal)
HDD trouble.
Image compression data corruption.
MFP PWB trouble. Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of adjustment is outside of 120 +/-5.
the memory. Detail PCU
Replace the HDD. Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Developing unit trouble.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the developing unit.
E7-94 Image file data process error Replace the PCU PWB.

Trouble content File image process error (backup restore error) when EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment
importing filing data
Detail MFP error (Over toner)
Cause Image data process abnormality
HDD trouble Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
Image compression data corruption adjustment is 26 or less or the control voltage is 198
MFPC PWB trouble or above.
DIMM memory trouble or contact error Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
the memory. Developing unit trouble.
Replace the HDD. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory. Replace the developing unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.

E7-A0 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write

error (K) EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment
error (Under toner)
Trouble content Write error in write sequence of the serial EEPROM/
LD driver for Black Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
Detail PCU adjustment is 201 or above or the control voltage is 48
Cause EEPROM/LD driver trouble. or less.
EEPROM/LD driver access circuit trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
the LD PWB and the PCU PWB. Developing unit trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble.
If the above remedies cannot delete the trouble, Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
replace the LSU. Replace the developing unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.

E7-A8 eMMC PWB error

Trouble detection MFP

Cause eMMC PWB contact trouble
eMMC PWB trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check contact state of eMMC PWB
Replace eMMC PWB
Replace MFPC PWB

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 14
F0-03 Finisher paper exit roller lift motor F0-15 Finisher tray lift motor trouble
trouble
Trouble content The operation of the lift motor for the upper and the
lower trays of the finisher is abnormal.
Trouble content Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation abnormality.
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown, area
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the upper tray
roller lift motor.
lift motor and the lower tray lift motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
Replace the control PWB, and motor, and the sensor
part.
part.

F0-08 Finisher stapler shift motor trouble

F0-18 Finisher rear edge hold motor trouble
Trouble content The shift operation of the finisher stapler is abnormal.
Trouble content The operation of the paper hold arm in the staple
Detail PCU
compiler of the finisher is abnormal.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Detail PCU
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper hold
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
motor.
and the sensor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
and the sensor.
part.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
F0-10 Finisher stapler motor trouble
F0-19 Finisher paper alignment motor F
Trouble content The operation of the finisher staple is abnormal.
trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Trouble content The operation of the front alignment plate in the staple
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple compiler of the finisher is abnormal.
motor. Detail PCU
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
and the sensor. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
part. alignment motor F.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
F0-11 Finisher bundle exit motor trouble Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.

Trouble content The grip expansion arm drive motor of the finisher for
staple bundle exit is abnormal. HP sensor abnormality.
F0-20 Finisher paper alignment motor R
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
trouble
trouble, HP sensor breakdown, disconnection of
harness or connector. Trouble content The operation of the rear alignment plate in the staple
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the gripper arm compiler of the finisher.
motor (FNM116). Detail PCU
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor R.
F0-14 Finisher paper rear edge falling motor Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
trouble and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
Trouble content The rear edge falling operation in the staple compiler
of the finisher is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the rear edge
falling motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 15
F0-23 Shutter trouble F0-30 Communication trouble between fin-
isher and saddle
Trouble content The operation of the shutter open/close in the paper
exit section.
Trouble content Communication trouble between the finisher and the
Detail PCU saddle
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of No response for the command send from the saddle
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. unit
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the shutter Detail PCU
clutch. Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB
Check connection from the control PWB to the clutch trouble, disconnection of connector or harness.
and the sensor. Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Check the connector
Replace the control PWB, the clutch, and the sensor between the finisher and the saddle. Replace the
part. control PWB of the saddle unit.

F0-25 Finisher paper transport roller lift F0-31 Finisher saddle folding motor trouble
motor trouble
Trouble content Saddle unit folding roller operation abnormality
Trouble content The separation operation of the transport roller in the Detail PCU
buffer section of the finisher or the path select Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
operation of the flapper is abnormal. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of paper folding motor.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper and the sensor.
transport roller lift motor. Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor part.
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part. F0-32 Finisher paper pass unit transport
motor trouble
F0-28 Finisher paper alignment roller lift
Trouble content The operation of the paper transport in the paper relay
motor trouble unit of the finisher is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Trouble content The lifting operation of the paper takeup roller arm in Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
the staple compiler of the finisher is abnormal. trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the relay paper
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of transport motor.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper Turn OFF/ON the power. Replace the control PWB
alignment roller lift motor. and the motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor F0-33 Finisher punch shift motor trouble
part.

Trouble content The horizontal registration shift operation of the punch

unit in the finisher is abnormal.
F0-29 Finisher pwb cooling fan trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Trouble content The operation of the PWB cooling fan in the finisher is harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
abnormal. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch shift
Detail PCU motor.
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector. and the sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the control PWB Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
cooling fan. part.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the control PWB and the fan motor.
F0-34 Finisher punch motor trouble

Trouble content The punching operation of the punch unit in the

finisher is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 16
F0-37 Finisher backup RAM trouble F0-44 Finisher saddle rear edge hold motor
trouble
Trouble content Data cannot be written into the backup RAM. The red
values are abnormal.
Trouble content The operation of the rear edge hold member of the
Detail PCU saddle unit is abnormal.
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble, EEPROM chip Detail PCU
breakdown.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle rear
edge hold motor.
F0-40 Communication trouble between the Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
finisher saddle and the trimmer and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
Trouble content Communication trouble between the saddle unit and
the trimmer unit.
When a command is sent from the saddle unit to the
trimmer unit, no response is made by the trimmer unit.
F0-45 Finisher saddle staple motor trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB Trouble content The staple operation of the saddle unit is abnormal.
trouble, disconnection of connector or harness. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Check the connector Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
between the saddle and the trimmer unit. Replace the harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
control PWB of the saddle unit. Replace the control Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
PWB of the trimmer unit. staple motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
F0-41 Finisher saddle lead edge stopper Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
motor trouble

Trouble content The operation of the finisher saddle unit lead edge F0-46 Finisher saddle rear edge shift motor
stopper motor is abnormal.
trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Trouble content The operation of the rear edge shift motor of the
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle lead finisher saddle unit is abnormal.
edge stopper motor. Detail PCU
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
and the sensor. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle rear
part. edge shift motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
F0-42 Finisher saddle folding roller guide Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
motor trouble

Trouble content The operation of the saddle unit folding roller guide is F0-47 Finisher saddle flap motor trouble
abnormal.
Detail PCU
Trouble content The operation of the rear edge flap unit of the saddle
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of unit is abnormal.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
folding roller guide motor.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle flap
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor motor.
part. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
F0-43 Finisher saddle alignment motor
section abnormality
F0-48 Finisher saddle push motor trouble
Trouble content The jogger shift operation in the staple compiler of the
saddle unit is abnormal. Trouble content The pushing operation of the saddle unit is abnormal.
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle push
paper alignment motor. motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor. and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part. part.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 17
F0-49 Finisher saddle separation motor trou- F0-54 Finisher trimmer paper exit separation
ble motor trouble

Trouble content The operation of the take up separation roller of the Trouble content The separation operation of the paper exit roller of the
saddle unit is abnormal. trimmer unit is abnormal.
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer
separation motor. paper exit separation motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor. and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part. part.

F0-51 Finisher trimmer cutter motor trouble F0-55 Finisher trimmer bundle press motor
trouble
Trouble content The cutter operation of the trimmer unit is abnormal.
Detail PCU Trouble content The nip and separation operations of the bundle press
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of roller of the trimmer unit are abnormal.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
cutter motor. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer
and the sensor.
bundle press motor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
part.
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
F0-52 Finisher trimmer registration motor
trouble
F0-56 Finisher Paper remaining trouble in
Trouble content PCU the trimmer
Detail The operation of the registration taking unit of the
trimmer unit is abnormal. Trouble content Paper bundle remained in the trimmer is not
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of discharged by the automatic paper exit operation.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer Cause Trimmer inlet port sensor breakdown
registration motor. The paper bundle is bent and cannot be transported.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer
and the sensor.
transport motor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
part.
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
F0-53 Finisher trimmer inlet port separation Check the paper bundle can be transported or not.
motor trouble

Trouble content The separation operation of the inlet port roller of the
F0-70 Communication trouble between the
trimmer unit is abnormal. finisher and the folding unit
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Trouble content Communication trouble between the finisher and the
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. folding unit.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer inlet No response for a command from the folding unit.
port separation motor. Detail PCU
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB
and the sensor. trouble, disconnection of connector or harness.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Check connection between
part.
the finisher and the folding unit. Replace the control
PWB of the folding unit.
Check AC power cord connection of MX-FD10

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 18
F0-71 Folding unit lead edge holding guide F0-76 Folding unit 3-fold stopper motor trou-
motor trouble ble

Trouble content The operations of the folding unit lead edge holding Trouble content The operation of the 3-fold stopper in the folding unit
guide is abnormal. is abnormal.
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the folding unit Check & Remedy Use SIM3-41 to check the operation of the 3-fold
lead edge holding guide motor. stopper motor in the folding unit.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor. and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part. part.

F0-72 Folding unit backup RAM trouble F0-77 Folding unit transport motor trouble

Trouble content Data cannot be written into the backup RAM of the Trouble content The folding and transport operations of the folding unit
folding unit. The red values are abnormal. are abnormal.
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Folding unit control PWB trouble, EEPROM chip Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
breakdown. harness or connector.
Check & Remedy Replace the folding unit control PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-41 to check the operation of the folding unit
transport motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
F0-73 Folding unit power supply fan trouble and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
Trouble content Cooling fan abnormality in the power unit section of
the folding unit
Detail PCU F0-80 Finisher power cooling fan motor
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
motor. Trouble content The operation of the cooling fan in the power unit
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor. section of the finisher is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
F0-74 Folding unit folding tray paper exit trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
motor trouble Check & Remedy Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
motor.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.
Trouble content The paper exit operation to the folding unit is
abnormal.
Detail PCU F0-81 Finisher upper tray fan trouble
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the folding unit Trouble content The operation of the cooling fan in the upper tray of
folding tray paper exit motor. the finisher is abnormal.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Detail PCU
and the sensor. Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
part. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the upper tray
fan.
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
F0-75 Folding unit upper stopper motor motor.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.
trouble

Trouble content The operation of the upper stopper of the folding unit F0-82 Finisher lower tray fan trouble
is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Trouble content The operation of the cooling fan in the lower tray of the
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of finisher is abnormal.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the folding unit
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
upper stopper motor.
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the lower tray
and the sensor.
fan.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
part.
motor.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 19
F0-83 Finisher paper guide motor trouble F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting opera-
tion trouble
Trouble content The operation of the paper lead edge guide unit at the
paper exit port of the finisher is abnormal.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Harness and connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper guide Home position sensor trouble
motor. Finisher control PWB trouble
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
and the sensor.
roller lift motor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
part.
position sensor.
Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
F0-84 Finisher grip trouble Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Trouble content The bundle grip operation when discharging paper
bundle from the staple compiler of the finisher is
abnormal. F1-03 Finisher oscillation operation trouble
Detail PCU (3K)
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Trouble detection PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the gripper
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
motor.
Sensor (FNHPS) trouble
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Motor (FNMS) trouble
and the sensor.
Finisher PWB trouble
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part. Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace sensor (FNHPS)
F0-86 Finisher discharged paper hold motor Replace motor (FNMS)
trouble Replace finisher PWB

Trouble content The operation of the paper hold lever at the paper exit
port of the finisher is abnormal. F1-04 Finisher paddle trouble (3K)
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Trouble detection PCU
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the discharged Clutch (FNCDP) trouble
paper hold motor. Sensor (FNHPP) trouble
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Motor (FNME) trouble
and the sensor. Finisher PWB trouble
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
part. SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace clutch (FNCDP)
F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication Replace sensor (FNHPP)
error Replace motor (FNME)
Replace finisher PWB

Trouble content
Detail PCU F1-08 Stapler shift trouble
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Finisher control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the Cause Stapler shift motor trouble.
finisher and the PCU PWB. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Home position sensor trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
Check that the inner Fin setting of Sim 26 - 50 is ON. motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
Replace the stapler shift motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 20
F1-08 Finisher stapler shift operation trouble F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation
(3K) trouble

Trouble detection PCU Trouble content Lift motor trouble.

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Detail PCU
Sensor (FNHPMSS) trouble Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble.
Motor (FNMMSS) trouble Finisher control PWB trouble.
Finisher PWB trouble Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
SIM3-3 to execute tray lift motor.
Check connection state of connector, harness Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Replace sensor (FNHPMSS) position sensor.
Replace motor (FNMMSS) Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace finisher PWB Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.
Replace the home position sensor.

F1-10 Staple motor trouble

F1-15 Finisher tray lift operation trouble (3K)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble detection PCU
Cause Staple motor trouble. Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Finisher control PWB trouble. Area sensor (5 types) trouble
Home position sensor trouble. Sensor (FN1DO) trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple Motor (FNMGMT) trouble
motor. Finisher PWB trouble
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
position sensor. SIM3-3 to execute
Replace the staple motor. Check connection state of connector, harness
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace Area sensors (5 types)
Replace the home position sensor. (FNULTM,?FNHPMT,?FNFMTLC,?FNFMTLS?FNFM
Replace the finisher control PWB. TSS)
Replace sensor (FN1DO)
Replace motor (FNMGMT)
F1-10 Finisher staple operation trouble (3K) Replace finisher PWB

Trouble detection PCU

F1-16 Finisher escape/saddle transport
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Sensor (FNHPDSS) trouble switching operation trouble (3K)
Motor (FNMSS) trouble
Finisher PWB trouble Trouble detection PCU
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
SIM3-3 to execute Sensor (FNHPFECE) trouble
Check connection state of connector, harness Motor (FNMFECES) trouble
Replace staple unit. Finisher PWB trouble
Replace finisher PWB
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness
F1-14 Finisher paper rear edge flap opera- Replace sensor (FNHPFECE)
tion trouble (3K) Replace motor (FNMFECES)
Replace finisher PWB

Trouble detection PCU

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F
Sensor (FNHPFR) trouble
Motor (FNMFR) trouble
Finisher PWB trouble Trouble content
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Detail PCU
SIM3-3 to execute Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Check connection state of connector, harness Motor speed abnormality.
Replace sensor (FNHPFR) Over-current to the motor.
Replace motor (FNMFR) Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace finisher PWB Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor F.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the paper alignment motor F.
Replace the home position sensor.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 21
F1-19 Finisher front paper alignment opera- F1-22 Finisher paper bundle exit operation
tion trouble (3K) trouble (3K)

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Sensor (FNHPJF) trouble Sensor (FNHPAR) trouble
Motor (FNMJF) trouble Motor (FNMAR) trouble
Finisher PWB trouble Finisher PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace sensor (FNHPJF) Replace sensor (FNHPAR)
Replace motor (FNMJF) Replace motor (FNMAR)
Replace finisher PWB Replace finisher PWB

F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble F1-23 Safety switch trouble (3K)
R
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble content Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Sensor (FNDOCFD) trouble
Detail PCU
Switch (FNOCFD/FNSSS) trouble
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Finisher PWB trouble
Motor speed abnormality.
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
Over-current to the motor.
Check connection state of connector, harness
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace sensor (FNDOCFD)
Home position sensor trouble.
Replace switch (FNOCFD/FNSSS)
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Replace finisher PWB
alignment motor R.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB. F1-28 Finisher stacking operation trouble
Replace the paper alignment motor R. (3K)
Replace the home position sensor.

Trouble detection PCU

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
F1-20 Finisher rear paper alignment opera- Sensor (FNHPGKS) trouble
tion trouble (3K) Motor (FNMGRS) trouble
Finisher PWB trouble
Trouble detection PCU Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Check connection state of connector, harness
Sensor (FNHPJR) trouble
Motor (FNMJR) trouble Replace sensor (FNHPGKS)
Finisher PWB trouble Replace motor (FNMGRS)
Replace finisher PWB
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace sensor (FNHPJR) F1-30 Communication trouble between Fin-
Replace motor (FNMJR) isher and Saddle
Replace finisher PWB

Trouble content
Detail PCU
F1-21 Finisher fan trouble
Cause Connector and harness connection trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Trouble content The operation of the relay unit fan motor inside the Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
machine is abnormal. Turn OFF/ON the power.
Detail PCU Replace the finisher control PWB.
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the relay unit F1-31 Finisher paper exit operation trouble
fan inside the machine.
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
(3K)
motor.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor. Trouble detection PCU
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Motor (FNME) trouble
Sensor (FSMCE) trouble.
Saddle Finisher PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace motor (FNME)
Replace sensor (FSMCE)
Replace Saddle finisher PWB

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 22
F1-32 Finisher punch unit communication F1-38 Finisher punch backup memory error
error (3K) (3K)

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Firmware is not latest version Cause Punch PWB trouble
Connector, harness connection trouble Check & Remedy Power OFF/ON to cancel
Punch PWB trouble Replace punch PWB
Finisher PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness F1-41 Finisher saddle paper positioning
Replace punch PWB
Replace finisher PWB
operation trouble (3K)

Trouble detection PCU

F1-33 Finisher punch shifting operation Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
trouble (3K) Sensor (FSHPSR) trouble
Motor (FSMSR) trouble
Saddle Finisher PWB trouble
Trouble detection PCU Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble SIM3-3 to execute
Sensor (FCHPR) trouble Check connection state of connector, harness
Motor (FCMR) trouble Replace sensor (FSHPSR)
Punch PWB trouble Replace motor (FSMSR)
Finisher PWB trouble Replace Saddle finisher PWB
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness F1-42 Finisher saddle switching operation
Replace sensor (FCHPR)
Replace motor (FCMR)
trouble (3K)
Replace punch PWB
Replace finisher PWB Trouble detection PCU
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Sensor (FSHPEL) trouble
F1-34 Finisher punch operation trouble (3K) Motor (FSMDLE) trouble
Saddle Finisher PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
Trouble detection PCU
SIM3-3 to execute
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Check connection state of connector, harness
Sensor (FCHPP) trouble
Replace sensor (FSHPEL)
Motor (FCP) trouble
Replace motor (FSMDLE)
Punch PWB trouble
Replace Saddle finisher PWB
Finisher PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness
F1-43 Finisher saddle alignment operation
Replace sensor (FCHPP) trouble (3K)
Replace motor (FCP)
Replace punch PWB
Trouble detection PCU
Replace finisher PWB
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Sensor (FSHPJ) trouble
Motor (FSMJ) trouble
F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error Saddle Finisher PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
Trouble content SIM3-3 to execute
Detail PCU Check connection state of connector, harness
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble. Replace sensor (FSHPJ)
Malfunction due to noises Replace motor (FSMJ)
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace Saddle finisher PWB
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10, Finisher control
PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
F1-44 Finisher saddle gripper operation
trouble (3K)
F1-37 Finisher backup memory error (3K)
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Cause Finisher PWB trouble Sensor (FSHPG) trouble
Check & Remedy Power OFF/ON to cancel Motor (FSMG) trouble
Replace finisher PWB Saddle Finisher PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace sensor (FSHPG)
Replace motor (FSMG)
Replace Saddle finisher PWB

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 23
F1-45 Finisher saddle staple operation trou- F1-53 Finisher - Main machine inconsistent
ble (3K) error

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Cause Firmware is not latest version
Sensor (FSHPDSS) trouble Finisher PWB trouble
Motor (FSMS) trouble Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute
Saddle Finisher PWB trouble Replace finisher PWB
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute
Check connection state of connector, harness F1-54 Finisher punch unit destination incon-
Replace Saddle staple unit
Replace Saddle finisher PWB
sistent error (Inner) (3K)

Trouble detection PCU

F1-46 Finisher saddle folding operation trou- Cause Improper destination setting of punch unit
ble (3K) Check & Remedy Set proper destination of punch unit. (SIM 26-50)

Trouble detection PCU F1-60 Communication trouble between

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Sensor (FSMCF) trouble
Sensor (FSHPT) trouble Trouble content Communication abnormality between the units
Motor (FSMF) trouble connected to the downstream of the inserter.
Saddle Finisher PWB trouble No response for a command from the inserter. Motor
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute abnormality.
SIM3-3 to execute Detail PCU
Check connection state of connector, harness Cause Noise on the communication line
Replace sensor (FSMCF) Control PWB trouble.
Replace sensor (FSHPT) Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace motor (FSMF) Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
Replace Saddle finisher PWB Check connection of the connector with the
downstream units of the inserter.
Replace the control PWB of the downstream units of
F1-47 Finisher saddle paper transport opera- the inserter.
Check AC power cord connection of MX-FN21/FN22.
tion trouble (3K)

Trouble detection PCU F1-64 Inserter No. 1 pickup motor trouble

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Sensor (FSHPP) trouble
Trouble content Abnormality of the paper feed roller driving motor in
Motor (FSMC) trouble
the upper side paper feed section of the inserter
Saddle Finisher PWB trouble
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute
SIM3-3 to execute Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position
Check connection state of connector, harness sensor breakdown, connection harness / connector
Replace sensor (FSHPP) connection trouble.
Replace motor (FSMC) Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 1
Replace Saddle finisher PWB pickup motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part.
F1-50 Combination error Finisher and Main
unit F1-65 Inserter No. 2 pickup motor trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content Abnormality of the paper feed roller driving motor in
Detail PCU the lower side paper feed section of the inserter
Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit Detail PCU
model is installed.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position
Finisher control PWB trouble.
sensor breakdown, connection harness / connector
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher. connection trouble.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 2
pickup motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
F1-51 Finisher communication error (3K) Replace the control PWB and the sensor part.

Trouble detection PCU

Cause Firmware is not latest version
Finisher PWB trouble
Check & Remedy SIM49-1 to execute
Replace finisher PWB

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 24
F1-66 Inserter No. 1 lift motor trouble F1-97 Decurler unit fan 1 trouble

Trouble content Abnormality of the tray lift-up driving motor in the Trouble content The operation of the fan in the decurler unit is
upper side paper feed section of the inserter. abnormal.
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
sensor breakdown, connection harness / connector trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
connection trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-51 to check the operation of the decurler
Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 1 lift unit fan 1 (Upper cooling fan).
motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. motor.
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part. Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.

F1-67 Inserter No. 2 lift motor trouble F1-98 Decurler unit fan 2 trouble

Trouble content Abnormality of the tray lift-up driving motor in the Trouble content The operation of the fan in the decurler unit is
upper side paper feed section of the inserter. abnormal.
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
sensor breakdown, connection harness / connector trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
connection trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-51 to check the operation of the decurler
Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 2 lift unit fan 2 (Lower cooling fan).
motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. motor.
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part. Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.

F1-78 Finisher staple free stapler operation F1-99 Decurler unit fan 3 trouble
trouble (3K)
Trouble content The operation of the fan in the decurler unit is
abnormal.
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble Detail PCU
Sensor (FNMCSLS) trouble Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
Motor (FNMSLS) trouble trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Finisher PWB trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM3-51 to check the operation of the decurler
Check & Remedy SIM3-2 to execute unit fan 3 (Transport motor cooling fan).
SIM3-3 to execute Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
Check connection state of connector, harness motor.
Replace Staple-Free staple unit. Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.
Replace finisher PWB

F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble (K)

F1-83 Finisher guide operation trouble (3K)
Trouble content When the discharge lamp open sensor is kept ON for
Trouble detection PCU a certain time from turning ON the discharge lamp, it is
detected as a trouble.
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Motor (FNMDT) trouble Detail PCU
Sensor (FNHPTF,FNHPTR) trouble Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (K)
Finisher PWB trouble and the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy SIM3-3 to execute Discharge lamp PWB (K) trouble.
Check connection state of connector, harness PCU PWB trouble.
Replace motor (FNMDT) Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the discharge lamp
Replace sensor (FNHPTF,FNHPTR) (K) [DL_K].
Replace finisher PWB Check the discharge lamp PWB (K).
Check the harness and the connector.
Replace the PCU PWB.
F1-90 Communication trouble between
decurler and downstream unit F2-39 Process temperature sensor trouble
Trouble content Communication trouble between the decurler and the
Trouble content
units connected to the downstream of the decurler.
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Temperature/humidity sensor trouble.
Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB
Room temperature/ humidity sensor harness and
trouble, disconnection of connector or harness.
connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. PCU PWB trouble.
Check connection of the connector between the
Check & Remedy Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
decurler unit and the downstream units of the decurler.
Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor
Replace the control PWB of the downstream units of
harness and the connector.
the decurler.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check AC power cord connection of MX-FN21/FN22.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 25
F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble

Trouble content Trouble content

Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality. Cause Toner motor trouble.
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble. Toner density sensor trouble.
Developing unit trouble. Connector/harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Toner cartridge trouble.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the Developing unit trouble.
harness. Tone hopper section trouble
Replace the developing unit. Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the toner density sensor.
Connector and harness check.
Replace the PCU PWB.
F2-47 Room temperature/humidity sensor Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the developing unit.
trouble Replace the toner hopper unit.
Check the toner hopper section.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Temperature/humidity sensor trouble. F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection
Room temperature/ humidity sensor harness and
connector connection trouble on manual paper feed. Trouble content
PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit
Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor
detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.)
harness and the connector.
Toner cartridge trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB.
F2-58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble

Trouble content F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error

Detail PCU
Cause Process humidity sensor trouble.
Trouble content
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the process humidity sensor.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
Replace the PCU PWB.
and toner cartridge
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB.
F2-59 Room temperature/humidity sensor Check the connector and the harness between the
trouble PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.

Trouble content
Detail PCU
F2-78 Image density sensor adjustment
Cause Process thermistor trouble. trouble
Process thermistor harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Transfer belt substrate reflection rate abnormality
Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor. Detail PCU
Check connection of the process thermistor harness
Cause Image density (registration) sensor trouble (Sensor
and the connector.
sensitivity adjustment trouble).
Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble.
Image density (resist) sensor connector and harness
connection trouble
Image density (registration) sensor dirt.
Transfer belt dirt, scratch.
Check & Remedy Replace the image density (registration) sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness of
the image density (resist) sensor.
Clean the image density (registration) sensor.
Clean or replace the transfer belt.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 26
F2-91 High density process control high F6-00 MFP - FAX communication trouble
voltage error
Trouble content MFP - FAX communication establishment error /
Framing / Parity / Protocol error
Trouble content When executing the high density process control in
the toner cartridge-less production process, the Section MFP
developing bias exceeds 500V. Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Cause * Image density sensor trouble, harness connection and
trouble between the PCU PWB and the image Remedy
density sensor, dirt on the image density sensor, Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB - MFPC PWB connector and
transfer belt cleaning trouble. harness trouble
* Eloping tank abnormality Check Check the connector and the harness between the
Check & Remedy * Use SIM44-02 to execute the gain adjustment of and FAX control PWB and the MFPC PWB.
the process control sensor. Remedy
When "Error" is displayed, it may be considered as Case 3 Cause FAX control PWB - Mother board connector and
breakdown. Check the sensor and the harness. harness trouble
When the adjustment is normally completed, check Check Check the connector and the harness between the
the drum surface and the belt surface. and FAX control PWB and the mother board.
* Replace the developing tank. Remedy
Case 4 Cause FAX control PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakage
Check Check the ROM of the FAX control PWB.
F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble and
Remedy
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time.
F6-01 FAX EEPROM read/write error
CLUD1 sensor trouble.
Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble. Trouble content FAX control PWB EEPROM access error (Read and
PCU PWB trouble. write)
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble Section FAX
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector of Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble
LUD1. Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
Replace the lift unit. and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
Replace the PCU PWB. Remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble and
Remedy
Trouble content LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU
Cause LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time. F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
CLUD2 sensor trouble.
Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble. Trouble content FAX control PWB MODEM chip operation trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Section FAX
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
Case 1 Cause FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Replace the lift unit.
and
Replace the PCU PWB.
remedy
Case 2 Cause The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
F3-32 Main body cassette 3 lift trouble and
Remedy
Trouble content C3LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU
Cause C3LUD sensor trouble. F6-21 Improper combination of FAX PWB
Cassette 3 lift motor trouble. and FAX soft switch
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB,
the lift unit, and the paper feed unit
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C3LUD. Section FAX
Check the lift unit. Case 1 Cause Improper destination of FAX PWB.
FAX PWB trouble.
Check Check proper destination of FAX PWB.
F3-42 Main body cassette 4 lift trouble and Replace FAX PWB.
Remedy

Trouble content C4LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU
Cause C4LUD sensor trouble.
Cassette 4 lift motor trouble.
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB,
the lift unit, and the paper feed unit
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C4LUD.
Check the lift unit.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 27
F6-30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access H2-02 Thermistor open trouble TH_US
error
Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Trouble content FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (Read and Detail PCU
write) Cause Thermistor trouble
Section FAX Control PWB trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble
Case 1 Cause Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor,
AC power trouble
or no program data written.
Fusing unit not installed.
Check Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
and program.
from the thermistor to the control PWB.
Remedy
Case 2 Cause FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble.
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
H2-03 Thermistor open trouble TH_UM_AD1
Remedy
Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Detail PCU
F6-97 Incompatibility between FAX control Cause Thermistor trouble
and main machine Control PWB trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble
AC power trouble
Trouble content Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the Fusing unit not installed.
main machine Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
Section MFP from the thermistor to the control PWB.
Case 1 Cause The FAX control PWB installed is improper.
FAX control PWB trouble.
Check Install a proper FAX control PWB. H2-05 Non-contact upper sub thermistor
and Replace the FAX control PWB.
Remedy
open

Trouble content The thermistor is open.

F6-98 Incompatible destination between FAX Detail PCU
control and main machine Cause Thermistor trouble
Control PWB trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble
Trouble content Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB AC power trouble
destination and the main machine destination Fusing unit not installed.
Section MFP Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
Case 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information from the thermistor to the control PWB.
written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that
in the main machine (set with SIM26-6)
Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX control PWB. H2-06 Contact upper sub thermistor open
and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6)
Remedy
Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Detail PCU
H2-00 Thermistor open trouble Cause Thermistor trouble
Control PWB trouble
(TH_UM_AD2) Fusing section connector connection trouble
AC power trouble
Trouble content Fusing unit not installed.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
Cause Thermistor trouble from the thermistor to the control PWB.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble H2-07 Contact lower main thermistor open
Fusing unit not installed
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Replace the thermistor.
Detail PCU
Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Thermistor trouble
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Control PWB trouble
harness.
Fusing section connector connection trouble
Check the connector in the fusing section.
AC power trouble
Fusing unit not installed.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
from the thermistor to the control PWB.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 28
H3-00 Upper main high temperature trouble H4-02 Upper sub low temperature trouble

Trouble content Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Detail PCU level within the specified time from turning ON the
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. power relay.
Thermistor trouble Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble Cause Thermistor trouble.
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble Heater lamp trouble.
HL control PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Thermostat trouble.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Connector, harness connection trouble.
heater lamp. HL control PWB trouble.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Power unit trouble.
Replace the thermistor. Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the
harness. heater lamp.
Replace the HL control PWB. Replace the thermistor.
Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the PCU PWB.
H3-02 Upper sub high temperature trouble Replace the thermostat.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the HL control PWB.
Trouble content Replace the power unit.
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermistor trouble H4-30 Upper main thermistor differential
PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
input abnormal
HL control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Trouble content The values of TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the exceed the specified value within the specified time
heater lamp. from turning ON the HL_UM.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Detail PCU
Replace the thermistor. Cause HL_UM does not turn on.
Replace the PCU PWB. Thermistor trouble.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the Harness trouble.
harness. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the HL control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
When the heater lamp flashes normally, check the
H4-00 Upper main low temperature trouble thermistor and its harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit section of the PCU
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified PWB.
level within the specified time from turning ON the When the lamp does not light up, check for
power relay. disconnection in the heater lamp and breakage of
the thermostat.
Detail PCU
Check the interlock switch.
Cause Thermistor trouble.
Check the lamp control circuit of the AC PWB and
Heater lamp trouble.
the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Thermostat trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
HL control PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
H4-32 Upper sub thermistor differential input
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. abnormal
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Trouble content The upper sub compensation thermistor and the
heater lamp.
upper sub differential thermistor do not exceed the
Replace the thermistor.
specified value within the specified time from turning
Replace the heater lamp.
ON the upper sub heater lamp.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU
Replace the thermostat.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Cause The upper sub heater lamp does not turn ON.
Replace the HL control PWB. Thermistor breakdown, harness trouble, PCU PWB
Replace the power unit. trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
When the heater lamp flashes normally, check the
thermistor and its harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit section of the PCU
PWB.
When the lamp does not light up, check for
disconnection in the heater lamp and breakage of the
thermostat.
Check the interlock switch.
Check the lamp control circuit of the AC PWB and the
PCU PWB.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 29
H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach L1-00 Scanner feed trouble
jam
Trouble content Scanner feed is not completed within the specified
time.
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Detail PCU
Cause Scanner unit trouble.
Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
SCU PWB trouble.
remains.)
Scanner control PWB trouble.
POD1 sensor trouble
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Fusing unit installation trouble
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
POD1 sensor connector and harness connection
Scanner motor trouble.
trouble
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Fusing unit, drive section trouble Replace the scanner unit.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Check installation of the fusing unit.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Replace the fusing unit.
Replace the scanner motor.
Check or repair the fusing drive section.
Check connection of the POD1 sensor connector and
the harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. L3-00 Scanner return trouble
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Trouble content Scanner return is not completed within the specified
time.
H7-10 Recovery error from low fuser temper- Detail SCU
ature Cause Scanner unit trouble
SCU PWB trouble
Scanner control PWB trouble
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Harness and connector connection trouble
level within the specified time from stopping a job due
Scanner home position sensor trouble
to fall in the fusing temperature.
Scanner motor trouble
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Cause Thermistor trouble. Replace the scanner unit.
Heater lamp trouble. Replace the SCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Thermostat trouble. Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Replace the scanner motor.
HL control PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. L4-02 Paper feed motor trouble
Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the thermostat. Trouble content A lock signal is not detected within the specified time
Check connection of the connector and the harness. in ON operation of the paper feed motor after
Replace the HL control PWB. warming-up or canceling a jam.
Replace the power unit. Detail PCU
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Cause Paper feed motor trouble
heater lamp. Paper feed motor harness and connector connection
trouble
PCU PWB trouble
H7-12 Recovery error from low fuser temp Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed
(TH_US) motor.
Replace the paper feed motor.
Check connection of the paper feed motor harness
Trouble content and the connector.
Detail PCU Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Thermistor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. L4-03 Fusing motor trouble
Thermostat trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
HL control PWB trouble. Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
Power unit trouble. fusing motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Detail PCU
Replace the heater lamp. Cause Fusing motor trouble
Replace the PCU PWB. Fusing motor harness and connector connection
Replace the thermostat. trouble
Check connection of the connector and the harness. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the HL control PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing
Replace the power unit. motor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Replace the Fusing motor.
heater lamp. Check connection of the fusing motor harness and the
connection.
Replace the PCU PWB.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 30
L4-04 Developing motor trouble L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan motor 5 trouble

Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Developing motor. specified time in the paper delivery cooling fan 5
Detail PCU operation.
Cause Developing motor trouble Detail PCU
Developing motor harness and connector connection Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
trouble the fan connector or other trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the developing PCU PWB and the fan.
motor. Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Replace the Developing motor.
Check connection of the Developing motor harness
and the connection. L4-32 Power source cooling fan motor 1
Replace the PCU PWB.
trouble

L4-06 Transfer unit pressure welding or Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time in the power cooling fan 1 operation.
estrangement trouble
Detail PCU
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
Trouble content A change in the transfer position sensor cannot be the ozone exhaust fan or other trouble.
detected within the specified time in lifting operation of Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
the transfer unit. PCU PWB and the fan.
Detail PCU Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Cause Transfer unit position sensor trouble
Dirt on the transfer unit position sensor.
PCU PWB trouble L4-34 Polygon cooling fan trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Transfer unit lift mechanism trouble
Transfer unit attachment trouble. Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-3 to check the estrangement operation of the polygon cooling fan.
the transfer unit. Section PCU
Replace the transfer unit position sensor. Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
Clean the transfer unit position sensor. the fan connector or other trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
Check connection of the connector and the harness. PCU PWB and the fan.
Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism. Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.

L4-08 Waste toner transport motor lock L4-35 Paper exit cooling fan motor 4 trouble

Trouble content The waste toner lock sensor is detected during Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
rotation of the drum motor. not detected within the specified time.
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Waste toner transport motor trouble. Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
Waste toner transport pipe clogging the fan connector or other trouble.
Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
and the waste toner transport motor. PCU PWB and the fan.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the waste toner Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
transport motor (WTM).
Check the waste toner transport pipe for clogging.
Check the harness and the connector between the L4-38 Paper exit cooling fan motor 3 trouble
PCU PWB and the waste toner transport motor.

Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of

L4-17 Drum motor lock trouble (BK) the cooling fan motor.
Detail PCU
Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the and the fan motor.
drum motor (K). PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Fan motor trouble.
Cause Drum motor trouble The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble.
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB (No power supply to the fan motor)
and the drum motor Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
Control circuit trouble PCU PWB and the fan.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-01 to check the operation of the drum Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
motor.
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the developing motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the drum motor.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 31
L4-39 Fuser cooling fan motor 1 trouble L4-46 DV cooling fan motor 1 trouble

Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the ADU
not detected within the specified time. transport cooling fan motor F.
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
the fan connector or other trouble. specified time in the developing section cooling fan
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the operation.
PCU PWB and the fan. Developing section cooling fan trouble.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
L4-40 Ozone fan motor 1 trouble Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the developing section cooling fan.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the
ozone fan motor 1.
Detail PCU L4-50 Process fan motor 1 trouble
Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
and the fan motor.
PCU PWB trouble. Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the ADU
Fan motor trouble. transport cooling fan motor R.
The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble. Detail PCU
(No power supply to the fan motor) Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. specified time in the process cooling fan operation.
Check the harness and the connector between the Process cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB and the fan motor. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Replace the fan motor. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the process cooling fan.
L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan motor 6 trouble Replace the PCU PWB.

Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
not detected within the specified time.
L4-56 Paper exit cooling fan motor 1 trouble
Detail PCU
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
the fan connector or other trouble. not detected within the specified time.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the Detail PCU
PCU PWB and the fan. Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. the fan connector or other trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fan.
L4-44 Power source cooling fan motor 2 Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
trouble
L4-58 Fuser cooling fan motor 2 trouble
Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the
power source cooling fan 2.
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
Detail PCU
not detected within the specified time.
Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
Detail PCU
and the fan motor.
PCU PWB trouble. Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
Fan motor trouble. the fan connector or other trouble.
The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble. Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
(No power supply to the fan motor) PCU PWB and the fan.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fan motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. L4-64 DV cooling fan motor 2 trouble
Replace the fan motor.
Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the ADU
transport cooling fan motor F.
Detail PCU
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time in the developing section cooling fan
operation.
Developing section cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the developing section cooling fan.
Replace the PCU PWB.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 32
L6-10 Polygon motor trouble U1-01 Battery trouble

Trouble content The polygon motor does not reach the specified RPM Trouble content RTC backup battery voltage fall
within the specified time after starting rotation of the Detail MFP
polygon motor. Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
Detail PCU 2) Battery circuit abnormality
Cause Polygon motor trouble. Check Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about
LSU control PWB trouble. and 2.5V or above.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Remedy Replace the battery.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
Replace the LSU.
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Trouble content The full wave signal is not detected. Strong external noises.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB EEPROM.
Cause PCU PWB trouble. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Power unit trouble. (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB. perform the works.)
Replace the power unit. Check the power environment.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.

U2-05 Erroneous detection of account

L8-02 Full wave signal error management data
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail PCU Detail MFP
Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is Cause Breakage of the authentication DB is detected.
detected.
Check & Remedy When breakage of the authentication DB is detected,
(The frequency is detected as 65Hz or above, or
the MFP is rebooted and the DB tables are
45Hz or less.)
reconstructed, generating "U2-05".
PCU PWB trouble.
The message, however, is not displayed and only the
Power unit trouble.
trouble history is saved.
Connection trouble of the connector and the
The authentication data are cleared.
harness.
Power frequency, waveform abnormality.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the power unit.
U2-11 MFP EEPROM counter check sum
Check connection of the connector and the harness. error
Check the power waveform.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
L8-20 Communication error of MFP/Mother Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
board EEPROM socket contact trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Strong external noises.
Trouble content
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing
data (about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the
Cause SCN mother board PWB - MFPC PWB connection
EEPROM.)
trouble.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
SCN mother board trouble.
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
Check & Remedy Check connection between the SCN mother board
perform the works.)
PWB and the MFPC PWB.
Check the ground of the main unit.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace the SCN mother board.

PC-- No personal counter installed

Trouble content
Detail MFPC
Cause The personal counter is not installed.
The personal counter is not detected.
Scan mother PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the Scan mother PWB.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 33
U2-30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB U2-42 Adjustment data error in system stor-
manufacturing No. data inconsistency age data area

Trouble content Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved Trouble content
in the PCU PWB and that in the MFPC PWB. Detail MFP
Detail MFP Cause The saved file of the machine adjustment values in
Cause When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFPC PWB, the mSATA eMMC and the HDD cannot be found or
the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before is broken.
replacement is not mounted on the new PWB. Both of the mSATA eMMC set data and the HDD
MFPC PWB trouble system saved data area are broken.
PCU PWB trouble HDD trouble
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set. MFPC PWB trouble
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was mSATA eMMC trouble
mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
on the new PWB. Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Check the mSATA eMMC, and replace if necessary.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after When replacing the HDD, the MFPC PWB, and the
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and mSATA eMMC, refer to the chapter of "Necessary
perform the works.) works and procedures of HDD, MFPC PWB, and
Replace the PCU PWB. mSATA eMMC replacement.
Use SIM to adjust the machine again and set the
adjustment values.
U2-40 mSATA eMMC system storage data
area error
U2-50 HDD user authentication data check
Trouble content
sum error
Detail MFP
Cause A file error occurs in the mSATA eMMC system Trouble content
storage data partition. Detail MFP
MFPC PWB trouble Cause HDD trouble
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power, and the backup data in the MFPC PWB trouble
HDD are written and the machine is automatically Strong external noises.
booted. Check & Remedy Check the data related to the check sum error
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary. (address book, image send system registration data
Check the mSATA eMMC, and replace if necessary. (senders record, meta data)) and register again.
Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
Replace the HDD.
U2-41 HDD system storage data area error Replace the MFPC PWB.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
Trouble content Manual, and perform the works.)
Detail MFP
Cause A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data
area, disabling backup of the saved file of the U2-60 Watermark check error
machine adjustment values in the mSATA eMMC.
HDD trouble
MFPC PWB trouble Trouble content
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary. Detail MFP
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary. Cause Watermark data trouble
When replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB, refer HDD trouble
to the chapter of "Necessary works and procedures MFPC PWB trouble
of HDD and MFPC PWB replacement." Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data.
Replace the HDD.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
Manual, and perform the works.)

U2-70 OCR dictionary check error

Trouble detection MFP

Cause OCR dictionary data trouble
Check & Remedy SIM49-6 to execute

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 34
U2-80 SCU EEPROM read write error U5-00 Document feed unit communication
error
Trouble content
Detail SCU Trouble content
Cause Scan mother PWB EEPROM trouble Detail SCU
Scan mother PWB trouble
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble.
Scan mother PWB EEPROM socket connection
Scan mother PWB trouble.
trouble
DSPF CNT PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the Scan mother PWB EEPROM.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
Replace the Scan mother PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check connection of the Scan mother PWB
Replace the Scan mother PWB.
EEPROM socket.
Replace the DSPF CNT PWB.
Check the SIM adjustment value of the following
items, and adjust again if they are improper.
• Scanner-related adjustments
• Touch panel-related adjustments
U5-16 Document feed unit fan motor trouble
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Trouble content
Detail SCU
U2-81 SCU EEPROM check sum error Cause When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
not detected within the specified time.
Trouble content Fan motor trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Detail SCU
DSPF CNT PWB trouble.
Cause Scan mother PWB EEPROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM2-3 to check that the fan is rotating.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
Replace the fan motor.
Scan mother PWB trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Replace the DSPF CNT PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the Scan mother PWB EEPROM.
Replace the Scan mother PWB.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
U5-20 Document feed unit paper transport
error detection data are calculated again to reset the motor trouble
proper check sum data.)
Trouble content
Detail SCU
U2-90 PCU EEPROM read write error Cause SPF paper feed transport motor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Use Sim2-3 to check the operation.
Detail PCU Check the SPF paper feed transport motor and
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble connection of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. U5-30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble
Check the SIM adjustment values of the engine, and
adjust again if they are improper.
Trouble content
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Detail SCU
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. Cause STUD does not turn ON 5 times continuously within
the specified time.
STUD/STLD sensor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
U2-91 PCU EEPROM check sum error DSPF CNT PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor.
Trouble content Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Detail PCU Replace the DSPF CNT PWB.
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
PCU PWB trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble U5-31 Document feed unit lift down trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum Detail SCU
error detection data are calculated again to reset the Cause STLD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
proper check sum data.) STUD/STLD sensor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
DSPF CNT PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the DSPF CNT PWB.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 35
U6-09 LCC lift motor trouble U6-23 A3 LCC tray descending trouble

Trouble content No variation in the motor rotation sensor signal Trouble content It is detected that the wire of the LCC tray is reversely
(encoder sign) is detected within the specified time wound. (A3 LCC / A3 2-stage LCT)
after booting or stopping the LCC lift motor. The lower limit position (full state) is not detected
Detail PCU within the specified time (A4: 10sec, A3: 8sec) from
Cause LCC lift motor rotation sensor trouble the start of descending the LCT1 tray.
LCC control PWB trouble (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
LCC lift mechanism trouble Detail PCU
LCC lift motor trouble Cause Reverse winding detection SW ON
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the LCC The wire is reversely wound.
sensor and the lift motor. Reverse winding detection SW trouble
Check the LCC lift motor rotation sensor, and replace Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
if necessary. LCC control PWB trouble. (A3 LCC)
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble (A3 2-stage LCT)
necessary. Remaining quantity sensor abnormality, LCT1 tray lift
Check the LCC lift mechanism, and repair if motor lock, connector and harness connection
necessary. trouble, PWB trouble
Check the LCC lift motor, and replace if necessary. (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
Use SIM15 to cancel the trouble. Check & Remedy Check the wire.
Replace the reverse winding SW and the LCC control
PWB. / Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
U6-20 Communication error between PCU Check connection of the connector and the harness.
(A3 LCC / A3 2-stage LCT)
and LCC unit Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operations
of the remaining quantity sensor and the LCT1 lift
Trouble content motor. Check the wiring.
Detail PCU (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
Cause Communication error between the LCC control PWB
and the PCU PWB.
Connection trouble of the harness and the connector U6-24 A3 LCC tray lock detection trouble
between the machine and the LCC and those of the
LCC control PWB. Trouble content The LCC / A3 2-stage LCT tray lock mechanism
LCC control PWB trouble malfunctions.
PCU PWB trouble
Detail PCU
Malfunction due to noises.
Cause Tray lock mechanism breakdown
Check & Remedy Check to confirm the LCC model.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Check the connection of the harness and the
Tray lock sensor trouble
connector between the machine and the LCC and
LCC control PWB trouble / A3 2-stage LCT control
those of the LCC control PWB, and replace if
PWB trouble
necessary.
Check & Remedy Check the tray lock mechanism.
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
necessary.
Replace the tray lock sensor.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary.
Replace the LCC control PWB. / Replace the A3 2-
stage LCT control PWB.
U6-21 LCC transport motor trouble
U6-51 Combination trouble between LCC
Trouble content Transport motor abnormality
and main machine
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock
Motor RPM abnormality Trouble content An LCC of a different model which is not supported by
Overcurrent to the motor the machine is installed. (Improper combination of the
LCC control PWB trouble / A3 2-stage LCT control machine and the LCC model code.)
PWB trouble Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the transport Cause LCC control PWB trouble
motor. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the motor Check & Remedy Check to confirm the LCC model.
Replace the LCC / A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if
necessary.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary.
U6-22 LCC 24V line power trouble

Trouble content The DV 24V power is not supplied to the LCC / A3 2-

U6-54 Option installation combination trou-
stage LCT. ble
Detail PCU
Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector Trouble content Optional wearing pair trouble.
and the harness. Detail PCU
LCC control PWB trouble / A3 2-stage LCT control
Cause Lower limit sensor trouble.
PWB trouble
Manual feed tray lift motor lock.
Power unit trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness of the power PWB trouble.
line.
Check & Remedy
Check the 24V voltage with the power unit, the LCC
control PWB, and the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 36
U7-50 MFP and vendor machine communica-
tion error

Trouble content Communication error between the MFP and the serial
vendor.
Detail MFP
Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications
(SIM26-3).
Vendor machine trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Change the specifications of the vendor machine
(SIM26-3).
Replace the MFPC PWB.

U7-51 Vendor machine error

Trouble content
Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)
Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy [Link] is displayed on the operation panel of the
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail
code.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.

U9-01 Touch panel trouble

Trouble detection MFP

Cause Connector, harness connection trouble
Touch panel trouble
Scan mother PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection state of connector, harness
Replace touch panel
Replace Scan mother PWB

UC-02 SCAN ASIC IPD error

Trouble detection SCN

Cause Scan mother PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace Scan mother PWB

UC-12 SCAN ASIC IPD error (DSPF)

Trouble detection SCN

Cause DSPF CNT PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace DSPF CNT PWB

UC-20 SCAN ASIC DOCC error

Trouble detection SCN

Cause Scan mother PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace Scan mother PWB

UC-30 SCAN ASIC DOCC error (DSPF)

Trouble detection SCN

Cause DSPF CNT PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace DSPF CNT PWB

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 37
H. LED status and errors of MFPC PWB
Check LED status of MFPC PWB to presume error content and its cause when machine cannot booted.
Process content and LED display.
Lighting up status of LED-S and LED-R.
LED status Condition Countermeasure at error
All eight LED lighting Normal -
Other status (blinking or lighting) Error Replace eMMC PWB  If the same condition remained, replace MFPC PWB

MFPC PWB

LED-S LED LED-R LED

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 38
2. JAM and troubleshooting JAM code JAM content
PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
A. JAM code list PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
(1) PCU JAM cause (Some parts are overlapped with PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM
the SCU code table.) (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
Main unit PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
JAM code JAM content PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM
MFT_LE Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
(1OOK for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM
TRAY1_LE Tray 1 paper feed JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
(2OOK for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD2_N3 PPD2 not-reached JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
TRAY2_LE Tray 2 paper feed JAM PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
(2OOK for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM
TRAY3_LE Tray 3 paper feed JAM (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
(1OOK for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
TRAY4_LE Tray 4 paper feed JAM PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
(1OOK for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD not-reached) PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
MFT_RT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
TRAY1_RT Tray 1 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM
TRAY2_RT Tray 2 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
TRAY3_RT Tray 3 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
TRAY4_RT Tray 4 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) PPD2_NM_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
MFT_1ST Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
(Check the paper set condition) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
TRAY1_1ST Tray 1 feed tray paper feed JAM PPD2_N1_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
(Check the paper set condition) (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
TRAY2_1ST Tray 2 feed tray paper feed JAM (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
(Check the paper set condition) PPD2_N2_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
TRAY3_1ST Tray 3 feed tray paper feed JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
(Check the paper set condition) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
TRAY4_1ST Tray 4 feed tray paper feed JAM PPD2_N3_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
(Check the paper set condition) (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
TRAY1 Tandem tray 1 (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
T1PPD1_S1 T1PPD1 remaining JAM PPD2_N4_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
(cassette 4 paper feed paper)
T1PPD2_N1 Tandem tray 1 paper feed JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
(T1PPD2 not-reached JAM)
PPD2_NL_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
T1PPD2_S1 T1PPD2 remaining JAM
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
TRAY2 Tandem tray 2 paper feed JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
(T2PPD1 not-reached JAM)
PPD2_NA_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
T2PPD1_N3 T2PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 3 paper feed
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
paper)
PPD2_SM_D PPD2 remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
T2PPD1_N4 T2PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
paper)
PPD2_S1_D PPD2 remaining JAM
T2PPD1_S2 T2PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 2 paper feed paper)
(tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
T2PPD1_S3 T2PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2
T2PPD1_S4 T2PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) PPD2_S2_D PPD2 remaining JAM
TRAY3 Cassette 3 paper feed JAM (C3PFD not-reached JAM) (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
C3PFD_N4 C3PFD not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2
C3PFD_S3 C3PFD remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper) PPD2_S3_D PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
C3PFD_S4 C3PFD remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
TRAY4 Cassette 4 paper feed JAM (C4PFD not-reached JAM) PPD2_S4_D PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
C4PFD_S4 C4PFD remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
LPPD1_NL LPPD not-reached JAM PPD2_SL_D PPD2 remaining JAM
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
LPPD1_NL11 LPPD not-reached JAM (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
(large capacity paper feed tray 1 paper feed paper) PPD2_SA_D PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
LPPD1_SL LPPD remaining JAM (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) P_FPFD_NM FPFD not-reached JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM (manual paper feed tray paper) P_FPFD_N1 FPFD not-reached JAM
PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
(tandem tray 1 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_N2 FPFD not-reached JAM
PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
(tandem tray 2 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_N3 FPFD not-reached JAM (tray 3 paper feed paper)
PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_N4 FPFD not-reached JAM (tray 4 paper feed paper)
PPD1_N4 PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_NL FPFD not-reached JAM
PPD1_NL PPD1 not-reached JAM (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) P_FPFD_NA FPFD not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) P_FPFD_SM FPFD remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper) P_FPFD_S1 FPFD remaining JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_S2 FPFD remaining JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_S3 FPFD remaining JAM (tray 3 paper feed paper)

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 39
 JAM code JAM content JAM code JAM content
P_FPFD_S4 FPFD remaining JAM (tray 4 paper feed paper) FNS101_S Inlet port remaining JAM (FN pass)
P_FPFD_SL FPFD remaining JAM FNS102_N Paper exit not-reached JAM
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) FNS102_S Paper exit remaining JAM
P_FPFD_SA FPFD remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) FNM110 Paper exit roller lift motor JAM
POD1_NA POD1 not-reached JAM FNM117 Gripper motor JAM
(In the case of a jam at the second surface) FNM115 Staple JAM
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM FNM114 Discharged paper HOLD motor JAM
POD1_SA POD1 remaining JAM FNM113 Paper rear edge fall motor JAM
(In the case of a jam at the second surface) FNM116 Gripper arm motor JAM
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM FNM112 Paper alignment roller lift motor JAM
POD2_NB POD2 not-reached JAM FNM118 Paper rear edge hold motor JAM
(In the case of a jam before switchback)
FCM102 Punch JAM
POD2_SB POD2 remaining JAM
FNPAOF Paper attribute data reception overflow
(In the case of a jam before switchback)
FNTIME Early reaching JAM
POD2_NA POD2 not-reached JAM
FNM105 Loading tray upper motor JAM
(In the case of a jam after switchback)
FNM106 Loading tray lower motor JAM
POD2_SA POD2 remaining JAM
(In the case of a jam after switchback) FCM101 Punch shift motor JAM
POD3_N POD3 not-reached JAM FSS201_N Saddle inlet port pass sensor delay JAM
POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM FSS201_S Saddle inlet port pass sensor remaining JAM
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM FSS203_N Saddle vertical pass sensor delay JAM
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM FSS226_N Saddle transport paper pass sensor 1 delay JAM
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM FSS226_S Saddle transport paper pass sensor 1 remaining JAM
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM FSS227_N Saddle paper exit pass sensor 2 delay JAM
LCC A4/A3LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached JAM) FSS227_S Saddle paper exit pass sensor 2 remaining JAM
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM FSM202 Saddle section saddle alignment motor JAM
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) FSM203 Saddle section lead edge stopper motor JAM
DRUM (Drum lock detection) FSM204 Saddle section folding roller guide motor JAM
FUSER (Fusing winding detection) FSM210 Saddle section rear edge hold motor JAM
PRI_JAM (Image preparation wait time-out) FSM211 Saddle section rear edge shift motor JAM
LCC_ERR (LCC communication abnormality detection) FSM213 Saddle section SADDLE flapping motor JAM
FIN_ERR (Finisher communication abnormality detection) FSM214 Saddle section SEPARATION motor JAM
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM FSM206 Saddle section folding motor JAM
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM FSM205 Saddle section PUSH motor JAM
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
MX-TM10
NO_MATCH Parameter inconsistency
JAM code JAM content
*1: In SIM22-41, the descriptions are abbreviated on the FTS103_N Trimmer paper exit sensor delay JAM
screen because of the limitation on the number of characters FTS103_S Trimmer paper exit sensor remaining JAM
(100K for the paper feed counter). FTS101_N Trimmer inlet port sensor relay JAM
*2: In SIM22-41, the description of "(Delay of paper just before the FTS101_S Trimmer inlet port sensor remaining JAM
JAM from PS)" is omitted because of the limitation on the number FTM103 Trimmer section inlet port separation motor JAM
of characters. FTM104 Trimmer section paper exit separation motor JAM
FTM102 Trimmer section registration motor JAM
FTM106 Trimmer section CUTTER motor JAM
MX-RB26
FTM105 Trimmer section bundle press motor JAM
JAM code JAM content
PDPPD1_N Finisher interface inlet port not-reached JAM MX-FD10
PDPPD1_S Finisher interface inlet port remaining JAM JAM code JAM content
PDPPD2_N Finisher interface outlet port not-reached JAM FLS30_N Speed reduction timing sensor delay JAM
PDPPD2_S Finisher interface outlet port remaining JAM FLS30_S Speed reduction timing sensor emaining JAM
FLS31_N Separation timing sensor delay JAM
MX-RB27
FLS31_S Separation timing sensor emaining JAM
JAM code JAM content FLS32_N Folding position adjustment sensor delay JAM
DCS100_N Decurler unit transport pass sensor not-reached JAM FLS32_S Folding position adjustment sensor remaining JAM
DCS100_S Decurler unit transport pass sensor remaining JAM FLS33_N Upper stopper section paper detection sensor delay
DCTIME Early reaching JAM JAM
DCPAOF Paper attribute data reception overflow FLS33_S Upper stopper section paper detection sensor
remaining JAM
MX-RB13 FLS22_N Outlet port 1 sensor delay JAM
FLS22_S Outlet port 1 sensor remaining JAM
JAM code JAM content
FLS27_N Folding tray empty sensor delay JAM
PIS150_N Transport unit pass sensor not-reached JAM
FLS27_S Folding tray empty sensor remaining JAM
PIS150_S Transport unit pass sensor remaining JAM
FLS20_N Inlet port sensor delay JAM
MX-FN21/22 FLS20_S Inlet port sensor remaining JAM
FLS21_N Outlet port 2 sensor delay JAM
JAM code JAM content
FLS21_S Outlet port 2 sensor remaining JAM
FNM107 Stapler shift motor JAM
FLM8 Folding section upper stopper motor JAM
FNM119 Paper transport roller motor JAM
FLM9 Folding SECTION 3-fold stopper motor JAM
FNM120 Paper guide motor JAM
FLM10 Folding section lead edge hold guide motor JAM
FNCL102 Shutter clutch JAM
FLM7 Folding section folding tray paper exit motor JAM
FNS101_N Inlet port not-reached JAM (FN pass)
FLENT_ERR EntryStart time out JAM

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 40
 1 : ‘19/March.
MX-FN34/35
JAM code JAM content
FLEJT_ERR EjectStartAck time out JAM JAM code JAM content 1
FCMR Punch shift motor JAM
MX-CF11 FCP Punch motor JAM
JAM code JAM content FCP2 Punched hole JAM
INSTR1_LE Inserter tray 1 paper feed JAM FIN_TIME Paper early reaching JAM
(60K for the paper feed counter)*1 FNB_N Buffer sensor time-out JAM
INSTR2_LE Inserter tray 2 paper feed JAM FNB_S Buffer sensor remaining JAM
(60K for the paper feed counter)*1 FNCDP Paddle JAM
INSTR1_RT Inserter tray 1 paper feed JAM (Check the paper) FNDPMS Manual bundle insert JAM
INSTR2_RT Inserter tray 2 paper feed JAM (Check the paper) FNE_N Entry port sensor time-out JAM
INSTR1_1ST Inserter tray 1 paper feed JAM FNE_S Entry port sensor remaining JAM
(Check the paper set condition) FNEE_N Escape paper exit sensor time-out JAM
INSTR2_1ST Inserter tray 2 paper feed JAM FNEE_S Escape paper exit sensor remaining JAM
(Check the paper set condition) FNMAR Rear edge assist motor JAM
INSFED1_N No. 1 paper feed sensor not-reached JAM FNMDT Tray auxiliary guide motor JAM
INSFED1_S No. 1 paper feed sensor remaining JAM FNMFECES Escape/Saddle motor JAM
INSFED2_N No. 2 paper feed sensor not-reached JAM FNMFR Paper rear edge falling motor JAM
INSFED2_S No. 2 paper feed sensor remaining JAM FNMGMT Tray lift motor JAM
INSPL1_N No. 1 pull-out sensor not-reached JAM FNMGRS Return roller lift motor JAM
INSPL1_S No. 1 pull-out sensor remaining JAM FNMJF Front alignment motor JAM
INSPL2_N No. 2 pull-out sensor not-reached JAM FNMJR Rear alignment motor JAM
INSPL2_S No. 2 pull-out sensor remaining JAM FNMMSS Stapler shift motor JAM
INSVTR1_N No. 1 vertical transport sensor not-reached JAM FNMOTERR Motor trouble JAM
INSVTR1_S No. 1 vertical transport sensor remaining JAM FNMS Oscillation motor JAM
INSVTR2_N No. 2 vertical transport sensor not-reached JAM FNMSLS Staple free staple motor JAM
INSVTR2_S No. 2 vertical transport sensor remaining JAM FNMSS Staple JAM
INSOUT_N Paper exit sensor not reached JAM FNSSS Safety switch actuation JAM
INSOUT_S Paper exit sensor remaining JAM FNTBP_N Preprocessing timing sensor time-out JAM
INSENT_N Inlet port sensor not-reached JAM FNTBP_S Preprocessing timing sensor remaining JAM
INSENT_S Inlet port sensor remaining JAM FSE_N Saddle entry port sensor time-out JAM
INSEXT_N Outlet port sensor not-reached JAM FSE_S Saddle entry port sensor remaining JAM
INSEXT_S Outlet port sensor remaining JAM FSEB_N Saddle folding bundle paper exit sensor time-out JAM
INSLUP1J No. 1 lift motor JAM FSEB_S Saddle folding bundle paper exit sensor remaining JAM
INSLUP2J No. 2 lift motor JAM FSMDLE Saddle switching lever motor JAM
INSPICM1J No. 1 pickup motor JAM FSME Saddle discharge motor JAM
INSPICM2J No. 2 pickup motor JAM FSME2 Paddle JAM (Saddle section)
FSMF Saddle folding motor JAM
MX-LC18/19
FSMG Saddle gripper motor JAM
JAM code JAM content FSMJ Saddle alignment motor JAM
LCC LCC paper feed JAM (LPFPD not-reached) FSMS Saddle staple JAM
LCC_1ST LCC paper feed JAM (check paper loading state) FSMSR Saddle rear edge stopper motor JAM
LCC_ERR LCC communication error detection
LCC_LE SideA4/A3 LCC paper feed JAM (paper feed roller (2) SCU JAM case (Some parts are overlapped with
needs to be replaced) the PCU code table.)
LCC_RT LCC paper feed JAM (check paper state)
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (LCC paper feed) JAM code JAM content
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
1 MX-FN33 SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
JAM code JAM content SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM
FPPD1_N Inner Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAM
FPPD1_S Inner Finisher inlet port remaining JAM SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAM
FPDD_S Inner Finisher Bundle exit remaining JAM SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM
FIN_TIME Inner Finisher paper early reaching JAM SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAM
FSTPD_S Inner Finisher paper exit remaining JAM SPPD4_N SPPD4 not-reached JAM
FSTPLJ Inner Finisher Staple JAM SPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining JAM
SPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAM
SPPD5_S SPPD5 remaining JAM
SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM
SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM
SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer end
P_SHORT Short size JAM
SDFS_S Double feed detection JAM/Accompanied feed JAM
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM
SPPD2_ND SPPD2 not-reached JAM (double feed)

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 41
 3
3. Image send communication report code
A. Outline and code system descriptions B. Details
After completion of communication, the communication report (1) Communication report main code
table, the communication management table, and the protocol are
described on the communication report column. Report Final receive signal
Final receive signal (Receive side)
The communication report code is composed as follows: code (Send side)
0 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
Communication report: XX (XXXX)
1 NSF, DIS (SID), (SUB), NSS, DCS
The upper 2 digits of the communication report code:
2 CFR (PWD), (SEP), NSC, DTC
Communication report code of 00 – 99 (Refer to communication
3 FTT EOP
report main code.)
4 MCF EOM
The lower 4 digits of the communication report code: 5 PIP, PIN MPS
Used by the serviceman. 6 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
The upper 2 digits: Communication report sub code 1 (Refer to 7 No signal, DCN DCN
3 communication report sub code 1.) 8 PPR PPS-EOP
The lower 2 digits: Communication report sub code 2 (Refer to 9 PPS-EOM
communication report sub code 2.) 10 PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
11 RNR RR
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 and sub code 2
12 CTR CTC
are in hexadecimal notation. (The others are in decimal
13 ERR EOR-Q
notation.)
14 PPS-PRI-Q
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 is not used in the 16 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
these models. 17 NSF, DIS SID, SUB, NSS, DCS
18 CFR PWD, SEP, NSC, DTC
19 FTT PPS-EOP
20 MCF PPS-EOM
21 PIP, PIN PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
22 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
23 No signal, DCN DCN
24 PPR
25 RNR RR
26 CTR CTC
27 ERR EOR-Q
28 PPS-PRI-Q
29 V.8 Phase-1 V.8 Phase-1
30 V.8 Phase-2 V.8 Phase-2
31 V.8 Phase-3 V.8 Phase-3

CAUTION: For report codes 16 – 31, V.34 MODE COMMUNICA-

TION.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 42
 Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
0- 31 Refer to “previous table”. Depends on the point of communication interruption. For 16 or later, V.34 mode communication.
33 BUSY The calling side cannot establish connection with the remote party.
34 CANCEL A communication interruption command is made during sending/receiving. The interruption key is pressed for
interruption of input. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
35 NG35 XXXX Power is failed during sending/receiving. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
36 (No record paper)
37 (Record paper jam)
38 MEM. FULL Memory over during reception. <Receive/Polling>
Print is not made during reception in acting reception inhibit. <Receive/Polling>
39 (Number of paper
unmatched)
40 (Relay not received)
41 LENGTH OVER The send data length of one page exceeds the limit (2m) in sending. <Send/Bulletin board>
42 LENGTH OVER The receive data length of one page exceeds the limit. <Receive/Polling>
43 (Communication) (OK) Speaking before data transmission
44 ORIGINAL ERROR A document jam occurs in direct sending. <Send>
45 (Picture quality error)
46 NO RESPONSE The FAX signal from the remote party is not detected within T1 time. <Send/Polling>
(When in recall, however, the recall setting in case of a communication error is valid.)
47 TX DECODE ERROR A decode error occurs in the FAX board. <Send/Bulletin board>
48 OK Normal end of communication
OK REPLY RECEIVE OK in Internet FAX send with reception confirmation.
49 NO RX POLL The called side does not have polling function in polling reception. <Polling>
The called side has no data to send. <Polling>
50 RX POLL FAIL In polling reception, DCN is received for DTC. <Polling>
In polling sending, there is no send data. <Bulletin board>
51 PASS # NG In poling sending, the allow number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In polling sending, the system number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
52 (No confidential function in In confidential sending, the remote party does not have confidential function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machines)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
53 (Confidential not received) 1) In confidential sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
54 (Confidential BOX NO NG) 1) In confidential reception, a confidential box number which is not registered is specified.
55 (No relay function in In relay command sending, the remote machine has no relay function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machine)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
56 NO REL RX 1) In relay command sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
2) In relay command reception, a remote station number which is not registered is specified. <Receive>
3) In F code relay broadcasting, an F code relay command is received.<Receive>
57 (Relay ID unmatched) 1) In relay command reception, the relay ID does not match. <Receive>
58 REJECTED In reception, data are sent from a remote machine of receive inhibit number. <Receive>
(Not rejected in the bulletin board send or the F code bulletin board send.)
59 RX NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), the remote machine has no DIS bit 47 (polling function). <Polling>
In F code polling (calling), the called side has no send data. (DIS bit 9 is 0.)<Polling>
60 NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), DCN is received for SEP. <Polling>
In bulletin board, there is no send data for SEP. <Bulletin board>
61 RX POLL # NG In bulletin board, the sub address (bulletin board number (SEP)) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
62 F POLL PASS # NG In bulleting board, the pass code (PWD) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
63 NO F FUNC In F code sending, the remote machine has no DIS bit 49 (sub address function). <Send>
(Check that the remote machine conforms to F code.)
64 NO F-CODE In F code sending : <Send>
1) DCN is received for SUB. --- Check the box number.
2) DCN is received for SID. --- Check the box number and pass code.

In F code receiving : <Receive>

"F code relay broadcasting" or "F code confidential reception" is "Inhibited with soft SW."
67 F PASS # NG In F code receiving, the pass code (SID) is not matched. <Receive>
68 BOX NO. NG In F code reception, a box number which is not registered is specified. (SUB is not matched.) <Receive>
69 MEMORY OVER Memory over in quick online sending <Send>
70 (JOB MEMORY OVER) In PC-FAX reservation, the number of remote parties is exceeded. <Send>
71 NG71 XXXX *1 In PC-FAX reservation, data sent from PC includes some errors. <Send>
72 (NG72 XXXX) *1 In department management setting on the machine side:
* In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, a department number which is not registered on the
machine side is specified. <Send>
* In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the department number is not specified. <Send>
73 NG73 XXXX *1 In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the use quantity limit is exceeded. <Send>

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 43
 Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
74 NG74 XXXX *1 When reserving specified filing in document filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX;
* The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and the pass-code from PC-XXX does not match
with it. <Send>
* The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and no pass-code is specified by PC-XXX. <Send>
75 NG75 XXXX *1 * Reservation cannot be made due to machine busy. (Reservation of PC-FAX cannot be accepted.)
* When "PC-FAX or PC-internet FAX send inhibit" is set on the machine side.
76 NG76 XXXX *1 Reserved with receive confirmation request in PC-Internet FAX, but the Internet FAX sender is not registered
on the machine side. <Send>
77 NG77 XXXX *1 In reserving specified filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the machine has no filing function.
78 NG78 XXXX *1 The filing function is inhibited on the machine side when filing specification is reserved by PC-FAX or PC-
Internet FAX.
79 NG79 XXXX *1 An authentication error occurs when PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX is reserved.
80 NG80 XXXX *1 NIC connect failure (network abnormality)
* Check for disconnection of cables.
* A network trouble (CE-XX) occurs.
* The port is set to DISABLE.
* Authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled.
* When an error other than the communication result code 93 or 94 in D-SMTP send (including error
response of 5XX)
81 NG REPORT In Internet FAX send, reply of receive confirmation of the remote machine is not normal. (Including PC-Internet
FAX).
* Error of the disposition-modifier.
* The disposition modifier is not in an error, and the disposition type is other than displayed, dispatched, or
processed.
82 NO REPORT In Internet FAX send, time-out occurs in waiting for receive confirmation from the remote machine. (Including
PC-Internet FAX).
* In a case where send confirmation wait time-out time is other than 0, when send confirmation reply from an
Internet FAX destination is not received.
* Recalls of the set number of recalls are performed, but send confirmation reply from an internet FAX
destination is not received.
83 NG LIMIT In E-mail/FTP, Internet FAX send, the send data size exceeds the upper limit of send data.
84 REJECTED In e-mail receive, a sender is registered in receive reject address/domain. <Receive>
85 NG85 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with POP3 server.
* Header acquisition error.
* Time-out during mail receive
86 RECEIVED In e-mail receive, an unsupported attached file is received.
Only the TIFF-F type is supported for attached files.
* The TIFF-F type of the attached file cannot be recognized.
* There is no attached file.
87 NG87 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
* Memory over
88 NG88 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
* Cannot be stored in memory.
* The number of items of acting receive data is the maximum, and an additional data cannot be stored.
89 NG89 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with the mail server.
* Time-out occurs during e-mail receive.
90 NG90 XXXX *1 When image conversion for image send cannot be made after send reservation.
91 NG91 XXXX *1 *2 Data cannot be written to the memory device when Scan To USB is executed.
* The memory device is disconnected during writing to the memory device.
* An error occurs due to a memory device trouble.
92 NG92 XXXX *1 *2 The USB device memory overflows during writing data into the memory device when "Scan to USB" is
executed.
93 NG93 XXXX *1 When error in D-SMTP send (with recall)
* An error response of 4XX occurs during communication with the SMTP server.
* Time out occurs after establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
94 NG94 XXXX *1 When busy in D-SMTP send
Time out occurs during establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
95 NG95 XXXX *1 When the path is too long in execution of Scan To USB.
96 NG96 XXXX *1 When the normal process is not executed in the secure mail sending.
98 NG98 XXXX *1 The copy inhibit pattern is detected when scanning a document.
99 NG99 XXXX *1 A document which is inhibited to be copied such as a banknote is scanned.

*1: For a job status result in "Display in the column of result," "NG XXXX" is displayed. " " is the code number.
For a communication result, "Communication error (XXXX)" is displayed.
*2: The error code of Scan To USB is specified only in the job log.
* When the communication result is OK, the communication sub code 1 and the communication sub code 2 are "0000."
* Errors in ( ) are not used.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 44
(2) Communication report sub code 1
The communication report sub code 1 (upper 2 digits) are always indicated as "00."
(3) Communication report sub code 2

Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive

00 When the conditions after 01 do not apply. Send/Receive
01 Send length over Send
02 EOL time up Receive
03 Carrier detection time up Receive
04 Time up of the communication start command from the machine side Receive
05 Time up in phase C (8 min) Send
06 Memory image decode error Receive
07 Memory image decode error Send
08 Time up between frames in phase C (Report code is 0 or 16.) Send/Receive
09 Not used -
10 Not used -
11 Polarity reversion detection Receive
12 Invalid command reception Receive
13 Time up (1-minute timer/6-second time) Receive
14 PUT error Receive
15 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Receive
16 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Receive
17 Command receive time-up from MFP controller Receive
18 Not used -
19 Not used -
20 Polarity reversion detection Send
21 Invalid command reception Send
22 Fallback retry number over Send
23 Command retry number resend over Send
24 Time up (T5 timer) Send
25 Time up (T5 timer) in V.34 mode Send
26 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Send
27 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Send
28 When sending the FSK signal, no response of send completion is sent back from the MODEM chip within a certain time. Send
(V.34, other than V.34)
29 Not used -
30 A communication error is generated between MFP controller and Modem controller. (Report code is 0 or 16.) -
31 DC current not detected (busy) Send
32 Dial tone not detected (busy) Send
33 Busy tone detection (busy) Send
34 T0 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
35 T1 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
36 In dialing, polarity reversion detection (Remote machine not responding) Send
37 Calling is not made (busy)<Collision detected (including CNG detection)> Send
38 Not used -
60 In resend of document filed data, an error occurs in decoding or coding. Resend
61 In resend of document filed data, setting to inhibit resolution conversion is made. (The resolution after resend is set to be Resend
Enlarged.)
62 In resend of document filed data, rotation setting is made for data which cannot be rotated. Resend
63 In resend of document filed data, data cannot be stored in HD after conversion of resolution for resend. Resend
64 In conversion for sending, the number of the IMS management pages exceeds the upper limit (1 communication Send
reservation: 999 sheets, Total communication reservation: 5,000 sheets). (This trouble occurs also in OSA scan, resulting OSAScan
in memory over.)
70 E-mail header acquisition error E-mail receive
71 Time out occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
72 Receive reject occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
73 Network communication cannot be made due to port disable. Network send
74 An authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled. Network send
75 In the setting of SSL communication, when SSL communication is tried but the server side does not support SSL. Network send
76 There is no image in network communication (transfer). Network send
80 There is no attached file in received e-mail. E-mail receive
81 The attached file of received e-mail is not of TIFF type which is supported. E-mail receive
82 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
ID error
83 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Endian error
84 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Version error
85 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Tag data error
86 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Tag parameter error

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 45
 Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive
87 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Header size error
88 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Data error
90 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Memory over.
Cannot be stored in memory.
91 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
The file size is too great to be stored in memory.
92 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Cannot be stored in memory.
93 There is character that cannot be processed. -
OCR processing error.

When the sub code 2 is "08" or "30" and the communication report is "OK," the report code is "00" or "16."

4. Dial tone
When shipping from the factory, the dial tone detection when sending is set to Enable (changed from OFF to ON). When installing this machine,
be sure to check and confirm that the dial tone is properly detected and the auto dial sending is enabled.

Check to confirm that the continuous buzzer sound is heard when the on-hook key is pressed. (Press the on-hook key again to cancel the
buzzer sound.)
If facsimile communication cannot be executed normally through the IP telephone line, try the general telephone line.

MX-M7570 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 46
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE
MX-M7570 Service Manual

1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the 2) Update method using FTP
machine. 3) Update method using the Web page
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
repair to the machine. methods.)
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
repaired. When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as
B. Notes for update power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update Firmware types
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s
The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations
of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine. Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.

2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or
USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.

Media
[Link] Adapter

USB Host

[Link] +

[Link] USB memory

[Link] The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.

*1:
* Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
* The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data.
* The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.

MX-M7570 FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 1

Execution of the firmware by SIM49-01 3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware will be shown for each firmware respectively.
into the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operation 4) Press [ALL] key.
panel.) All the firmware programs are selected.
2) Enter the SIM49-01. * Normally select all the firmwares and execute updating.
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to * In this case, firmwares which do not exist on the machine
the update screen. side are ignored.
* The number of key changes according to the number of the To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware with
sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted. the firmware display key.
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to * If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray out
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE and cannot be pressed.
CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]”
screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK] becomes clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selected
key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
firemware.
[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
6) If the update is normal completion, Display "Complete"
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB
memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is Press [OK] key. (The machine is rebooted.)
detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded suc-
appears. cessfully.
7) If the update is not normal completion, Display "Error"

B. Firmware update using FTP

FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.

Machine 1 Machine 3
[Link] [Link]

[Link]

Machine 2 Machine 4

FTP Client

[Link] [Link]

C. Firmware update using the Web page 3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro-
An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
the firmware.
appears.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.

MX-M7570 FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 2

4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com- c. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode
pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the To enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW on
[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update. the MFP PWB and boot the machine.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW to
OFF (normal mode).

"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-

tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.

D. Firmware update using the CN update function

(There are three methods.)
(1) Outline
The update method using the DIP SW of the MFP PWB is called
the CN update.
a. Function
There are the following three functions in the CN update mode. d. Keys used in the CN update mode
1) Firmware update function The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring
normal mode.
data from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the
SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options
by means of a USB memory or USB cable.
=72? =$#%-?
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the fol-
lowing points:
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN
update, this method can be used to update the firmware.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the
eMMC PWB must be replaced with a new one having the nor-
mal boot program.
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality
in the boot program.
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is =&190? =/'07? =1-?
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormal-
ity in the main program.
Key name Functions in the CN update mode
2) Firmware version check function
[OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5 [MENU] key Selects a menu.
is easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this [BACK] key Selects a menu.
manual.) (Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
b. Purpose [UP] key Selects an item.
[DOWN] key Selects an item.
This function is used in the following cases:
1) When an error occurs during firmware update operation other
than the CN update.
2) When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware
update operation of other method than the CN update, this
method can be used to update the firmware.
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be used.
In such a case, the eMMC PWB must be replaced with a new one
having the normal boot program.

MX-M7570 FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 3

(2) Operating procedures 7) Press [OK] key.
a. Firmware update function The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and
the file selection menu is displayed.
This function is used to revise the firmware by using the USB mem-
ory for the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX Display of file selection
PWB, and each option.
It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points. Firm Update
1) The update target ROM is automatically selected.
> [Link]
2) When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN 8) Select the firmware file (SFU).
update.
Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this method [DOWN] key.
cannot be used. On that case, the eMMC PWB must be replaced
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: ">
with a new one having the normal boot program.
D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in
menu returns to the original upper directory.
the main program (eMMC PWB).
9) Press [OK] key.
a-1. Necessary items
The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one
1) Insert the eMMC PWB to the MFP PWB of the machine. minute.
2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it. Display of file reading
NOTE: Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level
lower directory.
Firm Update
a-2. Procedures
1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP
Reading Data
PWB cover.
2) Turn ON the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. 10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is
3) Install the USB memory into the USB port. continued.
USB memory installing position Display of the firmware update process

Firm Update IcuM

Writing Data

* The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under

update process is indicated on the right upper corner of the
display.
* During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
neously. It is a normal operation.
11) Check the update result.
4) Turn ON the power. Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the
5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes firmware programs.
more than ten seconds to display the menu.) Display of the firmware update result
Display when booting is completed
Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM
Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG

Update Program Init

Please wait * OK: Update is completed successfully.
* NG: Update is failed.
* Not Update: Update is not executed.
12) Turn OFF the power.
Version Check 13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the
Conf : 00050000 DIP-SW to the normal mode.)
14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine
boots up normally.
6) Select the firmware update mode. Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key. Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
Display of the firmware update mode copier basic menu.
15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
Firm Update 16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.

From USB Memory

MX-M7570 FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 4

 2 : ‘19/Aug.

[9] MAINTENANCE
MX-M7570
Service Manual

1. Works necessary when executing the maintenance

A. Execution items before maintenance and servicing
To perform the procedures safely, refer to "NOTE FOR SERVICING" on the first page of this service manual.

Item Simulation
Check the developer counter value. 22 13
Check the OPC drum counter value. 22 13
Check the print count mode in each section and each operation mode. 22 1
Check the number of paper jam troubles. 22 2
Check the positions and contents of paper jams. 22 3
Check the positions and contents of paper jams (DSPF section). 22 12
Check the contents of troubles. 22 4
Print the setting values and the adjustment values. 22 6
Check the number of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the stapler, and the punch. 22 8
Check the number of use of each paper feed section. 22 9
Check the ROM version. 22 5

B. Necessary execution items in maintenance and servicing

Perform the work items listed in the maintenance list (parts) and details of works as well as the items described below.
(The necessary execution items are marked with "" in the table below.)

When repairing (replacing consumable parts) / maintenance

When
When When After cleaning
No. Work item Simulation replacing the Periodic
Installation replacing the replacing the scanner
fusing web maintenance
OPC drum developer (read) section
roller
1 Toner concentration reference 25-2  
2
control level setting
2 The photo-conductor counter is 24-4 
cleared.
3 Clear the fusing web cleaning send 24-4 
counter.
4 Copy/Printer image quality check 46-24     
and adjustment

C. Execution items after maintenance and servicing

Item Simulation
The paper jam / trouble data are cleared. 24 1
The use quantity counter of each paper feed section is cleared. 24 2
The numbers of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the stapler, and the punch are cleared. 24 3
The maintenance counter is cleared. (Select MAINTENANCE ALL) 24 4
The list of setting values and adjustment values is printed. 22 6

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
2. Display of maintenance execution timing
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value. The relations between the message and
the counters are shown below.

A. Maintenance counter
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: TA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Total) When SIM21-1 set value is Enable
reached
1 (Print stop) When 90% of SIM21-1 set value
is reached
□Maintenance required: TA 1 (Print stop) When SIM21-1 set value is Disable
reached

* After execution of maintenance, be sure to execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (Total).

B. Transfer unit
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: TK1 0 (Print continue) Transfer Belt print counter When 400K is reached. Enable

1 (Print stop)
Maintenance required: TK4 0 (Print continue) Transfer roller print counter Enable

1 (Print stop)

* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the print counter, the accumulated rotation counter and the use day counter of
TC BELT/ROLLER.

C. Fusing unit
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-B set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: FK1 0 (Print continue) Fusing roller print counter When 400K is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop)
Maintenance required: FK2 0 (Print continue) Pressure roller print counter Enable
1 (Print stop)
Maintenance required: FK3 0 (Print continue) Fusing upper web life end detection signal Enable
1 (Print stop) Disable
Maintenance required: FK4 0 (Print continue) Fusing lower web life end detection signal Enable
1 (Print stop) Disable

* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the print counter, the accumulated rotation counter and the use day counter of
FUSING ROLLER, PRESSURE ROLLER.

D. OPC drum
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: DK 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter When 800K is reached or When Enable
OPC drum accumulated rotation 2000K rotation reached.
1 (Print stop) counter
Maintenance required: MCK 0 (Print continue) Main charger print counter When 400K is reached or When Enable
Main charger accumulated rotation 1000K rotation reached.
1 (Print stop) counter

* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear print counter, the accumulated rotation counter and the use day counter of
DRUM UNIT K, MAIN CHARGER K.

E. Developer
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: VK 0 (Print continue) Developer print counter When 800K is reached or When Enable
DV unit accumulated rotation 2000K rotation reached.
1 (Print stop) counter

* After replacing developer, execute SIM25-2 to automatically clear counters.

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 2
F. Waste toner box
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Counter name Counter value Disable
Check the waste toner box After detection of near end approximately 10K (A4 6% coverage) Near end: Enable
End: Disable

* When the waste toner box is replaced with an empty one, the message disappears

G. Toner
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Toner supply is low (K) No relation Toner supply amount is decreasing Toner remaining sensor output Enable
(Near end) variation
Replace the toner cartridge 0 (Print continue) The toner remaining counter from Specified toner remaining Disable
(K) (End) 1 (Print stop) near end reaches the specified counter
value

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 3
3. Maintenance list
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
DSPF section 1 Paper pickup roller          Replace at 100K of the
2 Paper feed roller          SPF paper feed counter
3 Separation roller          or 1 year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x x x x Replace at 800K of the
SPF paper feed counter
5 Transport roller 1         
6 Transport roller 2         
7 Registration roller         
8 Transport roller 3         
9 Transport roller 4         
10 Paper exit roller         
11 Discharge brush x x x x x x x x x
12 No.1 scanning plate         
13 No.2 scanning         
section, scanning
glass
14 No.2 scanning         
section, white
reference glass
15 Mirror         
16 Lens, CCD         
17 Lamp          Blow air to clean LED
section (do not use
alcohol)
Blow air to clean optical
bar section (when dirt
cannot be eliminated,
clean with ethanol
alcohol)
18 OC mat         
19 Gears x x x x x x x x x
20 Belts x x x x x x x x x
21 Sensors x x x x x x x x x
Scanner section 1 Drive belt x x x x x x x x x
2 Drive wire x x x x x x x x x
3 Sensors x x x x x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease (UKOG-
0158FCZZ)
5 Mirror         
6 Lamp          Blow air to clean LED
section (do not use
alcohol)
Blow air to clean optical
bar section (when dirt
cannot be eliminated,
clean with ethanol
alcohol)
7 Lens         
8 CCD         
9 Table glass         
10 SPF glass         
Paper feed 1 Paper pick-up roller x         Replace according to
section 2 Paper feed roller x         each paper feed counter
3 Separation roller x         value: Replace at 100K or
after one-year use.
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x x x x
5 Transport rollers x        
6 Shaft (Grease) x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0012QSZZ
Developing 1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. The storage period is 2
section years.
2 Developer x x ▲ x ▲ x ▲ x ▲ Replace when the
specified rotation number
is reached. The storage
period is 2 years.
3 DV seal x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
4 DV side seal F/R x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
5 DV filter AS x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 4
 When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000
Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Photo conductor 1 Drum x x ▲ x ▲ x ▲ x ▲ Replace when the
section specified rotation number
is reached.
The storage period is 3
years.
2 Drum gear x x ▲ x ▲ x ▲ x ▲
3 Cleaner blade x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Should be replaced when
reached to the specified
rotation number.
Recommend to be
replaced after 2 year use.
4 Toner reception seal x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
5 Toner reception side x x x x x x x x x
sheet F/R
6 Drum separation x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
pawl unit
7 MC unit x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
8 Procon sensor x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
9 MC Home position x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
sensor
10 Discharge lamp x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
11 Cleaning brush x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
roller
12 Before-transfer x x x x x x x x x Wipe it with a dry waste.
discharge lamp The alcohol cleaning
prohibits it strictly.
13 Process intake filter x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
Transfer section 1 Transfer roller ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ When 400K is reached,
replace together with the
transfer belt.
2 Transfer roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
bearings
3 Transfer CL roller ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
4 Transfer belt  ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Never use alcohol or
solvents for cleaning.
5 Pre transfer paper         
guide
6 Transfer drive gear  ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Filter section 1 Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Or after six months use.
2 Toner filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Or after six months use.
3 DV ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Or after six months use.
Waste toner 1 Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a
section When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. serviceman calls. It is
advisable to replace in
advance if necessary.

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 5
 When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000
Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Fusing section 1 Upper heat roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease (UKOG-
2 Upper heat roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 0235FCZZ) to specific
bearing position.
3 Upper heat roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
insulation bush
4 Heat roller gear x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Upper separation x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Clean when a foreign
pawl/Pawl spring material is attached.
6 Non-contact x x x x x x x x x
thermistor (Main)
7 Non-contact x x x x x x x x x
thermistor (Sub)
8 Sub thermistor x x x x x x x x x Clean when a foreign
material is attached.
9 Lower heat roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease (UKOG-
10 Lower heat roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 0235FCZZ) to specific
bearing position.
11 Lower separation x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Clean when a foreign
pawl/Pawl spring material is attached.
12 Lower thermistor x x x x x x x x x Clean when a foreign
material is attached.
13 Upper web roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace timing varies
depending on the
coverage rate.
14 Upper web back-up x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller
15 Upper web back-up x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller bearing/
Pressure spring
16 Lower web roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
17 Lower web back-up x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller
18 Lower web back-up x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller bearing/
Pressure spring
19 Sensors x x x x x x x x x For the reflection-type
sensor, the other side
must be also cleaned.
20 Paper guides         
Paper transport / 1 PS follower roller x        
Paper exit 2 Transport rollers x        
section 3 Transport paper         
guides
4 Sensors          For the reflection-type
sensor, the other side
must be also cleaned.
5 Shafts (Grease) x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0012QSZZ
6 Paper dust remove         
unit
7 Gears x x x x x x x x x
8 Discharge brush x x x x x x x x x
Drive section 1 Gears (Grease) x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0307FCZZ(When
2 Shafts (Grease) x x x x x x x x x checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
3 Grounding shaft x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0012QSZZ(When
(Grease) checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
4 Gears (Conduction x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0299FCZZ(When
grease) checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
5 Belts x x x x x x x x
6 Belts x x x x x x x x x
7 Gears x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0013FCZZ(When
checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
8 Gears x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0299FCZZ(When
checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
9 Belt x x x x x x x x x
LSU section 1 Protection against  x x x x x x x x
dust glass

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 6
A. DSPF section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
DSPF section 1 Paper pickup roller          Replace at 100K of the
2 Paper feed roller          SPF paper feed counter
3 Separation roller          or 1 year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x x x x Replace at 800K of the
SPF paper feed counter
5 Transport roller 1         
6 Transport roller 2         
7 Registration roller         
8 Transport roller 3         
9 Transport roller 4         
10 Paper exit roller         
11 Discharge brush x x x x x x x x x
12 No.1 scanning plate         
13 No.2 scanning         
section, scanning
glass
14 No.2 scanning         
section, white
reference glass
15 Mirror         
16 Lens, CCD         
17 Lamp          Blow air to clean LED
section (do not use
alcohol)
Blow air to clean optical
bar section (when dirt
cannot be eliminated,
clean with ethanol
alcohol)
18 OC mat         
19 Gears x x x x x x x x x
20 Belts x x x x x x x x x
21 Sensors x x x x x x x x x

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 7
 21 20
2
20 1
3 21
5
21
19
4
6 20

19

7
12
21 21
8
21

10
16 11

18

15

17

14 13

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 8
B. Scanner section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Scanner section 1 Drive belt x x x x x x x x x
2 Drive wire x x x x x x x x x
3 Sensors x x x x x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease (UKOG-
0158FCZZ)
5 Mirror         
6 Lamp          Blow air to clean LED
section (do not use
alcohol)
Blow air to clean optical
bar section (when dirt
cannot be eliminated,
clean with ethanol
alcohol)
7 Lens         
8 CCD         
9 Table glass         
10 SPF glass         

10

3
9

7
8
2 6
5

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 9
C. Paper feed section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Tandem paper 1 Paper pick-up roller x         Replace according to
feed tray 2 Paper feed roller x         each paper feed counter
3 Separation roller x         value: Replace at 100K or
after one-year use.
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x x x x
5 Sensors x x x x x x x x x

Tray paper feed 6 Paper pick-up roller x         Replace according to

unit 7 Paper feed roller x         each paper feed counter
8 Separation roller x         value: Replace at 100K or
after one-year use.
9 Torque limiter x x x x x x x x x
10 Transport rollers x        
11 Sensors x x x x x x x x x
- Shaft (Grease) x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0012QSZZ
Paper feed tray 12 Sensors x x x x x x x x x For the reflection -type
sensor, the other side
must be also cleaned.

1 2
3
4
5

1
2
5

4
3
10
7

11
12

9
12
12
8
10
10
7

11

9
12
8
10

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 10
D. Manual paper feed section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Paper feed 1 Paper pick-up roller x         Replace according to
section 2 Paper feed roller x         each paper feed counter
3 Separation roller x         value: Replace at 100K or
after one-year use.
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x x x x Replace according to
each paper feed counter
value: 800K
5 Transport rollers x        
6 Sensors x x x x x x x x x For the reflection-type
sensor, the other side
must be also cleaned.

1
2

5 6

6
6
6
6
6
3

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 11
E. Paper transport section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
PS unit / 1 PS roller (Idle) x        
PS lower unit 2 Paper dust remove         
unit
3 Transport rollers x        
4 Sensors          For the reflection-type
sensor, the other side
must be also cleaned.
5 Transport paper         
guides
6 Shafts (Grease) ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ UKOG-0012QSZZ

1
3
Apply grease
4

(1) Resist roller (idle), and each transport roller (2) Resist roller (idle), and transport roller applying
cleaning grease
1) Open the right door. 1) Open the right door.
2) Clean the resist roller (Idle) (A), resist roller (Drive) (B) and the 2) Apply grease the resist roller (Idle), resist roller (Drive) and the
transport roller (Drive) (C). transport roller (Drive).
Maintenance Maintenance
Clean at every 400K. Apply grease at every 400K.

B C

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 12
F. Toner supply section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Toner supply 1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. The storage period is 2
section years.

(1) Toner cartridge replacement NOTE: When installing, hold the toner cartridge horizontally and
1) Open the front cover. inset it slowly.
2) Pull out the toner cartridge to remove. NOTE: Shake the toner cartridge several times.
Maintenance: Replace every-time when toner empty. (By the
user)

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 13
G. Developing section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Developing 1 Developer x x ▲ x ▲ x ▲ x ▲ Replace when the
section specified rotation number
is reached. The storage
period is 2 years.
2 DV seal x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
3 DV side seal F/R x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
4 DV filter AS x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Connector x x x x x x x x x

1
3
5

(Note for servicing the DV roller) [Countermeasures]

1. Prevent roller contamination If a fingerprint is attached to the DV roller surface erroneously, per-
[Note] form the following countermeasures.
* Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the DV roller 1) Remove developer material from the developer unit and the
surface. developer mag roller.
* When rotating the DV roller manually, hold the drive gear section 2) Remove oily dirt on the DV roller with alcohol.
to rotate it. 3) When alcohol dries completely, supply developer and perform
SIM 25-02.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the DV roller is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that cleaning is completely executed or not by the following
method.
* Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 14
H. OPC drum section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Photo conductor 1 Drum x x ▲ x ▲ x ▲ x ▲ Replace according to the
section drum counter value or
when the specified rotation
number is reached.
The storage period is 3
years.
2 Drum gear x x ▲ x ▲ x ▲ x ▲
3 Cleaner blade x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Should be replaced when
reached to the specified
rotation number.
Recommend to be
replaced after 2 year use.
4 Toner reception seal x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
5 Toner reception side x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
sheet F/R
6 Drum separation x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
pawl unit
7 MC unit x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
8 Procon sensor x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
9 MC Home position x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
sensor
10 Discharge lamp x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
11 Cleaning brush x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.
roller
12 Before-transfer x x x x x x x x x Wipe it with a dry waste.
discharge lamp The alcohol cleaning
prohibits it strictly.
13 Process intake filter x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed.

11 5
3

10
5
7
9
13

2
1
6
12
8
6

(Note for servicing the OPC drums) [Check method]

1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily
[Note] dirt and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the follow-
ing method.
* Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum
surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.) * Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
* When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the
protection sheet and hold the protection sheet. the image.

If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care 2. Prior exposure prevention
not to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both [Note]
edges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to * Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade * Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
may flip.)
* Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
[Countermeasures] paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously, [Countermeasures]
perform the following countermeasures. If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt. exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
2) Apply stearic acid powder to prevent blade flip.

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 15
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density
area in the previously exposed section.
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping
the OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not
recovered, replace the OPC drum.

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 16
I. Transfer section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Transfer section 1 Transfer belt          Never use alcohol or
solvents for cleaning.
2 Transfer rollers        
3 Transfer roller x        
bearings
4 Transfer CL roller        
5 Pre transfer paper         
guide
6 Transfer drive gear         

2 6

3
2 5

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 17
J. Filter section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Filter section 1 Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Or after six months use.
2 Toner filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Or after six months use.
3 DV ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Or after six months use.

1
2
3

(1) Ozone filter replacement (2) Toner filter and DV ozone filter replacement
1) Remove the screw-A, and the cover-B. Remove the ozone fil- 1) Remove the screw-A, and the cover-B.
ter-C. Remove the two screws-C. Remove the DV filter box-D.
Remove the toner filter-F and DV ozone filter-E.

F
E

B A

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 18
K. Waste toner collection section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Waste toner 1 Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a
section When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. serviceman calls. It is
advisable to replace in
advance if necessary.

(1) Waste toner box replacement

1) Remove the waste toner door.
Remove the waste toner box.

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 19
L. Fusing section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Fusing section 1 Upper heat roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease (UKOG-
2 Upper heat roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 0235FCZZ) to specific
bearing position.
3 Upper heat roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
insulation bush
4 Heat roller gear x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Upper separation x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Clean when a foreign
pawl/Pawl spring material is attached.
6 Non-contact x x x x x x x x x
thermistor (Main)
7 Non-contact x x x x x x x x x
thermistor (Sub)
8 Sub thermistor x x x x x x x x x Clean when a foreign
material is attached.
9 Lower heat roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease (UKOG-
10 Lower heat roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 0235FCZZ) to specific
bearing position.
11 Lower separation x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Clean when a foreign
pawl/Pawl spring material is attached.
12 Lower thermistor x x x x x x x x x Clean when a foreign
material is attached.
13 Upper web roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace timing varies
depending on the
coverage rate.
14 Upper web back-up x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller
15 Upper web back-up x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller bearing/
Pressure spring
16 Lower web roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
17 Lower web back-up x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller
18 Lower web back-up x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller bearing/
Pressure spring
19 Sensors x x x x x x x x x For the reflection-type
sensor, the other side
must be also cleaned.
20 Paper guides         

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 20
 19 15
7
5
6
13
14
4
5 2
19 3
15 10
8
18

20

11
16
17
9
1
2 12
3 11
10 19
18
19

20

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 21
M. Duplex / Paper exit section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Duplex unit / 1 Discharge brush x x x x x x x x x
Paper exit unit 2 Transport rollers x O O O O O O O O
3 Sensors O O O O O O O O O For the reflection-type
sensor, the other side
must be also cleaned.

2
1
3

1
2

3
2

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 22
(1) Each transport roller cleaning 4) Open the right door.
1) Clean the paper exit roller 2 (Drive).
* Maintenance
Clean at every 300K.

2) Open the ADU open/close door.

5) Remove the reverse PG unit.

6) Clean the transport roller (Drive).

* Maintenance
Clean at every 400K.

3) Clean the transport roller (Drive) (A), and the transport roller
(Drive) (B).
* Maintenance
Clean at every 400K.

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 23
7) Clean the transport roller (Drive).
* Maintenance
Clean at every 400K.

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 24
N. Drive section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
Main drive unit 1 Gears (Grease) x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0307FCZZ(When
checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
2 Shafts (Grease) x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0307FCZZ(When
checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
3 Grounding shaft x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0012QSZZ(When
(Grease) checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
Tandem paper 4 Gears (Conduction x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0299FCZZ(When
feed drive unit grease) checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
5 Belts x x x x x x x x
Multiple steps 6 Belts x x x x x x x x x
drive unit
Web drive unit 7 Gears x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0013FCZZ(When
checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
PS drive unit 8 Gears x x x x x x x x x UKOG-0299FCZZ(When
checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
9 Belt x x x x x x x x x
Drive units - Torque limiter x x x x x x x x x
- Clutches x x x x x x x x x

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 25
 7
Grease
UKOG-0013QSZZ

8
Grease
UKOG-0299FCZZ

4
Grease
UKOG-0299FCZZ

1
Grease
5 UKOG-0307FCZZ

2
Grease
UKOG-0307FCZZ

6
3
Conductive grease
UKOG-0012QSZZ

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 26
O. LSU section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

When 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3000

Section No. Part name 400K 800K Remark
calling K K K K K K
LSU section 1 Protection against  x x x x x x x x
dust glass

(1) Cleaning the protection against dust glass.

1) Clean the protection against dust glass.

CAUTION: Do not touch the protection against dust glass directly

with your hand.

MX-M7570 MAINTENANCE 9 – 27
MX-M7570
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Service Manual

1. Disassembly of Units
(2) Upper cabinet rear cover
A. Exteriors section
1) Remove four screws (A) and remove the upper cabinet rear.
(1) Part name

No. Unit name A

a Upper cabinet front right
b Upper cabinet front left
c Upper cabinet cover
d Front cabinet right upper
e Front cabinet upper
f Front cabinet
g Right cabinet front upper
A
h Right cabinet front lower
i Upper cabinet right
j Right cabinet rear upper
k Right cabinet rear lower
l Waste toner door
m Right cabinet lower
n Upper cabinet rear
o Rear cabinet upper
p Rear cabinet
q Upper cabinet left
r Left cabinet upper
s Left cabinet rear
t Left cabinet
u Left cabinet lower
v Delivery tray cabinet

(3) Rear cabinet

1) Loosen the screws in the lowest part of rear cabinet. Remove
a the screw and remove the rear cabinet.
b
i
c
d
e j
A
f
k

A
l A
g
h

A
m A
A

A A

A
n v
A
q
o r

s
p
t

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1

(4) Front cabinet upper (6) Paper exit tray cabinet
1) Open the front cabinet (A). Remove the screws (B) and shift 1) Remove the paper fixture and the actuator.
the front cabinet upper toward left and then remove it (C).

A
A

(5) Front cabinet right upper

1) Open the right door.

2) Remove the screws and remove the paper exit tray

2) Remove the screws and remove the front cabinet right upper.

A A

A
B

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 2

(7) Left cabinet upper 3) "Shift the hooks (8 pcs.) toward front side and remove from the
1) Remove the screw. Uplift and unhook the left cabinet upper main unit. Remove the left cabinet.
and remove it. *Make sure to insert the hooks to main unit completely when
attaching the cabinet to the main unit."

B
(9) Left cabinet rear
(8) Left cabinet
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
1) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray.
2) Remove the screws and remove the left cabinet rear.

2) Remove the screw and pull out the handles.

(10) Left cabinet lower
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screw and remove the left cabinet lower.

B
B
B

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 3

(11) Upper cabinet cover (14) Upper cabinet right, Upper cabinet left
1) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet cover. 1) Remove the screws and remove the glass holder right.

A
B

2) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet right.

(12) Upper cabinet front left
1) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet front left.
Disconnect the connector from the USB HUB PWB.
A

B
A B

A
3) Remove the table glass.

(13) Upper cabinet front right

1) Remove the screws.

4) Remove the screws and remove the glass holder left.

B
2) Remove the upper cabinet front right. A

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 4

5) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet left. (18) Right cabinet rear
1) Remove the screws and remove the right cabinet rear.

A B A

(15) Rear cabinet upper

1) Remove the screws (A) and step screw (B) and remove the C
rear cabinet upper.
A

B
B
(19) Waste toner door
1) Remove the pawls from main unit and remove the waste toner
door.
A
C

A A

(16) Upper cabinet rear

1) Remove the DSPF unit, disconnect the connector (A, B) and
remove the screw (C). Remove the screw (D) and the rear
cabinet upper (E).
B
D

(20) Front cabinet

1) Remove the band, shift the shafts and remove the front cabi-
net.

A
A B C

(17) right cabinet rear upper

1) Remove the screw and remove the Right cabinet rear upper.

B
A

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 5

B. Operation panel section 8) Remove the upper cabinet front right.

No. Unit name

a Operation Panel unit

9) Disconnect the connectors from the operation panel. Remove

the harness from the wire saddle.
North America

Disconnect the connectors

(1) Operation panel unit

1) Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws and shift the front
cabinet upper toward left and then remove.
2) Open the right door.
3) Remove the screws and remove the front cabinet right upper.
4) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet cover.
5) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet front left.
Disconnect the connector.
6) Remove the screw and remove the cover. Remove the harness from the wire saddle

Remove the harness from the wire saddle.

Remove the harness inside the guide to the out side.

7) Remove the screws.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 6

Europe 10) Remove the cover.

Disconnect the connectors

Remove the harness from the wire saddle

11) Remove the screws and remove the operation panel unit.

Remove the harness from the wire saddle. A

Remove the screw.

Other than North America and Europe

Disconnect the connectors

C. DSPF section
No. Unit name
1 DSPF unit

Remove the harness from the wire saddle

Remove the harness from the wire saddle. a

Remove the harness inside the guide to the out side.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 7

(1) DSPF unit D. Paper feed tray section
1) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
No. Unit name
2) Remove the screw-1 and disconnect earth wire-2. Disconnect
a Tandem paper feed tray
the connector-3 from the SCN Mother PWB.
b Paper feed tray
c Paper feed tray unit

b
c

3) Loosen the screws and lower the angle adjustment plate.

(1) Tandem paper feed tray

1) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray.

4) Open the DSPF unit until it is placed in upright position and

remove the screws.
2) Remove the screws and remove the tandem paper feed tray.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 8

(2) Paper feed tray unit
1) (1) Open the right lower door. (2) Remove the screw. (3)
Remove ADU open/close arm from the right lower door. (4)
While pressing the arm, (5) remove right lower door from the
main unit. (6) Remove ADU open/close arm from the main
unit.

2) (1) Remove the screw. (2) Remove the PF movable paper

guide lower.

3) Remove the screws and the connectors then, remove the

Positioning boss
paper feed tray unit.

NOTE: Precautions when installing the paper feed tray unit.

OK NG

Do not place the harness

Line the harness to the behind the ribs of the
near side of the rib. paper feed tray unit.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 9

E. Manual paper feed section 3) Remove the screws and remove the ADU inner cover R.

No. Unit name

a Manual paper feed tray
b Multi paper feed unit

4) Remove the screws and remove the ADU cabinet R.

(1) Manual paper feed tray and manual paper feed unit
1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the screws and remove the right delivery upper cover.

5) Remove the screw and disengage the right door lock pawl.
Remove the E-ring.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 10

6) Remove the screws and remove the ADU cabinet F. 10) Remove the screws. Disconnect the connector and remove
the manual paper feed unit.

F. Paper transport section

7) Disengage the pawl and remove the harness cover. Discon- (1) LCC transport unit
nect the connector.
1) Remove the screw and LCC transport cabinet.

2) Remove the screws and remove the LCC transport cabinet

paper guide.

8) Remove the shaft, screws, and manual paper feed tray.

3) Remove the screws and remove the dowel pin out of a hole.
Disconnect the connector and remove the LCC transport unit.

9) Remove the screws.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 11

(2) PS unit (4) Vertical transport unit
1) Remove the screw and remove the PS harness cover. Discon- 1) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector. Remove the
nect the connector. vertical transport unit.

2) Remove the screws and remove the PS unit.

(3) PS lower unit

1) Remove the screw and remove the PS lower unit.

Positioning boss

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 12

G. LSU section 7) Remove the screws and remove the LSU left plate.

No. Unit name

1 LSU

8) Put a marking on the current adjustment position.

(1) LSU
1) Open the front cabinet and remove the front cabinet upper.
2) Remove the screws and remove the front cabinet right upper.
3) Remove the screw and remove the paper exit tray cabinet.
(When attaching the cabinet, ensure that paper fixture is not
caught at the back side of the tray.) 9) Disconnect the connectors.
4) Remove the screw and remove the left cabinet upper. (When
attaching the left cabinet upper, hook the pawl from above.)
5) Pull out the tandem cassette.
6) Remove the screw which is fixing the left cabinet. Pull out the
handles.
Pull out the left cabinet and remove. (When attaching the cabi-
net, make sure to hook the pawl.)

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 13

NOTE: Precautions when removing FFC. H. Toner replenishment section
No. Unit name
a Toner cartridge

FFC can be removed by releasing the lever.

(1) Toner cartridge

1) Open the cover. Pull out the toner cartridge and remove.

Ĭ
ĭ

FCC is locked by down the lever after inserting FFC.

10) Remove the screw (1) and remove the screws (2).
Remove the LSU unit (3) and the LSU rotation shaft (4).

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 14

I. Development section 5) Remove the blue screw and pull out the DV unit. The unit
stops on the way, so remove the unit while pressing the DV
No. Unit name lever.
a DV unit *Hold the DV unit with both hands securely.
*When placing the DV unit, place it on a level place carefully.

(1) DV unit
1) Open the right door.
2) Open the front cabinet and remove the front cabinet upper.
3) Remove the screws and remove the inner cover right.

4) Turn the screw clockwise and remove it. Remove the drum fix-
ing sleeve.
*Fix the drum fixing sleeve to remove the screw so that the it
does not rotate.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 15

J. Drum section 5) Remove the blue screws. Remove the Photo-conductor unit.
NOTE: When removing the drum unit, remove the MC unit first.
No. Unit name
a Process unit

(1) Drum unit

1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the DV unit.
3) Pull the connector.

Disconnect the connector. Remove from

the clamp.

Remove from the wire saddle.

Turn the opening on the

downside for attachment.

4) Remove the blue screw, and remove the MC unit.

* Maintenance
Replace at every 400K.
NOTE: When inserting the MC unit, be careful not to scratch the
drum.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 16

K. Transfer section L. Toner hopper section
No. Unit name No. Unit name
a Transfer unit a Toner hopper unit

1) Open the right door.

2) Remove the DV unit.
3) Remove the MC unit.
4) Remove the Drum unit.
5) Disconnect the connector. (*Make sure to connect the connec-
tor when mounting the toner hopper.)

Disconnect the connector.

(1) Transfer unit

1) Turn on the power. Go into Sim 6-3, select JOINT and PAGE1
and then press EXECUTE so that the transfer belt contacts 6) Remove the screw and pull out the toner hopper unit.
drum.
2) Press up the lock lever and open the right door.
3) Pull the transfer leave lever while holding the holder.

4) Release the lock while pulling the transfer leave lever, release
your hand and remove the transfer unit.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 17

M. Waste toner collection section 5) Remove the waste toner door.

No. Unit name

a Waste toner transport unit
b Waste toner drive unit

6) Remove the screws and remove the right cabinet rear lower.

(1) Waste toner transport unit

1) Remove the DV unit.
2) Remove the MC unit.
3) Remove the Drum unit.
4) Remove the screw and the right cabinet rear.
A

B A

B
7) Remove the screws and remove the rear cabinet upper (B)
and the rear cabinet (D).
A

B
C

A C
C
D

C
C
C

C C

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 18

8) Remove the screws. 11) Remove the main drive unit.
12) Disengage the handle on the controller and remove the
screws. Remove the waste toner pipe guide plate. Be careful
while handling this area.

D
A

C
B

A
A A

A
13) Remove the screws.
9) Pull up the controller box unit. Hook the handle on the control-
ler to the main unit to secure the unit.
B

14) Remove the screws and remove the connection to the waste
toner transport section.
B A
B
A
A A

A
10) Remove the screw and open the waste toner box.
C

B A

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 19

(2) Waste toner drive unit 3) Remove the screws and disconnect the connector. Remove
1) Remove the screws, waste toner full detecting spring and the waste toner insert guide upper.
detecting sensor mounting plate. Disconnect the connector D
and remove the photo sensor. F
C

B
E G

D
A
E

C
A

4) Remove the screws and the waste toner motor.

B B

2) Remove the screw and waste toner motor protection plate.

A
A
B

N. Fusing section
No. Unit name
a Fusing unit

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 20

(1) Fusing unit removal O. Paper exit section
1) Press up the lock lever and open the right door. (1) Paper exit unit
1) Remove the paper fixture and the actuator.
2) Remove the screw and the delivery follower block.

3) Release the lock and open the right door unit.

2) Remove the blue screw (1), press down the lock lever (2) and
remove the fusing unit (3). 4) Open the front cabinet and remove the front cabinet upper.
5) Remove the screws and remove the front cabinet right upper.
6) Remove the screws and the upper cabinet front right.
7) Remove the screws and remove the glass holder right.

Handle

Handle

8) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet right.

NOTE: Do not turn the gear in the opposite direction of what

engraved mark indicates on the cover while fusing unit is
detached. Otherwise, the web sheet may sag and twine
around the roller.
NOTE: Make sure to use handles to hold the fusing unit. (Do not
use the lock lever to hold.)
NOTE: Do not hit the drawer connector on main unit while remov-
ing (and installing) the fusing unit.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 21

9) Remove the blue screw (1), press down the lock lever (2) and
remove the fusing unit.
Remove the wire saddle.

Disconnect the connector.

Handle

Handle

Remove the band from the main unit.

12) Remove the screw and remove the paper exit unit.

NOTE: Do not turn the gear in the opposite direction of what

engraved mark indicates on the cover while fusing unit is
detached. Otherwise, the web sheet may sag and twine
around the roller.
NOTE: Make sure to use handles to hold the fusing unit. (Do not
use the lock lever to hold.)
NOTE: Do not hit the drawer connector on main unit while remov-
ing (and installing) the fusing unit.
10) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the delivery
upper duct.

11) Remove the screw, delivery drive cover and disconnect the
connectors.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 22

P. Drive section 6) Pull up the controller box unit. Hook the handle on the control-
ler to the main unit to secure the unit.
(1) Tandem drive unit
1) Remove the screw and remove the right cabinet rear.
2) Remove the waste toner door.
3) Remove the screws and remove the right cabinet rear lower.
4) Remove the screws and remove the rear cabinet upper (B)
and the rear cabinet (D).

B
C

A C B
C
D A

C
C
7) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the DV duct.
C
B

C C

5) Remove the screws.

C
A

CAUTION: Pass the harness through the guide when assembling.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 23

8) Remove the screw and open the waste toner box. 11) Remove the screws and the tandem drive unit.

B A

9) Remove the screws, the tandem multiple steps joint plate and NOTE: Only one screw of
the belt. this position is different.
(M4 x 6 black)

(2) Multiple steps drive unit

1) Remove the screw and open the waste toner box.
2) Remove the screws and the tandem multiple steps joint plate.
C
Remove the belt.
3) Disconnect the connectors and remove the band.
B
A

Disconnect the
A connector.
Remove the band.

10) Disconnect the connectors and remove the harnesses.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 24

4) Remove the screws and the multiple steps drive unit. 4) Remove the screws and remove the main drive.
*Ensure that drum drive shaft won't be damaged.
*Ensure that each gear on the drive unit won't be damaged.
*Mount the screws in the order of A, B, C, and B as shown in
the illustration below.
C D

A
A B
C

(3) Main drive unit

1) Remove the DV unit, the MC unit, and the drum unit prelimi-
narily. B
2) Remove the screw and the main flywheel.

(4) PS drive unit

1) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness from the
wire saddle.

3) Disconnect the connectors.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 25

2) Remove the screws and remove the PS drive unit. Q. PWB section
No. Unit name
a MFPC PWB
b eMMC PWB
c HDD
d Scan Mother PWB
e PCU PWB
f HV MC PWB

a
b
c

e
(5) Fuser drive unit f
1) Disconnect the connector.
Remove the screws and remove the fuser drive unit.

(1) MFPC PWB, eMMC PWB and HDD

1) Remove the screw and remove the right cabinet rear upper.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 26

2) Remove the screws. Pull out the MFPC PWB mounting plate 4) Remove the screws and remove the eMMC PWB.
and remove.

3) Remove the screws and remove the MFPC PWB.

A
A B

A
ĭ
A
A

A Ĭ

A During assembly, to fit the cutout of the socket with the notch
of the EMMC, to insert diagonally.
Make sure that it is not partially inserted.
CAUTION: Do not touch contact terminal parts and IC on the board.
Be careful not to overtighten.
(tightening torque: 0.098 N · m)

OK: the terminal NG: the terminal

can not be seen. can be seen.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 27

5) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws and the HDD. (2) Scan Mother PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screws and remove the Scan Mother PWB.

A
A
A

B
A
B
A
A
A
A

C B

B
6) Remove the screws and remove the HDD mounting plate.

B
A Scan-Mother board FFC handling precautions.

A LAMP FFC can not Two FFCs run through

pass through guide hole. the holes in the guide.

CCD FFC
A
LAMP FFC LVDS FFC LSU FFC

This side is white. Connect the FFC.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 28

CCD FFC / LSU FFC LVDS FFC

ĭ
ĭ

Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ

FFC can be removed by releasing the lever. Press the lock levers on the right and left
of the connector at the same time and pull
PWB the FFC straight out.

OK
FFC

Connector lock lever position

(Unlocked state)

Insert horizontally with the reinforcing plate (blue)

Ĭ of the FFC facing up.
CAUTION: Check that the FFC reinforced plate is
parallel to the connector.
ĭ

NG

Insert the FFC [Link] FFC is locked

by lowering the lever.

PWB

FFC
Reverse surface insertion is NG.

NG
Connector lock lever position
(Locked state)

Diagonal insertion is NG.

CAUTION: Check that the FFC reinforced plate is

parallel to the connector.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 29

LAMP FFC 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screws. Remove
the HV MC PWB.

Unlocked (When removing FFC)

0 0 GB + 0 0
0 0 GB + 0 0
X X X :0 0 0
XXXX:XXX
A

XX/XX/XX
X X -:0 0 0
B

N o . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
XXXXXXXXXXX
A

Slide the connector in the direction of the arrow to

unlock.

Locked

No. Unit name

a AC PWB
b DC power supply PWB

In the unlocked state, insert until the FFC is bumped

straight. It is locked by pushing the connector.

(3) PCU PWB, HV MC PWB

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cabinet. b
2) Open the controller box.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screws. Remove a
the PCU PWB.

A B
(4) AC PWB, DC power PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the earth ter-
minal.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 30

3) Remove the screw and the AC cord mounting plate.
No. Unit name
a HV TC PWB
b HL PWB

4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the

AC/WH PWB.

(5) HV TC PWB
1) Remove the screw and remove the right cabinet rear upper.

5) Disconnect the connector and remove the screws. Remove

the DC power PWB.

2) Remove the rear cabinet upper and the rear cabinet.

3) Open the controller box.

A
B

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 31

4) Remove the screws and remove the right cabinet rear lower. (6) HL PWB
1) Open the right door a little.

B 2) Open the front cabinet. Remove the front cabinet upper.

5) Remove the screw and open the waste toner box.

B A 3) Remove the screws and remove the front cabinet right upper.

6) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the HV TC

PWB.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 32

4) Remove the screw and remove the paper exit tray cabinet. 7) Remove the screw which is fixing the left cabinet. Pull out the
(When attaching the cabinet, ensure that paper fixture is not handles.
caught at the back side of the tray.) Pull out the left cabinet and remove. (When attaching the cabi-
net, make sure to hook the pawl.)

5) Remove the screw and remove the left cabinet upper. (When ĭ
attaching the left cabinet upper, hook the pawl from above.)

ĭ
Į
Ĭ

8) Remove the screws and remove the LSU left plate.

6) Pull out the tandem cassette.

9) Disconnect the connector and, remove the screws and remove

the LSU fan.

A
B
A

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 33

10) Remove the screws and remove the left side reinforce plate
No. Unit name
upper.
a LVDS PWB

A
a

A C

B (7) LVDS PWB

1) Remove the upper cabinet cover.
A 2) Remove the upper cabinet front left.
3) Remove the FFC, remove the screw, and remove the LVDS
11) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the HL PWB.
PWB.

A C

Press the lock levers on the right and left

of the connector at the same time and
pull the FFC straight out.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 34

2. Disassembly and assembly of each 4) Remove the harness.
unit
A. Operation panel section
(1) LCD
1) Remove the harness from the clamp.

2) Remove the screws and the operation panel mounting plate.

Precautions for assembly:

Make sure the harness is on the upper side and the FFC is on
the lower side.

OK NG

5) Remove the FFC.

CAUTION: Release the connector lock then, remove the FFC.

3) Remove the screw then, open the cover.

(Only models
without keyboard)

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 35

 Precautions for assembly: Precautions for assembly:
Hold the reinforced part of the FFC and insert it. Insert four convex parts.
If you press anything other than the reinforced part, there is a
danger of bending and disconnection.

OK

8) Remove the tape and disconnect the connector. (Locked,

release lock bar then, remove the connector.)

There is a danger of
being broken at the
crease.
NG

6) Remove the screws and the pawls then, remove the LCD
holder assembly.

Attention point on connector connection during assembly.

Terminal side is top.

7) Remove the band and the pawl then, open the LCD holder.

OK

No gap

NG

Because there is a gap, it is NG.

It can not be inserted completely.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 36

* Lock the terminal lock bar to the connector on the receiving [Tape attaching reference.]
side.

Attaching reference (lower)

End face of LCD protection
±2mm Mylar

Attaching reference (left)

End face of LCD holder rib left edge

Push until locked on receiver.

completion.

[Position of coaxial cable passing to LCD board.]

Attaching reference (right)

10mm±1
End face of connector

Fix the harness with tape according to the standard.

Caution:
Put the tape with the wire flattened.
20mm±1 (Bundle status is NG)

9) Remove the LCD.

Attaching reference (lower)

End face of LCD board

Note:
Do not protrude from the end face of LCD board.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 37

(2) Touch panel when assembly, peel off the attachment sheet of the touch
1) Remove the touch panel. panel and paste the new sheet.

Attaching reference.
(End face)
0.3mm

0mm 0.3mm 0mm

Attaching reference. (End face)

Precautions for assembly

Attaching reference.
(Rib base)
Precautions for assembly
0mm 0.3mm

0.3mm
Attaching reference. (End face)
0.3mm 0mm
0mm
attaching reference. Insert the FPC 0.3mm
(Rib base) in the rib hole.
0mm
Attaching reference. (Rib base)
NG NG

NG Do not bend the touch panel

FPC.
There is a fear of breaking.

After attaching.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 38

B. DSPF section
(1) DSPF unit t
s
Part No. Part name t
a Paper pickup roller s
b Paper feed roller v
c Separation roller
d Torque limiter
e Transport roller 1
f Transport roller 2
g Registration roller
h Transport roller 3
i Transport roller 4
j Paper exit roller l
u
k Discharge brush
u
l No.1 scanning plate
m No.2 scanning section, scanning glass
n No.2 scanning section, white reference glass
o Mirror r
p Lens, CCD
q Lamp
r OC mat
p
s Gears
t Belts
u Sensors
v DSPF CNT PWB
o

tu
u
u d
u

n m
f

e a. Paper pickup roller

b. Paper feed roller
bc 1) Open the upper door, and remove the screw.
a
u

u u
Ĭ

h
i
j
k

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 39

2) Remove the front cabinet. 5) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle. Remove the
snap band.

ĭ Į

į
Ĭ
ĭ

3) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet. Ĭ

ĭ 6) Remove the screw, and remove the document feed unit.

į
Ĭ Ĭ

Ĭ
ĭ

Ĭ
Ĭ

4) Remove the screw. Remove the paper feed cover.

7) Remove the paper feed PG upper cover.

ĭ

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 40

8) Remove the pickup roller holder. Remove the paper pickup d. Torque limiter
roller from the pickup roller holder. 1) Remove the rear cabinet lower.

Ĭ
9) Remove the paper feed roller.
ĭ

2) Disconnect the connector and open the edge saddle.

c. Separation roller
1) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed PG lower ĭ
cover.

Ĭ
ĭ Ĭ Ĭ

3) Remove the screws and the paper exit drive unit.

When attaching the paper exit drive unit, tighten the screw in
2) Remove the revere pressure release lever, and remove the the order of (1) - (3).
separation roller.
Į

Ĭ
ĭ

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 41

4) Disconnect the connectors. Remove the harness from the wire 7) Remove the E-ring, and remove the Transport roller 1 (Idle).
saddle.

8) Remove the screw. Lift the document paper feed tray and
remove the paper guide.

Ĭ
5) Remove E-ring, separation clutch and transport clutch.
NOTE: make sure that stopping section in the clutch is fit into the
plate during the assembly. Ĭ
Į ĭ

ĭ ĭ

9) Remove the screw, and remove the support plate and the
bearing. Remove the roller shaft, and remove the torque lim-
iter.

6) Remove the screws and the paper feed drive unit.

Ĭ
į
Ĭ Į
ĭ

Ĭ
Ĭ

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 42

e. Transport roller 1 3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide.
f. Transport roller 2 Clean the registration roller.
1) Clean the transport roller 1 and the transport roller 2.

ĭ
Ĭ

g. Registration roller h. Transport roller 3

1) Remove the screw, and remove the left rear lower cabinet. i. Transport roller 4
1) Open the OC mat.

2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the PS knob.

ĭ 2) Open the lower door. Remove the screw, and remove the ful-
crum plate. Remove the lower door.

ĭ
Ĭ
Į Ĭ

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 43

3) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum plate. Remove the 2) Clean the paper exit roller.
white reference plate.

k. Discharge brush
1) Check the discharge brush.
NOTE: when replacing the discharge brush, attach to the attach-
ment reference.

4) Clean the transport roller 3 and transport roller 4.

0mm

0.5mm

0.5mm 0.5mm
Attaching reference

l. No.1 scanning plate

m. No.2 scanning section, scanning glass
1) Clean the no.1 scanning plate and the no.2 scanning section,
j. Paper exit roller scanning glass.
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
document feed tray.

ĭ
ĭ

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 44

n. No.2 scanning section, white reference glass 3) Remove the E-ring, and remove the upper door unit.
1) Use cleaner to clean the no.2 scanning section, white refer-
ence glass.
ĭ

o. Mirror
1) Remove the spring, pressure release axis holder, screw and
pressure release link lever. 4) Disconnect the connector for lamp unit from the control PWB.

į ĭ

5) Remove the screw and lamp unit.

Į
Ĭ

2) Disconnect the connector.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 45

6) Remove the screws and paper guide. 9) Remove the screw, and remove the mirror base cover.

Ĭ ĭ

7) Remove the CCD FFC from the CCD PWB.

10) Clean the mirror.

p. Lens, CCD
1) Remove the screw, and remove the dark box. Remove the
8) Remove the screw and cushion. Remove optics fixing plate dust-proof cover.
and optical unit.

Ĭ
ĭ

ĭ
Į

Ĭ ĭ
į

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 46

2) Remove the lens cover. r. OC mat
1) Clean the OC mat.

3) Clean the lens and the CCD.

s. Gears
1) Clean the Gears.

q. Lamp
1) Remove the screw, and remove the LED PWB guide.

ĭ Į Ĭ
Ĭ

2) Clean the lamp.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 47

t. Belts 2) Disconnect the connector.
1) When attaching the belt, loosen the screw. Then, tighten the Clean the sensor.
screw while applying tension.

Ĭ
ĭ

3) Remove the screw and the rotation tray shaft. Then, remove
the document feed tray upper.

2) When attaching the belt, loosen the screw. Then, tighten the
screw again after reapplying tension in the direction of the
arrow.

ĭ
Ĭ

4) Clean the sensor.

5) Remove the screw and the paper feed paper guide upper rein-
u. Sensors forcing plate.
1) Remove the screw and the document feed tray lower.
Ĭ

Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 48

6) Clean the sensor. v. DSPF CNT PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the rear cabinet lower.

7) Remove the screw and the PS upper paper guide.

Ĭ
ĭ

Ĭ
Ĭ

3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws. Remove

ĭ the DSPF CNT PWB.

ĭ
8) Clean the sensor.
Ĭ
ĭ

Ĭ
ĭ

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 49

C. Scanner section
(1) Scanner unit
Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the
Part No. Part name figure below and fix it.
a Drive belt When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror
b Drive wire unit to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as
c Sensors shown in the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then
d Rails wind two turns furthermore around the pulley.
e Mirror
f Lamp
g Lens IJ
ı
h CCD
i Table glass į ĭ
j SPF glass İ
Ĭ

Į
c

j
d
c
i
IJ
ı
1 7 8 9 10
į

a İ
ĭ
b Ĭ
d Į 10 9 8 7 1
g
h
b

c. Sensors
1) Clean the each sensor.
e
e

a. Drive belt
b. Drive wire
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to
confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound with-
out clearance.

OK NG

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 50

d. Rails g. Lens
1) Remove the table glass. h. CCD
2) Grease each rail. 1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box, and the cover.

Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with drive Ĭ

wires.
If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.
ĭ Ĭ

3) Clean the lens, and the CCD.

e. Mirror
f. Lamp
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror.

i. Table glass
j. SPF glass
1) Remove the glass holder, the table glass and the SPF glass.

Ĭ
İ
3) Clean the lamp and the No. 1 mirror.
į

2) Clean the both surfaces of the table glass and the SPF glass.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 51

D. Tray paper feed section 4) Remove the screw and remove the tandem support PG lower.

(1) Tandem paper feed tray

1) Remove the pick up roller (a), paper feed roller (b), separation
roller (c) and torque limiter (d).

a b
c
d

a
b
cd

5) Remove the separation roller.

2) Remove the tandem support PG upper.

6) Remove the screws and remove the bearing holder unit.

3) Remove the pick up roller and paper feed roller.

7) Remove separation roller.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 52

(2) Tray paper feed unit 5) (1) Remove the spring. (2) Remove the screw. (3) Remove the
1) Remove the paper guide. reinforcing plate. (4) Remove the spring. (5) Remove the lever.

2) Remove the paper pick up roller and the paper feed roller.

6) (1) Upon removal of the separation roller in step 5), (2) remove
the E-ring.

3) Remove the separation roller.

7) (1) Shift the separate shaft. (2) Remove the bearing. (3)
Remove the separate shaft.

4) Remove the E-ring, gear, parallel pin, and bearing. Remove

the screws and paper feed lower unit.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 53

8) (1) Remove the E-ring. (2) Remove the coupling. (3) Remove 11) Remove the screws and holders then, disconnect the connec-
the separate shaft. (4) Remove the torque limiter. tors and remove the sensors.

9) Remove the screws and the paper guide.

12) Remove the screw and the holder.

10) Remove the screws and the cover.

13) Disconnect the connector then, remove the screw and the sen-
sor.
When assembling, securely insert the sensor and screw it.

OK NG

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 54

14) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw then, remove E. Manual paper feed section
the solenoid.
(1) Manual paper feed unit
1) Remove the pickup cover.

2) Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller
When assembling, the arm of the solenoid is inserted under (B).
the holder. Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.

OK NG

15) Remove the screws and the solenoid.

When assembling, the pin of the solenoid is inserted into the A
arm.

3) Open the maintenance cover, remove the separation roller.

Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 55

(2) Torque limiter 2) Remove the screws and paper guide.
1) Remove the screws, the reinforcing plate and the spring.

3) Remove the screws and paper guide.

Clean the transport roller.

2) Remove the e-ring and shift the shaft then, remove the torque
limiter. 1

2
3

(3) Transport roller.

1) Remove the cover.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 56

F. Paper transport section G. Developing section
(1) PS unit (Note for cleaning the developing unit)
1) Remove the PS stay plate. If the developing unit is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower with
much developer in the developing unit, static electricity may be
accumulated in the unit.
* Metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller surface
when transporting developer or removing foreign material from
the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the magnet roller sur-
face. Be careful to avoid this when handling the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as developer
attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
NOTE: Before cleaning with a vacuum, remove ground the magnet
roller rear side cored bar as shown in the figure below and
clean the unit with a vacuum. (Do not pinch the grounding
wire with a crocodile clip connector in order to prevent
against damage on the cored bar.)

2) Remove the resist detection sensor and disconnect the con-

nector.

(1) Developer replacement

NOTE: Supply of developer must be performed after completion of
all the maintenance works of the developing unit.
1) Remove the screw, and hold the rib to remove the cover -C.
NOTE: After installing, check to confirm that the cover is securely
engaged with the frame pawl.
Order shown in the following figure.(A, B)

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 57

2) While rotating the mixing roller, discharge developer from the (2) Toner filter replacement
unit. 1) Remove the cover and the toner filter.
* Maintenance
Replace at every 800K.

3) Supply new developer.

* Maintenance
Replace at every 800K. 2) When installing, shown in the following figure.
NOTE: When supplying developer, use care not to spill it. Espe-
cially, take a great care not to spill developer on the drive
section.
NOTE: After supplying developer, do not tilt the developing unit.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 58

(3) DV seal replacement H. OPC drum section
1) Remove the DV seal. (1) Drum replacement
* Maintenance 1) Remove the screw, and open the [Link] the drum.
Replace as needed.
NOTE: Attach the seal according to the reference, and press and
hold securely after attachment.

0mm

0.5mm
0.5mm 0mm

(4) DV side seal F and R replacement

1) Remove the DV side seal F and R.
* Maintenance
Replace as needed.
NOTE: Attach the seal according to the reference, and press and
hold securely after attachment.
2) When replacing OPC drum, turn the inner cover right removed
at Step. (1) - 3) upside down.

0.5mm 0.5mm

0mm 0mm
0mm 0.5mm 0.5mm 0mm

3) Place OPC drum unit on it.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 59

1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the drum transfer drive
gear. Remove the drum flange R. Pull the drum.
* Maintenance
Replace at every 800K.

Lot Number

NOTE: When installing, lot number listed inside of a drum makes

the position of the F side.
When removing and installing, be careful not to scratch the
drum by making it into contact with the separation pawl.
Use the stearic acid powder (UKOG-0312FCZZ) when
there is the part which steric acid powder is not applied.
After installing OPC to the unit, insert the drum fixing
sleeve from unit F side, and then turn it around 360
degrees in the normal rotating direction.
Use the stearic acid powder (UKOG-0312FCZZ) when
there is the part which steric acid powder is not applied.
Do not apply any other powder than the stearin acid.
Without cleaning the setting powder applied to the replace-
ment OPC drum in advance, apply the stearic acid powder
over the setting power.
For the sections located in 30mm proximity to both ends of
OPC drum which contacts the cleaning blade edge,
securely apply stearic acid powder (a) with particular care.

Check that there is no clearance between the flange F/

flange R and the OPC drum ends.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 60

 After replacing OPC drum and also during other works, turn (3) Toner reception seal, toner reception side seals F
the inner cover right removed at Step. (1) - 3) upside down, and R replacement
and then place the drum unit on it.
1) When replacing the toner receive sheet, remove the toner
receive sheet and affix it according to the reference.
NOTE: When cleaning the affixation side with alcohol, eliminate
the toner, dirt, and dust.
Slide your finger in the direction of arrow to attach the toner
receive sheet.
It must not ride on the step.
Replace the toner receive sheet while the side seal F/R are
attached because the toner receive sheet covers a parts of
the side seal F/R.
2) When replacing the side seal F/R, remove the side seal F/R
and clean the affixation side with alcohol, and then affix it
according to the reference while the cleaning blade is placed
For exposure prevention, cover the OPC drum with paper to F side.
(about 10 sheets). NOTE: Before attaching the side seal F/R, the cleaning blade must
(2) Drum separation pawl unit replacement be installed as those will be attached based on the cleaning
1) Remove the washer, stopper and remove the drum separation blade edge as the reference.
pawl. When cleaning the affixation side with alcohol, eliminate
* Maintenance the toner, dirt, and dust.
Replace at every 400K. After attaching the side seal F/R, push the blade edge and
then check that it does not ride on the side seal F/R and
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or put dirt on the tip of the separa-
can smoothly move.
tion pawl.
Do not touch the blade edge except the corner.
When replacing the side seal F/R, replace the toner receive
sheet as well. (This is because the toner receive sheets
covers a part of side seal F/R.)
* Maintenance
Check at every 400K.

0.3mm

0mm
0.3mm 0mm

0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm

0mm 0mm

0.3mm 0.3mm

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 61

 (4) Cleaner blade replacement
1) Remove the screw, discharge cover. Remove the blue screw,
and the cleaner blade.
* Maintenance
Replace at every 400K.

NOTE: Attach the toner reception side sheet F/R according to the
reference.
Attach with the cleaner blade edge as the reference so that
the clearance is within 0 - 0.3mm. Press to secure attach-
ment.

NOTE: Before removing the cleaner blade, remove the side seals
Align the direction of fiber with jig. (5times) F and R in advance. When, therefore, the cleaner blade is
replaced, replace the side seals F and R with new ones as
well.
If this note is ignored, a trouble such as improper cleaning
or toner leakage may occur.
NOTE: Be careful not to touch or scratch the tip of the cleaner
blade.
NOTE: When installing, tighten the blue screws in the sequence of
C -> D -> E.

Be careful of the blade edge.

After replacing the side seal F/R, apply the steric acid (UKOG-
0309FCZZ) to the side seal F/R with micro-spatula (UKOG-
0311FCZZ).
NOTE: Be careful not to be adhered to the peripheral parts.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 62

I. Transfer section (3) Transfer cleaning roller replacement
(1) Transfer belt unit removal 1) Remove the transfer cleaning roller.

1) Remove the transfer drive spring. * Maintenance

Order shown in the following figure.(A, B) Replace at every 400K.

* Installing to order shown.(B, A)

Next remove the screws.

2) Remove the transfer belt unit.

(4) Transfer belt replacement

1) Remove the screw and the transfer idle roller holder.

2) Remove the transfer idle roller and the transfer belt.

* Maintenance (Transfer belt)
(2) Pre-transfer paper guide cleaning Replace at every 400K
1) Clean the pre-transfer paper guide-A.
* Maintenance
Clean at every 400K.

Shaft position of transfer idle roller

NOTE: At the time of the installation, make the inside batch num-
ber of the belt the R side.
The salient of the belt do not run onto each roller end.
Being careful about the handling in particular, and there not
being a wound, a dirt.

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 63

 Lot Number

Pressure state Separation state

2) Attach the transfer unit to the holder F / R.

3) Push both sides of the F / R of the transfer unit all the way.
F

(5) Transfer roller and Transfer roller bearings

replacement
1) Remove the transfer roller and remove the transfer roller bear-
ings.
* Maintenance
Replace at every 400K.

(6) Transfer drive gear replacement

1) Remove the transfer drive gear.
* Maintenance
Replace at every 400K.

(7) Installation of transfer unit.

1) Confirm ADU transport paper guide unit detach lever position
(The lever standing vertically)
If not, set the transfer unit to the press contact position with the
SIM 6 - 3.
(Select JOIN, PAGE 1 and execute.)

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 64

J. Fusing section
(1) Upper web roller
1) Remove the screw and the web unit.

[Route diagram]

2) Remove the spring, screws, holder and pull out two web ten-
sion rollers.
*When assembling the unit, make sure the web sheet follows (2) Lower web roller
the path marked on the holder.
1) Remove the screws and remove the lower web frame.

3) Remove the pressure bearing and remove the web roller and
backup roller.

2) Remove the spring, screw, holder and pull out a web tension
roller.
*When assembling the unit, make sure the web sheet follows
the path marked on the holder.

* Maintenance
Replace at every 400K. and life end

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 65

3) Remove the pressure bearing and remove the web roller and (3) Heater lamp
backup roller. 1) Remove the screws and remove the fusing cover F/R.
NOTE: After assembling the web unit, rotate the drive gear until
the end position of the start mark line of the web sheet
reaches the backup roller.

* Maintenance 2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, lamp holder and
Replace at every 400K. and life end heater lamp. When mounting the heater lamp, insert the con-
vex portion on the lamp into the groove on the holder.

[Route diagram]

(4) Upper heat roller

1) Remove the screws releasing the pressure out of the heat
roller and open the fusing unit. (When assembling the unit, fas-
ten the screw to apply pressure.)

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 66

2) Mount the screw removed in the step 1) - (2) to the location 5) Remove the upper heat roller unit.
shown in the illustration below so that the unit keeps opening. * Maintenance:
(Remove the screw for assembly.)
Replace at every 400K.

3) Remove the spring (1), screws (2), Fusing rear upper paper
guide B unit (3). Remove the screws (4) and disengage the
upper separate pawl unit (5).

į ĭ

İ Į
6) Remove the roller stopper from the upper heat roller. Remove
the upper heat roller gear, upper heat roller insulate bush,
upper heat roller bearing. Apply designated grease (UKOG-
0235FCZZ) to the prescribed position for assembly.
7) When replacing the upper heat roller, remove the protecting
sheet, saturate a cloth with sufficient amount of alcohol and
ĭ clean the surface of heat roller thoroughly.
Ĭ (5) Lower heat roller
1) Remove the lower heat roller unit. Remove lower heat roller
bearing from the lower heat roller. Apply designated grease
(UKOG-0235FCZZ) to the prescribed position for assembly.
* Maintenance:
Replace at every 400K.

4) Disengage the Upper separate pawl (D).

* Maintenance:
Replace at every 400K and life end.

#
( )
%

'
$

&

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 67

(6) Separate pawl lower 2) Remove the screw and the fusing front upper paper guide from
1) Open the paper guide. Release the edge of spring on paper the fusing upper frame. Remove the screw and the thermistor.
guide side from the paper guide spring stopper.
Specifically, slide the edge of the spring and then press down
toward the back side of the paper guide. Then remove the sep-
arate pawl lower from the shaft side of the separate pawl lower
where the spring is hooked. Remove the spring from the sepa- &
rate pawl lower.
* Maintenance:
%
Replace at every 400K.

#
3) Remove the screws, fusing paper enter paper guide and the
lower harness holder from the fusing lower frame.

&

NOTE: When attaching the spring, make sure the spring hook
goes through the hole on the separate pawl lower.
NOTE: When attaching the separate pawl lower, make sure to
attach the shaft without spring to the paper guide first.
(7) Thermistor $ #
1) Remove the screws, the thermistor cover, and the un-contact- #
ing thermistor from the fusing upper frame.
NOTE: Insert the boss on the thermistor to a hole when attaching
the thermistor.

% $

%
$
#

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 68

K. Drive section 4) Remove the screws (A) and drum motor (B). Remove the
screw (C) and the DV motor (D).
(1) Main drive unit
1) Remove the connector and the band.

A
A
D

C
5) Remove the screws and the drive shaft ground spring.

2) Remove the screw and the MC cleaning holder.

B
A
3) Remove the MC cleaning coupling (A) (Remove it as show in B
Conductive A
the illustration with "" mark below. Change the condition as grease
shown in the illustration with "✕" mark after the attachment.)
UKOG-0012QSZZ
Remove the screw (B) and lift up motor unit (C).
6) Remove the screw and remove the drive main frame.

A
C

B
A
C A
B

Grease
UKOG-0307FCZZ

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 69

7) Remove the bearings, the shafts, and the gears.

Grease
UKOG-0307FCZZ

D
B
A
B

A
A

MX-M7570 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 70

 VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLINGService Manual
MX-M7570
[11]
1. HDD/eMMC PWB map 2. Necessary steps when replacing PWB,
HDD/eMMC PWB
A. with HDD model
(1) HDD data contents A. with HDD model
(1) MFPC PWB replacement procedure (work flow)
No. File system Stored data
Registered user information will not be recovered if MFPC PWB is
L-1 Not available ICU firmware
affected by U2-05 trouble.
I-1 Image data Image data (ERDH + document filing)
I-2 Image data Image data (temporary storage) 1) Attach EEPROM, eMMC PWB of the MFPC PWB onto the new
I-3 Image data User watermark/stamp MFPC PWB and install it to the main unit.
I-4 Image data FAX/internet FAX received images Ground your body with grounding band during the work.
L-2 Not available System registration data 2) U2 trouble occurs, use Sim16 to cancel it.
S-1 Universal System registration data (for backup) 3) Set as follows after rebooting the main unit.
S-2 Universal Download font
Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-2 (clear software
Download color profile
User macro switch related to FAX).
Key operation registration data (2) Procedures necessary for HDD replacement
Database system file
Custom icon • Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex
S-3 Universal System log machine. If HDD operates normally and data backup is possible
S-4 Universal Document filing before replacement, perform data backup and then replace HDD.
Job log • HDD does not operate normally, data cannot backed up.
Job log completion list • HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that
S-5 Universal Address book with a normal HDD.
Account management data
Paper property registration data
Billing account data
Cookie file for OSA application
S-6 Universal Database file
S-7 Universal Spool area for printer
S-8 Universal Print release storage data
Print release file management information
S-9 Universal Work area for OCR
S-10 Universal Work area for application
S-11 Universal User file saved in the SMB
S-12 Universal Address book, account data
User data of set value etc which must not be erased
when installing the DSK

(2) eMMC PWB data contents

No. File system Stored data

L-101 Universal ICU firmware
S-101 Universal Font
Spdl
Option font ROM
L-102 Not available Snapshot image
S-102 Universal e-manual
Watermark
OCR dictionary
S-103 Universal System registration data
S-104 Universal eOSA application file
L-104 Not available Format data
I-101 Image data FAX/internet FAX received data (backup)
S-105 Universal Backup data
S-106 Universal Log data
L-105 Not available Swap area

MX-M7570 VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 1

(3) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, some storage data can be reinstalled, If HDD operate normally before replacement and can be backed
up data before replacement of the HDD referring to the HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of HDD.
a. HDD storage data list

Before After
installation installation Data Backup Data Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind
(when shipping (after use by backup method reinstallation procedures operator
from the factory) users)
1 Address book Not available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service/
Device cloning/ Device cloning/ User
Storage backup Storage backup
2 Image send registration data Not available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service/
(sender's information, meta data etc) Device cloning/ Device cloning/ User
Storage backup Storage backup
3 User authentication Not available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service
Account management Device cloning/ Device cloning/
Storage backup Storage backup
4 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
5 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
6 JOB log Not available Available Enable Sim56-4/ Disable --- ---
WEB PAGE
7 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
8 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
9 User font Not available Available Disable --- Enable WEB PAGE Service/
User
10 User macro Not available Available Disable --- Enable WEB PAGE Service/
User
11 Document filing Not available Available Enable SIM56-3/ Enable WEB PAGE Service/
WEB PAGE User
12 System registration data Not available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service/
Device cloning/ Device cloning/ User
Storage backup Storage backup
13 User color profile Not available Available Disable --- Enable WEB PAGE Service/
User
14 Cookie file for OSA application Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
15 User file saved in the SMB Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
16 Paper property registration data Not available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service/
Device cloning Device cloning User
17 Billing account data Not available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service
Device cloning/ Device cloning/
Storage backup Storage backup
18 Print release stored data Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---

MX-M7570 VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 2

(4) Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can (5) Replacement procedures when HDD storage data
be backed up cannot be backed up due to breakdown
a. Work contents and procedures a. Display when HDD breakdown
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03 is
When a new HDD
popped up.
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which is (used in the same In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD must
normal but a program error model) is used * be replaced.
occurs in it is used.
b. Work contents and procedures
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
(Servicing) When a new HDD
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB Procedures used, or when a HDD which is (used in the same
memory.) normal but a program error model) is used *
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 1, 2, 3 occurs in it is used.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
authentication data))
and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User or  Formatting is automatically complex machine.
servicing) performed.
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05,
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 6, 11 (JOB
is displayed.  Cancel
LOG data, Document filing data))
with SIM16.
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format the
to backup the image data from the eMMC PWB to the USB
automatically formatted, there is HDD.
memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file type, and
no need to perform formatting
cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data are given
procedure with SIM.
to the user.)
Step 4 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62
Step 4 Replace the HDD.
to backup the image data from the eMMC PWB to the USB
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file type, and
 Formatting is automatically machine. cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data are given
performed. to the user.)
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-05, Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory
is displayed.  Cancel is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data
with SIM16. and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions.
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format the (The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but
automatically formatted, there is HDD. in the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)
no need to perform formatting
procedure with SIM. With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory shipping.
is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data
and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions.
(The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but in
the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)
Step 11 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup to
import.
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 1, 2, 3
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Step 12 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in Step
2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use
macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)

MX-M7570 VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 3

(6) eMMC PWB storage data and backup
Some eMMC PWB storage data can be backed up, some storage data can be reinstalled, If eMMC PWB operate normally before replacement and
can be backed up data before replacement of eMMC PWB referring to eMMC PWB storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of
eMMC PWB.
a. eMMC PWB storage data list

Before installation After installation

Backup Data Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (when shipping (after use by Data backup
method reinstallation procedures operator
from the factory) users)
1 ICU firmware/ Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-1 Service
Snapshot
2 font Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-1 Service
spdl
3 Option font ROM Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-1 Service
4 e-Manual Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-7 Service
5 Watermark Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-7 Service
6 OCR dictionary Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-7 Service
7 Backup data Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
8 System registration Available Available Enable SIM56-2/ Enable SIM56-2/ Service/User
data Device cloning/ Device cloning/
Storage backup Storage backup
9 FAX/internet FAX Not available Available Enable SIM66-62 Disable --- ---
received data
10 eOSA application Not available Install application Disable --- Disable Install Service
file application

b. Work contents and procedures

Step
Step 1 Use Sim56-2 to backup eMMC PWB data to USB memory
Step 2 Backup eMMC PWB by device cloning function when operation
panel screen is customized
Step 3 Replace eMMC PWB with new one
Step 4 Upgrade firmware to the latest version
Step 5 Use Sim56-2 to restore data backed up in step1)
Step 6 Restore data backed up in step2) by using device cloning function

MX-M7570 VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 4

[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE
MX-M7570 Service Manual

1. General
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.

Menu/Item Function and content

Output of Test Page Used to print out the test page (system setting contents).
Font/Form Download Used to download Font/Form.
Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and other resources are downloaded to the HDD and controlled. (PS,
PCL5 only)
User Control Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the screen is shifted to the setting screen of user management.
User Control2 Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group by authority of the serviceman. (Select
among preset items.)
Device Cloning Used to import/export the system setting information in XML format. By importing the export file to the other
device, the setting values and setting contents of the device can be copied to another device. This function is
useful to set the same setting to two or more machines efficiently.
Filing Data Backup Used to import/export the document filing data in the unit of folder.
Update of Firmware Used to update the firmware version.
Job Log Save Job Log Used to save the Job Log.
View Job Log Used to display the Job Log.
Machine ID Setting Used to Machine ID setting.
Password Setting Used to set the password to enter the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
Save/Delete Syslog Administration Settings Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)
Storage/Send Settings Keep all the items selected.
Save /Delite Syslog Used to save or delete the log data.
View Syslog Used to display the log data.
Administration Settings Used to set the menu display.
Paper Settings Used to set individual paper

*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs. When submission of the log data file is requested in order to troubleshoot,
use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the client PC.

2. Details and operation procedures

A. Procedures to enter the Hidden Web page B. Password Setting
exclusively used for the serviceman
1) Boot a browser program.
2) Enter the specified
URL ([Link] and enter the
servicing page menu.
Default password: "service"

* The password can be optionally changed in the following proce-

dures.
1) Enter a new password.
2) Enter the new password again to make confirmation.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button.

NOTE: The password can be optionally changed in the Password

Setting menu.

MX-M7570 SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 1

C. Output of Test Page E. Device Cloning

1) Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed. (1) Export

When there is a list of items for selection, select one of the
1) Select an item to be backed up.
items in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button.
2) Click "Execute" button.
The list is printed out.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file.
D. Font/Form Download (File name: *****.bin)
When the password is set, the set password must be entered
when importing.
(2) Import
1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up
file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button to execute import.
If the password is set when exporting, the password must be
entered.
3) Reboot the machine.

F. Filing Data Backup

(1) Download of Font, Form, and Macro

1) Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list.
(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)
2) Click "Refer" button to select a target file.
3) Click "Download" button.
4) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
The file is downloaded to the HDD.
The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the
HDD are displayed.
(2) Delete of downloaded font
(Procedures to delete a file separately) (1) Export
1) Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files, 1) Select the folder to be backed up.
and click "Delete" button. The list display conditions can be specified by changing the
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press index and the number of display items on the pull-down menu.
Yes key. 2) Click "Execute" button.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button. Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File
The file in the HDD is deleted. name: *****.bin)
(3) Procedures to delete all the files at a time 3) Click "Update" button.
1) Click "Initialize" button. (2) Import
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press 1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
OK key. 2) Click "Execute" button.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button. The target file is imported.
NOTE: By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded files 3) Click "Update" button.
can be set to write protect.

MX-M7570 SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 2

G. User Control (2) View Job Log

1) Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. (In the default setting,

1) Enter the password to log in. all the items are selected. Remove check marks of the items
which are not to be displayed.)
Default Password: admin
2) Click "Show" (display) button.
The screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.
The Jog Log is displayed.
H. User Control 2
J. Update of Firmware

1) Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation

Group. (The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation 1) Click "Refer" button to select a firmware file.
Group must be set in advance.)
2) After selecting a firmware file, click "Execute" button.
(Example of use)
The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of the
The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the firmware is processed.
Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions
During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now pro-
in advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in
cessing..." is displayed.
this mode for servicing work.

I. Job Log K. Syslog

There are following functions in the Syslog mode.
(1) Save Job Log
This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to trouble-
shoot when a trouble occurs.
When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshoot-
ing, use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the cli-
ent PC.

Syslog Administration Settings Log Type Setting (Set to the default.)

Storage/Send Settings Set all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Log data save, delete
View Syslog Log data display

(1) Administration Settings/ Log Type Setting

Set to the default.
1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job
Log to save it.

MX-M7570 SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 3

(2) Storage/Send Settings L. Machine ID Setting
Keep all the items selected.

1) Enter the machine ID.

(3) Save/ Delete Syslog Max. 30 digits of numeral figures and characters can be
entered.
2) Press the registration button.
NOTE: The machine ID can be set with SIM26-7 as well as this
function.

M. Administration Settings (Menu display setting)

This setting is to select whether to display all the menus of Web
Page on the machine display or to display only the restricted sys-
tem setting menu of the default.
Setting must be executed according to the user request.
1) Press the setting execution button corresponding to the dis-
play mode.
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and
press OK key.
(4) View Syslog

N. Paper Settings14.
For each sheet of the user, when setting change is necessary, each
parameter such as fixing temperature setting is set as a property.
Setting must be executed according to the user request.

1) Select a Syslog item to be displayed.

2) Click "Show" button.
The Syslog is displayed.

MX-M7570 SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 4

MX-M7570
[13] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS Service Manual

1. Operation panel section

A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

2 OCSW

3
12
1 4
9

6
11
10 PWRSW
4

7
8

Signal name Name Function/Operation

OCSW Document size detection trigger sensor Generates the document size detection trigger signal.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Turns ON/OFF the power on the secondary side.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal. / Controls the touch panel.
2 Document size detection PWB (Light emitting) Drives the LED for the document size detection.
3 Document size detection PWB (Light receiving) Outputs the document size detection signal.
4 USB CN PWB Connect WIRELESS LAN PWB and SCN Mother PWB.
USB Interface.
5 NFC HOME KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
6 POWER-SW PWB Power switch, Buzzer, sound, power ON/OFF.
7 Touch panel Touch panel
8 LCD LCD
9 INFO-LED G PWB Display indication state of MFP
10 INFO-LED R PWB Display indication state of MFP
11 Motion sensor PWB Detects the approach of human in energy saving [Link] send signal to MFPC PWB
12 WIRELESS LAN PWB Perform wireless network connection.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 1

B. Operational descriptions
The operation panel unit is composed of the LCD unit, the LVDS PWB, the USB CN PWB, and the KEY PWB. It displays the machine opera-
tion.
It is provided with the USB CN which is used for the firmware update, USB print, and Scan to USB.
In addition, the USB CN line is provided inside the operation panel to connect with the keyboard and the IC card reader.

A document size is detected by the document size detection PWB (light emitting) and the document size detection PWB (light receiving).
The detection timing of document size is determined according to the document size detection trigger sensor signal.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 2

2. DSPF section
A. Electrical and mechanical parts location
(1) Paper feed section

SPFM

SPFC
SCOV

SPED1
SPPD1
SLUM
2 STUD 4

SPRDMD SPED2

STLD

1 SPWS
3

SPLS1
SPLS2

Signal name Name Function/Operation

SCOV Upper cover sensor Detects open/close of the upper cover
SLUM Lift motor Lifts up or moves down the document feed tray
SPED1 Document sensor 1 Detects document empty of the document feed tray
SPED2 Document sensor 2 Detects document empty of the document feed tray
SPFC Document feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the document feed section
SPFM Transport motor Drives the transport roller
SPLS1 Document length sensor 1 Detects the document length of the document feed tray
SPLS2 Document length sensor 2 Detects the document length of the document feed tray
SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1 Detects pass of the document
SPRDMD Document random sensor Detects the document size in random document feed
SPWS Document width sensor Detects the document width of the document feed tray
STLD Document feed tray lower limit sensor Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray
STUD Document feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Pickup roller Picks up document and feed it to the document feed roller
2 Document feed roller Perform the document feed operation of documents
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double feed
4 Torque limiter A fixed level of resistance is always provided for rotation of the separation roller to prevent double feed.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 3

(2) Upper transport section

SPFM

STRC

4
STRRC

SPPD2

3 2

Signal name Name Function/Operation

SPFM Transport motor Drives the transport roller
SPPD2 Document pass sensor 2 Detects pass of the document
STRC Transport roller 2 clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 2
STRRC Transport roller 1 clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from paper feed roller to transport roller 2
2 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides transport power of the transport roller
to document
3 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document from transport roller to registration roller
4 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport
roller to document

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 4

(3) Lower transport section

SPFM

SRRC

SPPD3
2
SPPD5
SPPD4 3
1
5

SOCD
SLCOV

Signal name Name Function/Operation

SLCOV Lower cover sensor Detects open/close of the lower cover
SOCD SPF sensor Detects open/close of the SPF unit
SPFM Transport motor Drives the transport roller
SPPD3 Document pass sensor 3 Detects pass of the document
SPPD4 Document pass sensor 4 Detects pass of the document
SPPD5 Document pass sensor 5 Detects pass of the document
SRRC Registration roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of registration roller

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Registration roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport
2 Registration roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the registration roller to
document
3 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the No.1 scan section to the transport roller 4
4 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to document
5 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 3 to the document exit roller
6 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to document

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 5

(4) Optical section

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Mirror Sends the document image to the lens.
2 Lens Reduces the document image (light) and reflects it onto the CCD.
3 CCD PWB Scans document images and perform A/D conversion of the scanning signal
4 LED PWB Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 6

(5) Paper exit section

SPOM

SPOD

STMPS

Signal name Name Function/Operation

SPOD Document exit sensor Detects document exit of the document
SPOM Document exit motor Drives the document exit roller
STMPS Stamp solenoid Drives the stamp solenoid

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document
2 Document exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the document exit roller and provides transport power of the document
exit roller to document

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 7

B. Operational descriptions (2) DSPF paper feed and transport operations
(1) Document size detection When a job is started , the document tray is lifted until a document
at the top in the document tray turns on the document feed tray
Size detection on the document tray
upper limit sensor (STUD).
The document size is detected by the document width sensor
The pressure between the document at the top in the document
(SPWS), and the document length is detected by the document
tray and the pick up roller is maintained at a constant level to
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from improve the paper feed capacity.
the document width and the document length as shown in the table
When paper to be scanned is exhausted, the document sensor 1
below.
(SPED1) turns off and the document tray moves down automati-
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on
cally until the document feed tray lower limit sensor (STLD) detects
the document tray, the largest size is detected. it.
Document length sensor Up and down movements of the document tray are performed by
Document size the lift motor (normal rotation and reverse rotation) and the lift gear.
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF The document fed by the pick up roller is sent through the paper
B5 OFF OFF feed roller and the transport roller to the resist roller section.
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF In the resist roller section, the document lead edge and the scan
A4 OFF OFF start position are synchronized.
B5R ON OFF
The document is transported to the scan section. After being
A4R ON OFF
scanned, the document is sent to the document exit tray by the exit
8.5" x 13" ON ON
roller.
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON

SPWS

SPLS1

SPLS2

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 8

3. Scanner section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

MHPS

5 CL_ON

MIM
2
3

CL_ON 4
1

Signal name Name Function/Operation

CL_ON Scanner lamp Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position
MIM Scan motor Drives the scanner unit (scan, return operations)

No. Name Function/Operation

1 CCD PWB Scan document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal
2 LED DRIVER PWB Drives the scanner lamp
3 Lens Reduces a document image (light) and project it to the CCD.
4 1st mirror Leads a document image to the lens.
5 2nd mirror
6 3rd mirror

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 9

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Outline
This section performs the following functions.
1) Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the
B
G
contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of
R
three lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (ana-
log).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).
(2) Detail description
a. Optical section drive R
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner G
motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to
B
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by
the drive wires.
(Image data for 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
b. Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage gen- R G B
erated in the LED DRIVER PWB according to the control signal Red component Green component Blue component
sent from the scanner control PWB. image data image data image data

c. Image scan/color separation

d. Image signal A/D conversion
Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the con-
trast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three 1) The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted
lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog). into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
The color components of document images are extracted to R, G, Each color pixel has 10bit information.
and B separately by the three kinds of CCD elements (R,G,B). 2) The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image
The red CCD extracts the red component of document images, the process section.
green CCD green the components, and the blue CCD the blue
components. This operation is called the color separation. CCD PWB
Analog IC
The CCD unit looks like one unit, but it includes three kinds of CCD CCD
elements, R, G, and B. AFE ADC LVDS
(6 Lines) R
The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by G
the CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direc- B
tion is performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner
Buffer
motor. Document images are optically reduced by the lens and
reflected to the CCD. Timing
The scan resolution is 600 dpi. Generator

e. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 10

4. Paper feed section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Manual paper feed section

HPFM

CPFM

MPUC
1 4

MPFS
TH_D/HUD_M
MPED 3
2
5 MTOP1
MTOP2
MPLD
MPWD
MPGS

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 11

Signal name Name Function/Operation
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detector Detects presence of paper in the manual paper feed tray.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Controls pickup of paper. (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls open/close of the manual paper feed gate.
MPLD Manual paper feed length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed section.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
Manual paper fees tray pull-out position
MTOP1 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (storing position).
detector 1
Manual paper fees tray pull-out position
MTOP2 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (pull-out position).
detector 2
HPFM Horizontal transport motor Transport paper from the paper feed section to the transport motor drive [Link] paper
from the right door section to the transport motor drive system.
HUD_M/
Temperature/humidity sensor Detects the temperature and the humidity.(For the process control)
TH_M

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double feed.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Picks up paper to send to the paper feed roller.
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to prevent
double feed.
5 Transport roller 11(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 15 to the transport roller 12.
6 Transport roller 10(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 9 to the transport roller 12.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 12

(2) Tandem paper feed tray unit

T1PUC
T1SPD CPFM
5 T1PUS
2
T1LUD
T1PED T2SPD
1 T1LUM T2PUS
T2PUC

3
T2LUD
T2PED
4

5 T2LUM

TNDSET

4
2
3
1

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 13

Signal name Name Function/Operation
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section and the transport section.
T1LUD Tandem tray 1 upper limit detector Detects the upper limit position of the upper limit tandem tray 1.
T1LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tandem tray 1) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
T1PED Tandem tray 1 paper empty detector Detects presence of paper in tandem tray 1
T1PUC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 1 paper feed section.
T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) Controls the paper pickup.
T1SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tandem tray 1.
T2LUD Tandem tray 2 upper limit detector Detects the upper limit position of tandem tray 2.
T2LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tandem tray 2) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
T2PED Tandem tray 2 paper empty detector Detects paper presence in tandem tray 2.
T2PUC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 1 paper feed section.
T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2) Controls the paper pickup.
T2SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tandem tray 2.
TNDSET Tandem tray installation detector Detects installation of tandem tray.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Paper pickup roller (Tandem 1, 2 paper feed tray) Picks up paper to send to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (Tandem 1, 2 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Separation roller (Tandem 1, 2 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
4 Torque limiter Applies a certain level of resistance power to rotation of the separation roller in order to
prevent against double feed.
5 Lift wire Transmits the drive power of the paper tray lift motor to the paper feed tray.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 14

(3) Tray paper feed section

CPFM

C3PUS
4
C3LUD C3LUM
C3PUC
C3PED

2 1 C4LUM
3 C3PFD
5
6 CPFC
C3SS1 C4PUC
C3SS3 C3SS2
C3SS4

C3SPD

7 C4PUS
11
C4LUD
C4PED

9 8
10 C4PFD
12
13
C4SS1
C4SS3 C4SS2
C4SS4

C4SPD

14

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 15

 Signal name Name Function/Operation
C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detector (Lift Detects the upper limit position of tray 3.
home position detection)
C3LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tray 3) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detector Detects paper presence in tray 3.
C3PFD Tray 3 paper entry detector Detects paper entry from tray 3.
C3PUC Tray 3 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 3 paper feed section.
C3PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 3) Controls pickup of paper.
C3SPD Tray 3 remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tray 3.
C3SS1 Tray 3 rear edge detector 1 Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 3 is detected to detect tray insertion.
C3SS2 Tray 3 rear edge detector 2 The paper size of tray 3 is detected.
C3SS3 Tray 3 rear edge detector 3
C3SS4 Tray 3 rear edge detector 4
C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detector (Lift Detects the upper limit position of tray 4.
home position detection)
C4LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tray 4) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detector Detects paper presence in tray 4.
C4PFD Tray 4 paper entry detector Detects paper entry from tray 4.
C4PUC Tray 4 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 4 paper feed section.
C4PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 4) Controls pickup of paper.
C4PWD Casette 4 width detection Casette 4 width detection
C4SPD Tray 4 remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tray 4.
C4SS1 Tray 4 rear edge detector 1 Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 4 is detected to detect tray insertion.
C4SS2 Tray 4 rear edge detector 2 The paper size of tray 4 is detected.
C4SS3 Tray 4 rear edge detector 3
C4SS4 Tray 4 rear edge detector 4
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
PTRC1 Casette Vertical transport clutch Casette Vertical transport clutch control

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 3, 4) Picks up paper to send to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 3, 4) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 3, 4) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
4 Torque limiter Applies a certain level of resistance power to rotation of the separation roller in order to prevent against
double feed.
5 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport roller 2.
6 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 to the transport roller 4.
7 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport roller 4.
8 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 2 and the transport roller 3 to the transport roller 5.
9 Paper size detection plate This plate shifts its position in conjunction with the rear edge plate, and the rear edge is detected to detect
the paper size.
10 Lift plate Lifts paper to maintain the paper feed position at a certain level.
11 Regulation plate Regulates paper in the transverse direction.
12 Rear edge plate Regulates paper in the longitudinal direction.

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Bypass
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface,
separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it
to the paper feed roller section.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to pre-
vent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual
paper feed clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the
paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the registration roller by the man-
ual transport roller.
(2) Tandem paper feed
a. Paper size for each paper feed tray
Paper tray 1 accepts paper of A4, 11” x 8.5”, or B5. Paper tray 2
accepts paper of A4 (11” x 8.5”) only.
b. Paper feed operation
1) When the copy/print operation is started, the motor (CPFM)
and the clutch (T1PUC) are turned ON to turn ON the solenoid
(T1PUS) at the timing of paper pickup. This rotates the takeup
roller and lowers it to pick up paper.
2) At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to
the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
to prevent double feed of paper.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 16

(3) Tray paper feed
a. Paper feed front operation
1) Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller
falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
2) The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
3) The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate
stops at the specified position.
b. Paper feed operation
1) When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup
timing, feeding paper.
2) At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport
paper to the transport section. At that time, the separation
roller rotates to prevent against double feed of paper.
c. Paper remaining detection
1) The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in
total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper
empty. The result is displayed.
d. Paper remaining quantity detection method
1) The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of
rotations of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-
up operation of the paper feed tray to turning ON the upper
limit sensor.

(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)

The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection Detection Actuator

CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low

Remaining paper 1/3 position

2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi

Remaining paper 2/3 position

3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

Remaining paper 3/3 position

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 17

5. Paper transport section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Interface pass unit

TTRC
CPFM

1
PTRC2

T1PPD1

DSW_RL1
T2PPD1

Signal name Name Function/Operation

CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
DSW_RL1 Right lower door open/close detector 1 Detects open/close of the right lower door.
PTRC2 Paper vertical transport clutch (Upper) Turns ON/OFF the transport roller in the upper section of the vertical paper transport section.
T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 transport sensor 1 Detects paper entry from tandem tray 1.
T2PPD1 Paper pass sensor (Tandem tray 2) Detects the tandem tray 2 paper pass.
TTRC Transport clutch (Tandem tray 1, 2) Turns ON/OFF the transport roller of the Tandem tray.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Horizontal transport roller left (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed roller to the horizontal roller Right.
2 Transport roller 9(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 10.
3 Transport roller 7(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 6 to the transport roller 9.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 18

 1 : ‘19/March.
(2) Vertical transport unit

RRM

PFM

HPFM

1
2

PPD2

3
4

Signal name Name Function/Operation

HPFM Horizontal transport motor Transport drive from the paper feed section to the transport motor drive system.
1 Transport drive from right door section to transport motor drive system.
Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the
PFM PS front motor transport
roller to paper.
PPD2 Registration pre-detection Detects the paper in front of registration roller.
RRM Registration motor Drives the registration roller and controls ON/OFF.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 1 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts the
relative position between images and paper.
Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the
2 Registration roller (Idle)
transport roller to paper.
3 Transport roller 12(Drive) Transports paper to the registration roller. Makes a bend of the paper between a register roller
and this roller and corrects a paper skew and an image and relative relations of the paper.
4 Horizontal transport roller Right (Drive) Transports paper fed from the horizontal roller left to the transport roller 12.

B. Operational descriptions
Transport paper from each paper feed section to the registration roller with two or more transport rollers. The paper transport clutch controls
ON/OFF of each transport roller. The registration roller controls the relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images.
The registration roller controls the relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images. The registration roller is driven by the trans-
port motor. The relative positions of the paper and the transfer images are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 19

6. LSU section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

2
PGM 5 6
7

8
9

LSUCFM

3
10

4
11

Signal name Name Function/Operation

LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the section LSU.
PGM Polygon motor Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 LSU control PWB Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB control
signal and the MFPC PWB image data.
2 LD PWB Controls drive and power of the laser diode.
3 Reflection mirror 2 Assures the optical path for laser.
4 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams, and focuses on the polygon mirror. (sub scanning direction)
5 f lens 1 Converges laser beams on the OPC drum, making the laser scan speeds at both ends and the center the same.
6 Lapel mirror Arranges laser beams.
7 Lapel mirror Arranges laser beams.
8 f lens 2 Converges laser beams on the OPC drum, making the laser scan speeds at both ends and the center the same.
9 BD mirror Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
10 Collective lens for BD Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
11 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 20

B. Operational descriptions (3) Outline of LSU specifications
(1) Outline a. On the polygon motor
Image data sent from the image process circuit are converted into Model Resolutio Laser Rotatin Bearin Number of
laser beams which are radiated to the surface of the OPC [Link] n (dpi) g speed g mirror surface
this model, the 4-laser system is employed which radiates two laser (rpm)
beams. The LSU unit is composed of the primary system from the 75cpm 1200 4beam 42520 Oil 6
laser to the polygon mirror and the scanning system of the optical s
elements including the polygon mirror. 65cpm 1200 4beam 38976 Oil 6
s
(2) Composition
Primary system

Scanning system

* Though four laser beams are actually radiated for one color, they
are illustrated as one beam.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 21

7. OPC drum section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

CCM

DM
CCMD

2 3

MC
HUD-DV 1
TH-DV 4
DL1

CCHPD

PCS

PTDL

PSPS

Signal name Name Function/Operation

CCHPD MC cleaner HP sensor Detects the MC cleaner home position.
CCM MC cleaner motor Drives the MC cleaner.
CCMD MC cleaner shift sensor Detects the shift distance of the MC cleaner.
DL1 Discharge lamp 1 Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DM Drum motor Drives the drum.
HUD_DV/
Temperature/humidity sensor Detects the temperature and the humidity.(For the process control)
TH_DV
MC Main charger The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
PCS Process control sensor Detects the ID density.
PSPS Detachment solenoid Exfoliates the paper of the drum part.
PTDL Discharge lamp Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately before transfer operation.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Toner transport roller Transports toner to the toner supply roller.
2 Toner transport roller Transports toner to the developing section.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 22

B. Operational descriptions 3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger. cleaning blade.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images. the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main
charger.

Main corona unit

Screen grid

High voltage unit

OPC drum
CTL
CGL

Aluminum layer

The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt- 4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
age applied to the screen grid.
2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
Aluminum Aluminum
layer layer
CGL CGL
CTL CTL

OPC drum OPC drum

.CUGTDGCO

When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum

Aluminum layer CGL, positive and negative charges are generated. Positive
CGL charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the negative
CTL charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, nega-
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative tive charges are attracted by the positive charges in the alumi-
and positive charges are generated. num layer of the OPC drum. Therefore, positive and negative
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the charges are balanced out on the OPC drum surface and in the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other aluminum layer, reducing positive and negative charged to
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in decrease the surface voltage of the OPC drum.
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 23

5) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.

Aluminum Aluminum
layer layer
CGL CGL
CTL CTL

Lens

By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,

light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 24

 3

8. Toner supply section

A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Toner supply section

TNM

CRUM

TNHM1

TNHM2

TFSD

Signal name Name Function/Operation

CRUM CRUM chip Stores the toner bottle information
TFSD Toner remaining quantity sensor Detects the remaining toner quantity.
TNHM1 Toner hopper motor 1 Transports toner.
TNHM2 Toner hopper motor 2 Transports toner.
TNM Toner motor Transports toner from the toner bottle to the toner hopper unit.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Toner transport roller Transport a toner in toner hopper to the toner supply roller.
2 Toner supply roller Supply a toner in toner hopper to a developing section.

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Outline
Adoption of the rotating toner bottle enables large capacity with a compact toner cartridge size.
When the remaining toner detection sensor in the toner hopper unit detects no toner, the toner bottle turns to supply toner to the toner hopper.
After supplying, full or empty status is detected at the toner hopper inside. Therefore even if the toner cartridge becomes empty, copying is not
immediately suspended because toner inside the toner hopper is used.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 25

9. Developing section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

2
TCS

Signal name Name Function/Operation

DVM Developing drive motor Drives the developing section.
TCS Toner density sensor Detects the toner density.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Developer roller Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images.
2 Mixing roller Mixing of developer
3 DV filter AS Prevents dispersing of toner

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 26

B. Operational descriptions
This converts the electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum gen-
erated by the laser (writing) unit into visible images with toner.

12%FTWO

6QPGT
%CTTKGT
&GXGNQRKPITQNNGT

0QPFGXGNQRKPI &GXGNQRKPIOQFG
OQFG

Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively
charged due to mechanical friction.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC
component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.

12%FTWO

6QPGT
%CTTKGT
&GXGNQRKPIOQFG

0QPFGXGNQRKPI &GXGNQRKPIOQFG
OQFG

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 27

10. Transfer section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Transfer section

DM

2
3
4 TURM
5

7
6
8 BESTD

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 28

 Signal name Name Function/Operation
BESTD Belt estrangement sensor Detects the estrangement of the belt.
DM Drum motor Drives the drum.
TURM TC unit estrangement motor Pressure welding or estrangement the transfer unit to the drum.
TC TC roller output TC roller high voltage
TC_CL TC cleaning roller output TC cleaning roller high voltage

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Transfer belt Toner on the drum is transferred to form toner images on the belt.
2 Transfer drive roller Drives the transfer belt.
3 Transfer roller Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the transfer belt.
4 Back up roller Holds the belt position in the registration section in the process control.
5 Transfer follower roller Transfer belt follower.
6 Transfer idle roller Transfer belt follower.
7 Belt cleaning roller Transfer belt back surface cleaning.
8 Transfer front paper guide Transfer front paper guide

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Transfer operation
1) A toner image on photoconductor drum is transferred to trans-
fer belt by applying positive high voltage on transfer roller.

7UDQVIHUUROOHULVSRVLWLYHO\FKDUJHGDQG
QHJDWLYHFKDUJHGWRQHURQGUXPLVWUDQVIHUUHG
WRDSDSHU
-

- 7UDQVIHUFOHDQLQJUROOHULVSRVLWLYHO\FKDUJHG
- DQGZDVWHWRQHURQWKHEHOWLVFROOHFWHGRQ
-
WUDQVIHUFOHDQLQJUROOHU
-
- +
- -
- -
-
+

7RQHU

(2) Cleaning operation

1) For cleaning, the polarity of voltage applied to transfer roller is
set to negative first. Then waste toner on the transfer belt is
transferred to photoconductor drum next. Lastly the toner is
cleaned off by a cleaning blade so that the toner is transferred
to waste toner section.

7UDQVIHUUROOHULVQHJDWLYHO\FKDUJHGDQG
ZDVWHWRQHURQWKHEHOWLVWUDQVIHUUHGWR
-

-
7UDQVIHUFOHDQLQJUROOHULVQHJDWLYHO\FKDUJHG
-
DQGZDVWHWRQHULVVSUHDGWRWKHEHOW
-

- -

-
-

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 29

11. Waste toner section

WTM

WTSD

WTFD

Signal name Name Function/Operation

WTFD Waste toner full detector Detects full of waste toner.
WTM Waste toner motor Transport waste toner.
WTSD Waste toner shutter open/close detection Detects open/close of the waste toner shutter.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 30

12. Fusing section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

FUM

WEBEND1

TH_US

TH_UM
5
TS_M
1 5
TS_S
WEBS
TH_LM
WEBM1 POD1
FPFD
HL_UM/HL_US/HL_UW
2

4
WEBEND2

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 31

 Signal name Name Function/Operation
FPFD Fusing front paper pass detector Detects paper pass in front of the fusing section.
FUFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing section.
HL_LM/US/UW Heater lamp lower main Heats the fusing roller.
POD1 Fusing paper exit detector Detects paper pass in the fusing section.
TH_LM Fusing temperature sensor lower Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing roller.
TH_UM Fusing temperature sensor upper (Main) Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing roller.
TH_US Fusing temperature sensor upper (Sub) Detects the suffered temperature at the edge section of the fusing roller.
TS_M Thermostat upper (Main) Shuts down the heater lamp circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS_S Thermostat upper (Sub) Shuts down the heater lamp circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
WEBEND1 Web end detector Detects web end of the fusing unit.
WEBEND2 Web end detector Detects web end of the fusing unit.
WEBM1 Fusing web motor Drives the fusing web roller.
WEBS WEB drive control solenoid Drives the WEB.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Fusing roller (Heating) Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
2 Fusing roller (Pressing) Presses toner on paper to fuse.
3 Fusing web roller1 Cleans the fusing roller (Heating).
4 Fusing web roller2 Cleans the fusing roller (Pressing).
5 Separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller.

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Fusing unit drive
1) For driving the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from (WUKPITQNNGT *GCVKPI
the drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the (WUKPITQNNGT 2TGUUKPI
upper heat roller gear.
Driving by the drive motor (DC Brush-less motor) is performed
according to the control signal sent from the PCU.

PCU FUM

(2) Heater lamp drive

1) The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the
thermistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower
than the specified level, the heater lamp ON signal is sent from
the PCU to the heater lamp drive circuit on the HL PWB. The fusing heat roller (heating) is provided with three/two
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, heater lamps, which heat the fusing roller to fuse toner onto
and the AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the paper.
lamp and heating the heat roller. The fusing rollers (pressing) are made of silicon rubber
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat because of the following reasons and purpose.
roller, the thermostat is provided for safety. a) Paper is separated upward. (Since the fusing roller (heat-
When the thermostat is opened, the power supply (AC line) to ing) is of higher hardness, the fusing roller (pressing) is
the heater lamp is cut off. deformed to separate paper upward.)
(3) Fusing operation b) The nip quantity is increased to increase heat capacity for
paper.
1) Toner on paper is heated and pressed to be fused by the heat
roller. c) By pressing paper with the flexible roller, toner is fused
without deformation.
(4) Fusing temperature control
1) The temperature sensor is provided at the center of the fusing
roller (heating).
The roller temperature is detected by the thermistor sensor,
and the heater lamp is controlled so that the temperature is
maintained at the specified level.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 32

(5) Roller cleaning
1) The fusing roller is cleaned by the web.
Remaining toner on the upper fusing roller is cleaned by the
web with silicon included.
The web unit is provided in the upper section of the fusing
roller, and is composed of the feeding section of the web
sheet, the winding section, and the backup roller which
pressed the web sheet onto the fusing roller.

:HEUROOHU

(WUKPITQNNGT *GCVKPI
(WUKPITQNNGT 2TGUUKPI

(WUKPITQNNGT *GCVKPI
(WUKPITQNNGT *GCVKPI
:HEUROOHU

(6) Web end detection

1) The judgment of web end is made by the fusing web send
counter for near end, and the web life end detection, which-
ever is earlier.
When the web life end is detected, the warning display is
made, and the machine is stopped the operation.
Warning display content: Maintenance required. Code: FK3
FK4
When the web is replaced with a new one and the web counter
is cleared, the warring display disappears.
The new web is not automatically detected.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 33

13. Duplex/paper exit section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Duplex section

ADUM1

POD3
1 TFD3
2 ADUGS

PRTPD
DSW_ADU
APPD1
3
4
ADUM2

APPD2

Signal name Name Function/Operation

ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
ADUM1 ADU motor lower Drive the transport roller 19, 20 and the paper exit roller 2.
ADUM2 ADU motor upper Drive the transport roller 21, 22.
APPD1 ADU paper pass detector 1 Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU paper pass detector 2 Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
DSW_ADU ADU open/close detector Detects open/close of the duplex (ADU) cover.
POD3 Right paper exit detector Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
PRTPD Paper exit tray paper detector (Right paper exit tray) Detects paper empty in the paper exit tray (Right paper exit tray).
TFD3 Paper exit tray full detector (Right paper exit tray) Detects the right tray paper exit full.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Transport roller 16 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the exit roller 1 to the transport roller 14 and the exit roller 2.
2 Right exit gate Selects the paper path: to transport paper to the ADU section or to the right tray.
3 Paper exit roller 2(Drive) Discharges paper to the right side.
4 Transport roller 14(Drive) Transports paper transported from the switchback section to the transport roller 15.
5 Transport roller 15(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 14 to the transport roller 11.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 34

(2) Paper exit section

POM
TFD2

POD2

POFM_6
1

POFM_5

Signal name Name Function/Operation

POD2 Paper exit tray detector Detects paper exit to the paper exit tray.
POFM_5 Paper exit cooling fan motor F Cools paper after fusing.
POFM_6 Paper exit cooling fan motor R
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
TFD2 Paper exit full detector Detects paper full in the paper exit tray.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Paper exit roller 1(Drive) Discharges paper to the left side.

B. Operational descriptions (2) Paper exit

(1) Duplex * Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 16 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
* Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
paper exit roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray.
port roller 16 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
* When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the
paper exit roller 1. At that time, paper is passed under the ADU
reverse gate guide. paper exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely.
Paper is passed through the right paper exit gate, and dis-
* When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead
charged to the right tray.
edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and
rotates reversely after the specified time..
* By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is
sent to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the
upper side of the Ado gate which lowers by its own weight.
* The transport rollers 15 are driven by the ADU motor 2 to trans-
port paper to the duplex paper feed position.
* Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then
transported to the machine again.

MX-M7570 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 35

 '(5,9(5< 81,7 )8)0 '63) 81,7 63(' 63/6
[14]
632' 675& 63)&
:(%0 )8)0 633'
MX-M7570

678' 6755& 655& 63(' 63/6

32' 32)0 )80 32)0 710 7)6' 633'
721(5 81,7 67/' 237,21 6/80 63:6 6&29
7)' 32)0 320 32)0 &580 71+0 633' 67036
633' 6320 &&' 3:%
3)0 32)0 71+0 633'
635'0' /(' 3:%
62&'
6/&29
'9)0
'0 63))$1 '63)FQW 3:%
)86(5 81,7 63)0
1. Block diagram

'9)0
'90
)3)' :(%(1'
&&0 6&$11(5 81,7
A. System block diagram

7+B80 :(%(1' 6&1027+(5 3:% 0,0

&&0'
7+B86 :(%6 /(' '5,9(5 3:% /(' 3:%
0$,1 '5,9( 81,7 2&6:
7+B86 &&' 3:%
0+36
+/B80 352&(66 81,7
7+B/0 256B/('
7+'9 23(5$7,21 81,7
+/B86 +8''9 728&+
237,21 $8',725
32' 256B3' 32:(56: 3:% 31&
2=)0 3$1(/ ྎ‴ྥࡅࡢࡳ
+/B8: 3636 37'/
1)& +20(.(< 3:% 237,21
ELECTRICAL SECTION

352)0
&&+3' '/
:+B6&1
'6:B) /9'6 3:% /&' ᪥ᮏྥࡅᶆ‽
3&6
550 '5,9(5 3:%
'6:B5 .(<%2$5'
໭⡿ྥࡅᶆ‽
᪥ᮏྥࡅタᐃ↓ࡋ 237,21
+3)0 '5,9(5 3:% '6:B) 7& 3:%
࢔ࢪ࢔ྥࡅ୍㒊237,21
'9 81,7
'6:B5/ :70 3&8 3:% :,5(/(66 /$1
7&6
36 81,7 237,21
71'6(7 :76' ,& &$5' 5($'(5 ᪥ᮏྥࡅࡢࡳ
'9&+
)$;
&3:' ᪥ᮏྥࡅᶆ‽
0& 3:% 3,5 3:%
33' /33' :7)' +''
237,21
UG &$66(77( UG &$66(77( 7$1'(0 7$1'(0 0)3& 3:%
5,*+7 '225 81,7 QG 75$< QG 75$<
)$;
&66B &66B &3)0
$'80 )$;
&38& &38& 733' 733' 375& /68 81,7 ᪥ᮏྥࡅࡢࡳ
$'80
&/80 &/80 375& /68 FQW 3:%
5' ,)
3:% &63' &63' 763' 763' 775& %' 3:%

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 1

᪥ᮏྥࡅᶆ‽ 7850 /' 3:% 3*0
ᾏእ237,21 &3)' &3)' 738&
Service Manual

7/80 /68)0
32' %(67' &386 &386 7386 7386
738& 36)0
7)' '6:B$'8 +/ 3:% &/8' &/8' 7/8' 7/8'
7/80 36)0
3573' $'8*6 &3(' &3(' 73(' 73('
᪥ᮏྥࡅࡢࡳ
3'33'
3$3(5 )(('  81,7 3$3(5 )(('  81,7 3$3(5 )(('  81,7 3$3(5 )(('  81,7
038& 67$786 3'370
03(' $33' 3'33'
&2,19(1'(5 ,1',&$725
03)6 $33' 3'26
/&& ),1,6+(5 3'3*6
,11(5 3$66
0723 0723 :+B/&& /&& ),1,6+(5
'&36
06: 237,21
03/' 03)' ᪥ᮏྥࡅᶆ‽
237,21
03:' 03*6
7+0 237,21 237,21 237,21 :+ 3:% $& 3:%
+8'0
:+B6:
0$18$/ 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 :+B&6 :+B&6 :+B71' ᪥ᮏྥࡅ㸸$&:+ 3:%
ᾏእྥࡅ㸸$& 3:%  :+ 3:% 2SWLRQ
᪥ᮏྥࡅᶆ‽ ᪥ᮏྥࡅᶆ‽
$& ,1
 㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻔㻞㻡㻢㼗㼎㼕㼠㻕 㻹㼁㼄 㻰㻿㼃㼋㻭㻰㼁㻛㼀㻲㻰㻟㻛㻹㼀㻻㻼㻝
㻴㻯㻝㻡㻝 㻛㻹㼀㻻㻼㻞㻛㻹㻼㻸㻰㻝㻛㻹㻼㻱㻰
B. PCU PWB

㻭㼐㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㼎㼡㼟 㻾㻰㻌㻵㻛㻲㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻾㻱㻿㻱㼀㻌㻵㻯 㻲㼘㼍㼟㼔㻾㻻㻹
㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼎㼡㼟
㻔㻝㻢㻹㼎㼕㼠㻕

㼄㻓㼠㼍㼘㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 㻿㻾㻭㻹
㻝㻠㻚㻣㻠㻡㻢㻹㻴㼦 㻰㻯㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻔㻝㻹㼎㼕㼠㻕
㻯㻯㻹㻛㼀㼁㻾㻹
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻲㻭㻺 㼃㻱㻮㻱㻺㻰㻝㻛㼃㻱㻮㻱㻺㻰㻞㻛㻼㻻㻰㻝㻛㻼㻻㻰㻞㻛㼀㻲㻰㻞㻛㻼㻾㼀㻼㻰㻛
㻼㻻㻲㻹㻝㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻟㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻠㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻡㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻢㻛㻲㼁㻲㻹㻝㻛 㻼㻻㻰㻟㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻲㻞㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻾㻛㻼㻼㻰㻞㻛㻹㻼㻲㻰㻛㻭㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㻭㻼㻼㻰㻞㻛
㻲㼁㻲㻹㻞㻛㻰㼂㻲㻹㻝㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹 㻮㻱㻿㼀㻰㻛㻯㻯㻹㻰㻛㻯㻯㻴㻼㻰㻛㻰㼂㻯㻴㻝㻛㻰㼂㻯㻴㻞㻛㻰㼂㻯㻴㻟
㻯㻾㼁㻹
㻹㻲㻼㻯 㻯㻾㼁㻹 㻰㼞㼡㼙㻌㻸㼍㼙㼜㻌㻻㼜㼑㼚㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻰㻸㻝㼋㻻㻼㻱㻺

㼁㻭㻾㼀 㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻛㻲㼍㼚㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻼㻹㻯㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌㻝 㻿㼠㼑㼜㼜㼕㼚㼓㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞 㻲㼁㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻲㼁㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛
㻿㻯㻺㻙㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞 㻿㻯㻵
㻼㻹㻯 㻼㻻㻹㻛㻭㻰㼁㻹㻝㻛㻭㻰㼁㻹㻞㻛㻼㻲㻹㻛㼃㻱㻮㻹㻛㼀㻺㻹㻛㼀㻺㻴㻹㻝㻛㼀㻺㻴㻹㻞 㻼㻻㻲㻹㻟㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻠㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻡㼋㻸㻰㻛
㻼㻻㻲㻹㻢㼋㻸㻰㻛㻰㼂㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰

㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻸㻿㼁 㻹㻼㻲㻿㻛㻹㻼㻳㻿㻛㻭㻰㼁㻳㻿㻛㼃㻱㻮㻿㻛㻼㻿㻼㻿㻛㼀㻝㻼㼁㻿㻛㼀㻞㻼㼁㻿

㻼㼃㻹 㻰㼞㼡㼙㻌㼘㼍㼙㼜
㻰㻸㻝㻛㻼㼀㻰㻸
㻲㼡㼟㼑㼞㻌㼁㼚㼕㼠
㻲㼃 㻴㻸㼏㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻴㼂
㻰㻯㻼㻿 㻹㻯㻛㻴㼂㼋㻾㻱㻹㻛㼀㻯㼋㻰㻾㻛㼀㻯㼋㻯㻸㻛㼀㻯㼋㻭㻯㻛㼀㻯㻗㻛㼀㻯㻙
㻴㻸㼋㼁㻹㻛㻴㻸㼋㼁㻿㻛㻴㻸㼋㻸㻹
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㼀㻝㻼㻱㻰㻛㼀㻞㻼㻱㻰㻛㻯㻟㻼㻲㻰㻛㻯㻟㻼㻱㻰㻛㻯㻠㻼㻲㻰㻛㻯㻠㻼㻱㻰㻛
㻯㻟㻿㻼㻰㻛㻯㻠㻿㻼㻰㻛㼀㻝㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㼀㻞㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㼀㻝㻿㻼㻰㻛㼀㻞㻿㻼㻰㻛
㻲㻭㻺
㻰㻿㼃㼋㻾㻸㻝㻛㻯㻠㻿㻿㻝㻙㻿㻿㻠㻛㻯㻟㻿㻿㻝㻙㻠㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻲㻝㻛㼀㻝㻸㼁㻰㻛
㻰㼂㻲㻹㻞㻛㻸㻿㼁㻲㻹㻛㻼㻾㻻㻲㻹㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㻝㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㻞
㼁㻭㻾㼀 㼀㻞㻸㼁㻰㻛㻯㻟㻸㼁㻰㻛㻯㻠㻸㼁㻰㻛㼃㼀㻲㻰㻛㼃㼀㻿㻰㻛㼀㻺㻰㻿㻱㼀㻛㻸㻼㻼㻰
㻸㻯㻯 㻼㻰㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㻼㻰㻼㻼㻰㻞㻛㻼㻰㻻㻿

㻿㼠㼑㼜㼜㼕㼚㼓㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞 㻴㼂㻌㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞
㻼㻹㻯
㻴㻼㻲㻹㻛㻼㻰㻼㼀㻹 㻹㻯㼋㻱㻾㻾㻛㼀㻯㼋㻱㻾㻾
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻲㻵㻺
㻴㻸㻌㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻾㼑㼘㼑㼥 㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻛㻲㼍㼚㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻯㻼㼁 㻴㻸㼋㻼㻾 㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠
㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟 㻼㻹㻯㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌㻞 㼃㼀㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻯㻼㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻰㼂㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰㻛㻸㻿㼁㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰
㼀㻝㻼㼁㻯㻛㼀㻞㻼㼁㻯㻛㻼㼀㻾㻯㻝㻛㻼㼀㻾㻯㻞㻛㼀㼀㻾㻯 㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻾㻻㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰
㻛㻹㻼㼁㻯㻛㻯㻟㻼㼁㻯㻛㻯㻟㻼㼁㻿㻛㻯㻠㻼㼁㻯㻛㻯㻠㻼㼁㻿
㻰㻯 㻮㼘㼡㼟㼔㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞 㻛㻼㻰㻼㻳㻿
㻯㻸㻷
㻯㻼㻲㻹㻛㼃㼀㻹

㻰㻯㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㼀㻝㻸㼁㻹㻛㼀㻞㻸㼁㻹㻛㻯㻟㻸㼁㻹㻛㻯㻠㻸㼁㻹

㻯㼛㼕㼚㻌㼂㼑㼚㼐㼛㼞
㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㻼㼅㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻸㻯㻻㻼㼅

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 2

㻯㻼㻸㻰
㻯㼛㼕㼚㻌㼂㼑㼚㼐㼛㼞
㻯㼂㼋㻿㼀㻭㻾㼀㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㼁㻺㼀㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㻸㻻㻾㻝㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㻸㻻㻾㻜㻛
㻯㼂㼋㻯㻭㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻜㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻝㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻞㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻟㻛
㻯㼂㼋㻿㼀㻭㻼㻸㻱㻛㻯㼂㼋㻰㼁㻼㻸㻱㼄

㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻲㻼㻲㻰

㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻛㻲㼍㼚㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻲㼁㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻰㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻰㼂㻹㼋㻸㻰

㻯㻸㻷 㻰㻯 㻮㼘㼡㼟㼔㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻰㻹㻛㻰㼂㻹㻛㻲㼁㻹㻛㻾㻾㻹

㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠
㻼㻯㻿㼋㻸㻱㻰㻛㼀㻿㻳 㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㼁㻹㼋㻯㻿㻛㼁㻹㼋㻰㻛㼁㻹㻛㼁㻿㻝㼋㻯㻿㻛㼁㻿㻝㼋㻰㻛㼁㻿㻝㻛㻸㻹㻛㼁㻿㻞㻛
㻼㻯㻿㻛㼀㻯㻿㻛㼀㻲㻿㻰
㼀㻴㼋㻰㼂㻛㻴㼁㻹㼋㻰㼂
㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓 㼀㻴㼋㻹㻛㻴㼁㻰㼋㻹㻛㻹㻼㼃㻰㻛㻯㻠㻼㼃㻰
㻿㼃
 ,&&$5' 86%+RVW
86%૮଍ .H\%RDUG
1)&7DJ 5($'(5 7<3($&1
+'' *% /$1 ਨ৪67'
2SW )URQW

6$7$ +''
&1 1)&&1 :L)L&1 &1 86%&1
32:&1

6OLGH
6: ''52Q%RDUG
5HSHDWHU
*%
6$7$JHQ P6$7$ '63)&1
&1

0ESV
86%+RVW
''5

''5 86%,)
6$7$,) &&'&1
,) +RVW

&18SGDWH
C. MFP control PWB

86%+XE
86%
శᄭ૵୩ୠ
/$1-$&. )3'/,1.
/$1ୄਃৎ21 /&'&,)
5- 7UDQVPLWWHU

*ESV *3,2
6FDQ'DWD/9'6
/9'6 *RUJRQ
*0,, /9'6
(WKHU3+< (WKHU0$& 6&1,) %866:
5HFHLYHU
* * $6,&
86%'HYLFH )3'/,1.
86% 0ESV 7UDQVPLWWHU
86%,) /9'6 /68
'HYLFH /68,)
'HYLFH 5HXV
7<3(%&1 /9'6
8$57 FK
$6,& 5HFHLYHU
8$57 /9'6 /68&/. 6<1&
FK 32)
,17 ,17
FK 32)
Q)$;B3,&B,17 ᄭ૵୩ୠ
,17
FK /$1ୄਃৎ2)) ,& FK ,& FK
,17 &RQWUROOHU &RQWUROOHU 63,)ODVK
:DNH8S 0%
,17

0ESV
FK /RFDO%XV 3URJUDP

86%+RVW
,) /RFDO%XV
,17 &3/'
FK 6',)

3,&
(WKHU0$& 8$57 3&,H,) 3&,H,) ,& FK
57& %DWWHU\
* FK ODQH ODQH &RQWUROOHU 0LFRQ
,&
.+]

Q)$;B3,&B,17
%WR% 8$57
8$57 &RQWUROO
6HULDO&1 8$57 FK

5,& 3,1 &38
+6
8$57
'HEXJ

3&,H[JHQ
*ESV
8$57
86%+RVW )$; )$;
86%
0ESV &1 -3RQO\
+RVW
7<3($&1

63,)ODVK
0%

/68&1
86%+RVW 3&,H ,& ,& SLQ',3 '6.
86% ODQH 463,
,,& ,,& 62&.(7

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 3

7303:%
86%+RVW ((3520 8$57
86% NE &RQWUROO
730&1
86%+RVW
/9'6 /&' 5*%ELW

86% ,&
,,& 3&8&1
8$57
'HEXJ

)$; ,&
)$;2SW QG ,,&
&1 8$57

[ *HQ
)$; 1;3/6$ 730
)$;2SW UG &KLS
-3RQO\ &RUWH[$FRUH*+]
&1 *3,2
8$57 7RXFK
3DQHO
'8$57 &RQWUROOHU
8$57

'8$57
8$57

''5/
'8$57 6HULDO&1
8$57 'HEXJ

2Q%RDUG'5$0 0HPRU\
&RQWUROOHU
''5/*%
+3' 7RXFK31
H6'+& 6$7$ 3DQHO&1 3$1(/&1
&1 &1

/&' +XPDQ +20(/('

7RXFK 32:(5B.(<
P6$7$&1 32:(5B/('
3DQHO 'HWHFW 3DQHO %X]]HU +20(B/(' :8B.(<
/9'6 6HQVRU +20(B.(<
67$7(B/(' 5*
H00&*%
D. Scanner control PWB
㻿㻯㻺㻙㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻯㻺㼀䝤䝻䝑䜽ᅗ
㻰㻿㻼㻲㼏㼚㼠㻼㼃㻮 㻼㼍㼓㼑
㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥
㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮 㻸㻰㻻㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
䠄㻰㻿㻼㻲ഃ䠅 㼀㼞 㻾㻙㻾㻳㻮 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤㻌
㼀㼞 㻟㻡㼎㼕㼠
㼀㼞 㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌 㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻝㻜㼂 㻸㻰㻻 㻝㻞㼂
㼀㼞 㻭㻲㻱 㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞 㻳㼛㼞㼛㼓㼚 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㼀㼤
㻟㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻯㻯㻰 㻞㻤㼎㼕㼠
㼀㼞 㟁※ 㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻡㻚㻟㼂 㻝㻞㼂
㻸㻰㻻
㼀㼞

䝅䝸䜰䝹⣔⤫ 㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻸㻰㻻 㻡㼂

㻯㻼㼁
㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟 㻔㼀㼛㻌㻳㼛㼞㼓㼛㼚㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻕㻌㻝㻚㻞㼂 㻸㻰㻻 㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻸㻱㻰㻌㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾
㻸㻱㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻳㼛㼞㼓㼚㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻘㻌㻼㼍㼓㼑㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻕㻌㻝㻚㻡㼂 㻰㻯㻰㻯 㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻿㻾㻭㻹
㻯㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔
㻯㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻲㻙㻾㻻㻹
㻯㻸㻷㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻿㼀㻹㻼㻿
㻿㼀㻹㻼㻿 㻲㻙㻾㻻㻹
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻔㻿㼔㼍㼐㼕㼚㼓㻕
㻳㼛㼞㼓㼛㼚㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌
㏻ಙ௚ 㻔㼒㼛㼞㻌㻼㼍㼓㼑㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻕㻌
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞 㻯㻸㻷
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞 㻯㻼㼁㻌 㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞
㻯㻸㻷
㻳㼛㼞㼓㼛㼚㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻔㻝㻥㻚㻡㻣㻢㻹㻴㼦㻕
㻰㻿㻼㻲 㻲㻭㻺 㻔㼒㼛㼞㻌㻌㼞㼑㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼏㼑㻕㻌
㻰㻿㻼㻲㻌㻲㻭㻺
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞

㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞

㟁※

㻹㻲㻼㻯㻼㼃㻮
㻿㻯㻺㻙㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻯㻺㼀㻼㼃㻮
㻯㻼㼁䜈
㻯㻯㻰㻙䠢㻌㻼㼃㻮
䠄ᮏయഃ䠅
Page
㼀㼞
Memory
㼀㼞
㼀㼞 㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌 㻲㻙㻾㻳㻮
㻭㻲㻱 㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤㻌
㼀㼞
㻟㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻯㻯㻰 㼀㼞 䡸䢔䡭䢕⣔⤫ 㻟㻡㼎㼕㼠
㼀㼞 㻯㻼㼁䜈
㟁※

㻮㼁㻿
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌 㻾㻱㼁㻿
㻿㼃
㻵㻯㻌㼀㼤
㻞㻤㼎㼕㼠

㻳㼛㼞㼓㼛㼚
㻭㻿㻵㻯

ཎ✏䝃䜲䝈
᳨▱䝉䞁䝃
㻯㻼㼁
㻱㻞㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟 㻯㻼㼁䜈 㼡㼍㼞㼠௚

㻹㼕㼞㼞㼛㼞
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞 㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾
㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾
㻿㻾㻭㻹
㻔㻝㻹㼎㻕
㻸㻱㻰㻌㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾㻌
㻸㻱㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻼㼃㻮

㻹㻴㻼㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞 㻲㼘㼍㼟㼔㻾㻻㻹

㻻㻯㻿㼃
㻸㻰㻻㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻭㼁㻰㻵㼀㻻㻾 㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻝㻜㼂 㻸㻰㻻 㻝㻞㼂
㻔㻻㻼㼀㻛ྎ‴ྥ䛡䛾䜏㻕
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻡㻚㻟㼂 㻝㻞㼂
㻸㻰㻻
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻸㻰㻻 㻡㼂

㻔㼀㼛㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻕㻌㻝㻚㻞㼂 㻸㻰㻻 㻟㻚㻟㼂

ྛ✀ಙྕ㻔㻲㻭㼄⏝㻕
㻲㻭㼄㻌㼁㻺
㻔㻻㻼㼀㻕
䠄᪥ᮏྥ䛡䛾䜏㻕 㟁※ 㻰㻯㻰㻯㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚

㻔ᇶᯈୖ㻘㻰㻿㻼㻲㻯㻺㼀㻌㼑㼠㼏㻕㻌㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻰㻯㻰㻯䡶䢙 㻡㼂㻸

㻔㼀㼛㻌㻳㼛㼞㼓㼚㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻘㻌㻼㼍㼓㼑㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻕㻌㻝㻚㻡㼂 㻰㻯㻰㻯䡶䢙 㻟㻚㻟㼂

᚟ᖐ䝖䝸䜺
㻯㻸㻷㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻿㻼㻱㻰
㻳㼛㼞㼓㼛㼚㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌
ྑ䝖䝺䜲 㻔㼒㼛㼞㻌㻼㼍㼓㼑㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻕㻌
㻯㻸㻷
㻯㻼㼁㻌 㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞
㻯㻸㻷
㻳㼛㼞㼓㼛㼚㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻔㻞㻡㻹㻴㼦㻕
㻔㼒㼛㼞㻌㻌㼞㼑㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼏㼑㻕㻌

㻼㻵㻯
㻼㻻㻲ಙྕ 㻸㻭㻺㼏㼚㼠ಙྕ㻛㏻ಙせồ㻛㻼㻻㻲

㻾㼥㼏㼚㼠㻛㻻㻲㻲㼏㼚㼠ಙྕ
㻼㻻㻲
㻿㻯㼁㻌㻯㻼㼁䜈

㻺㻲㻯㻌㻴㻻㻹㻱㻌㻷㻱㼅㻌㻼㼃㻮 㻰㻿㻼㻲㻯㻺㼀㻌㻯㻼㼁䜈
㟁※ 㟁※

㻼㻻㻲㻞
㻿㻯㼁㻌㻯㻼㼁䜈
ྛ✀ಙྕ㻔㼀㻼⏝㻕 㼀㻼ไᚚ㻵㻯 㻵㻞㻯
㼀㻼㻭㻺㻱㻸㻌㼁㻺 㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾㻌㻿㼃㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻿㼃ಙྕ

㻸㻯㻰㻌㼁㻺
ྛ✀ಙྕ㻔㻸㻯㻰⏝㻕

㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻼㼃㻮 㟁※

㻸㻯㻰㼐㼍㼠㼍

㻴㼡㼙㼍㼚㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞

㻿㼅㻺㻯 㻿㼅㻺㻯

㻸㻿㼁㼏㼚㼠㻌㻼㼃㻮
⏬ീ㼐㼍㼠㼍 ⏬ീ㼐㼍㼠㼍

㟁※

㼁㻿㻮

㼃㻵㻲㻵 㟁※

㻵㻯㻌㻯㻭㻾㻰 㼁㻿㻮㻌㻯㻺㻌㻼㼃㻮 㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼁㻮

㻭㼡㼐㼕㼛
㻾㻱㻭㻰㻱㻾
㻷㻱㼅㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮 㟁※
㻔㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻌㼁㻿㻮㻕

㻟㻚㻟㼂㼋㻱㻯㻻

㻞㻠㼂㻛㻡㼂㼛㻛㻡㼂㻸

㻡㼂㻸 㻡㼂㻻 㻞㻠㼂 㻡㼂㼛

㟁※
㻝㻞㼂㻺
㻾㼥㼏㼚㼠㻛㻻㻲㻲㼏㼚㼠ಙྕ 㻹㻭㻵㻺㻰㻯㻌
㻰㻯㻯㻺㼀㻌㻼㼃㻮 㻼㼃㻮
㏻ಙ௚

㻾㼥㼏㼚㼠ಙྕ
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻼㻻㻲ಙྕ

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 4

 㻻㻼㻱㻌㼁㻺 㻸㼂㻰㻿㼋㻼㼃㻮 㻿㻯㻺㼋㻹㻻㼀㻴㻱㻾㼋㻼㼃㻮
㻲㻵㻙㻾㻱㻠㻝㻿㻙㻴㻲 㻡㻜㻟㻥㻜㻤㻙㻠㻝㻜㻜
㻝㻜㻚㻝㻸㻯㻰㻌㻌㼁㻺 㻯㻺 㼀㼔㼕㼚㻌㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌 㻯㻺㻞 㻯㻺㻝 㻯㻺
㻠㻜㻼㼕㼚 㼏㼛㼍㼤㼕㼍㼘㻌㼏㼍㼎㼘㼑 㻠㻝㻼㼕㼚 ᕪືಙྕ 㼀㻯㻸㻷 㻲㻼㻰㻌㻸㼕㼚㼏 㻾㼇㻣㻦㻞㼉 㻲㻼㻰㻌㻸㼕㼚㼏 ᕪືಙྕ 㼀㻯㻸㻷 㻠㻝㻼㼕㼚 㻲㻲㻯
ᕪືಙྕ 㼀㼄㼋㻻㼁㼀㻜 㻵㻯㻞 㻳㼇㻣㻦㻞㼉 㻵㻯㻝 ᕪືಙྕ 㼀㼄㼋㻻㼁㼀㻜
ᕪືಙྕ 㼀㼄㼋㻻㼁㼀㻝 㻯㻟㻤㻡 㻮㼇㻣㻦㻞㼉 㻯㻲㻟㻤㻢 ᕪືಙྕ 㼀㼄㼋㻻㼁㼀㻝
ᕪືಙྕ 㼀㼄㼋㻻㼁㼀㻞 ᕪືಙྕ 㼀㼄㼋㻻㼁㼀㻞
㻯㻸㻷
E. Operation unit

(1$%

㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻟㻚㻟㼂

㻯㻯㻲㼀㼋㼛㼡㼠 㻛㻯㻯㻲㼀

㻰㻵㻿㻼㼋㼛㼡㼠 㻮㻷㻸㼀㼋㻱㻺

㻵㻯㻮㻝 㻼㻿㼀㻤㻠㻞㻣㼁㻾 㻵㻯㻠 㻹㻼㻞㻟㻜㻟㻭㻰㻺

㻟㻚㻟㼂 㼂㻸㻱㻰㻌㻔㻢㻚㻟㼂㻕 㻞㻠㼂

㼂㻸㻱㻰㻌㻔㻢㻚㻟㼂㻕
㻵㻯㻟 㻮㻰㻜㻜㻵㻯㻜㼃㻱㻲㻶
㻟㻚㻟㼂 㼚㻸㻯㻰㼋㻰㻵㻿㻼
㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻡㼂

㻺㻲㻯㻌㻴㻻㻹㻱㻌㻷㻱㼅㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻯㻺 㻯㻺
㻴㼛㼙㼑㻌㼗㼑㼥 㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㼔㼍㼞㼚㼑㼟㼟

㻴㼛㼙㼑㻌㻸㻱㻰

㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻙㼟㼍㼢㼕㼚㼓
㻿㼃

㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻙㼟㼍㼢㼕㼚㼓
㻸㻱㻰

㻺㻲㻯㻌㼀㼍㼓

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 5

㻯㻺 㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾㼋㻿㼃㼋㻼㼃㻮 㻯㻺 㻯㻺 㻯㻺 㻯㻺
㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㼔㼍㼞㼚㼑㼟㼟
㼀㼛㼡㼏㼔㻌㼜㼍㼚㼑㼘

㻮㼡㼦㼦㼑㼞

㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻿㼃

㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻸㻱㻰

㻯㻺 㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㼔㼍㼞㼚㼑㼟㼟 㻯㻺 㻯㻺

㻷㼑㼥㼎㼛㼍㼞㼐
F. LSU PWB

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 6

 LIU EX PWB FAX MAIN PWB
TEL/LIU Voltage
Silicon DAA Connector 3.3V 1.8V MDM3.3V
Regulator
Si3056 CHIP SET
AFE_CLK
(1) MX-FX15

AFE_RES- STATUS LED_1

ASPCLK PROGRAM
G. FAX section

ABITCLK 16bit
MJ1 ARXD
FLASH ROM
Si3019 Si3056 ATXD 16Mb
(LINE)
SPK(analog) STATUS LED_2
16bit (Not mount)
MODEM

Crystal WORK
Resonator
24.576MHz MEMORY
16bit RESET- 3.3V
(Not mount) RESET IC
SDRAM
64Mbit

+5V
MDM3.3V +3.3V
Filter
+5VA MFP IF
Speaker
16bit Connector
BZ

EN_SPKON- With secure

Speaker Power Volume EN_BZON- +1.2V locking
DCDC device
Connector Amplifier Change
S02B- VOLA SPI Flash
PASK VOLB +24V
VOLC
SPI (Not mount)
VOLD Diag Soft +3.3V +5V
16Mbit DCDC
SPMUTE-

RGDT-(CI᳨ฟ) +5VS

MON_24V- +24V +24V

Detection
CI2- RES_FAX-

DATA_RXD_P
DATA_RXD
DATA_RXD_N
CI LVDS
CI- DATA_TXD_P
Detection DATA_TXD
DATA_TXD_N
FAX_CTS(D)-

FAX_RTS(D)-
CPU CMD_RXD_P
CMD_RXD
CMD_RXD_N
LVDS CMD_TXD_P
CMD_TXD
CMD_TXD_N

FAX_CTS(CS)-
S relay
+5VS FAX_RTS(CS)-

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 7

FLVPP
MJ2
(TEL) MODEL ID voltage
level
OFF fock
detection MODEL ID2 voltage
level
EXHS- CNCT_FAX-
JTAG
JTAG Connector
SON1 14pin
UART (Not mount)
CID-
Download
Crystal Log
Resonator Connector
+24V (Not mount)
+12
13.333MHz
䊼 PICPGM_EN
PIC +12V +24
CI Fi䡈ter
microcomputer
CI Fi䡈ter UART

+5VS

WUP_FAX-

voltage TELID
1W┬䜶䝛䝰䞊䝗᫬ level
ືస voltage TELID2
level
 $&32:(5',$*5$0 (;

DC POWER SUPPLY

Voltage
$&3:% Conversion
+24V1
+24V2
+24V3
+24V4
+24V5
D001

+
AC IN F1 3DWWHUQ*$3 F001
L

~
~
20A/250V

-
A1 VR1 3DWWHUQ*$3
N/F
3DWWHUQ*$3
A. AC power line diagram

N
3DWWHUQ*$3
2. Power line diagram

F005

MAIN POWER SW

:+3:% 237,21 FW
Generating
Circuit
(1) AC power line diagram (100V series)

X001

Voltage
Conversion
F3 F4 + 5Vo
T2.0AH/250V T2.0AH/250V + 5VL

RY1
NC
WH_CNT
NO

24V3

WH-SW (OPTION) HL PWB

L2

L1
㼃㻭㻾㻹㻌㻴㻱㻭㼀㻱㻾
RY1
INT5V

TD1 TD2 TD4 /HL_PR

/&& 7$1 &66 &66 6&1 T1 G T1 G T1 G
+($7(5 +($7(5 +($7(5 +($7(5 +($7(5

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 8

237,21 237,21 237,21 237,21 237,21 T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR4
10W 10W 10W 10W 10W 1 1 1
HLOUT_US HLOUT_UM HLOUT_UW
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
㻸㻯㻯㻔㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺㻕 㻿㻯㻺㻌㼁㻺㻵㼀
6 6 6

㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞

HL_UM

HL_UW

HL_US

7+(50267$7 76B80

7+(50267$7 76B86
 $&32:(5',$*5$0 (;

DC POWER SUPPLY

Voltage
$&3:% Conversion
+24V1
+24V2
+24V3
+24V4
+24V5
D001

+
AC IN F1 3DWWHUQ*$3 F001
L

~
~
T10AH/250V

-
A1 VR1 3DWWHUQ*$3
N/F
F2 3DWWHUQ*$3
N
T10AH/250V 3DWWHUQ*$3

F005

MAIN POWER SW

:+3:% 237,21 FW
Generating
(2) AC power line diagram (200V series)

X001 Circuit

Voltage
Conversion
F3 F4 + 5Vo
T2.0AH/250V T2.0AH/250V + 5VL

RY1
NC
WH_CNT
NO

24V3

WH-SW (OPTION) HL PWB

L2

L1
㼃㻭㻾㻹㻌㻴㻱㻭㼀㻱㻾
RY1
INT5V

TD1 TD2 TD4 /HL_PR

/&& 7$1 &66 &66 6&1 T1 G T1 G T1 G
+($7(5 +($7(5 +($7(5 +($7(5 +($7(5

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 9

237,21 237,21 237,21 237,21 237,21 T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR4
10W 10W 10W 10W 10W 1 1 1
HLOUT_US HLOUT_UM HLOUT_UW
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
㻸㻯㻯㻔㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺㻕 㻿㻯㻺㻌㼁㻺㻵㼀
6 6 6

㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞

HL_UM

HL_UW

HL_US

7+(50267$7 76B80

7+(50267$7 76B86

)86,1*81,7
 㟁※⣔⤫ᅗ㸦㹔㸧

'&3681 6&1027+(53:% '63)&173:%

$ 9 9 93' $
93'
㻯㻸㼁㼀㻯㻴
$
9
㻿㻸㼁㻹
$
㻿㻻㻸㻱㻺㻻㻵㻰
/(''5,9(53:%
$ 1.5A 0.315A '5,9(5 㻿㻼㻻㻹
'&'& /('3:%
㻿㻼㼁㻲㻹
$ $
'ULYHU 㻹㻵㻹 '5,9(5 /('3:%

/9'63:% 9 9

$ /'2
9/9'6 0.8A
'&'& /&' 9 &&'3:%
/'2
B. DC power line diagram

$
256/('3:%
㻿㻼㻲㻲㻭㻺

0J(1608) 237,21
(1) DC power line diagram (24V)

0)3&3:%
)$;3:% 0;)/
-$3$121/<
0J(1608)

)$;3:% 237,21
0J(1608) 0;);

)$;3:% 67'
-$3$121/<
$9 &&'3:%
/'2
$9
/'2

0J

32:(56:3:%

5LJKW'RRU,)3:%
3&83:% $
9 7U 㼀㼁㻾㻹

'&'& 㻿㻻㻸㻱㻺㻻㻵㻰㻖㻟
㻭㻰㼁㻳㻿㻛㻹㻲㻼㻿㻛㻹㻼㻳㻿
$ 9 9 $
㼃㻱㻮㻹 9
0&3:%
9 7U 㻲㻭㻺㻖㻤
7U 㻰㼂㻲㻹㻝㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻝㻝㻘㻟㻘㻠㻘㻡㻘㻢㻛㻲㼁㻲㻹㻝㻘㻞

,& 㻭㻰㼁㻹㻝 7&3:%

,& 㻭㻰㼁㻹㻞
'5,9(53:%
,& 㻼㻲㻹 ,& 㻴㻼㻲㻹
$ 9 '6:B5
,& 㻼㻻㻹 㻰㻹

㻲㼁㻹
'6:B) ,179 ,179
)(7 㻹㻼㼁㻯

㻯㻯㻹
9 '/3:%
'&'&
㻸㻿㼁㻲㻹
$ 9 '5,9(53:%
9
,&
㻾㻾㻹
$

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 10

/683:% /'3:%
㼀㻺㻹
㻼㻳㻹
$
㼀㻺㻴㻹㻝
㻯㻼㻲㻹
$
㼀㻺㻴㻹㻞
㻰㼂㻹
$
7U 㼀㻝㻸㼁㻹
:+3:%
$
237,21 7U 㼀㻞㻸㼁㻹
$
㻯㻟㻸㼁㻹 㼃㼀㻹
7U
/&&
$
7U 㻯㻸㼁㻯㻴㻖㻣 㻼㼀㻾㻯㻝㻘㻞㻛㼀㼀㻾㻯㻛㼀㻝㻘㻞㻘㻟㻘㻠㻼㼁㻯
㻯㻠㻸㼁㻹
0;/&/& ,& 㻿㻻㻸㻱㻺㻻㻵㻰㻖㻢 㻼㻿㻼㻿㻛㼀㻝㻘㻞㻘㻟㻘㻠㻼㼁㻿㻛㼃㻱㻮㻿
7U 9
㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻖㻞
䠰䠢䠯䠠㻛㼀㻯㻿
7U 㻲㻭㻺㻖㻢
㻼㻾㻻㻲㻹㻛㻰㼂㻲㻹㻞㻛㻴㻰㻰㻲㻭㻺㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㻝㻘㻞㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹
7U
9UHI
Zener diode 㻯㻠㻼㼃㻰

,11(53$6681
$ 9
9
,& 㻼㻰㻼㼀㻹

㻼㻰㻼㻳㻿
0;5%

),1
237,21
0;)1)1
HWF
 㟁※⣔⤫ᅗ㸦929/㸧

'63)&173:%
6&1027+(53:% 9
'&3681
'&'& 㻿㻼㼃㻿

/'2
9/ 9/ PSW
㻿㻼㻸㻿㻝㻘㻞㻛㻿㻼㻱㻰㻝㻘㻞㻛㻿㻼㻼㻰㻝㻘㻞㻘㻟㻘㻠㻘㻡㻛㻿㻯㻻㼂㻛㻿㻸㻯㻻㼂㻛
㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾
㻿㻼㻻㻰㻛㻿㼀㼁㻰㻛㻿㼀㻸㻰㻛㻿㻼㻾㻰㻹㻰㻛㻿㻻㻯㻰
$9
/'2 &&'3:% $9
$ /'2 &&'3:%
2563'3:% 92

/9'63:% 9 92GXW\

$ 9B/9' 㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾
/'2 /&'
200J(3216)

㻻㻯㻿㼃
200J(3216)
㻹㻴㻼㻿 )$;3:%

0J(1608)
9/ 9
'&'& '&'&
9
1J(1608) 1J(1608)
92 9
'&'& 67'
3,53:%
$ -$3$121/<
92 92
(2) DC power line diagram (5V)

92GXW\
)(7
0J(1608)

92
,1)2/('3:% 5(' 1)&+20(.(<3:%
92
0)3&3:% $ 32:(56:3:%
92
,1)2/('3:% *5((1
'&'&
9B21
3,&

'&'&
9B21
0J

9/ $ 9/

237,21
)$;3:%
0;)/
9B(&2 92 -$3$121/<
'&'&

9B(&2 9/
'&'&
)$;3:% 237,21
9B62& 92 0;);
'&'&

9B62&
'&'&

9B62&
'&'&

9B(&2
'&'&

$ 9/
$ 5HDU 86%
)(7

$ $ 9/

+''

9/
:L)L
0J(1608)

1)&

9/
37& )URQW 86%
9/
37& .(<%2$5'

9/
&$5' 5($'(5

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 11

9/ 9/ 3&83:% $ 9 /683:% /'3:%
'&'&

91 $ 91

)(7 %'3:%

92GXW\ 5',)3:% 200J(3216) 92GXW\

㻼㻾㼀㻼㻰
91
㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾
㻹㻼㼃㻰㻛㼀㻴㼋㻹㻛㻴㼁㻰㼋㻹
91 200J(3216)
91
'5,9(53:% 㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾
㻼㻻㻰㻟㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻭㻰㼁㻛㻭㻼㻼㻰㻝㻘㻞㻛㻹㼀㻻㻼㻝㻘㻞㻛㻹㻼㻸㻰㻝㻛㼀㻲㻰㻟㻛㻮㻱㻿㼀㻰㻛㻹㻼㻱㻰㻛㻹㻼㻲㻰
,179+/
)(7 +/3:%
0J(1005)
91
&580
91
3&63:%
200J(3216) 91
㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾
㻯㻯㻹㻰㻛㻯㻟㻘㻠㻿㻼㻰㻛㼃㼀㻲㻰㻛㼃㼀㻿㻰㻛㼀㻺㻰㻿㻱㼀㻛㼀㻝㻘㻞㻿㻼㻰㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻾㻸㻝㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻲㻝
91
㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾 㻼㼀㻰㻸㻛㻯㻯㻴㻼㻰㻛㼀㻝㻘㻞㻼㻼㻰㻛㼀㻝㻘㻞㻘㻟㻘㻠㻼㻱㻰㻛㼀㻝㻘㻞㻘㻟㻘㻠㻸㼁㻰㻛㻯㻟㻘㻠㻼㻲㻰㻛㻯㻟㻿㻿㻝㻘㼋㻠㻛㻯㻠㻿㻿㻝㼋㻠㻛
㻼㻻㻰㻝㻘㻞㻛㻼㻼㻰㻞㻛㻸㻼㻼㻰㻛㼃㻱㻮㻱㻺㻰㻝㻘㻞㻛㻲㻼㻲㻰㻛㼀㻲㻰㻞㻛㼀㻴㼋㻰㼂㻛㻴㼁㻰㼋㻰㼂

237,21
,11(53$6681
200J(3216) 0;5%
91
㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾 㻼㻰㻻㻿

91
㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾 㻼㻰㻼㻼㻰㻝㻘㻞

91
0;/&/&
/&&
91 0;)1)1
),1,6+(5
HWF
 DC POWER PWB '63)'5,9(53:%
92 6&1027+(53:% '63)&173:%

$
92
+20(.(<3:%
3,&

92
)$;,1)2
/('3:%
)(7

,G$
)URQW86% 

92GXW\

SENSOR
㻌㻞㻜㻜Ω
3&8
SENSOR

9/
9/
0J(3216)
+''
0J(3216)

5$,'3:% +''

92
)$;3:%
7(//,83:%

9/

$

92
0)3&3:% )$;3:% 7(//,83:%

SC196
9/

SC196
ISL8016IRAJZ 9B(&2 9B21
'&' '&'

SC185HULTRT 9B21
'&' 9B(&2 '&'
)$;3:% 7(//,83:%
SC185QULTRT 9B(&2
'&'

9B$720
)(7
ISL6314
'&'
9B$720

ISL8016IRAJZ 9B$720 $&5(3:%

'&'

ISL8016IRAJZ 9B3&,
9B$720
'&' )(7 +66:

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 12

SC185JULTRT 9B$720 &/$
'&'

SC185QULTRT
5HDU86%
9B$720)(7 9B6
'&'
$

+66: )URQW86%

&/$ $
+66: .(<%2$5'

&/$ $
+66: :L)L

&/$

+66: &$5'5($'(5

&/$
 1
N.C. 3.3V (NC)
2
N.C. 3.3V (NC)
3
N.C. 3.3V (NC)
FAX PWB SCN MOTHER PWB MFPC PWB 4
GND
5
GND
MJ1 CN3 CN17 CN12 CN59 CN6 6
GND
1 1 30 1 1 1 7
--- PG PGND LCD_DATA0- LCD_DATA0- DGND 5VHD
2 2 29 2 2 2 8
--- DGND-5 GND LCD_DATA0+ LCD_DATA0+ 5VHD 5VHD
3 3 28 3 3 3 9
L1 +3.3V-4 N.C. N.C. NC LCD_DATA1- LCD_DATA1- DGND 5VHD A. MFP
4 4 27 4 4 10
L2 +3.3V-3 N.C. N.C. NC LCD_DATA1+ LCD_DATA1+ 179228-3 GND
5 5 26 5 5 292132-3 11
--- FAX_RTS(CS)- NFAXCS_CTS LCD_DATA2- LCD_DATA2- GND
6 6 25 6 6 12
--- +24V +24V LCD_DATA2+ LCD_DATA2+ GND
7 24 7 7 N.C.
13
FAX_CTS(CS)- NFAXCS_RTS LCD_CLK- LCD_CLK- 12V (NC)
JP021XX62X0I4D2X-01-G 8 23 8 8 N.C.
14
+5V2 +5V_A LCD_CLK+ LCD_CLK+ 12V (NC)
9 22 9 9 15
FAX_RTS(D)- NFAXD_CTS OPE_BKLT_EN LCD_DATA3- N.C. 12V (NC)
10 21 10 10 CN61
FLVPP N.C. N.C. NC CCFT LCD_DATA3+ 1 1
MJ2 11 20 11 11 DGND GND
FAX_CTS(D)- NFAXD_RTS NLCD_PVCCEN NLCD_DISP(OC) 2 2
1 12 19 12 12 SATA_TXP SATA_TXP
--- DGND-4 GND NHDS NC 3 3
2 13 18 13 13 SATA_TXN SATA_TXN
--- FAX_TXD(CS)- FAXCS_RXD_N SCANDATA3+ SCANDATA3+ 4 4
3 14 17 14 14 DGND GND
TEL1 DGND-3 GND SCANDATA3- SCANDATA3- 5 5
4 15 16 15 15 SATA_RXN SATA_RXN
TEL2 FAX_TXD(CS)+ FAXCS_RXD_P SCAN_CLKOUT+ SCANCLKOUT+ 6 6
5 16 15 16 16 SATA_RXP SATA_RXP
--- +5V-2 5V_(OFF) SCAN_CLKOUT- SCANCLKOUT- 7 7
6 17 14 17 17 DGND GND
--- FAX_TXD(D)+ FAXD_RXD_P SCANDATA2+ SCANDATA2+
18 13 18 18
FAX_WUP- NFAX_WUP SCANDATA2- SCANDATA2- IMSA-9813B-07Y901 SATA-7pin SATA-7pin&15pin
JP021XX62X0I4D2X-01-G 19 12 19 19 SATA SIGNAL&POWER
FAX_TXD(D)- FAXD_RXD_N SCANDATA1+ SCANDATA1+
20 11 20 20 CN21
DGND-2 GND SCANDATA1- SCANDATA1-
21 10 21 21 1
FAX_RXD(CS)- FAXCS_TXD_N SCANDATA0+ SCANDATA0+ VBUS
22 9 22 22 2
RES_FAX- NRES_FAX SCANDATA0- SCANDATA0- D-
CN1 23 8 23 23 3 USB2.0 HDD
FAX_RXD(CS)+ FAXCS_TXD_P CH0_N CH0_N D+
1 24 7 24 24 4
TX+ +5V-1 +5V_(OFF) CH0_P CH0_P GND (TYPE-A HOST)
2 25 6 25 25
RX+ FAX_RXD(D)+ FAXD_TXD_P CH1_N CH1_N
3 26 5 26 26 UAR27-4K5J00
RX- CNCT_FAX- NCNCT_FAX CH1_P CH1_P
4 27 4 27 27 CN18
TX- FAX_RXD(D)- FAXD_TXD_N CH2_N CH2_N
5 28 3 28 28 1
DGND +3.3V-2 N.C. N.C. NC CH2_P CH2_P VBUS
6 29 2 29 29
3. Actual wiring chart

RHS- +3.3V-1 N.C. N.C. NC CLK_N CLK_N 2

30 1 30 30 D-
DGND-1 GND CLK_P CLK_P 3 USB2.0
5749180-1 31 31 D+
CH3_N CH3_N 4
DF50-30DP-1V(51) DF50S-30DS-1C DF50S-30DS-1C 32 32 GND (TYPE-B DEVICE)
DF50-30DP-1V(51)
CH3_P CH3_P
33 33 UBR23-4K2200
CH4_N CH4_N
34 34 CN17
CH4_P CH4_P
35 35 1
ECLK_LSU_N ECLK_LSU_N RC_MDI_0P
36 36 2
ECLK_LSU_P ECLK_LSU_P RC_MDI_0N
37 37 3
HSYNC_LSU_P HSYNC_LSU_P RC_MDI_1P
38 38 4
HSYNC_LSU_N HSYNC_LSU_N RC_MDI_1N
39 39 5
VSYNC_K_N VSYNC_K_N RC_MDI_2P
40 40 6
VSYNC_K_P VSYNC_K_P RC_MDI_2N
LAN
41 41 7
NSSPND_DAC VSYNC_C_P RC_MDI_3P
CN4 42 42 8
S_AUDIO_EN VSYNC_C_N RC_MDI_3N
+ 1 SP+ 43 43
NNFC_INT_N VSYNC_M_N
2 SP- 44 44 24-010139U13-1
Fax Speaker - OFF_CNT VSYNC_M_P
45 45
179228-2 OPE_LED_R VSYNC_Y_P CN19
292250-2 46 46
TP_RST VSYNC_Y_N 1
47 47 NC
TP_SCL TP_SCL 2
48 48 232C_RXD
TP_SDA TP_SDA 3
49 49 232C_TXD
AUDIO_MUTE +5VL 4
50 50 232C_DTR
+5VL +5VL 5
51 51 DGND
+5VL +5VL 6
232C_DSR
+5VL
52
53
52
53
+5VL
232C_RTS
7
RS232C
+5VL +5VL 8
54 54 232C_CTS
+5VL +5VL 9
55 55 NC
+5VL +5VL
56 56
+5VL +5VL DBR30-091F100
57 57
+5VL +5VL CN15
58 58
+5VL +5VL 1
59 59 R_3R3V_ECO
RXD_DSPF_DEBUG DGND 2
60 60 RB_DSR_PCI
NPOF2_MFPC DGND 3
61 61 RB_RXD_PCI
USB_DN USB_DN_OUT 4
62 62 RB_GPI_CTS_PCI
USB_DP USB_DP_OUT 5
63 63 RB_GPO_CTS_PCI
VBUS_WIFI USB_VBUS_OUT 6
64 64 RB_TXD_PCI
USB_WIFI_P USB_RTN_P_IN 7
65 65 RB_DTR_PCI
USB_WIFI_N USB_RTN_N_IN 8
66 66 DGND
USB HUBRST PICVPPON
67 67
RXD_SCN RXD_SCN D_502382-0870
68 68
NCTS_SCN NCTS_SCN CN13
69 69
TXD_SCN TXD_SCN 1
70 70 GND
NRTS_SCN NRTS_SCN 2
71 71 +3.3V_F
NRES_SCN NRES_SCN 3
72 72 +3.3V_F
NRES_PCU NRES_PCU 4
73 73 FAXD_TXD_N
RXD_PCU RXD_PCU 5
74 74 nCNCT_FAX
NCTS_PCU NCTS_PCU 6
75 75 FAXD_TXD_P
TXD_PCU TXD_PCU 7
76 76 +5V_(off)
NRTS_PCU NRTS_PCU 8
77 77 FAXCS_TXD_P
NPOF_MFPC NPOF_MFPC 9
78 78 nRES_FAX
NREQ_PIC NREQ_PIC 10
79 79 FAXCS_TXD_N
NCLR_PIC NCLR_PIC 11
80 80 GND

Board to Board Connector

TXD_PIC TXD_PIC 12
81 81 FAXD_RXD_N
RXD_PIC RXD_PIC 13
82 82 nFAX_WUP
NFC_SCL PWM0 14
83 83 FAXD_RXD_P
NFC_SDA NFAN_CNT(RSV) 15
84 84 5V_(off)
NRST_PIC NRST_PIC 16
85 85 FAXCS_RXD_P
VBUS_STOP USB_FR_DIS 17
86 86 GND
PIC_PGC PWM1

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 13

87 87 18
NREQ_PIC_INT NREQ_PIC_INT FAXCS_RXD_N
88 88 19
FAX1D_TXD FAX1D_TXD GND
89 89 20
FAX1D_RXD FAX1D_RXD nFAXD_RTS
90 90 21
FAX1D_RTS FAX1D_RTS FLVPP
91 91 22
FAX1D_CTS FAX1D_CTS nFAXD_CTS
92 92 23
FAX1CS_TXD FAX1CS_TXD +5V_A
93 93 24
FAX1CS_RXD FAX1CS_RXD nFAXCS_RTS
94 94 25
FAX1CS_RTS FAX1CS_RTS +24V
95 95 26
FAX1CS_CTS FAX1CS_CTS nFAXCS_CTS
96 96 27
RES_FAX1 RES_FAX1 +3.3V_F
97 97 28
NCNCT_FAX1 NCNCT_FAX1 +3.3V_F
98 98 29
NWU_FAX2 NWU_FAX23_LAN GND
99 99 30
3R3V_ECO 3.3VECO_MFP_OUT PGND
100 100
NTP_INT NTP_INT DF50-30DP-1V(51) DF50S-30DS-1C
101 101
R_3R3V_ECO_NFC 3.3V_FAX
102 102 CN12
5VL_HDD 3.3V_FAX
103 103 1
5VL_HDD 3.3V_FAX GND
104 104 2
5VL_HDD NC +3.3V_F
105 105 3
5VO_FAX 5V0_FAX +3.3V_F
106 106 4
WOLAN_ON WOLAN_ON FAXD_TXD_N
107 107 5
RXD_SCU_DEBUG LCDSEL2 nCNCT_FAX
108 108 6
NSCU_RES_REQ LCDSEL3 FAXD_TXD_P
109 109 7
DGND DGND +5V_(off)
110 110 8
DGND DGND FAXCS_TXD_P
111 111 9
DGND DGND nRES_FAX
112 112 10
DGND DGND FAXCS_TXD_N
113 113 11
DGND DGND GND
114 114 12
DGND DGND FAXD_RXD_N
115 115 13
DGND DGND nFAX_WUP
116 116 14
DGND DGND FAXD_RXD_P
117 117 15
DGND DGND 5V_(off)
118 118 16
DGND DGND FAXCS_RXD_P
119 119 17
RXD_PCU_DEBUG NC GND
120 120 18
24V_FAX 24V_FAX FAXCS_RXD_N
19
GND
TX25-120P-LT-H1E TX24-120R-LT-H1E 20
nFAXD_RTS
21
FLVPP
22
nFAXD_CTS
23
+5V_A
24
nFAXCS_RTS
25
+24V
26
nFAXCS_CTS
27
+3.3V_F
28
+3.3V_F
29
GND
30
PGND
DF50-30DP-1V(51) DF50S-30DS-1C
 PCU PWB SCN MOTHER PWB CCD PWB
CN18 CN1
CN20 CN9 1 1
1 14 GND GND
PCU_TXD PCU_TXD CCD_SEL1 2 2
2 13 CCD_SEL1
PCU_RES PCU_RES CCD_SEL2 3 3
3 12 CCD_SEL2
PCU_RXD PCU_RXD CN_TE_P 4 4
4 11 CN_TE_P
/POF PCU_nPOF CN_TE_N 5 5
5 10 CN_TE_N
PCU_RTS PCU_RTS GND 6 6
6 9 GND
PRTPDOUT PCU_PRTPD CN_TD_P 7 7
7 8 CN_TD_P
PCU_CTS PCU_CTS CN_TD_N 8 8
8 7 CN_TD_N
5VO 5VO_DUTY GND 9 9
9 6 GND
B. Scanner

GND GND CN_TCLK_P 10 10

10 5 CN_TCLK_P
GND GND CN_TCLK_N 11 11
11 4 CN_TCLK_N
TXD_LOG PCU_LOG GND 12 12
12 3 GND
FW FW CN_TC_P 13 13
13 2 CN_TC_P
DCCNT DCCNT CN_TC_N 14 14
14 1 CN_TC_N
12V 12V GND 15 15
GND
1-353293-4 1-353293-4 CN_TB_P 16 16
1-292207-4 1-292207-4 CN_TB_P
CN_TB_N 17 17
CN_TB_N
GND 18 18
GND
CN_TA_P 19 19
CN_TA_P
CN_TA_N 20 20
CN_TA_N
GND 21 21
GND
A10V 22 22
A10V
A10V 23 23
A10V
GND 24 24
GND
A5V 25 25
A5V
A5V 26 26
A5V
A5V 27 27
A5V
GND 28 28
GND
A3.3V 29 29
A3.3V
A3.3V 30 30
A3.3V
A3.3V 31 31
A3.3V
A3.3V 32 32
A3.3V
A3.3V 33 33
A3.3V
A3.3V 34 34
A3.3V
GND 35 35
GND
RES_CCDAD 36 36
RES_CCDAD
AFE_CS 37 37
AFE_CS
AFE_SCLK 38 38
AFE_SCLK
AFE_SDIO 39 39
AFE_SDIO
CN_AFE_SDO 40 40
CN_AFE_SDO
GND 41 41
GND
GND 42 42
GND
GND 43 43
GND
GND 44 44
GND
GND 45 45
GND
GND 46 46
GND
GND 47 47
GND
GND 48 48
GND
GND 49 49
GND
GND 50 50
GND
FH48-50S-0.5SV FH48-50S-0.5SV
CN3
CN_AU_PNC 1
CN_AU_COPY 2
CN_AU_CA 3
CN_AU_READY 4
CN_AU_AUD 5
+5VL 6
GND 7
+24V 8
CN_COL 9
CN_AU_TC 10
+24V 11
CN_AU_nPNC-a 12
GND 13
1-440129-3
1-440054-3

CN19 292254-4 1
MIM_XB
MIM_XB 1 4 1 2
MIM_XB N.C. (NC)
MIM_B 2 3 2 3
MIM_B MIM_B
MIM_A 3 2 3 4
MIM_A MIM_A
MIM_XA 4 1 4 5 MIM
MIM_XA N.C. (NC)
6
173977-4 173977-4 179228-4 MIM_XA
292132-4
a-PDPTM b-PDPTM PHR-6 S6B-PH-K-S

CN16
MHPS 3 1
MHPS
GND 2 2
GND

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 14

5V_MHPS 1 3
5V_MHPS MHPS
292207-3 353293-3 173977-3

LED DRIVER PWB LED PWB

CN25 CN1 CN2 CN1
24V 5 1 1 1
+24VPD LED_ANODE LED_ANODE
24V 4 2 2 2
+24VPD GND N.C. N.C. GND
CL_ON 3 3 3 3
LAMP_ON/OFF LED_CATHODE/ LED_CATHODE/
GND 2 4 4
GND LED_ANODE/ 502380-0300
GND 1 5 5 502386-0370
GND GND N.C.
6
LED_CATHODE
5597-05CPB7F 5597-05APB7F 440129-6
440055-6

1
OCSW
2
GND
3
5V_OCSW
LED PWB
CN1
179228-3
OCSW 1
LED_ANODE/
2
CN20 N.C. GND
3
1 LED_CATHODE
OCSW 502380-0300
GND 2 ORS-LED PWB 502386-0370
5V_OCSW 3
24V 4 RD
+24V
/SIZE_LED1 5 PL
CN_nSIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED2 6 LB
CN_nSIZE_LED2
GY
179228-6 GND
292132-6
FGND

CN24 SRA-01T-3.2
NC 7
N.C.
PDSEL0 6 ORS-PD PWB
PDSEL1 5
1
4 PDSEL0
PDSEL2 2
3 PDSEL1
5V 3
2 PDSEL2
PD 4
1 5V
GND 5
PD
173977-7 6
292132-7 GND
173977-6 292250-6
 SCN MOTHER PWB CN22 CN1
LVDS PWB CN2
LCD module
GND 1 41 GND 3.3V 41 40 VCSS
nLCD_PVCCEN 2 40 nLCD_DISP 3.3V 40 39 VCSS
PNL_SEL 3 39 PNL_SEL 3.3V 39 38 VCSS
BKLT_EN 4 38 BKLT_EN 3.3V 38 N.C. N.C. 37 VEDID(NC)
GND 5 37 GND (NC) 37 N.C. N.C. 36 (NC)
GND 6 36 LCD_DATA3+ (NC) 36 35 CLKEDID(NC)
7 35 35 N.C. N.C. 34
GND LCD_DATA3- (NC) N.C. N.C. DATAEDID(NC)
GND 8 34 GND TX_OUT_0- 34 33 Rxin0-
LCD_CLK_P 9 33 LCD_CLK+ TX_OUT_0+ 33 32 Rxin0+
LCD_CLK_N 10 32 LCD_CLK- GND 32 31 VSS
GND 11 31 GND TX_OUT_1- 31 30 Rxin1-
LCD_A2_P 12 30 LCD_DATA2+ TX_OUT_1+ 30 29 Rxin1+
LCD_A2_N 13 29 LCD_DATA2- GND 29 28 VSS
GND 14 28 GND TX_OUT_2- 28 27 Rxin2-
LCD_A1_P 15 27 LCD_DATA1+ TX_OUT_2+ 27 26 Rxin2+
LCD_A1_N 16 26 LCD_DATA1- GND 26 25 VSS
GND 17 25 GND TCLK- 25 24 RxCLK-
LCD_A0_P 18 24 LCD_DATA0+ TCLK+ 24 23 RxCLK+
LCD_A0_N 19 23 LCD_DATA0- GND 23 22 VSS
GND 20 22 GND (NC) 22 21 (NC)
21 21 21 N.C. N.C. 20
CCFT /CCFT (NC) N.C. N.C. (NC) CN1
GND 22 20 (NC) GND 20 19 VSS 1
C. Operation panel

GND 23 19 (NC) (NC) 19 18 (NC) 5VL

N.C. N.C. 2
GND 24 18 (NC) (NC) 18 17 (NC) GND
25 17 17 N.C. N.C. 16 3
GND (NC) GND VSS NHDS PIR
GND 26 16 GND (NC) 16 N.C. N.C. 15 (NC) 353908-3
27 15 15 14 292228-3
+5V_LVDS +5V (NC) N.C. N.C. (NC)
+5V_LVDS 28 14 +5V GND 14 13 VSS
+5V_LVDS 29 13 +5V GND 13 12 LED GND
+5V_LVDS 30 12 +5V GND 12 11 LED GND
GND 31 11 GND GND 11 10 LED GND
GND 32 10 GND GND 10 9 LED GND
+24V_LVDS 33 9 +24V GND 9 8 LED GND
+24V_LVDS 34 8 +24V GND 8 7 LED GND
INFO LED PWB
+24V_LVDS 35 7 +24V CCFT_out 7 6 LED PWM
+24V_LVDS 36 6 +24V DISP_out 6 5 LED EN
(Green)
GND 37 5 GND GND 5 4 LED GND CN1
GND 38 4 GND VLED 4 3 LED VCCS 1 nFAX_INFO_LED
GND 39 3 GND VLED 3 2 LED VCCS 2 NC
40 2 2 1 N.C.
GND GND VLED LED VCCS 3 +5VO
GND 41 1 GND (NC) 1 N.C.
DF13-3S-1.25C DF13C-3P-1.25V(21)
FI-RE41CLS
503908-4100 503908-4100 FI-RNE41SZ-HF 20453-040T-01

292215-7
1 5VL 7
2 GND 6
3 NHDS 5
4 NFAX_INFO_LED 4
5 +5VO 3
CN23 6 GND 2 INFO LED PWB
7 INFO_LED_R 1
5VL 32
GND 31 353908-7 353908-7 CN1
(Red)
NHDS 30 a-KBD1 b-KBD1 1 GND
NFAX_INFO_LED 29
N.C. 2 NC
+5VO 28 POWER-SW PWB 3 INFO_LED_R
GND 27
26 292215-9 CN1
INFO_LED_R DF13-3S-1.25C DF13C-3P-1.25V(21)
GND 25 1 GND 9 1 GND
POW_SW 24 2 POW_SW 8 2 POW_SW
+5VO 23 3 +5VO 7 3 +5VO
POW_LED 22 4 POW_LED 6 4 POW_LED
BZR 21 5 BZR 5 5 BZR
20 6 4 6 CN2
XP_X1 XP_X1 XP_X1
YP_Y1 19 7 YP_Y1 3 7 YP_Y1 XN_X2 1
XN_X2 18 8 XN_X2 2 8 XN_X2 YN_Y2 2
YN_Y2 17 9 YN_Y2 1 9 YN_Y2 XP_X1 3
353908-9 N.C. 10 GND YP_Y1 4 TOUCH PANEL
1-353908-6 353908-9
a-KBD1 b-KBD1
502380-1000 502382-1070 IMSA-9619S-04Y800

CN2
SP- A-16 N.C. 1 +5VO
A-15 1-292215-4 2
SP+ N.C. WU_LED
+5VO A-14 1 +5VO 14 3 nWU_KEY
WU_LED A-13 2 WU_LED 13 4 nHM_KEY
NWU_KEY A-12 3 nWU_KEY 12 5 5VO
NHM_KEY A-11 4 nHM_KEY 11 6 HOME_LED
5VO A-10 5 +5VO 10 7 GND
HOME_LED A-9 6 HOME_LED 9
A-8 7 8 DF13-7S-1.25C DF13C-7P-1.25V(21)
GND GND
GND A-7 8 GND 7 NFC HOME-KEY PWB
3R3V_IN A-6 9 3R3V_IN 6 CN1
SCL A-5 10 SCL 5 1 GND
SDA A-4 11 SDA 4 2 3R3V_IN
NIRQ A-3 12 NIRQ 3 3 SCL
GPO2 A-2 N.C. N.C. 13 (NC) 2 N.C. 4 SDA
NFCSET A-1 N.C. N.C. 14 (NC) 1 N.C. 5 NIRQ
N.C. 6 (NC)
1-353293-6 1-353293-4 1-353908-4 7
3-292208-2 N.C. (NC)
a-KBD1

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 15

b-KBD1
292215-6 DF13-7S-1.25C DF13C-7P-1.25V(21)
1 SHIELD4 6
2 DGND4 5
3 D4+ 4
4 D4- 3 CARD READER (OPTION)
5 VBUS4 2
N.C. 6 NC 1
CN14
353908-6 353908-6
SHIELD4 1 a-KBD1 b-KBD1
DGND4 2 Americas : Standard
3 FGND
D4+ SRA-21T-4 292254-6 KEYBOARD PWB
D4- 4 Others : Option
5 292254-5 1 6 GY
VBUS4 F-GND F-GND
SHIELD3 6 1 SHIELD3 5 2 SHIELD3 5 GY SHIELD3
DGND3 7 2 DGND3 4 3 DGND3 4 GY DGND3
D3+ 8 3 D3+ 3 4 D3+ 3 BR D3+
D3- 9 4 D3- 2 5 D3- 2 LB D3-
VBUS3 10 5 VBUS3 1 6 VBUS3 1 BL VBUS3
SHIELD1 11
12 179228-5 179228-5 179228-6 179228-6
DGND1 a-KBD1 b-KBD1 a-KBD2 b-KBD2
D1+ 13
D1- 14
VBUS1 15
DF50A-15S-1C
DF50A-15P-1V(51)

CN1
USB CN PWB USB-A
1 SHIELD1 SHIELD1 -
2 DGND1 DGND1 4
3 D1+ D1+ 3
4 D1- D1- 2
5 VBUS1 VBUS1 1 FRONT USB
179228-5 292250-5

CN13 CN1
USB CN PWB
SHIELD2 1 1 SHIELD2
DGND2 2 2 DGND2
D2+ 3 3 D2+ WIRELESS LAN
D2- 4 4 D2-
VBUS2 5 5 VBUS2
DF50A-5P-1V(51) DF50A-5S-1C 179228-5 292250-5
 SCN MOTHER PWB DSPF-cnt PWB DSPF CCD PWB
CN15 CN5 CN4 CN1
GND 1 14 GND GND 1 1 GND
GND 2 13 GND AFE_SDO 2 2 AFE_SDO
24V 3 12 24V AFE_SDIO 3 3 AFE_SDIO
24V 4 11 24V AFE_SCLK 4 4 AFE_SCLK
24V 5 10 24V RES_CCDAD 5 5 RES_CCDAD
24V 6 9 24V CCD_SEL 6 6 CCD_SEL
7 8 7 7
D. DSPF

12V 12V GND GND

5V 8 7 5V A3.3V 8 8 A3.3V
5VO 9 6 5VO A3.3V 9 9 A3.3V
5VO_DUTY 10 5 5V_SPF A3.3V 10 10 A3.3V
3.3V 11 4 3.3V A3.3V 11 11 A3.3V
3.3V 12 3 3.3V A3.3V 12 12 A3.3V
GND 13 2 GND GND 13 13 GND
GND 14 1 GND A5V 14 14 A5V
A5V 15 15 A5V
1-292207-4 1-353908-4 1-353908-4 16 16
1-292207-4 A5V A5V
GND 17 17 GND
A10V 18 18 A10V
A10V 19 19 A10V
GND 20 20 GND
CN21 CN6 21 21
TA_N TA_N
GND 1 1 GND TA_P 22 22 TA_P
nCTS_SCN 2 2 nRST_DSPF GND 23 23 GND
DSDATA_3P 3 3 DSDATA_3P TB_N 24 24 TB_N
nRTS_SCN 4 4 nCTS_DSPF TB_P 25 25 TB_P
DSDATA_3N 5 5 DSDATA_3N GND 26 26 GND
RXD_SCN 6 6 TXD_DSPF TC_N 27 27 TC_N
GND 7 7 GND TC_P 28 28 TC_P
TXD_SCN 8 8 RXD_DSPF GND 29 29 GND
DSCLK_P 9 9 DSCLK_P TCLK_N 30 30 TCLK_N
GND 10 10 GND TCLK_P 31 31 TCLK_P
DSCLK_N 11 11 DSCLK_N GND 32 32 GND
DSPF_INT 12 12 DSPF_INT TD_N 33 33 TD_N
GND 13 13 GND TD_P 34 34 TD_P
GND 14 14 GND GND 35 35 GND
DSDATA_2P 15 15 DSDATA_2P TE_N 36 36 TE_N 3 5V_SPED1
RES 16 16 RES TE_P 37 37 TE_P 2 GND
DSDATA_2N 17 17 DSDATA_2N GND 38 38 GND 1 SPED1
DSPFUP 18 18 DSPFUP AFE_CS 39 39 AFE_CS SPED1
GND 19 19 GND GND 40 40 GND 173977-3
TXD_DSPF_LOG 20 20 D_CPU_TXD
21 21 FH48-40S-0.5SV FH48-40S-0.5SV
DSDATA_1P DSDATA_1P
SPED 22 22 SPED CCN10 3 5V_SPRDMD
DSDATA_1N 23 23 DSDATA_1N 12
5V_SPED1 2 GND
GND 24 24 nLVDS_STBY 13
N.C. N.C. GND 1 SPRDMD
GND 25 25 GND 14
SPRDMD
26 26 D_SPED1 173977-3
NC/(RXD_DSPF_LOG) N.C. N.C. NC 15
27 27 5V_SPRDMD
DSDATA_0P DSDATA_0P 16
28 28 GND
nPOF nPOF 17
29 29 D_RANDOM
DSDATA_0N DSDATA_0N 18 2
30 30 /D_SPFC /D_SPFC
GND GND 19 1
+24V +24V
DF50S-30DS-1C DF50S-30DS-1C 20 N.C.
(NC)
DF50-30DP-1V(51) DF50-30DP-1V(51)
(NC)
21
N.C.
353293-2
SPFC
22
(NC) N.C.
1-353293-1
FGND FGND 1
SAA-21T-3.5L SRA-21T-4 (NC) N.C.
2
(NC) N.C.
3 3
5V_SCOV 5V_SCOV
4 2
GND GND
5 1
D_SCOV SCOV
6
5V_STUD
7 173977-3
SCOV
GND
8
D_STUD
5V_STLD 3 9
5V_SPPD1
GND 2 10 3
GND 5V_STUD
STLD 1 11 2
STLD D_SPPD1 GND
1-353293-1 1 STUD
173977-3 2-292208-2
STUD
173977-3
292254-3
3 GND 1 3 GND
5V_SPF 3 2 2 2
GND 2 SPPD2 SPPD2 3
1 3 1 5V_SPPD1
SPED2 1 5V_SPPD2 5V_SPPD2 2 GND
SPED2 173977-3 173977-3 8-292112-3 8-292112-3 292133-3
SPPD2 1 SPPD1 SPPD1
CCN13 a-SPWS b-SPWS
173977-3
1 5V_STLD
2 CN1 3
GND 5V_SPPD3
3 D_STLD GND 16 2 GND
OPTION 4 5V_SPF SPPD2 17 1 SPPD3 SPPD3
5 GND 5V_SPPD2 18
292254-4 6 19 173977-3
D_SPED2 5V_SPPD3
1 +24V 4 7 +24V GND 20
2 /D_STMPS 3 8 /D_STMPS SPPD3 21
STMPS 3 D_STSET 2 9 D_STSET 5V_SPPD4 22 3 5V_SPPD4
4 GND 1 10 GND GND 23 2 GND
11 5V_SPOD SPPD4 24 1 SPPD4
179228-4 173977-4 12 25
SPPD4
a-STMPS b-STMPS GND 5V_SPPD5 173977-3
13 D_SPOD GND 26
SPPD5 27
1-353293-3 1-292207-3 28 292254-3
5V_SLCOV N.C.
5V_SPOD 3 GND 29 3 5V_SPPD5 1 3 5V_SPPD5
GND 2 SLCOV 30 2 GND 2 2 GND
D_SPOD 1 1 SPPD5 3 1 SPPD5
SPOD 1-353293-5 SPPD5

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 16

173977-3 173977-3 8-292112-3 8-292112-3 3
a-SPWS b-SPWS 5V_SOCD
2 GND
1 SOCD SOCD
2 GND
1 173977-3
FGND FGND SLCOV
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 173977-2
SLCOV
2 /D_STRC
1 1
5V_SOCD +24V
2
GND
SOCD
3 353293-2
STRC
4
/D_STRC
CCN8 5
+24V
/D_LUMBOUT 1 /D_LUMBOUT SPUFM_LD 6 7 SPUFM_LD
/D_LUMAOUT 2 /D_LUMAOUT SPUFM_CW 7 6 SPUFM_CW
D_LUMBOUT 3 D_LUMBOUT SPUFM_BRAKE 8 5 SPUFM_BRAKE
SLUM D_LUMAOUT 4 D_LUMAOUT SPUFM_CLK 9 4 SPUFM_CLK
+24V 5 +24V PGND 10 3 (NC)
N.C. SPUFM
+24V 11 2 PGND
PHR-5 12 1
440054-5 /D_STRRC +24V
+24V 13
14 173977-7 292132-7
/D_SRRC
CCN9 15
+24V
/D_SPUMBOUT 4 1 /D_SPOMBOUT
3 2 3-292208-0 1-353293-5
/D_SPUMAOUT /D_SPOMAOUT
D_SPUMBOUT 2 3 D_SPOMBOUT 3 5V_SPLS1 2 /D_STRRC
SPOM D_SPUMAOUT 1 4 D_SPOMAOUT 2 GND 1 +24V
1 D_SPLS1
STRRC
292132-4 173977-4 173977-4 353293-2
292132-4
173977-3
SPLS1
CCN12
5V_SPLS1 1 2 /D_SRRC
GND 2 1 +24V
3 292254-3 SRRC
D_SPLS1 353293-2
CN1 CN7 4 3 1
GND GND BL GND
LED_ANODE 1 1 LED_ANODE D_SPWS 5 2 D_SPWS 2 BR D_SPWS
GND 2 2 GND +3.3V 6 1 +3.3V 3 GY +3.3V
N.C. N.C. SPWS
LED_CATHODE/ 3 3 LED_CATHODE/ 5V_SPLS2 7
LED PWB 4 8 173977-3 179228-3
502380-0300 LED_ANODE/ GND a-SPWS b-SPWS
502386-0370 5 9
N.C. GND D_SPLS2
6 LED_CATHODE
292207-9 353293-9
179228-6
292132-6

CN1 CN1001
LED_ANODE 1 SPFFAN_+V 1
GND 2 SPFFAN_GND 2
N.C. 3
3 5V_SPLS2
LED_CATHODE/ 3 SPFFAN_SIG 2
GND
LED PWB 502386-0370 502380-0300 292132-3 179228-3
SPFFAN 1
D_SPLS2 SPLS2
173977-3
 292215-6
1 DSW_RL1 6 1 DSW_RL1
GND 1 2 GND 5 2 GND
T1LUM# 2 3 5V_DSW_RL1 4 3 5V_DSW_RL1 DSW_RL1
T1LUM PCU PWB 4 5VN 3 173977-3
2-292253-2 173977-2 5 2 175489-3
T2PPD1
6 GND 1
353293-6 353293-6
GND 1 1 5VN
T2LUM# 2 2 T2PPD1
T2LUM 3 GND T2PPD1
2-292253-2 173977-2 173977-3
292133-3
CN4 CN5
1 18 17
GND GND DSW_RL1
2 17 16
C3LUM# T1LUM# GND
C3LUM 16 15 1
GND 5V_DSW_RL1 5VN
2-292253-2 173977-2 15 14 2
T2LUM# 5VN C3PFD
14 13 3
GND T2PPD1 GND C3PFD
13 12 1-292215-1 173977-3
C3LUM# GND
E. Paper feed

1 12 11 1 11 292133-3
GND GND 5VN 5VN
2 11 10 2 10
C4LUM# C4LUM# C3PFD C3PFD
10 9 3 9
GND GND GND
C4LUM 2-292253-2 173977-2 9
C3SS1 5VN
8 4 5VN 8 1 5VN
8 7 5 7 2
C3SS2 C3LUD C3LUD C3LUD
7 6 6 6 3 C3LUD
C3SS3 GND GND GND
1 6 5 7 5 173977-3
GND N.C. C3SS4 5VN 5VN
2 5 4 8 4 175489-3
GND GND C3PED C3PED
3 4 3 9 3
C3SS1 C4SS1 GND GND
4 3 2 10 2
C3SS2 C4SS2 24V3 24V3
C3SS1 4 5 2 1 11 1 1
C3SS3 C4SS3 /C3PUS /C3PUS 5VN
6 1 1-353293-1 1-353293-1 2
C3SS4 C4SS4 C3PED
1-353293-7 3 GND
C3PED
292250-6 173977-6 1-353293-8 173977-3
175489-3

GND 1 292254-2
N.C.
GND 2 1 24V3 2
C4SS1 3 2 /C3PUS 1
C4SS2 4 C3PUS
C4SS1 4 C4SS3 5 173977-2 179228-2
C4SS4 6

292250-6 173977-6 1 5VN

2 C4PFD
3 GND
C4PFD
T1SPD 1 1-292215-1 173977-3
2 34 1 11 292133-3
GND 5VN 5VN
3 33 2 10
T1SPD 5V_T1SPD C4PFD C4PFD
32 3 9
GND GND
175489-3 173977-3 36 31 4 8 1
T1SPD 5VN 5VN 5VN
35 30 5 7 2
GND C4LUD C4LUD C4LUD
34 29 6 6 3
5V_T1SPD GND GND GND C4LUD
1 33 28 7 5 173977-3
T2SPD T2SPD 5VN 5VN
2 32 27 8 4 175489-3
GND GND C4PED C4PED
3 31 26 9 3
T2SPD 5V_T2SPD 5V_T2SPD GND GND
30 25 10 2
5VN 24V3 24V3
175489-3 173977-3 29 24 11 1 1
GND /C4PUS /C4PUS 5VN
28 23 1-353293-1 1-353293-1 2
T1LUD 5VN C4PED
292254-4 27 22 3
T1PED LPPD GND C4PED
1 4 1 26 21 173977-3
5VN 5VN 5VN GND
2 3 2 25 20 N.C. 175489-3
T1LUD GND GND GND (NC)
3 2 3 24 19 N.C.
T1LUD T1LUD T2LUD (NC)
4 1 4 23 18 292254-2
T1PED T1PED T2PED (NC) N.C.
22 1 2
173977-4 5VN 24V3
292250-4 173977-4 173977-4
T1PED 21
20
T1PPD1 3-292208-4 1-353293-7 2 /C4PUS 1
C4PUS
GND
19 173977-2 179228-2
N.C. NC
292254-4
1 4 1 292215-3
5VN 5VN 1-353293-8 3-292208-6
T2LUD GND 2 3 GND 2 1 5VN 3 1 5VN
T2LUD 3 2 T2LUD 3 2 LPPD 2 2 LPPD
T2PED 4 1 T2PED 4 3 GND 1 3 GND LPPD
353293-3 353293-3 173977-3
T2PED 292250-4 173977-4 173977-4 173977-4 292133-3

292254-3
292254-3 1 3
C4PWD
5VN 1 3 5VN 1 2 GND 2
T1PPD1 2 2 T1PPD1 2 3 Vref 1 C4PWD
T1PPD1 GND 3 1 GND 3 173977-3 179228-3

292133-3 8-292112-3 8-292112-3 173977-3

CN6 1
C3SPD
18 2
C4PWD GND
17 3 C3SPD
GND 5V_C3SPD
1 16 173977-3
24V3 VREF
2 15 175489-3
24V3 N.C. C3SPD
3 14
GND GND
4 N.C. 13
GND CN8 5V_C3SPD
5 12 1
/CPFM_CLK# C4SPD C4SPD
6 30 11 2
CPFM /CPFM_D N.C. NC GND GND
7 29 10 3 C4SPD
CPFM_LD N.C. NC 5V_C4SPD 5V_C4SPD
8 28 9 173977-3
CW/CCW N.C. 24V3 TNDSET
9 27 8 175489-3
NC N.C. GND GND
26 7
/CPFM_CLK# 5V_TNDSET
292132-9 173977-9 25 6
/CPFM_D /PTRC1
24 5 1
CPFM_LD 24V3 TNDSET
23 4 2
DTR_LCC /C3PUC GND
22 3 3
/RXD_LCC 24V3 5V_TNDSET TNDSET
21 2 173977-3
/TXD_LCC /C4PUC

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 17

20 1 175489-3
GND 24V3
19 292254-2
5VN 1-353293-8
18 1 2
RES_LCC /PTRC1
17 2 1
/DSR_LCC 24V3
16 173977-2 179228-2 PTRC1
TRC_LCC
1-353293-5 292254-2
292254-3 1 2
/C3PUC
3 GND 1 2 24V3 1
2 DVFM2_LD 2 173977-2 179228-2 C3PUC
DVFM2 1 DVFM2_V 3
292254-2
179228-3 173977-3 1 2
/C4PUC
2 24V3 1
292254-2 173977-2 179228-2 C4PUC
2 /T2PUS 1
1 24V3 2
T2PUS 179228-2 173977-2 36 N.C.
292254-2
(NC)
35 1 2
/T1PUS /T1PUS
34 2 1
24V3 24V3
33 173977-2 179228-2 T1PUS
PSFM2_LD
292254-2 32
GND 292254-3
2 1 31
/PTRC2 PSFM2_V
1 2 15 30 1 3
24V3 GND GND PSFM2_LD
PTRC2 14 29 2 2
DVFM2_LD PSFM1_LD GND
179228-2 173977-2 13 28 3 1
DVFM2_V PSFM1_V PSFM2_V PSFM2
12 27 173977-3 179228-3
/T2PUS GND
292254-2 11 26
24V3 PROFM_LD 292254-3
2 1 10 25
/TTRC /PTRC2 PROFM_V
1 2 9 24 1 3
24V3 24V3 LSUFM_LD GND
TTRC 8 23 2 2
/TTRC GND PSFM1_LD
179228-2 173977-2 7 22 3 1
24V3 LSUFM_V PSFM1_V PSFM1
6 21 173977-3 179228-3
/T2PUC DSW_F1
292254-2 5 20
24V3 GND 292254-3
2 1 4 19
/T2PUC /T1PUC 5V_DSW_F1
1 2 3 1 3
24V3 24V3 GND
T2PUC 2 3-292208-6 1-353293-8 2 2
/MPUC PROFM_LD
179228-2 173977-2 1 3 1
INT24V2 PROFM_V PROFM
173977-3 179228-3
292254-2 1-353293-5 3-292208-0
2 1 292254-3
/T1PUC
1 24V3 2 1 LSUFM_LD 3
T1PUC 2 GND 2
179228-2 173977-2 3 1
PROFM_V LSUFM
173977-3 179228-3
292254-2
2 /MPUC 1
1 INT24V2 2 1 DSW_F1
MPUC 2 GND
179228-2 173977-2 3 DSW-F1
5VN
173977-3
 292254-3
1 POFM3_LD 3
2 GND 2
PCU PWB 3 POFM3_V 1 POFM3
Main drive unit
173977-3 179228-3
INT24V2 1
2 CN12 CN16 1-292215-5
GND
3 28 15 1 15
INT24V2 N.C. INT24V2 POFM3_LD POFM3_LD
4 27 14 2 14
GND GND GND GND
5 26 13 3 13 1-292215-2
NC N.C. /DM_CLK# POFM3_V POFM3_V
DM 6 25 12 4 12 1 12 1
/DM_CLK# /DM_D /WEBM_A /WEBM_A /WEBM_A /WEBM_A
7 24 11 5 11 2 11 2
/DM_D /DM_CW /WEBM_B /WEBM_B /WEBM_B /WEBM_B
8 23 10 6 10 3 10 3
/DM_CW DM_LD 24V1 24V1 24V1 24V1
9 22 9 7 9 4 9 4
DM_LD CCM_A 24V1 24V1 24V1 24V1
21 8 8 8 5 8 5 WEBM
CCM_B /WEBM_/A /WEBM_/A /WEBM_/A /WEBM_/A
292132-9 173977-9 20 7 9 7 6 7 6
INT24V2 /WEBM_/B /WEBM_/B /WEBM_/B /WEBM_/B
19 6 10 6 7 6
GND GND GND GND
18 5 11 5 8 5 173977-6 292132-6
/FUM_CLK# FUFM2_LD FUFM2_LD FUFM2_LD
1 17 4 12 4 9 4
CCM_A /FUM_D FUFM2_V FUFM2_V FUFM2_V
2 16 3 13 3 10 3
NC N.C. FUM_CW GND GND GND
3 15 2 14 2 11 2
CCM CCM_B FUM_LD DVFM1_LD DVFM1_LD DVFM1_LD
1 15 1 12 1
DVFM1_V DVFM1_V DVFM1_V
292250-3 173977-3 1-353293-4
3-292208-0 1-353293-5 1-353293-5 1-353293-5 1-353293-2 1-353293-2 292254-3
F. Paper exit, Motor

1 GND 3
INT24V2 1 2 FUFM2_LD 2
GND 2 3 FUFM2_V 1 FUFM2
NC 3 N.C.
4 173977-3 179228-3
/FUM_CLK#
FUM /FUM_D 5
6 292254-3
FUM_CW
FUM_LD 7 1 GND 3
2 DVFM1_LD 2
292132-7 173977-7 3 1
DVFM1_V DVFM1
173977-3 179228-3
292254-3 1
N.C. NC
1 3 2
OZFM_V OZFM_V
2 2 3
OZFM_LD OZFM_LD
3 1 4
OZFM GND GND
5
N.C. /OZFM_CNT
179228-3 173977-3 6
5V_CCMD
7
GND
8
CCMD
3 9
5V_CCMD DVM_LD
2 10
GND N.C. DVM_CW
1 11
CCMD CCMD /DVM_D
12
/DVM_CLK
173977-3 13
GND
14
24V3 PS
7 1-353293-4 2-292208-8 292215-3
DVM_LD
6 30 1 3 1
DVM_CW N.C. 5VN 5VN 5VN
5 29 2 2 2
/DVM_D PPD2 PPD2 PPD2
4 28 3 1 3
/DVM_CLK GND GND GND PPD2
3 27
DVM NC N.C. 5VN
2 26 353293-3 353293-3 173977-3 292133-3
GND POD2
1 25
24V3 GND
24
5VN
292132-7 173977-7 23
TFD2
22 Delivery unit
GND
21 1-292215-2
POFM5_LD
20 1 12 1
GND 5VN 5VN
19 2 11 2
POFM5_V POD2 POD2
18 3 10 3
POFM6_LD GND GND POD2
17 4 9
GND 5VN
16 5 8 173977-3 175489-3
POFM6_V TFD2
HPFM MOTOR DRIVE PWB 6 GND 7
Tandem drive unit 3-292208-0 1-353293-5 7 6
POFM5_LD
CN1 CN7 8 GND 5
2 8 1 9 POFM5_V 4 1 5VN
(NC) N.C. INT24V2 INT24V2 10 3 2
5 CN2 7 2 POFM6_LD TFD2
(NC) N.C. GND GND 11 2 3
B 4 1 B /HPFM_MODE 6 3 /HPFM_MODE GND GND TFD2
6 2 5 4 12 POFM6_V 1
XB XB /HPFM_CW /HPFM_CW 175489-3
HPFM XA 3 3 XA /HPFM_CNT 4 5 /HPFM_CNT 173977-3
1-353293-2 1-353293-2
A 1 4 A /HPFM_ENABLE 3 6 /HPFM_ENABLE
/HPFM_CLK 2 7 /HPFM_CLK 292254-4
DF1BZ-6P-2.5DS DF1B-6S-2.5R 179228-4 292132-4 1 8
5VN 5VN 1 4
POFM5_LD
292132-8 173977-8 2 GND 3
3 NC 2
N.C.
4 POFM5_V 1 POFM5
173977-4 179228-4

292254-4

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 18

1 POFM6_LD 4
RRM MOTOR DRIVE PWB 2 GND 3
PS drive 3 NC 2
N.C.
CN1 4 POFM6_V 1 POFM6
(NC) 2 N.C. 24V3 8 9 24V3
CN2 173977-4 179228-4
(NC) 5 GND 7 10 GND
N.C.
B 4 1 B /RRM_MODE 6 11 /RRM_MODE
XB 6 2 XB /RRM_CW 5 12 /RRM_CW
RRM XA 3 3 XA /RRM_CNT 4 13 /RRM_CNT
A 1 4 A /RRM_ENABLE 3 14 /RRM_ENABLE
/RRM_CLK 2 15 /RRM_CLK
DF1BZ-6P-2.5DS DF1B-6S-2.5R 179228-4 292132-4 FGND FGND
5VN 1 16 5VN SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-4
292132-8 173977-8 1-353293-6 1-292207-6

292254-4 CN19
POM_OUT_/B 4 1 POM_OUT_/B 4 1 POM_OUT_/B
POM_OUT_B 3 2 POM_OUT_B 3 2 POM_OUT_B
POM_OUT_/A 2 3 POM_OUT_/A 2 3 POM_OUT_/A
POM POM_OUT_A 1 4 POM_OUT_A 1 4 POM_OUT_A
5 PFM_OUT_/B
292250-4 173977-4 173977-4 179228-4 6 PFM_OUT_B
7 CN18 292254-3
PFM_OUT_/A
8 PFM_OUT_A GND 9 1 GND 3
9 ADUM1_OUT_A POFM1_LD 8 2 POFM1_LD 2
10 ADUM1_OUT_/A POFM1_V 7 3 POFM1_V 1 POFM1
11 ADUM1_OUT_B POFM4_LD 6
12 5 173977-3 179228-3
4 ADUM1_OUT_/B GND
PFM_OUT_/B 13 4
3 ADUM2_OUT_A POFM4_V
PFM_OUT_B 14 3 292254-3
2 ADUM2_OUT_/A GND
PFM_OUT_/A 15 2 1 3
PFM 1 ADUM2_OUT_B FUFM1_LD POFM4_LD
PFM_OUT_A 16 1 2 2
ADUM2_OUT_/B FUFM1_V GND
3 POFM4_V 1
292250-4 179228-4 292207-9 353293-9
POFM4
1-353908-6 1-292207-6
173977-3 179228-3

292254-3
1 GND 3
2 FUFM1_LD 2
3 FUFM1_V 1 FUFM1
173977-3 179228-3
 1
ADUM1_OUT_A
2 Right door side Main body side
ADUM1_OUT_/A
ADUM1_OUT_B
3
PCU PWB
ADUM1 4
ADUM1_OUT_/B CN19
292250-4 179228-4 1
POM_OUT_/B
2
POM_OUT_B
3
POM_OUT_/A
4
POM_OUT_A
5
PFM_OUT_/B
6
FGND (HRS QR/P4) FGND PFM_OUT_B
1 7
ADUM2_OUT_A SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 PFM_OUT_/A
2 1 1 8
ADUM2_OUT_/A FGND PFM_OUT_A
3 2 2 9
ADUM2_OUT_B ADUM1_OUT_A ADUM1_OUT_A
ADUM2 4 3 3 10
ADUM2_OUT_/B ADUM1_OUT_/A ADUM1_OUT_/A
4 4 11
292250-4 179228-4 ADUM1_OUT_B ADUM1_OUT_B
5 5 12
ADUM1_OUT_/B ADUM1_OUT_/B
6 6 13
ADUM2_OUT_A ADUM2_OUT_A
G. Right door

7 7 14
ADUM2_OUT_/A ADUM2_OUT_/A
8 8 15
292254-5 ADUM2_OUT_B ADUM2_OUT_B
9 9 16
ADUM2_OUT_/B ADUM2_OUT_/B
1 5 1 10 10
GND GND GND 1-353908-6
2 4 2 11 11 1-292207-6
TURM# TURM# TURM#
3 3 12 12
TURM 173977-2 BESTD BESTD CN17
2-292253-2 2 4 13 13
GND 24V1 24
1 5 14 14
5VN+R /MPFS 23 GND
15 15
/MPGS 22 TURM#
1 173977-5 173977-5 16 16
BESTD MPFD 21 BESTD
2 17 17
GND MPWD 20 24V1
3 18 18
5VN+R HUD_M 19 /MPFS
BESTD 19 19
173977-3 TH_M 18 /MPGS
20 20
APPD2 17 MPFD
21 21
292156-2 APPD1 16 MPWD
22 22
PRTPD 15 HUD_M
2 1 23 23
/MPFS 5VO+R 14 TH_M
1 2 24 24
24V1 POD3 13 APPD2
25 25
MPFS 179228-2 173977-2 1-292215-0 /ADUGS APPD1
26 26 1-353908-2
24V1
10 1 27 27
/MPFS SEL3 12
9 2 28 28
24V1 SEL2 11 PRTPD
1 8 3 29 29
MPED MPED SEL1 10 5VO+R
2 7 4 30 30
GND GND Y 9 POD3
3 6 5 31 31
5VN+R 5VN+R 5VN 8 /ADUGS
MPED 5 6 32 32
173977-3 /MPGS GND 7 24V1
4 24V1 7 SEL3
3 8 6
MPFD QR/P4-32P-C(01) QR/P4-32S-C(02) SEL2
292254-2 292254-5 2 9 5
GND 4 SEL1
2 /MPGS 1 5 /MPGS 1 1 5VN+R 10 Y
1 2 4 2 3
24V1 24V1 1-353293-0 1-353293-0 2 5VN
MPGS 3 MPFD 3 GND
179228-2 173977-2 2 4 1
GND N.C. NC
1 5VN+R 5
1-353908-2 2-292208-4
1 173977-5 173977-5
MPFD
2
GND
3
MPFD 5VN+R RIGHT DOOR I/F PWB
173977-3
CN1
N.C. 1
NC
1 2
APPD2 GND
2 3
GND 5VN
3 4
5VN+R Y
APPD2 5
173977-3 SEL1
6
SEL2
7
SEL3
8
24V1
1 9
DSW_ADU /ADUGS
2 10
GND POD3
3 11
5VN+R 5VO+R
DSW_ADU 12
173977-3 PRTPD
1-353908-2

13
APPD1
14
292215-3 APPD2
15
TH_M
1 3 APPD1 1 16
APPD1 HUD_M
2 2 GND 2 17
GND MPWD
3 1 5VN+R 3 18
APPD1 5VN+R MPFD
19
173977-3 353293-3 353293-3 /MPGS
20
/MPFS
21
24V1
22
292215-3 BESTD
23
TURM#
1 3 PRTPD 1 24
PRTPD GND
2 2 GND 2
GND 1-353908-2
3 1 5VO+R 3 2-292208-4
PRTPD 5VO+R
173977-3 353293-3 353293-3 CN2
18
GND
17
TURM#
16
BESTD
15
GND
1 MX-TR21 14
POD3 5VN+R
2 13
GND /MPFS
3 12
5VN+R 292215-6 24V1
11
POD3 173977-3 6 1 10
MPED
POD3 GND
5 GND 2 9
5VN+R

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 19

4 5VN+R 3 8
/MPGS
1 3 TFD3 4 7
TFD3 24V1
2 2 GND 5 6
GND MPFD
3 1 5VN+R 6 5
5VN+R GND
4
TFD3 173977-3 353293-6 353293-6 3
5VN+R
APPD2
2
GND
1
292254-2 5VN+R
1-353293-8
2 /ADUGS 1
1 24V1 2 N.C. 36
NC
35
DSW_ADU
ADUGS 179228-2 173977-2 34
GND
33
5VN+R
32
APPD1
31
GND
1 30
MPLD1 292254-9 5VN+R
2 29
GND PRTPD
3 N.C. 9 NC 1 N.C. 28
MPLD1 5VN+R GND
N.C. 8 NC 2 N.C. 27
173977-3 5VO+R
N.C. 7 NC 3 N.C. 26
POD3
6 MPLD1 4 25
GND
5 GND 5 24
5VN+R
4 5VN+R 6 23
TFD3
1 3 GND 7 22
GND GND
2 2 MPWD 8 21
MPWD 5VN+R
3 1 5VN 9 20
5VN /ADUGS
19
MPWD 292161-3 173977-3 173977-9 173977-9 24V1
1-353293-8 3-292208-6

1 1-292215-6 CN3
MTOP2
2 16 MPLD1 1 16
GND MPLD1
3 15 GND 2 15
5VN+R GND
MTOP2 14 5VN+R 3 14
173977-3 5VN+R
13 GND 4 13
GND
12 MPWD 5 12
MPWD
11 5VN 6 11
5VN
1 10 MTOP2 7 10
MTOP1 MTOP2
2 9 GND 8 9
GND GND
3 8 5VN+R 9 8
5VN+R 5VN+R
7 10 7
MTOP1 173977-3 6
MTOP1
11 6
MTOP1
GND GND
5 5VN+R 12 5
5VN+R
4 5VN 13 4
5VN
3 HUD_M 14 3
HUD_M
1 2 GND 15 2
5VN GND
2 1 TH_M 16 1
HUD_M HUD_M TH_M
3 1-353293-6
GND 1-353293-6 1-353293-6
4 1-292207-6
TH_M
TH_M 292250-4 173977-4
H. LSU

LD PWB LSU CNT PWB PCU PWB

CN1 CN500 CN3 CN21
1 1 1 14
+5VBD +5V_BD nPCU_TRG /PCU_TRG
2 2 2 13
nBD nBD JOBEND_INT JOBEND_INT
3 3 3 12
DT_A1-LD1- DT_A1-_LD1- nRSV_DAT RSV_DAT
4 4 4 11
DT_A2-LD2- DT_A2-_LD2- nSCK_LSU SCK_LSU
5 5 5 10
P4_A(ENB) P4_A nTRANS_DAT TRANS_DAT
6 6 6 9
nINT_A nINIT_A nTRANS_RST TRANS_RST
7 7 7 8
nMS_SET_A_cn MSET_A RST_LSU LSU_RST
8 8 8 7
AK_TXD_cn AK_TXD +5V 5VN
9 9 9 6
AK_CS_EEP_A AK_CS_EEP_A DGND GND
10 10 10 5
DT_B1-LD3- DT_B1-_LD3- +3.3V 3.3V
11 11 11 4
DT_B2-LD4- DT_B2-_LD4- DGND GND
12 12 12 3
P4_B(ENB) P4_B INT_5VLD 5VN
13 13 13 2
nP2_cn #P2 DGND GND
14 14 14 1
nP0_cn #P0 INT_5VLD 5VN
nMS_SET_B_cn 15 15 MSET_B
AK_CS_EEP_B 16 16 AK_CS_EEP_B 1-292207-4 1-353293-4 1-353293-4 2-292208-8
17 17 DGND

Board to Board
DGND
DGND 18 18 DGND
LDCHK1 19 19 LDCHK1
LDCHK2 20 20 LDCHK2
LDCHK3 21 21 LDCHK3
CN1 CN3 22 22
nPOLY_START nPOLY_START
3 1 nBD 23 23 nPOLY_CK CN2
nBD nPOLY_CK
BD PWB GND
+5VBD
2
1
2 GND
3 +5VBD
PGND
+24V
DGND
24
25
26
24
25
26
PGND
+24V
DGND
+24V3
PGND
+24V3
13
12
11
15
16
17
24V3
GND
24V3
292250-3 173977-3 173977-3 292250-3 27 27 10 18
SDCLK_cn SDCLK PGND GND
28 28 9 19
DT_A1+LD1+ DT_A1+_LD1+ DGND GND
29 29 8 20
DT_A2+LD2+ DT_A2+_LD2+ AK_RXD AK_RXD#
30 30 7 21
P3_A(nWAIT) P3_A AK_TXD AK_TXD#
31 31 6 22
nLDERR_AB_cn nLDERR_AB AK_SCLK AK_SCLK#
32 32 5 23
AK_RXD_cn AK_RXD AK_CS_EEP_AK1 AK_CS_EEP_K1#
33 33 4 24
AK_SCLK_cn AK_SCLK AK_CS_EEP_AK2 AK_CS_EEP_K2#
34 34 3 25
AK_CS_A AK_CS_A AK_CS_AK1 AK_CS_K1#
35 35 2 26
DT_B1+LD3+ DT_B1+_LD3+ AK_CS_AK2 AK_CS_K2#
36 36 1 27
DT_B2+LD4+ DT_B2+_LD4+ DGND GND
37 37 28
P3_B(nWAIT) P3_B N.C. NC
38 38 #P1 1-292207-3
nP1_cn 1-353293-3 1-353293-4
nINT_B 39 39 nINIT_B 2-292208-8
AK_CS_B 40 40 AK_CS_B
CN1 CN2 41 41
+5V +5V
+24V 5 1 +24V +5V 42 42 +5V
PGND 4 2 PGND +3.3V 43 43 +3.3V
PGM nPORY_START
nPORY_LOCK
3
2
1
3
4
5
nPOLY_START
nPOLY_LOCK
WP
SDA
44
45
46
44
45
46
WP
SDA
nPORY_CK nPOLY_CK SCL SCL
nBRAKE 47 47 nBRAKE
292172-5 173977-5 173977-5 292250-5 48 48
nPOLY_LOCK nPOLY_LOCK
PGND 49 49 PGND
+24V 50 50 +24V

TX25-50P-6ST-H1E TX24-50R-6ST-H1E

SCN MOTHER PWB

CN1 CN26

DGND 1 30 GND
CH0_N 2 29 LSU_CH0_N
CH0_P 3 28 LSU_CH0_P
DGND 4 27 GND
CH1_N 5 26 LSU_CH1_N
CH1_P 6 25 LSU_CH1_P
DGND 7 24 GND
CH2_N 8 23 LSU_CH2_N
CH2_P 9 22 LSU_CH2_P
DGND 10 21 GND
CLK_N 11 20 LSU_CLK_N
CLK_P 12 19 LSU_CLK_P
DGND 13 18 GND
CH3_N 14 17 LSU_CH3_N
CH3_P 15 16 LSU_CH3_P
DGND 16 15 GND
CH4_N 17 14 LSU_CH4_N
CH4_P 18 13 LSU_CH4_P
DGND 19 12 GND
VSYNC_K_N 20 11 LSU_VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P 21 10 LSU_VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P(GND) 22 9 GND
VSYNC_C_N(GND) 23 8 GND
DGND 24 7 GND
ECLK_LSU_N 25 6 LSU_ECLK_N
ECLK_LSU_P 26 5 LSU_ECLK_P
DGND 27 4 GND
HSYNC_LSU_P 28 3 LSU_HSYNC_P
HSYNC_LSU_N 29 2 LSU_HSYNC_N
DGND 30 1 GND
FH41-30S-0.5SH(05) FH48-30S-0.5SV

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 20

 PCU PWB
1 292254-7 1-292215-3 CN9 CN10 292254-4
ENC_A N.C.
WTM_LD 2 7 WTM_LD 1 13 WTM_LD 1 16 WTM_LD CRUM_DATA 18 1 CRUM_DATA 4 1 CRUM_DATA
WTM_CW 3 6 WTM_CW 2 12 WTM_CW 2 15 GND(WTM_CW) CRUM_CLK 17 2 CRUM_CLK 3 2 CRUM_CLK
/WTM_CLK 4 5 /WTM_CLK 3 11 /WTM_CLK 3 14 /WTM_CLK CRUM_5V 16 3 CRUM_5V 2 3 CRUM_5V
/WTM_D 5 4 /WTM_D 4 10 /WTM_D 4 13 /WTM_D GND 15 4 GND 1 4 GND
CRUM
WTM 5VN 6 3 5VN 5 9 5VN 5 12 5VN /TNM_A 14
7 2 6 8 6 11 13 173977-4 179228-4 62 9246 004 000 001
GND GND GND GND /TNM_B
24V3 8 1 24V3 7 7 24V3 7 10 24V3 24V3 12
6 WTFD 8 9 WTFD 24V3 11
292228-8 353293-8 173977-7 173977-7 5 9 8 10
GND GND /TNM_/A
4 5V_WTFD 10 7 5V_WTFD /TNM_/B 9
3 WTSD 11 6 WTSD TSGOUT 8 1 /TNM_A
2 GND 12 5 GND GND 7 2 /TNM_B
1 5V_WTSD 13 4 5V_WTSD TCS 6 3 24V3
WTFD 1 N.C. 3 HDDFM_LD 24V3 5 4 24V3
2 1-353293-3 1-353293-3 2 4 5 TNM
GND N.C. GND DVCH3 /TNM_/A
5V_WTFD 3 1 HDDFM_V DVCH2 3 6 /TNM_/B
WTFD N.C.
DVCH1 2
173977-3 1 173977-6 292132-6
1-353293-6 1-292207-6 GND
1-292207-8 1-353293-8
WTSD 1
GND 2
I. Process, High voltage

WTSD 5V_WTSD 3
292254-8
173977-3 1 8 8 8 1
TSGout TSGout TSGout
2 GND 7 7 GND 7 4 GND
3 TCS 6 6 TCS 6 3 TCS
4 24V3 5 5 24V3 5 2 24V3
TCS
5 DVCH3 4 4 DVCH3 4 N.C.
6 3 3 3 51021-0400 53047-0410
DVCH2 DVCH2 N.C.
7 DVCH1 2 2 DVCH1 2
8 GND 1 1 GND 1
173977-8 179228-8 QR/P8-8S-C(02) QR/P8-8P-C(01)

CN11
16 1-292215-5 4
GND N.C. GND
GND 15 1 GND 15 3 NC
14 N.C.
TFSD 2 TFSD 14 2 TFSD
24V3 13 3 24V3 13 1 24V3
TFSD
/TNHM1_A 12 4 /TNHM1_A 12
11 5 11 440129-4 B4B-PH
/TNHM1_B /TNHM1_B
24V3 10 6 24V3 10
24V3 9 7 24V3 9
/TNHM1_/A 8 8 /TNHM1_/A 8
/TNHM1_/B 7 9 /TNHM1_/B 7 1 /TNHM1_A
/TNHM2_A 6 10 /TNHM2_A 6 2 /TNHM1_B
/TNHM2_B 5 11 /TNHM2_B 5 3 24V3
24V3 4 12 24V3 4 4 24V3
TC PWB 24V3 3 13 24V3 3 5 /TNHM1_/A
TNHM1
/TNHM2_/A 2 14 /TNHM2_/A 2 6 /TNHM1_/B
CN3 /TNHM2_/B 1 15 /TNHM2_/B 1
CN101 30 179228-6 292132-6
N.C. NC 1-353293-6 1-353293-5 1-353908-5
1 29
TC_ERR 28 TC_ERR
HV_REM_TC 2 HV_REM_TC
3 27 1
/TC_CL_REM 26 /TC_CL_REM /TNHM2_A
/TC_CL_PWM 4 /TC_CL_PWM 2 /TNHM2_B
TC 5 25 3
/TC_DR_REM 24 /TC_DR_REM 24V3
1 TC /TC_DR_PWM 6 /TC_DR_PWM 4 24V3
7 23 5 TNHM2
TC PS-187 /TC_AC_REM 22 /TC_AC_REM /TNHM2_/A
#187 Faston-terminal /TC_AC_PWM 8 /TC_AC_PWM 6 /TNHM2_/B
PS-187 9 21
/TC-_REM 20 /TC-_REM
10 179228-6 292132-6
/TC-_PWM 19 /TC-_PWM
CN301 /TC+_REM 11 /TC+_REM
12 18
1 TC_CL /TC+_PWM 17 /TC+_PWM
GND 13 GND
TC_DL N.C.
2 NC
14 16
INT24V2 INT24V2 292215-7
PS-187(BL) 1-1123722-2 1-1123723-2
1-353293-4 1-353293-5
1-292207-4 5VN 32 1 5VN 7 1 5VN

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 21

HUD_DV 31 2 HUD_DV 6 2 HUD_DV HUD_DV
GND 30 3 GND 5 3 GND
TH_DV 29 4 TH_DV 4 4 TH_DV
5VN 28 5 5VN 3 TH_DV
27 6 2 173977-4 292250-4
PCS PCS
PCS_LED 26 7 PCS_LED 1
/PSPS 25
24 353293-7 353293-7 1
24V3 5VN
GND 23 2 PCS
PTDL# 22 3 PCS_LED PCS
DL1# 21
20 173977-3 292250-3
GND
5VN 19
MC PWB 18 292215-9 292254-2
CCHPD
GND 17 1 /PSPS 9 1 /PSPS 2
MC MC CN1 2 8 2 1
1 24V3 24V3
1 MC INT24V2 9 INT24V2 3-292208-2 1-353293-6 3 GND 7 PSPS
8 2 4 6 173977-2 179228-2
PS-187 GND 3 GND PTDL#
SRA-21T-3 #187 Faston-terminal 24V1 7 24V1 5 DL1# 5
6 4 6 4
GND 5 GND GND
MC_DATA 5 MC_DATA 7 5VN 3
4 6 8 2
MC_CLK 7 MC_CLK CCHPD
MC_LD 3 MC_LD 9 GND 1
2 8 292254-2
CN2 HV_REM_MC 9 HV_REM_MC 353293-9 353293-9
GB MC_ERR 1 MC_ERR 1 GND 2
1 10 2 1
GB 11 HL_PR PTDL#
N.C. 2 NC 292207-9 353293-9 HL_OUT_UM
PTDL
SRA-21T-3 12 173977-2 179228-2
1-1123722-2 13 HL_OUT_CNT3
1-1123723-2 HL_OUT_US
14
15 GND
INT5V
1 DL1#
1-353293-5 3-292208-0 2
CN3 N.C. GND
DV 3 GND DL1
1 DV
2 173977-3 2-292173-3
N.C. NC
SRA-21T-3 3 NC
N.C.
1-1123722-3 1-1123723-3 1 5VN
2 CCHPD
3 GND CCHPD
173977-3 175489-3
 Fuser unit side Main body side HL PWB
2-1674754-0 2-1674755-0

CN3
(HRS DF63) HL_US (HRS DF63) 3 N-HL(LM)
3 N-HL(US) 3 3 N-HL(US) 3 1 N-HL(US) 1 2 NC
2 2 2 2 2 2 N.C. 1 CN5
J. Fusing

N-HL(UW) HL_UW N-HL(UW) N-HL(UW) N.C. N-HL(UW)

1 N-HL(UM) 1 1 N-HL(UM) 1 3 N-HL(UM) 3 INT5V 1
4 4 1-1123722-3 1-1123724-2 GND 2
DF63-3S-3.96C DF63-3EP-3.96C N.C. 5 NC 5 N.C. 3
HL_UM DF63-3S-3.96C DF63-3EP-3.96C L-HL(UM) HL_out_US
6 L-HL(US/LM) 6 HL_out_CNT3 4
CN2 5 N.C.
HL_out_CNT4
1 N-HL(US) HL_out_UM 6
2 N-HL(UM) HL_PR 7

SRA-51T-3 SRA-51T-3 DF22R-2S-7.92C(28) DF22R-2P-7.92DSA(05) 292132-7 173977-7

TS-M
a-TSM b-TSM CN4
2 L-HL(UM/UW)
1 L-HL(US/LM)
SRA-51T-3 c-TSS
SRA-51T-3 DF22L-2S-7.92C(28) DF22L-2P-7.92DSA(05)

TS-S
b-TSS
SRA-51T-3 a-TSS

292156-3 PCU PWB

1 TH_UMCS_IN 3
2 TH_UM_IN 2
TH_UM 3 GND 1
CN13 CN3
179228-3 179228-3 1 (A-9) TH_UMCS_IN 9 12 TH_UMCS_IN INT24V2 1
2 (A-8) TH_UM_IN 8 13 TH_UM_IN GND 2
292156-2 3 (A-7) GND 7 14 GND 24V1 3
1 TH_US2_IN 2 4 (A-6) TH_US2_IN 6 15 TH_US2_IN GND 4
2 GND 1 5 (A-5) GND 5 16 GND MC_DATA 5
TH_US2 6 (A-4) TH_LM_IN 4 17 TH_LM_IN MC_CLK 6
179228-2 179228-2 7 (A-3) GND 3 18 GND MC_LD 7
8 (A-2) /WEBS 2 19 /WEBS HV_REM_MC 8
292156-2 9 (A-1) 24V3 1 20 24V3 MC_ERR 9
1 TH_LM_IN 2 21 NC HL_PR 10
2 GND 1 353908-9 353293-9 N.C. 22 11
N.C. NC HL_OUT_UM
TH_LM HL_OUT_CNT3 12
179228-2 179228-2 1-353293-1 HL_OUT_US 13
GND 14
292156-2 INT5V 15
1 /WEBS 2
2 24V3 1 3-292208-0
WEBS 1-353293-5
179228-2 179228-2

292156-3
1 TH_US1CS_IN 3
2 TH_US1_IN 2
TH_US1 3 GND 1

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 22

179228-3 179228-3 11 (B-11) TH_US1CS_IN 1 11 TH_US1CS_IN
10 (B-10) TH_US1_IN 2 10 TH_US1_IN
9 (B-9) GND 3 9 GND
5VN 1 8 (B-8) 5VN 4 8 5VN
WEBEND1 2 7 (B-7) WEBEND1 5 7 WEBEND1
WEBEND1 GND 3 6 (B-6) GND 6 6 GND
5 (B-5) WEBEND2 7 5 WEBEND2
175489-3 179228-3 4 (B-4) POD1 8 4 POD1
3 (B-3) FPFD 9 3 FPFD
2 (B-2) 5VN 10 2 5VN
1 (B-1) GND 11 1 GND
5VN 1
2 1-353293-1 1-353293-1 2-292208-2
WEBEND2 1-353908-1
WEBEND2 GND 3

175489-3 179228-3

5VN 1
POD1 2
POD1 GND 3

175489-3 179228-3

5VN 1
FPFD 2 DF11-4DS-2C + DF11-4DP-SP1(05)
FPFD GND 3 1 GND
2 GND
292133-3 3 GND
179228-3
4 GND

a-GND FUSER

DF11-4DS-2C + DF11-4DP-SP1(05)
1 5VN
2 5VN
3 5VN
4 5VN

a-5V FUSER
 HL PWB DC PWB SCN MOTHER PWB
CN6 CN1 CN101 CN1
1 1 4
L_HL
3 L_DC
D-GND DGND
2 N.C. N.C. 2 3
NC
2 NC
D-GND DGND
3 3 2
N_HL
1 N_DC
D-GND +5VL
5VO 4 1
+5VL
1-1123722-3 1-1123724-2 5
4-1123724-2 4-1123722-3<Red> 5VL
6 2132781-4 1-1123723-4
5VL
7
5VL
Main Switch 1-1123723-7 2132781-7 CN7
CN1 1 +5VO
L_HL 1 1 2
LIVE GND
3
+24V
N_HL 2 PS-250(WH)
1-1123722-3 1-1123723-3
MSW1
DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05) DF22-2S-7.92C(28)

1
NEUTRAL
K. Power supply

PS-250(WH) CN102 CN8

MSW2 1 3
DCCNT1(NRY) nRY_CNT
2 N.C. N.C. 2
NC GND
3 1
DCCNT2(NOFF) nOFF_CNT
1 173977-3 173977-3
AC PWB NEUTRAL 292132-3 292132-3
CN2 PS-250(RD)
1 MSW3
N_out CN103
2 1 1
L_out LIVE FW
P-GND 2 N.C.
DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05) DF22-2S-7.92C(28) 3
PS-250(RD) P-GND
MSW4 4 N.C.
P-GND
CN1 P-GND 5
1 6
L_in P-GND
2 P-GND 7
N_in Americas 8
DF22-2S-7.92C(28) P-GND
DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05) 1-1123722-8
FND5.5-5 1-1123723-8
FGND
CN104
CN1 1 N.C.
24V1
24V1 2
L_in 1 Europe 3
24V2
N_in 2
DF22-2S-7.92C(28) 24V3 4
PCU PWB
DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05) 24V3 5
SRA-51T-4 6 CN1
24V4
FGND 24V5 7 1 24V5
2 GND
1-1123723-7 1-1123722-7 3 24V1
4 GND
CN3 5 24V3
Nout 3 6 GND
NC 2 N.C. 7 5VL
Lout 1 8 GND
9
5-1123722-3 PS-187-2V b FW
5-1123724-2
1 172164-1 172156-1 1-1123722-9 1-1123723-9
24V2
1 24V2
1
CN14
N.C. 1 NC
2 DSW_R(24V)
WH PWB 1-1123722-2 1-1123723-2
1
(OPTION) DSW_R
1 1 1 1
24V3 24V3
2 2 2 2
PS-187-2V a GND GND
CN1
172165-1 172233-1 172165-1 172233-1
L_in 1
2 Right door switch
N_in CN26
5-1123724-2 5-1123722-3 1
24V5
2
GND
3
24V5
CN6 4
GND
WH_CNT 1 1-1123722-4 1-1123723-4
2
24V3
292132-2 179228-2
CN2
26
Dehumidification WH_CNT
Finisher side Main body side 25
24V3
24
heater Switch /DSR_FIN
23
/DTR_FIN
1 DSR_FIN 1 22 RXD_FIN
1 Live_WH
2
DTR_FIN
2 21
TXD_FIN
3 RxD_FIN 3 20 GND
CN3 PS-187 4 4 19
TxD_FIN 5VN
1 WHSW1 5 5 18
L_WH_IN GND N.C. RES_FIN_INS
NC 2 N.C. 6 5VN 6 17 RES_FIN
3 7 7 N.C. 16
L_WH_OUT 24V5 (NC)
to Finisher 8 RES_FIN 8 N.C. 15 (NC)
4-1123724-2 4-1123722-3 9 GND 9 N.C. 14
(NC)
1 10 10
Live_WH 24V5 1-353908-3
11 F-GND 11
PS-187 (OPTION) 12 12
GND FGND
WHSW2

MX-M7570 ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 23

172170-1 172162-1 SRA-21T-4

CN4
1 1 1 1
N_WH(SCAN) 5VN 5VN
2 2 2 2 2 2
NC N.C. WH-N(SCAN) RLYN_B RLYN_B
3 1 1 3 3 3
L_WH(SCAN) WH-L(SCAN) WH-SCN RLYM_/B RLYM_/B
4 RLYM_/A 4 4 RLYM_/A
1-1123724-2 1-1123722-3 172157-1 172165-1 5 5 5
RLYM_A RLYM_A
6 6 6
to Interface pass unit 24V5 24V5
7 SOL 7 7 SOL
CN5 8 ENTSEN 8 8 ENTSEN
1 9 9 9
N_WH PASSEN PASSEN
2 N.C. 1 1 1 1 (OPTION) 10 10 10
NC WH-N WH-N GND GND
3 2 2 2 2 11 11 11
L_WH WH-L WH-L WH-CS1 OPNSEN OPNSEN
12 GND_OPN 12 12 GND_OPN
1-1123724-2 1-1123722-3 172157-1 172165-1 172157-1 172165-1 13 13 13
5V_OPN 5V_OPN
14 (NC) 14 N.C.
15 15 1-353908-3 2-292208-6
FGND
1 WH-N
1 1 WH-N 1
2 2 2 2 172171-1 172163-1 FGND Inner cover right
WH-L WH-L WH-CS2 SRA-21T-4
172157-1 172165-1 172157-1 172165-1
existence detect
DSW_R_out 1
1 1 1 1
WH-N WH-N
2 2 2 2 CN15
WH-L WH-L WH-TAN PS-187-2V a
172157-1 172165-1 172157-1 172165-1 1 DSW_R_OUT
N.C. 2
NC
3
DSW_F2(24V)
LCC side Main body side 1-1123722-3 1-1123723-3
1 DTR_LCC
1 1
2 2 292254-8 DSW_F2(24V)
N.C. 12 NC 12 /RxD_LCC
3 3 8 1 CN22
N.C. 11 NC 11 /TxD_LCC DTR_LCC PS-187-2V b
10 10 4 4 7 2 1
N.C. NC NC N.C. /RxD_LCC 24V3
9 9 5 5 6 3 2 GND
SRA-21T-4 WH-N NC N.C. /TxD_LCC 3
8 8 6 GND
6 5
GND
4 /CV_COPY
GND 7 7 4 5 4
7 NC 7 5VN 5VN /CV_COUNT
N.C. 8 8 3 6 5
6 6 F-GND RES_LCC
to Paper feed transport /CV_START
FGND N.C. NC 9 9 2 7 6
5 5 to LCC(OPTION) RES_LCC /DSR_LCC /CV_CA
N.C. NC 10 10 1 8 7
4 4 /DSR_LCC TRC_LCC /CV_CLCOPY
N.C. NC 11 11 8
3 3 NC N.C. /CV_COLOR1
N.C. NC 12 12 179228-8 173977-8 9
2 2 NC N.C. /CV_STAPLE
N.C. NC 13 13 10
1 WH-L 1 TRC_LCC /CV_COLOR0
14 14 to COIN VENDOR 11
GND /CV_DUPLEX
15 15 12 5VN
172162-1 172170-1 24V3 13 /CV_SIZE0
172171-1 172163-1 (OPTION) 14
FGND /CV_SIZE1
15
SRA-21T-4 /CV_SIZE2
16
/CV_SIZE3
1-1470107-6 1-1470109-6
MX-M7570
[15] OTHERS Service Manual

1. TOOL LIST
PARTS CODE Name NOTE
UKOG-0012QSZZ Conduction grease (FLOIL GE-676)
UKOG-0013QSZZ Grease (FLOIL GP-501MR)
UKOG-0158FCZZ Grease (MOLYKOTE X5-6020) Scanner rail
UKOG-0162FCZZ Gray test chart Gray balance adjustment
UKOG-0235FCZZ Grease (JFE552)
UKOG-0299FCZZ Grease (HANARL FL-955R)
UKOG-0307FCZZ Grease (FLOIL G-313S)
UKOG-0309FCZZ Stearic acid powder Side seal
UKOG-0311FCZZ Micro-spatula Side seal
UKOG-0312FCZZ Stearic acid powder OPC drum
UKOG-0326FC11 Service test chart Gray balance adjustment
UKOG-0326FCZZ Service test chart Gray balance adjustment
UKOG-0333FCZZ Shading adjustment chart DSPF Shading
UKOG-0356FCZZ Scanner adjustment chart CCD calibration

MX-M7570 OTHERS 15 – 1
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.

Example:

<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>

Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu

a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag

(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.

(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT © XXXX
solder is about 220°C, which BYSHARP
is about CORPORATION
40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
 CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.

CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.

“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
 COPYRIGHT © 2021 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Trademark acknowledgements
x Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1, Windows® 10,
Windows® Server 2012, Windows® Server 2012 R2, Windows® Server 2016,
Windows® Server 2019, Internet Explorer®, and Microsoft Edge®
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
and other countries.
x PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
x Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Laser Writer, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Inc.
x IBM, PC/AT, and Power PC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
x Acrobat® Reader Copyright® Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
x PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
x Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
x All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

SHARP CORPORATION
Smart Business Solutions BU

First edition: July 2018

Latest edition: November 2021